Download INDICO 100 SERIES X-RAY GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL

CPI
Communications & Power Industries
communications & medical products division
INDICO 100 SERIES
X-RAY GENERATOR
SERVICE MANUAL
PREPARED BY:
COMMUNICATIONS & POWER INDUSTRIES
45 RIVER DRIVE
GEORGETOWN, ONTARIO, CANADA, L7G 2J4
TELEPHONE: (905) 877-0161
CPI Canada Inc.
SERVICE
AND
INSTALLATION
MANUAL
P.N. #740855
PRE-INSTALLATION
1¾
INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION
2¾
CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING
3¾
ACCEPTANCE TEST
4¾
TROUBLESHOOTING
5¾
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
6¾
THEORY OF OPERATION
7¾
SPARES
8¾
SCHEMATICS
9¾
The original version of this manual (Aug.21,1997)
has been drafted in the English language by:
Communications & Power Industries
communications & medical products division.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-00
Rev. A
Page 0-1
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 0-2
Rev. A
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-00
CPI Canada Inc
Pre-installation
1
CHAPTER 1
PRE-INSTALLATION
1.0
INTRODUCTION
1.1
Purpose
This manual applies to the Indico 100 family of generators and provides instructions for the installation
and maintenance of all models of that generator.
This Chapter contains the following sections.
SECTION
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
TITLE
Introduction
Safety
Preparing for installation
Compatibility listing
Generator layout and Major Components
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-01
Rev. A
Page 1-1
1 Pre-installation
CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank.)
Page 1-2
Rev. A
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1A
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.1.1 Purpose..................................................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION ..................................................................................................................1A-2
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................................................1A-3
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS.........................................................................................................................................1A-5
1A.5.0 FEATURES................................................................................................................................................1A-5
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL ...................................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS ...............................................................................................................1A-6
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION ...................................................................................................................1A-6
1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS........................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications.................................................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards .............................................................................................................................1A-7
1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ..................................................................................................1A-11
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS ..............................................................................................1A-11
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-1
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
1A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
1A.1.1 Purpose
This manual provides instructions for the installation and service of Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators.
This section of the manual applies to the Millenia and Indico 100 family of X-ray generators. Some of the
sections / chapters in the balance of this manual are common to Millenia and Indico 100 X-ray generators;
other sections / chapters are unique to each generator series.
1A.2.0 GENERATOR DESCRIPTION
Depending on configuration and options, the generator provides the power and interfacing to operate X-ray
tubes, Buckys, Rad tables, GI (gastro-intestinal) tables, remote R&F tables, tomographic devices, and digital
imaging systems. The generator consists of power supply and control systems housed in the upper and
lower cabinets, a control console, and an optional remote fluoro control along with the necessary
interconnecting cable(s).
Major items provided are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 1A-2
X-ray generator housed in upper and lower cabinets.
Control console.
Optional remote fluoro control.
Interconnecting cable(s).
Operator's manual.
Service and installation manual.
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Figure 1A-1 shows the outline of the Millenia series X-ray generator, control console, and remote fluoro
control. Figure 1A-2 shows the Indico 100 series X-ray generator outline.
Figure 1A-1: Generator outline drawing (Millenia)
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-3
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
1A.3.0 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS (CONT)
Figure 1A-2 shows the outline of the Indico 100 series X-ray generator.
21.7 (552)
18 (457)
*
TOP
*
THE SHADED AREAS (MARKED *) REPRESENT
OPTIONAL WIRING CHANNELS. REFER TO
CHAPTER 2, THE SECTION REMOVING THE
EXTERNAL COVERS, FOR FURTHER DETAILS.
ANCHORING PLATES
4 PLACES
16.1 (408)
RIGHT SIDE
12.3 (313)
12.3 (313)
4.5 (114)
REAR
16.4
(417)
3.7
(94)
14.3
(363)
16.4 (417)
MAXIMUM
10.9
(277)
3.7
(94)
6.5 (164)
24.6 (626)
39.7 (1008)
*
FRONT
16.6 (422)
3.0 (76)
*
38.7 (984)
48.7 (1237)
9 (229)
18.1 (459)
R&F CONSOLE
RAD CONSOLE
ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
FIGURE 1A-1 SHOWS THE OUTLINE FOR THE 23 X 56 (CM) CONSOLE. THIS FIGURE SHOWS THE OUTLINE FOR THE
31 X 42 (CM) INDICO 100 R&F CONSOLE, THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, AND THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
AN OPTIONAL LINE-ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS AVAILABLE THAT MOUNTS ON THE BOTTOM OF THE GENERATOR
CABINET. THIS TRANSFORMER HAS THE SAME WIDTH AND DEPTH AS THE GENERATOR CABINET, AND A HEIGHT OF
APPROXIMATELY 8.1 INCHES (206 mm).
IN_OL.CDR
Figure 1A-2: Generator outline drawing (Indico 100)
Page 1A-4
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
1A.4.0 APPLICATIONS
RAD SYSTEMS:
• Bucky table, tabletop and off-table radiography.
• Vertical bucky/cassette radiography.
• Conventional tomography.
R&F SYSTEMS
• Fluoroscopic and spot film applications.
• Tomography with conventional and/or remote R&F tables.
• Optional digital compatible.
• Optional high-level fluoro for therapy simulators (Indico 100).
1A.5.0 FEATURES
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
High frequency generator.
One or two tube operation, Rad or Rad / Fluoro.
Single or dual filament supplies.
Low speed or dual speed X-ray tube stator supply.
Optimal matching of X-ray tubes by PROMs.
Repetitive self checks of generator functions, provides display of system faults and operating errors.
Optional AEC, up to four inputs.
Optional ABS with kV or kV/mA fluoro stabilizer.
Optional remote fluoro control box for tabletop use or SFD mounting.
Optional Dose-Area Product (DAP) display (Indico 100).
X-ray Tube protection. The generator allows setting the following limits:
a) Maximum mA, adjustable for each focal spot.
b) Maximum kV, adjustable for each X-ray tube.
c) Maximum kW, adjustable for each focal spot.
d) Maximum filament current limit, adjustable for large and small focal spots.
e) Anode heat warning and anode heat alarm levels.
Calibration features:
a) Microprocessor design allows all calibration and programming to be performed via the Console.
b) mA calibration is automated.
Messages and diagnostic information: For users and service personnel, the generator console
displays various messages indicating status or equipment problems. The user is prompted in case of
errors.
Error log stores last 200 errors and associated generator settings.
Service and diagnostic information available via a laptop computer (optional).
KV range:
Radiography 40 to 150 kV.
Fluoroscopy 40 to 125 kV.
mA range:
Radiography 10 to 320 mA (30 kW), 10 to 400 mA (32 kW),
10 to 500 mA (40 kW), 10 to 630 mA (50 kW), 10 TO 800 mA (65 kW)
and 10 to 1000 mA (80 and 100 kW).
Fluoroscopy 0.5 to 6.0 mA, 0.5 to 20 mA with optional high-level fluoroscopy.
mAs range:
tube dependent, max 1000 mAs.
Time range:
Radiography 1.0 to 6300 ms (Indico 100), 2.0 to 6300 ms (Millenia).
Fluoroscopy 0 to 5 or 0 to 10 minutes.
Refer to the compatibility statement / product description (end of section 1D) for compatibility and
features of this specific generator.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-5
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
1A.6.0 ROTOR CONTROL
The generator will be equipped with a low speed starter, or optional dual speed starter.
DUAL SPEED STARTER
Number of tubes permissible:
Current monitoring
Dual speed starter output
frequency
Braking
Rotor boost time
Duty cycle
LOW SPEED STARTER
Current monitoring
Duty cycle
Maximum of 32 tube types. Tube type is switch selectable
Both stator circuits
50 or 60 Hz (low speed)
150 or 180 Hz (high speed).
(Independent of line frequency)
Dynamic braking when in high speed rotation
Determined by tube selection plus incremental boost time
changes from 100 to 700 msec.
Not to exceed 2 high speed starts per minute.
Both stator circuits
Not to exceed 5 consecutive boosts, followed by a minimum 10
second wait period.
1A.7.0 AUXILIARY POWER OUTPUTS
The generator supplies the following power outputs for X-ray room equipment:
•
•
•
24 VDC, 4 Amp.
120 VAC, 2.5 Amp.
240 VAC, 1.5 Amp.
2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 120 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 240 VAC, BUT BOTH ARE
NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY.
The above voltage sources are not compatible with:
•
•
•
Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These lamps exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply.
Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (some motors and solenoids).
1A.8.0 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
The Millenia and Indico 100 series of X-ray generators includes the following documentation:
•
•
•
Page 1A-6
Operator’s manual.
Service and installation manual.
Insert and application notes as required.
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
1A.9.0 REGULATORIES AND DESIGN STANDARDS
1A.9.1 Environmental Specifications
OPERATING
Ambient temperature range
Relative humidity
Atmospheric pressure range
10 to 40 °C
30 to 75%
500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
Ambient temperature range
Relative humidity
Atmospheric pressure range
-20 to 70 °C
10 to 95%, including condensation
500 to 1060 hPa (375 to 795 mm Hg)
1A.9.2 Applicable Standards
A) SAFETY
The Millenia / Indico 100 family of generators comply with the following regulatory requirements and design
standards:
•
FDA Center for Devices & Radiological Health (CDRH) - 21 CFR title 21 subchapter J (USA).
•
Radiation Emitting Devices Act - C34 (Canada).
•
Medical Device Regulations (Canada).
•
EC Directive 93/42/EEC concerning Medical Devices (European Community).
•
•
EN 60601-1/IEC 60601-1, EN 60601-2-7/IEC 60601-2-7, CSA 601.1, UL2601.1
-Type of protection against electric shock: Class I equipment.
-Degree of protection against electric shock: Not classified.
-Degree of protection against harmful ingress of water: Ordinary equipment.
-Mode of operation: Continuous operation with intermittent loading (standby - exposure).
-Equipment not suitable for use in presence of a flammable anesthetic mixture with air or with
oxygen or nitrous oxide.
EN 60601-1-4/IEC 60601-1-4, EN ISO 14971.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-7
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
B) EMC (EN 60601-1-2:2001/IEC 60601.1.2:2001)
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic emissions
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that
it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test
Compliance
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Group 1
RF emissions
CISPR 11
Class A
(The VZW2926
and VZW2930
series of X-ray
generators in
combination with
shielded location)
Not Applicable
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators use RF
energy only for their internal functions. Therefore, the RF
emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference
in nearby electronic equipment.
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators must be
used only in a shielded location with a minimum RF shielding
effectiveness and, for each cable that exits the shielded location, a
minimum RF filter attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz to 230 MHz
and 47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The minimum at 30 MHz is
40dB and the minimum at 230 MHz is 47dB).
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series is suitable for use in all
Harmonic
establishments other than domestic and those directly connected
emissions
to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies
IEC 61000-3-2
buildings used for domestic purposes.
Voltage
Not Applicable
fluctuations/
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
NOTE It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specifications.
Page 1A-8
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure
that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity
test
IEC 60601
test level
Compliance
level
Electromagnetic environment –
guidance
Electrostatic
discharge (ESD)
IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast
transient/burst
IEC 61000-4-4
± 6 kV contact
± 8 kV air
± 6 kV contact
± 8 kV air
Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile.
If floors are covered with synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be at least 30%.
± 2 kV for power
supply lines
± 1 kV for
input/output lines
± 1 kV differential
mode
± 2 kV common
mode
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
± 2 kV for power
supply lines
± 1 kV for
input/output lines
± 1 kV differential
mode
± 2 kV common
mode
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 0.5 cycle
Mains power quality should be that of a typical
commercial or hospital environment.
40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
40 % UT
(60 % dip in UT)
for 5 cycles
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT)
70 % UT
(30 % dip in UT)
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s
3 A/m
< 5 % UT
(> 95 % dip in UT)
for 5 s
3 A/m
Surge
IEC 61000-4-5
Voltage dips,
short interruption,
and voltage
variations on
power supply
input lines
IEC 60601-4-11
Mains power quality should be that of a typical
commercial or hospital environment.
Mains power quality should be that of a typical
commercial or hospital environment. If the user
of the VZW2926 and VZW2930 series X-ray
generator requires continued operation during
power mains interruptions, it is recommended
that the X-ray generator be powered from an
uninterruptible power supply or battery.
Power frequency
Power frequency magnetic fields should be at
(50/60 Hz)
levels characteristic of a typical location in a
typical commercial or hospital environment
IEC 61000-4-8
NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-9
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
Guidance and manufacturer’s declaration – electromagnetic immunity
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray generators are intended for use in the electromagnetic
environment specified below. The customer or the user of the VZW2926 or VZW2930 series should assure that
it is used in such an environment.
Immunity
test
IEC 60601
test level
Compliance
level
Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted RF
IEC 61000-4-6
3 Vrms
150 kHz to
80MHz
3 Vrms
150 kHz to
80MHz
Radiated RF
IEC 61000-4-3
3 V/m
80MHz to 2.5
GHz
3 V/m
80MHz to 2.5
GHz
The VZW2926 and VZW2930 series of X-ray
generators must be used only in a shielded location
with a minimum RF shielding effectiveness and, for
each cable that enters the shielded location, a
minimum RF filter attenuation of 40dB from 30 MHz
to 230 MHz and 47dB from 230 MHz to 1 GHz. (The
minimum at 30 MHz is 40dB and the minimum at
230 MHz is 47dB.)
Field strengths outside the shielded location from
fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey, should be less than 3
V/m.a
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1 These guidelines may not apply all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption
and reflection from structures, objects and people.
NOTE 2 It is essential that the actual shielding effectiveness and filter attenuation of the shielded location be
verified to assure that they meet the minimum specification.
a
Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and
land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted
theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the
VZW2926 or VZW2930 series of X-ray generators is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, the X-ray generator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is
observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the X-ray generator.
Page 1A-10
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Introduction
1A
1A.9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
In accordance with the intended use, this X-ray generator complies with the European Council Directive
concerning Medical Devices. The CE marking affixed to this product signifies this. One of the harmonized
standards of this Directive defines the permitted levels of electromagnetic emission from this equipment
and its required immunity from the electromagnetic emissions of other devices.
It is not possible, however, to exclude with absolute certainty the possibility that other high frequency
electronic equipment, which is fully compliant to the EMC regulations, will not adversely affect the
operation of this generator. If the other equipment has a comparatively high level of transmission power
and is in close proximity to the generator, these EMC concerns (the risk of interference) may be more
pronounced. It is therefore recommended that the operation of equipment of this type such as mobile
telephones, cordless microphones and other similar mobile radio equipment be restricted from the vicinity
of this X-ray generator.
1A.10.0 TECHNIQUE FACTORS DEFINITIONS
•
•
KV:
TIME:
•
•
mA:
mAs
KV peak after any initial kV overshoot.
Time in milliseconds, (ms) that the high voltage (anode to cathode) is greater than or
equal to 75% of the desired kV.
Average Tube Beam Current (in mA) during the exposure TIME.
milliampere-seconds (mA x TIME).
Address any questions regarding X-ray generator operation to:
Mail:
Customer Support Department
Communications and Power Industries Canada Inc.
45 River Drive
Georgetown, Ontario, Canada L7G 2J4
Telephone:
(905) 877-0161
Fax:
(905) 877-8320
Attention: Customer Support Department
E-mail:
[email protected]
Attention: Customer Support Department
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
Rev. L
Page 1A-11
1A
Introduction
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 1A-12
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1B
SAFETY
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1B-2
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS .......................................................................................................1B-2
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS ......................................................................................................1B-2
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................1B-4
1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization ...................................................................................................1B-5
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 ............................................1B-5
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label............................................................................................................1B-5
1B.5.2 Weight Label ..........................................................................................................................................1B-6
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label .........................................................................................................................................1B-6
1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board....................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board .....................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board............................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.7 AEC Board .............................................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.8 Power Input Board .................................................................................................................................1B-7
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board......................................................................................................................1B-8
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA ............................................................................1B-8
1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label................................................................................................1B-8
1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label ........................................................................................................1B-9
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label .......................................................................................................................1B-9
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label ...................................................................................................1B-10
1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label.......................................................................................................1B-11
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label ...................................................................................................................................1B-11
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label............................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks.......................................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock) ...........................................................................................................1B-12
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100 .......................................................................1B-12
1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label..................................................................................................................1B-12
1B.7.2 Caution HV Label.................................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label .................................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label ................................................................................................................1B-13
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals .......................................................................................................1B-14
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension ...........................................................................................................................1B-14
1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer)..................................................................................................1B-14
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-1
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains important safety warnings and safety information required for installing and
servicing the generator.
1B.2.0 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS
The following advisory symbols are used on the safety warning labels, and/or on circuit boards, and/or on
the operator console and the optional remote fluoro control.
High voltage symbol used to indicate the presence
of high voltage.
WARNING
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE
DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND
OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
ARE OBSERVED.
Warning symbol used to indicate a potential hazard
to operators, to service personnel, or to the
equipment. It indicates a requirement to refer to the
accompanying documentation for details.
Radiation exposure symbol used on operator
console. Lights to indicate that an exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
Fluoro radiation exposure symbol used on operator
console and on optional remote fluoro control unit.
Lights to indicate that a fluoro exposure is in
progress. This is accompanied by an audible tone
from the console.
Radiation warning label on console, used in certain
jurisdictions.
Never allow unqualified personnel to operate the Xray generator.
1B.3.0 SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS
WARNING:
PROPER USE AND SAFE OPERATING PRACTICES WITH RESPECT TO X-RAY
GENERATORS ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF USERS OF SUCH GENERATORS. CPI
CANADA INC. PROVIDES INFORMATION ON ITS PRODUCTS AND ASSOCIATED
HAZARDS, BUT ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITIES FOR AFTER-SALE OPERATING AND
SAFETY PRACTICES.
THE MANUFACTURER ACCEPTS NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY GENERATOR NOT
MAINTAINED OR SERVICED ACCORDING TO THIS SERVICE AND INSTALLATION
MANUAL, OR FOR ANY GENERATOR THAT HAS BEEN MODIFIED IN ANY WAY.
THE MANUFACTURER ALSO ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR X-RAY RADIATION
OVEREXPOSURE OF PATIENTS OR PERSONNEL RESULTING FROM POOR OPERATING
TECHNIQUES OR PROCEDURES.
Page 1B-2
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont)
WARNING:
THIS X-RAY UNIT MAY BE DANGEROUS TO PATIENT AND OPERATOR UNLESS SAFE
EXPOSURE FACTORS AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE OBSERVED.
X-ray radiation exposure may be damaging to health, with some effects being cumulative and extending
over periods of many months or even years. Operators and service personnel should avoid any
exposure to the primary beam and take protective measures to safeguard against scatter radiation.
Scatter radiation is caused by any object in the path of the primary beam and may be of equal or less
intensity than the primary beam that exposes the film.
No practical design can incorporate complete protection for operators or service personnel who do not
take adequate safety precautions. Only authorized and properly trained service and operating
personnel should be allowed to work with this X-ray generator equipment. The appropriate
personnel must be made aware of the inherent dangers associated with the servicing of high voltage
equipment and the danger of excessive exposure to X-ray radiation during system operation.
DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE.
For the 23 X 56 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J4 is not used, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J1 is for
connection of an optional printer.
For the 31 X 42 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J13 is for connection of an
external hand switch and / or foot switch.
For the Rad-only console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a serial port
for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the main cabinet.
For the touch screen console, J2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect
cable to the generator main cabinet, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J5
connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and
J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE..
CAUTION:
DO NOT EXCEED THE TUBE MAXIMUM OPERATING LIMITS. INTENDED LIFE AND
RELIABILITY WILL NOT BE OBTAINED UNLESS GENERATORS ARE OPERATED WITHIN
PUBLISHED SPECIFICATIONS.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-3
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
SAFETY NOTICES AND WARNINGS (cont)
WARNING:
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES EXIST INSIDE THE GENERATOR WHENEVER THE MAIN POWER
DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. THOSE AREAS INCLUDE THE MAIN FUSEHOLDER AND
ASSOCIATED CIRCUITS IN THE HV POWER SUPPLY, PORTIONS OF THE GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD IN THE UPPER PORTION OF THE GENERATOR (MILLENIA AND
INDICO 100), AND THE TERMINALS ON THE LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IN THE
LOWER GENERATOR CABINET IF FITTED (MILLENIA ONLY).
THE CONSOLE ON/OFF SWITCH DOES NOT DISCONNECT THE MAIN POWER FROM THE
ABOVE AREAS INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED IN THE POWER SUPPLY PRESENT A SAFETY
HAZARD FOR AT LEAST 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM
THE UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE SERVICING
THE GENERATOR.
1B.4.0 SAFETY WARNING LABELS - INTRODUCTION
The safety warning label subsections define the safety labels used inside and outside the generator
cabinets. Depending on configuration, your X-ray generator may contain some or all of the labels shown.
NOTE:
THESE LABELS AND WARNINGS ARE LOCATED TO ALERT SERVICE PERSONNEL THAT
SERIOUS INJURY WILL RESULT IF THE HAZARD IDENTIFIED IS IGNORED.
NOTE:
DUE TO THE DIVERSITY OF GENERATOR MODELS, THE EQUIPMENT MAY NOT BE
EXACTLY AS SHOWN.
WARNING:
SWITCH OFF THE MAIN POWER DISCONNECT AND ALLOW SUFFICIENT TIME FOR ALL
CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR OPENING ANY
SERVICE DOOR.
WARNING:
IF ANY BARRIERS OR COVERS MUST BE REMOVED FOR SERVICE, TAKE ALL
REQUIRED PRECAUTIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE HAZARD(S) AND IMMEDIATELY
REPLACE THE BARRIERS/COVERS WHEN THE NEED FOR REMOVAL IS COMPLETED.
REPLACE ALL FUSES IN THIS GENERATOR WITH THE SAME TYPE AND
RATING.
This information is provided to help you establish safe operating conditions for both you and your CPI Xray generator. Do not operate this X-ray generator except in accordance with these precautions, and any
additional information provided by the X-ray generator manufacturer and/or competent safety authorities.
Page 1B-4
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
1B.4.1 Safety Warning Labels - Organization
The safety warning label information is organized into three subsections:
•
•
•
Safety labels/notices common to Millenia and Indico 100
Safety notices unique to Millenia
Safety notices unique to Indico 100
1B.5.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES COMMON TO MILLENIA AND INDICO 100
1B.5.1 Caution HV Behind Cover Label
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the main power contactor. This area will have
mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the resonant circuit and low speed starter
components if a low speed starter is fitted. The resonant components (resonant
capacitors etc) may be energized for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the
main disconnect is switched off.
If a low speed starter is fitted, the associated components will have up to 240
VAC applied when the console is switched on.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to each of the access panels on the rear of the generator. The high
voltage hazards behind these panels is similar to that behind the upper and lower
entrance doors, see 1B.7.4.
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the line adjusting transformer (if fitted). The
terminals on the transformer will have mains voltage applied as long as the main
disconnect is switched on. If access to the transformer connections is needed, SWITCH
OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT FIRST.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to a cover over the inverter board(s). The inverter assembly is
connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the
generator is switched off, or the main disconnect is switched off.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to a cover over the main input fuses on the power input board. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-5
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.5.2 Weight Label
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to the upper and lower generator cabinets and to the HT oil tank
and states the approximate weight of each of the generator sections and of the HT oil
tank. This label cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper
assistance.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to the lower generator cabinet and to the HT oil tank and states the
approximate weight of the lower generator cabinet and of the HT oil tank. This label
cautions against attempting to lift those assemblies without proper assistance.
1B.5.3 DC Bus Label
MILLENIA:
This label is attached to a cover over the DC bus capacitors. These capacitors will hold a
lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off, or the main disconnect is
switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5 minutes after the power has
been switched off.
INDICO 100:
This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. The
internal capacitors will hold a lethal charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched off,
or the main disconnect is switched off. Do not remove the cover for a minimum of 5
minutes after the power has been switched off.
WARNING:
Page 1B-6
WAIT A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE INPUT MAINS POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED
BEFORE REMOVING ANY COVERS OR ACCESS PANELS. ONCE THE COVER(S) /
PANEL(S) ARE REMOVED CHECK THAT THE VOLTAGE ACROSS THE DC BUS
CAPACITORS IS LESS THAN 48 VDC BEFORE SERVICING.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
1B.5.4 Console CPU Board / Console Board
For 23 X 56 (cm) consoles:
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of
U32 and J10. This voltage is used to light the backlight for the LCD display assembly in the
console.
For 31 X 42 (cm) Indico 100 R&F consoles:
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of T1,
C57, and J10. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD display.
For Indico 100 Rad-only consoles:
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 400 VAC is present on this board in the area of T1,
C36, and J5. This is a high voltage source for the fluorescent backlight on the LCD display.
FUSE RATING:
F1:
1.6A 250V
1B.5.5 Generator Interface Board
This symbol is printed on the generator interface board in the high volage (mains) area.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Components within the dashed line on the board have high
voltage applied at all times that the main disconnect is switched ON. These components are
live EVEN WITH THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
This symbol is printed on the generator interface board near fuses F1 to F6.
FUSE RATINGS:
F1:
1.6A 250V slow blow
F2, F5: 2.5A 250V slow blow
F3, F4: 5A 250V slow blow
F6:
2A 250 V slow blow
1B.5.6 Room Interface Board
This symbol is printed on the room interface board near the 110/220 VAC terminal blocks.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: 110/220 VAC may be present on this board at all times that the
AC mains to the generator is switched on.
1B.5.7 AEC Board
This symbol is printed on some versions of AEC board with a high voltage power supply for a
PMT or ion chamber.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Depending on the AEC board type, up to approximately 1000
VDC may be present on the AEC board at all times that the generator is switched on.
1B.5.8 Power Input Board
Power input boards for single phase 240 VAC generators are fitted with several high power
resistors that operate at temperatures sufficient to cause skin burn. Ensure that these
resistors have cooled sufficiently after the power has been switched off before servicing.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-7
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.5.9 Dual Speed Starter Board
This symbol is printed on the dual speed starter board if fitted.
HIGH VOLTAGE HAZARD: Approximately 600 VDC is present on this board. This voltage is
supplied from the DC bus capacitors in the HF power supply. USE EXTREME CAUTION
WHEN SERVICING, this voltage and current combination is lethal. Ensure that the DC bus
capacitors are fully discharged before servicing as these capacitors will hold a lethal charge
for 5 minutes AFTER THE EQUIPMENT IS SWITCHED OFF.
WARNING:
COMPONENTS BEHIND VARIOUS COVERS, AS NOTED IN THIS SECTION, REMAIN LIVE
EVEN WITH THE OPERATOR CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF. THE ONLY WAY TO REMOVE
POWER FROM THESE AREAS IS TO SWITCH OFF THE MAIN DISCONNECT.
1B.6.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO MILLENIA
1B.6.1 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals Label
This label indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach to the high tension transformer
primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.
This label also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.
Page 1B-8
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
1B.6.2 Live Mains / Fuses / Ground Label
This label is attached to a cover over the main fuse block and fuses. This area will have mains voltage
applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on. The main system ground is also located behind
this cover.
1B.6.3 Live Mains / Fuses Label
This label is attached to a cover over the fuse block and fuses for the room interface transformer. This
area will have mains voltage applied as long as the main disconnect is switched on.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-9
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.6.4 Caution - Hazardous Voltages Label
CAUTION
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ARE
PRESENT INSIDE THE CABINET
FOR A PERIOD OF FIVE (5)
MINUTES AFTER DE-ENERGIZING
THIS EQUIPMENT.
This label is attached to the main access doors on the generator. Wait a minimum of five minutes after
the main power has been removed from the generator before opening the cabinet doors. This will
allow for internal capacitors to discharge to a safe level.
The upper door provides access to the HV power supply driver section, room interface board and
associated control circuits. The lower door allows access to the HT transformer, dual speed starter
chassis if fitted, line adjusting transformer if fitted, and access to the tube stator connections and thermal
switch connections. Additionally, the grounding location for the X-ray tube housing is located in this area.
Hazards associated with each area within are outlined in the relevant sections of this chapter.
Page 1B-10
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
1B.6.5 Warning / Caution / Caution Label
This label is attached to a cover over the dual speed starter assembly (if fitted). DC bus voltage is present
behind this panel, see 1B.5.9.
Ensure that the generator has been turned OFF for five minutes before removing the cover or
disconnecting the DC supply.
Replace fuses with the same type and rating, refer to spares list (chapter 8) for details.
1B.6.6 Tank Vent Label
This label is attached to the HT tank clamping bracket on generator models equipped with an HT tank
vent screw. This screw must be loosened to allow venting of the HT tank before use of the generator
when the tank is so equipped.
The screw must be fully tightened to prevent insulating oil spills or leaks from the HT tank during
transportation or shipping.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-11
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.6.7 mA Test Jacks Label
This label is attached to the top of the HT tank on generator models equipped with mA test jacks. A
similar warning is printed on tank lid boards using this connector; see 1B.6.8 below for details.
1B.6.8 mA test Jacks
This symbol is printed on tank lid boards with mA/mAs test jacks.
Replace the shorting jumper immediately after use. Do not attempt exposures without either
the shorting jumper in place, or an approved mA/mAs measuring device properly connected.
The warning “CAUTION: 48V MAX” printed on some tank lid boards does not apply in Millenia
generator applications.
1B.6.9 F3 (Auxiliary Power Fuseblock)
This symbol is on a label under the fuseholder for F3 (to the right of the HF power supply).
FUSE RATING: 3A 500V slow blow.
This fuse is only used if the generator is fitted with the neutral block option.
1B.7.0 SAFETY LABELS / NOTICES UNIQUE TO INDICO 100
1B.7.1 Caution HV Exposed Label
This label is attached to the removable panels on the lower (power supply) cabinet. High voltage is
present within this cabinet at all times that the mains power is switched on.
Page 1B-12
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Safety
1B
1B.7.2 Caution HV Label
This label is attached to the power input board, and to the resonant board assembly. The input power
board has line voltage components attached that will be live at all times that the main disconnect is
switched on. This includes the input fuses, main line contactor, mains rectifier and associated
components.
The resonant board assembly has components that may be energized at all times that the
generator is on. These components may retain their charge for 5 minutes after the console is switched
off, or the main disconnect is switched off.
1B.7.3 Danger HV Label
This label is attached to the primary terminals on the HT oil tank. These terminals may be energized at all
times that the generator is switched on, and for 5 minutes after the console or the main disconnect is
switched off.
1B.7.4 High Voltage Warning Label
This label is attached to the inverter board(s) and to the low speed starter assembly if fitted. The inverter
assembly is connected to the main DC bus and will have high voltage applied at all times that the
generator is switched on. This assembly will remain energized for 5 minutes after the generator is
switched off, or the main disconnect is off.
Components on the low speed starter assembly will have 240 VAC applied when the console is
switched on.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
Rev. H
Page 1B-13
1B
Safety
CPI Canada Inc.
1B.7.5 HT Tank - Transformer Terminals
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid and indicates that if the power supply inverter leads that attach
to the high tension transformer primary terminals are not connected the generator must not be energized.
This notice also cautions against over tightening the nuts on the transformer feedthrough terminals
mentioned in the above paragraph.
1B.7.6 Danger High Tension
This notice is printed on the HT oil tank lid. High voltage may be present at the primary terminals on the
tank lid board, at the output high voltage connectors, and at the mA/mAs measuring jacks if the shorting
link is opened for mA/mAs measurements.
1B.7.7 F1 (Primary of Auxiliary Transformer)
This symbol is on a label above the fuse holder for F1 (to the left of the main input fuses on
the power input board).
FUSE RATING:
Single phase generators: 3A 250V slow blow.
Three phase generators: 2A 500V slow blow.
Page 1B-14
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-01
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1C
PREPARING FOR INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................................................... 1C-2
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................. 1C-2
1C.2.1 32 kW Single Phase ............................................................................................................................ 1C-2
1C.2.2 40 kW Single Phase ............................................................................................................................ 1C-2
1C.2.3 32 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-2
1C.2.4 40 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-3
1C.2.5 50 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-3
1C.2.6 65 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-3
1C.2.7 80 kW Three Phase ............................................................................................................................. 1C-4
1C.2.8 100 kW Three Phase ........................................................................................................................... 1C-4
1C.2.9 Service Disconnect (All Models).......................................................................................................... 1C-4
1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS............................................................................................................ 1C-5
1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................. 1C-7
1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................ 1C-7
1C.5.1 Generator Outline ................................................................................................................................ 1C-7
1C.5.2 Generator Weight ................................................................................................................................ 1C-7
1C.5.3 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions ...................................................................................... 1C-8
1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER........................................................... 1C-8
1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room..................................................................................... 1C-9
1C.6.2 Seismic Centers and mounting hole locations .................................................................................. 1C-10
1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................................. 1C-12
1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR .............................................................. 1C-12
1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS ................................................................................................... 1C-13
1C.9.1 Site Logistics...................................................................................................................................... 1C-13
1C.9.2 Installation Equipment ....................................................................................................................... 1C-13
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-1
1C
Preparing for Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The following items must be considered before installing your generator:
• Power level of your generator.
• Power line requirements.
• Ground requirements.
• Physical placement of the generator.
• Environmental requirements for the generator.
• Cable runs from the generator to all room components: tables, Buckys, X-ray tubes etc.
1C.2.0 GENERATOR POWER REQUIREMENTS
1C.2.1 32 kW Single Phase
Line Voltage
230 VAC ± 10%, 1∅.
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
200 Amps.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
1C.2.2 40 kW Single Phase
Line Voltage
230 VAC ± 10%, 1∅.
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
250 Amps.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
1C.2.3 32 kW Three Phase
400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅.
Line Voltage
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer.
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
65 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
55 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Standby Current
Page 1C-2
5 Amps.
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
1C.2.4 40 kW Three Phase
Line Voltage
400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅.
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer.
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
80 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
65 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
1C.2.5 50 kW Three Phase
Line Voltage
400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer,
(for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.8
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
100 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
80 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
1C.2.6 65 kW Three Phase
Line Voltage
400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer,
(for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.8
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
125 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
105 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Standby Current
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
5 Amps.
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-3
1C
Preparing for Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.2.7 80 kW Three Phase
400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 400 VAC input generators).
Line Voltage
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer,
(for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.8
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
155 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
130 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
1C.2.8 100 kW Three Phase
400 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 400 VAC input generators).
Line Voltage
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ with optional line adjusting transformer,
(for 400 VAC input generators).
480 VAC ± 10%, 3∅ (for 480 VAC input generators).
* SEE NOTE AT THE END OF 1C.2.8
Line Frequency
50/60 Hz.
Momentary Current
195 Amps/phase at 400 VAC.
160 Amps/phase at 480 VAC.
Standby Current
5 Amps.
50 kW AND HIGHER THREE-PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS ARE AVAILABLE IN 400
VAC AND 480 VAC MODELS. 400 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 400 VAC
MAINS, OR MAY BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC MAINS WITH AN OPTIONAL LINE
ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER. 480 VAC MODELS MUST BE OPERATED FROM 480 VAC
MAINS (THESE ARE THE NOMINAL MAINS VOLTAGES, THE ALLOWED TOLERANCES
ARE AS DETAILED IN THE PREVIOUS TABLES).
*NOTE:
1C.2.9 Service Disconnect (All Models)
Refer to the following table for the recommended service disconnect ratings for the Generators
(Power Supplies).
Page 1C-4
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
1C.3.0 POWER LINE REQUIREMENTS
The following table defines the power line requirements for the generators.
NOTE: THE FOLLOWING TABLE CONTAINS RECOMMENDED VALUES FOR THE WIRE SIZES
BETWEEN THE MAINS DISCONNECT AND THE GENERATOR. THE ACTUAL VALUES
USED AT AN INSTALLATION ARE DEPENDENT ON THE QUALITY OF THE INPUT LINE
(VOLTAGE LEVEL) THE CURRENT REQUIREMENTS AND THE LENGTH OF THE CABLE
RUN AND MUST BE CONFIRMED BY THE INSTALLER.
FINAL SELECTION OF GENERATOR INPUT WIRE AND DISCONNECTS AS WELL AS THE
CABLING FROM THE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER TO THE MAINS DISCONNECT,
MUST MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODES AND IS
USUALLY DETERMINED BY HOSPITAL/CONTRACTOR ENGINEERING.
ALL THE RATINGS LISTED CONSIDER THE GENERATOR REQUIREMENTS ONLY. THE
INSTALLER MUST MAKE THE NECESSARY COMPENSATION FOR ADDITIONAL LOAD
REQUIREMENTS
A POOR QUALITY INPUT LINE MAY RESULT IN THE INSTALLER HAVING
TO DERATE THE GENERATOR'S MAXIMUM POWER
Mains Voltage
Minimum
Recommended
Mains Disconnect
to Generator
15 ft/5 m max)
Generator
Momentary
Line
Current
Minimum
Recommended
Generator
Service Rating
Minimum
Recommended
Distribution
Transformer
Rating
#4
200 A
120 A
50 kVA
Ground
Wire
Size
Apparent
Mains
Resistance
#4
0.055 Ω
32 kW 1∅ Generator
230 VAC
2
2
(25 mm )
(25mm )
40 kW 1∅ Generator
230 VAC
#4
250 A
120 A
65 kVA
2
0.045 Ω
#4
2
(25 mm )
(25mm )
32 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC
#6
65 A
100 A
45 kVA
(15 mm2)
480 VAC
#6
0.27 Ω
#4
(25mm2)
55 A
100 A
45 kVA
2
0.40 Ω
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
40 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC
#6
80 A
100 A
55 kVA
2
2
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
(25mm )
65 A
100 A
2
55 kVA
0.32 Ω
#4
2
(15 mm )
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
0.22 Ω
#4
(25mm )
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-5
1C
Preparing for Installation
Mains Voltage
CPI Canada Inc.
Minimum
Recommended
Mains Disconnect
to Generator
15 ft/5 m max)
Generator
Momentary
Line
Current
Minimum
Recommended
Generator
Service Rating
Minimum
Recommended
Distribution
Transformer
Rating
#6
100 A
100 A
65 kVA
Ground
Wire
Size
Apparent
Mains
Resistance
#4
0.17 Ω
50 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC
2
2
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
(25mm )
80 A
100 A
65 kVA
2
0.24 Ω
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
65 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC
#6
125 A
100 A
85 kVA
2
2
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
0.13 Ω
#4
(25mm )
105 A
100 A
85 kVA
2
0.19 Ω
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
80 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC
#6
155 A
100 A
105 kVA
2
2
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
0.11 Ω
#4
(25mm )
130 A
100 A
105 kVA
2
0.15 Ω
#4
2
(15 mm )
(25mm )
100 kW 3∅ Generator
400 VAC
#6
195 A
100 A
130 kVA
2
2
(15 mm )
480 VAC
#6
(25mm )
160 A
100 A
130 kVA
2
•
Page 1C-6
0.12 Ω
#4
2
(15 mm )
•
•
•
0.09 Ω
#4
(25mm )
All wiring and grounding should be in compliance with the national electrical code or equivalent.
All wiring must be copper.
For all installations, a separate copper ground cable #4 AWG (25 mm2) is required from the building
distribution ground to the ground terminal located inside the main disconnect switch fuse block.
The disconnect switch shall be located within reach of the operator.
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
1C.4.0 GROUND REQUIREMENTS
POWER LINE:
• A suitable flexible copper cable #6 AWG (15 mm2) or larger must be supplied (usually part of the line
cable) to connect from the disconnect switch to the main ground of the generator, located to the left of
the main fuse block on the power input board.
• If a neutral line is provided with the system under no circumstances is it to be used for ground
purposes. The ground conductor must carry fault currents only.
X-RAY TUBE HOUSING:
• A copper ground cable, #10 AWG (6 mm2) or greater, is to be connected from each X-ray tube’s
housing to the H.T. tank ground stud (located at the top of the H.T. tank).
STATOR CABLE:
• For units with a low speed starter, shielded stator cables are recommended. For units with a dual
speed starter, shielded stator cables MUST be used.
The shield for the stator cable(s) must be properly grounded at the chassis ground studs as per
chapter 2.
1C.5.0 OUTLINE DRAWINGS
1C.5.1 Generator Outline
Refer to chapter 1A for the Indico 100 generator outline.
1C.5.2 Generator Weight
The weight of the generator cabinet and of the available consoles is listed below:
Generator cabinet
Control console (23 X 56 cm)
Control console (31 X 42 cm)
Control console (Rad only)
Control console (Touch screen)
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
235 lbs (107 kg).
7 lbs (3.2 kg).
8 lbs (3.7 kg).
6 lbs (2.7 kg).
24 lbs (10.9 kg).
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-7
1C
Preparing for Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.5.3 Generator Shipping Containers: Dimensions
The overall dimensions of the Indico 100 shipping pack are shown below.
Figure 1C-1: Generator shipping container
1C.6.0 LOCATING THE GENERATOR CABINET AND CONTROLLER
The generator cabinet is self standing and does not need to be supported. However, the installation
should meet the following requirements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 1C-8
The floor must be flat and level.
The floor must be capable of supporting a load of approximately 250 lbs (115 Kg).
The generator installation area must be clean and free of dirt or debris.
Sufficient room must be provided to allow access to the rear and side panels for installation.
Clearance must also be provided at both sides of the cabinet, at the front, and at the rear of the upper
cabinet to allow access for service. See Figure 1C-2 for recommended clearances.
A cable conduit should be provided from the control console to the generator cabinet to allow routing
of the control cable if required. Allow for a 2 inch conduit. See Figure 1C-3.
Refer to 1C.6.2 for the seismic center location and for the mounting-hole locations to secure the
generator to the floor, if required.
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
1C.6.1 Locating The Equipment In The X-Ray Room
Figure 1C-2 shows recommended clearances around the generator. Figure 1C-3 shows recommended
clearances for through-the-wall cable routing.
Figure 1C-2: Generator clearances
Figure 1C-3: Typical through the wall installation.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-9
1C
Preparing for Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.6.2 Seismic Centers and mounting hole locations
Figure 1C-4 shows the seismic center location for the Indico 100 X-ray generator. The dimensions are
shown as a range of values because the seismic center location will vary slightly, depending on model
and configuration of the generator. The installer will need to confirm the exact seismic center location if
the published range is insufficiently precise.
The generator should be secured to the floor via the 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter clearance holes that are
located in the base of the cabinet as shown in figure 1C-6, or by means of the anchoring plates shown in
figure 1C-5.
Figure 1C-4: Indico 100 seismic centers
Page 1C-10
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
1C.6.2 Seismic Centers and mounting hole locations (Cont)
0.39 (10 mm ) DIA
13.9 (353)
16.1 (409)
3.3 (85)
TOP
VIEW
FRONT
LEVELLING
FEET
(4 PLACES)
20.1 (511)
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
SPACERS
SUPPLIED BY
CUSTOMER
(4 PLACES)
FILE: IN_MTG.CDR
Figure 1C-5: Anchoring plates for securing the generator
16.1 (409)
12.3 (312)
0.63 (16 mm ) DIA
TOP
VIEW
FRONT
1.5 (38)
15.0 (380)
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES (MM)
FILE: IN_MTG2.CDR
Figure 1C-6: Holes in base of cabinet for securing the generator
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-11
1C
Preparing for Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
1C.7.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Listed below are the ventilation requirements for the Indico 100 series generator:
•
•
•
•
Unrestricted air flow must be provided at the front and sides of the cabinet, as well as underneath the
unit.
Do not allow storage on top of the cabinet.
Typical heat output of the generator during stand-by is 75 BTU/hr, or 4000 BTU/hr during fluoro
operation.
Control console heat output is negligible (150 BTU/hr).
1C.8.0 CABLES SUPPLIED WITH THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR
Figure 1C-7 shows the cabling supplied with the generator:
•
•
The cable supplied for the console is a 15 conductor cable with a standard length of 50 ft. (15 m).
The cable supplied for the optional remote fluoro control is a 9 conductor cable with a standard length
of 50 ft. (15 m).
Figure 1C-7: Cabling supplied with generator
Page 1C-12
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc.
Preparing for Installation
1C
1C.9.0 PRE-INSTALLATION CHECK LISTS
The following checklists are provided to help the installer during a pre-installation site visit, prior to
installing the generator:
•
•
Site logistics
Installation equipment
1C.9.1 Site Logistics
Before starting the generator installation, review the following checklist for site logistics.
CHECK √
DESCRIPTION
Is there an unloading area to transport the generator from the delivery truck to the inside of
the building?
If the installation is not on the same floor as the delivery entrance, is there an elevator
available?
Are all halls and doorways large enough to allow the generator to pass through?
Is there a transport dolly or similar device to move the Generator? It must have a minimum
rating of 250 lb. (115 Kg.)
Do any regulatory bodies need to be notified prior to installation?
If movers are required, have arrangements for time and equipment been completed?
Are lifting straps or some other suitable device available to lift the generator off the
shipping pallet?
1C.9.2 Installation Equipment
The following is a checklist of recommended tools and test equipment for installation and calibration of
the generator.
NOTE: Please note that GenWare® and a laptop computer are required for programming and calibration
of the touch screen console. Refer to chapter 3C for details.
CHECK √
DESCRIPTION
GenWare® and a laptop computer for setup and calibration if required. This is needed for
programming and calibration of the touch screen console.
General hand tools for installation: Wrenches, nut drivers, assortment of screwdrivers,
pliers, etc.
If the generator is to be anchored to the floor, suitable hardware and drills, drill bits etc
must be available.
A supply of connectors for wiring: lugs, caps, line splices etc.
A calibrated DVM which indicates true RMS voltages.
Dual trace memory oscilloscope with a minimum 20 MHz bandwidth; appropriate leads,
probes, etc.
Device for measuring true kVp and mA (mAs). This may be a Dynalyzer equivalent or a
non-invasive system such as the Keithly TRIAD system.
A calibrated radiation meter with detectors that will allow for R/min and uR type
measurements (or uGy and Gy/min).
A strobe or reed type tachometer to verify that the anode is rotating up to speed.
A sufficient selection of patient absorbers to allow AEC and ABS calibration. A suggested
selection is 3/4 inch Al (quantity 2); 1 mm of Cu (quantity 8), Water in containers of 5.0.
10.0, 15.0 cm thickness.
Test phantoms to verify the imaging system with the generator.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
Rev. N
Page 1C-13
1C
Preparing for Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 1C-14
Rev. N
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-02
CPI Canada Inc
Compatibility Listing
1D
CHAPTER 1
SECTION 1D
COMPATIBILITY LISTING
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS ................................................................................................. 1D-2
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.2 Stators................................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.3 AEC Devices......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups ......................................................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables ............................................................................................................................. 1D-2
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators) ..................................................................................................... 1D-2
1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)..................................................................................................................... 1D-3
1D.2.8 Options.................................................................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA ................................................................................................................................. 1D-3
1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION ................................................................ 1D-4
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-1
1D
Compatibility Listing
CPI Canada Inc
1D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details external equipment that is compatible with your specific generator, and lists options
that are included in that generator.
1D.2.0 COMPATIBLE DEVICES AND OPTIONS
The Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators may be factory or user configured to be compatible with
various external devices. Certain features must be factory configured, others are user configurable.
Please refer to chapter 2 and 3 of this manual and / or consult the factory for further specifics.
1D.2.1 X-Ray Tubes
Various makes and models of inserts and housings are supported.
CAUTION:
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE INSERT IS AS STATED ON THE
COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION.
IF THE HOUSING HAS BEEN RELOADED WITH ANOTHER INSERT TYPE, CALIBRATION
MAY BE SERIOUSLY AFFECTED AND MAY CAUSE TUBE DAMAGE.
1D.2.2 Stators
Various types / impedances of stators are supported.
1D.2.3 AEC Devices
The Millenia / Indico 100 family of X-ray generators may be configured to be compatible with various AEC
devices (ionization, solid state or PMT) via the optional AEC board. Refer to the compatibility statement /
product description at the end of this section for AEC device compatibility of this specific generator.
1D.2.4 ABS Pickups
Various ABS pickups (light diode, composite video, PMT, etc) are supported on R&F generators
depending on configuration. Refer to the compatibility statement / product description at the end of this
section, and chapter 3E.
1D.2.5 Tomographic Tables
Various. Please note that the generator is used as a backup timer ONLY in tomography.
AEC is NOT available for tomography.
1D.2.6 Digital Interfaces (R&F Generators)
The generator may be configured to be compatible with various digital imaging systems. Refer to the
compatibility statement / product description at the end of this section.
Page 1D-2
Rev. C
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-02
CPI Canada Inc
Compatibility Listing
1D
1D.2.7 DAP (Dose Area Product)
A DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter is available as an option on Indico 100 X-ray generators. Refer to
chapter 3F for details.
1D.2.8 Options
Major options include AEC board, DAP (Indico 100 only), remote fluoro control unit, dual speed starter,
line adjusting transformer, and two tube HT transformer.
NOTE:
REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION AT THE END OF THIS SECTION FOR COMPATIBILITY
OF THIS SPECIFIC GENERATOR.
1D.3.0 X-RAY TUBE DATA
PLEASE INSERT THE TUBE RATING CHARTS FOR THE X-RAY TUBES USED WITH THIS
GENERATOR.
TUBE #1
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:
TUBE #2
HOUSING (MAKE / MODEL):
INSERT (MAKE / MODEL):
SERIAL #:
STATOR TYPE:
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-3
1D
Compatibility Listing
CPI Canada Inc
1D.4.0 COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The compatibility statement / product description for this generator follows this page.
Page 1D-4
Rev. C
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-02
CPI Canada Inc
Compatibility Listing
1D
REPLACE (DISCARD) PAGE 5, 6
AND REPLACE WITH
"COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION” FORM
1 PAGE FOR CS FORM
2 PAGES FOR PD FORM
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-02
Rev. C
Page 1D-5
1D
Compatibility Listing
CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 1D-6
Rev. C
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-02
CPI Canada Inc
Generator Layout and Major Components
1E
CHAPTER 1 SECTION 1E
GENERATOR LAYOUT AND
MAJOR COMPONENTS
CONTENTS:
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................1E-1
1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT ..............................................................................................................1E-2
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly.................................................................................................................1E-2
1E.2.2 Console Assembly .................................................................................................................................1E-4
1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control...........................................................................................................................1E-6
1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location.....................................................................................................1E-6
1E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section contains generator layout drawings and figures that identify the major generator components and
circuit board assemblies.
This section also shows the location and correct orientation of the power EPROM (located on the
generator CPU board, the console EPROM (located on the console CPU board), and the dual speed starter
EPROM (located on the dual speed starter board if the dual speed starter option is used). Refer to the applicable
figures to ensure correct EPROM placement and orientation should EPROM replacement be necessary.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-1
1E
Generator Layout and Major Components
CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly
The following major assemblies are located within the generator cabinet:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Auxiliary power supply.
Generator control circuits.
Room interface for the X-ray system.
Low speed starter or optional dual speed starter.
High frequency inverter.
H.T. transformer.
Optional AEC board (automatic exposure control).
Optional DAP interface board.
Figure 1E-1 shows the major components within the front and right side of the generator cabinet. Figure
1E-2 shows the major components accessible from the left side and the rear of the generator cabinet.
Figure 1E-1: Major generator subassemblies & power EPROM location
Page 1E-2
Rev. H
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-03
CPI Canada Inc
Generator Layout and Major Components
1E
1E.2.1 Generator Cabinet Assembly (Cont)
Figure 1E-2: Major generator subassemblies (right side and rear)
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-3
1E
Generator Layout and Major Components
CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.2 Console Assembly
Figure 1E-3 is an overview of the 23 X 56 cm console, the 31 X 42 cm console, the Rad-only console,
and the touch screen console for Indico 100 generators. Figure 1E-4 is an internal view of these console
styles (except touch screen), showing the major components and cabling in the console assembly.
The touch screen console contains no user serviceable parts, and must be returned to the factory for
service.
INDICO 100
23 X 56 cm
Console
31 X 42 cm
Console
Rad only
Console
Touch Screen
Console
FILE: IN_CON1.CDR
Figure 1E-3: Console top / external view
Page 1E-4
Rev. H
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-03
CPI Canada Inc
Generator Layout and Major Components
1E
1E.2.2 Console Assembly (Cont)
Figure 1E-4: Console internal view including EPROM location
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-03
Rev. H
Page 1E-5
1E
Generator Layout and Major Components
CPI Canada Inc
1E.2.3 Remote Fluoro Control
Figure 1E-5 is an overview of the optional remote fluoro control for the Indico 100 generators. This allows
operation of fluoro functions from a location other than the main console.
Figure 1E-5: Remote fluoro control unit overview
1E.2.4 Dual Speed Starter EPROM location
Figure 1E-6: EPROM location inside the dual speed starter
Page 1E-6
Rev. H
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-03
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
CHAPTER 2
INSTALLATION
CONTENTS:
2.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.0 RECEIVING .................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Major Shipping Assemblies ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.0 REMOVAL FROM PACK .............................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.3.1 Lifting The Generator ................................................................................................................................ 2-5
2.4.0 REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.5.0 LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER............................................................................................................ 2-8
2.6.0 MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT.................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.7.0 INSPECTING THE HT TANK ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.0 EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT.......................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.1 Equipment Cabinet .................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.2 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.8.3 Anchoring The Generator To The Floor .................................................................................................... 2-9
2.8.4 Leveling ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.0 WIRING TO THE GENERATOR................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.1 Control Console......................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.9.2 Remote Fluoro Control (Optional) ........................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9.3 Hand Switch Installation .......................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.9.4 X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections ................................................................................ 2-14
2.9.5 Generator Mains Connection .................................................................................................................. 2-15
2.9.6 Room Equipment..................................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.9.7 Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay .................................................................................. 2-16
2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND ......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES......................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER ..................................................................................... 2-18
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table .................................................................................................. 2-18
2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection ......................................................................................... 2-18
2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection............................................................................................ 2-20
2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection ............................................................................................. 2-21
2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER .................................................................................... 2-21
2.13.1 Setting tube type ................................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type ............................................................................................... 2-23
2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table ................................................................................................. 2-25
2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 ....................................................................... 2-25
2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH ......................................................................................................... 2-26
2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS ............................................................................................................................ 2-27
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE .......................................................................... 2-27
2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS.......................................................................................................................... 2-31
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP ....................................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements ................................................................................................................ 2-32
2.18.2 Initial Power Up ..................................................................................................................................... 2-33
2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection..................................................................................................... 2-34
2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection ..................................................................................................... 2-36
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-1
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE.............................................................2-37
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode .......................................................................................2-37
2.19.2 Menu Selections ....................................................................................................................................2-38
2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION ....................................................................................................................2-40
2.21.0 FINAL CHECKS ........................................................................................................................................2-41
Page 2-2
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.1.0
Installation
2
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains instructions for unpacking, positioning, and cabling the Indico 100 series of
generators to allow initial operation and calibration. The instructions in this chapter allows the installation
engineer to:
• Install the generator and control console.
• Install the optional remote fluoro control.
• Connect power.
• Calibrate one or two X-ray tube(s), depending on the generator model, without completing the room
interface connections. This allows for simpler installation and troubleshooting on the generator itself.
2.2.0
RECEIVING
WARNING:
THE INDICO 100 GENERATOR CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING ITEMS: UPPER AND
LOWER CABINETS (FACTORY ASSEMBLED), CONTROL CONSOLE, AND AN OPTIONAL
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL.
THE COMPLETE GENERATOR WEIGHS APPROXIMATELY 250 POUNDS (115 KG) IN ITS
SHIPPING CONTAINER.
THE OPTIONAL LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER IS SUPPLIED IN A SEPARATE
ENCLOSURE, THE WEIGHT OF THAT ASSEMBLY IS APPROXIMATELY 100 POUNDS (45
KG).
THE OIL TANK IS LOCATED IN THE LOWER (POWER SUPPLY) CABINET. ONE PERSON
SHOULD NOT ATTEMPT TO LIFT OR MOVE THE GENERATOR ASSEMBLY OR OPTIONAL
LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER WITHOUT ADEQUATE ASSISTANCE OR PROPER
EQUIPMENT.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-3
2
Installation
2.2.1
CPI Canada Inc.
Major Shipping Assemblies
Refer to figure 1A-2 (chapter 1A). This shows the upper (control cabinet) and lower (power supply)
cabinet fully assembled, along with the control console and optional remote fluoro control unit.
2.3.0
REMOVAL FROM PACK
1.
Inspect the pack for evidence of shipping damage. If there is evidence of shipping damage, note
this in the event that a damage claim is justified.
2.
Locate any documentation attached to the outside of the cardboard sleeve. Be sure to read and
understand this documentation before unpacking the generator. Then set this documentation
aside temporarily until it can be transferred to a storage location close to the generator for future
reference.
3.
Remove the cardboard outer pack(s).
CAUTION:
OPEN THE CARDBOARD PACK(S) CAREFULLY. SHARP TOOLS MAY DAMAGE THE
CONTENTS.
4.
Set aside the cardboard pack(s).
5.
Unscrew the bolts that secure the generator to the shipping pallet. Carefully lift the generator
from the pallet. Refer to 2.3.1 for the procedure for lifting the generator.
6.
Inspect for internal and external shipping damage. Refer to 2.4.0 for instructions for removing the
external covers.
7.
Unscrew the leveling feet at the bottom of the generator by a minimum of 1 ½ in. (35 mm). This
will provide the required air flow underneath the generator cabinet and allow room to make
leveling adjustments when the generator is placed in its final location.
8.
Remove and unpack the control console, the optional line adjusting transformer if used, the
optional remote fluoro control if used, and the optional hand switch kit if included, and check
these items for any damage.
9.
Remove and unpack the manuals and any other paperwork that may be packed with the
generator.
10.
Keep the shipping containers. In case of shipping damage, place the unit(s) back in its shipping
pack and notify the carrier and the customer support group at CPI Canada Inc.
Page 2-4
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.3.1
Installation
2
Lifting The Generator
One of the following methods is recommended for lifting or maneuvering the generator. Since the
generator weighs more that 30 kg (65 lbs), proper lifting equipment should be used or additional help
should be obtained to lift the unit. Refer to figure 1E-1 and figure 2-2 for identification of the panels
referenced below.
•
Lifting straps can be used along with a hoist to raise the generator. The straps should be placed
underneath the generator cabinet and along the four sides to properly support the cabinet as it is
raised.
•
Remove the main access panel and the lower wiring access panel from the generator cabinet (refer
to 2.4.0 - removing the external covers). The metal cross brace found at the front of the cabinet
(below the circuit board mounting panel) may be used, in conjunction with the lip at the upper edge of
the opening for the lower wiring access panel, as lifting points. Two people (one on each side) will be
required to lift or maneuver the generator cabinet.
Figure 2-1: Generator lifting points
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-5
2
Installation
2.4.0
CPI Canada Inc.
REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS
NOTE: A POTENTIAL HAZARD EXISTS TO OPERATORS, SERVICE PERSONNEL, OR TO THE
EQUIPMENT IF THE GENERATOR IS OPERATED WITH ANY OF THE GROUND LEADS TO THE
EXTERNAL COVERS DISCONNECTED OR IMPROPERLY CONNECTED.
BE SURE TO PROPERLY RECONNECT ALL GROUND LEADS AFTER COMPLETING ANY
PROCEDURE THAT REQUIRES THEIR REMOVAL.
REFER TO FIGURE 2-2 FOR IDENTIFICATION OF COVERS / PANELS DESCRIBED IN THIS
SECTION.
Upper Cabinet Hood
Remove the four screws that secure the upper cabinet hood to the generator (two on each side).
Carefully lift the hood off the generator. Temporarily disconnect the ground lead connecting the upper
cabinet hood to the generator, if necessary.
Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the upper cabinet hood.
Main Access Panel
Remove the upper cabinet hood as described above (this must be done before the main access panel
can be removed). Then remove the screws that secure the main access panel to the generator cabinet
(these screws are located on both sides of the main access panel). The panel may then be pulled away
from the frame. Temporarily disconnect the ground lead connecting the panel to the cabinet, if necessary.
Reverse the above steps to reconnect the ground wire(s), and to reinstall the access panel.
Lower Wiring Access Panel
THIS PANEL IS NOT FITTED IF THE OPTIONAL WIRING CHANNELS ARE USED.
Remove the screw from the upper right hand corner of the panel. Pull out the snaps on the three nylon
fasteners such as to release the panel. Remove the panel from the generator.
Upper & Lower Wiring Channels
The wiring channels are optional. If the wiring channels are fitted, the cable access covers in the upper
part of the cabinet and the lower wiring access panel will not be used.
To remove these panels, remove the screws from the upper left hand and upper right hand corner of the
panel to be removed. Then slide the wiring channel up such that the shoulder rivets clear the keyhole slot
at the bottom of the channel. The wiring channel may then be removed from the generator.
Page 2-6
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.4.0
Installation
2
REMOVING THE EXTERNAL COVERS (Cont)
Figure 2-2: Removable external covers on generator cabinet
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-7
2
Installation
2.5.0
CPI Canada Inc.
LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER
An optional line-adjusting transformer is available if required to allow 480 VAC generators to operate from
400 VAC mains, or to allow 400 VAC generators to be operated from 480 VAC mains. The line adjusting
transformer is supplied in a separate enclosure. Please consult the factory for further details regarding
this option.
2.6.0
MAJOR COMPONENT LAYOUT
Refer to chapter 1E for major component identification and layout.
2.7.0
INSPECTING THE HT TANK
Before continuing with the installation of the generator, the HT oil tank should be inspected as per the
following steps:
•
Verify that there is no obvious shipping damage to the tank (i.e. dents to the tank surface).
•
Carefully check the inside of the generator cabinet and the HT tank for evidence of any oil loss. Refer
to chapter 6 if it is suspected that there has been some loss of oil.
•
Verify that the clamps supporting the HT oil tank are tight.
•
Verify that all the connections to the tank lid are secure.
•
Verify that the rubber vent plug on the top of the tank is snug.
2.8.0
EQUIPMENT PLACEMENT
2.8.1
Equipment Cabinet
Place the equipment cabinet in a location that will allow the following:
•
•
•
•
2.8.2
Easy front and side access for service and sufficient clearance at the rear for room interface cables.
Refer to chapter 1C.
Air circulation - a minimum height of 1 ½ in. (35 mm) is recommended to allow airflow underneath the
generator. Do not cover or block the cooling slots on the cabinet.
Stable footing - the leveling feet at the bottom of the cabinet will be used to prevent movement during
normal operation.
Close proximity to service disconnect boxes - cables should not be on the floor where they could be
stepped on.
Control Console
Locate the control console in its intended position and ensure that it is stable. Refer to chapter 1C:
•
•
•
•
Page 2-8
If the console is located on a shelf, supply index pins or equivalent hardware to the base of the
console to prevent slipping.
Ensure that the console is mounted at a height and angle to allow easy viewing of the displays.
If the optional CPI pedestal stand is to be used for the console mounting, follow the mounting
instructions supplied with the stand.
Leave sufficient slack in the cabling to the console to allow for future service and maintenance.
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.8.2
Installation
2
Control Console (Cont)
NOTE: DO NOT LOCATE THE CONTROL CONSOLE WHERE X-RADIATION MAY BE PRESENT DURING
INSTALLATION OR OPERATION.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE CONSOLE CABLE NOT BE DISASSEMBLED FOR SYSTEM
INSTALLATION. HOWEVER, IF THIS IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO ROUTE THE CABLE,
PLEASE ENSURE CAREFUL AND CORRECT REASSEMBLY OF THE CONNECTOR SHELL TO
AVOID ANY POSSIBILITY OF PINCHING OF THE INTERNAL WIRES BY THE SHELL.
YOU MAY CHOOSE TO TEMPORARILY LOCATE THE CONSOLE NEAR TO THE GENERATOR FOR
INITIAL PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION. IF THIS IS SO, PLEASE COMPLETE THE FINAL
CONSOLE INSTALLATION PER THIS SECTION WHEN THE GENERATOR INSTALLATION IS
COMPLETED.
2.8.3
Anchoring The Generator To The Floor
If it is desired to anchor the generator to the floor, refer to chapter 1C. This should not be done until all
cable hookups are completed that require rear access to the generator.
2.8.4
Leveling
Adjust the leveling feet such that the generator is level and stable. This adjustment must be made for
both anchored and freestanding generator installations. As noted in 2.3.0, the leveling feet must be
unscrewed by a minimum of 1 ½ in. (35 mm) to allow for proper airflow underneath the generator.
2.9.0
WIRING TO THE GENERATOR
2.9.1
Control Console
1.
Route the generator end of the console cable into the generator cabinet via the access cover in
the upper part of the cabinet nearest to J4 on the generator interface board.
2.
Connect the console cable to J4 on the generator interface board. For the Rad-only console,
connect the console cable to J16 on the generator interface board.
3.
Connect the free end of the console cable as follows:
For the 23 X 56 (cm) console and the 31 X 42 (cm) console, connect the free end of the console
cable to J5 at the rear of the console.
For the Rad-only console, connect the free end of the console cable to the J8 at the rear of the
console.
For the touch screen console, connect the free end of the console cable to J2 on the touch
screen interface board at the rear of the console.
Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to secure the connectors.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-9
2
Installation
2.9.1
CPI Canada Inc.
Control Console (Cont)
4.
FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE ONLY:
a) Connect one end of the supplied ground wire to the touch screen console ground screw,
shown in figure 2-3. Connect the other end of the ground wire to one of the ground studs on
the generator chassis, under the room interface board.
b) Connect the supplied line cord from the rear of the touch screen to the generator as follows:
• Green (ground) to one of the ground studs on the generator chassis, under the room
interface board.
• White (neutral) to any terminal on TB7 on the room interface board.
• Black (line) to any terminal on TB9 on the room interface board.
c) JW1 on the generator interface board should be set such that the 110 / 220 VAC supply on
the room interface board is on at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched on.
The procedure for setting this jumper is described in chapter 3B.
THE POWER CABLE FOR THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE MUST BE CONNECTED TO
THE GENERATOR AS DESCRIBED ABOVE, AND NOT CONNECTED TO AN
INDEPENDENT SOURCE OF AC. THE CONSOLE REQUIRES THE LINE ISOLATION
PROVIDED BY THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER IN THE GENERATOR IN
ORDER TO MEET IEC REGULATIONS.
5.
Figure 2-3 shows the designations and functions of the connectors on the rear panel of the
control console.
DO NOT CONNECT UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT TO THE REAR OF THE CONSOLE.
For the 23 X 56 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J4 is not used, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J1 is for
connection of an optional printer.
For the 31 X 42 (cm) console, J5 is used for the interconnect cable to the generator main
cabinet, J2 is a serial port for use by an external computer, and J13 is for connection of an
external hand switch and / or foot switch.
For the Rad-only console, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J4 is a serial port
for use by an external computer, and J8 is for the interconnect cable to the main cabinet.
For the touch screen console, J2 on the touch screen interface board is for the interconnect
cable to the generator main cabinet, J3 is for connection of an external hand switch, J5
connects to the membrane switch assembly with the on / off and prep / expose switches, and
J4 is a serial port for use by an external computer.
INCORRECT CONNECTIONS OR USE OF UNAPPROVED EQUIPMENT MAY RESULT IN
INJURY OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE.
Page 2-10
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.1
Installation
2
Control Console (Cont)
Figure 2-3: Rear of control console
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-11
2
Installation
2.9.2
CPI Canada Inc.
Remote Fluoro Control (Optional)
1.
Connect the free end of the 9 conductor remote fluoro cable (from the optional remote fluoro
control box) to J11 of the generator CPU board. Ensure that the screw locks are fully tightened to
secure the connector. Refer to figure 2-4 for the location of J11 on the generator CPU board. The
cable should be routed into the generator via the access cover in the upper part of the cabinet
closest to J11 on the generator CPU board.
Figure 2-4: Remote fluoro connector on generator CPU board
2.9.3
Hand Switch Installation
FOR 23 X 56 (CM) CONSOLES:
The optional hand switch is supplied as a kit that must be user installed. If this option is used, refer to
separate installation instructions packaged along with the hand switch.
For reference, a drawing is supplied in this section showing the hand switch connections to the
console CPU board. See figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5: Hand switch connections on console CPU board
Page 2-12
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.3
Installation
2
Hand Switch Installation (Cont)
FOR 31 X 42 (CM) CONSOLES, RAD-ONLY CONSOLES, AND TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLES:
The optional hand switch, if ordered from CPI Canada Inc, is supplied pre-wired to a male 9 pin
subminiature ‘D’ connector. This connects to J13 on the rear of the 31 X 42 cm console, to J3 on the rear
of the Rad-only console, or to J3 on the touch screen interface board on the rear of the touch screen
console.
Fluoro foot switch connections may also be made to this connector (31 X 42 cm console with fluoro
option only). For the touch screen console, the fluoro foot switch connections must be made to the room
interface board as per chapter 3B.
The table below shows the pin designations for the hand switch connector on the console. A male 9 pin
subminiature ‘D’ connector will need to be provided by the installer if the CPI supplied hand switch is not
used.
PIN
NUMBER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
J13 PIN CONNECTIONS
31 X 42 CM CONSOLE
Hand Switch: X-Ray
No Connection
Hand Switch: Prep
No Connection
Hand Switch: Common (ground)
No Connection
Foot Switch: ‘live’ terminal
No Connection
Foot Switch: ‘ground’ terminal
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
J3 PIN CONNECTIONS
RAD-ONLY CONSOLE
AND TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
Hand Switch: X-Ray
No Connection
Hand Switch: Prep
No Connection
Hand Switch: Common (ground)
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
NOT USED
Rev. AM
Page 2-13
2
Installation
2.9.4
CPI Canada Inc.
X-Ray Tube Stator & Thermal Switch Connections
Refer to figure 2-6 for the X-ray tube stator and thermal switch connections.
1.
Route the X-ray tube stator cable(s) through the lower wiring access panel panel on the rear of
the generator cabinet, then route the cables towards the stator terminal blocks as shown in the
figure below.
FOR UNITS WITH A LOW SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR CABLES ARE
RECOMMENDED. FOR UNITS WITH A DUAL SPEED STARTER, SHIELDED STATOR
CABLES MUST BE USED.
THE SHIELD FOR THE STATOR CABLE(S) MUST BE PROPERLY GROUNDED AT
THE CHASSIS GROUND STUD(S) SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-6.
2.
Connect the wires to the appropriate terminal as shown. The tube thermal switch will normally be
connected to the THERMAL SWITCH connections on the stator terminal block, but may
optionally be connected to the room interface board (refer to chapter 3B).
3.
Ensure that all terminal connections are tight, then dress and secure the cables.
NOTE:
ONE TUBE ONLY GENERATORS WILL HAVE 1 STATOR TERMINAL BLOCK FITTED. THE
LOWER TERMINAL BLOCK IN FIGURE 2-6 IS ONLY FITTED ON TWO TUBE GENERATORS.
Figure 2-6: Stator connections to generator
Page 2-14
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
2.9.5
Installation
2
Generator Mains Connection
WARNING:
TO AVOID ELECTRICAL SHOCK, ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS DISCONNECT IS LOCKED
IN THE OFF POSITION, AND THAT ALL MAINS CABLES ARE DE-ENERGIZED BEFORE
CONNECTING TO THE GENERATOR.
Refer to chapter 1C for generator power and generator power line requirements.
1.
Pass the AC mains cable through the access hole located at the lower rear of the generator.
2.
Use an appropriate cable clamp to secure the mains cable at the cabinet entrance.
3.
Temporarily remove the safety cover from the main fuses. Strip sufficient cable jacket to allow the
ground wire to reach the main ground connector located at the left side of the main fuse block.
Refer to figure 2-7.
4.
Connect the ground wire to the chassis ground connector, and connect the mains wires to the
terminals on the bottom of the main fuse holder (3 wires for 3 phase systems, 2 wires for single
phase systems). Be sure to replace the main fuse safety cover after all connections are made
and properly tightened.
5.
DO NOT SWITCH ON MAINS POWER AT THIS TIME.
Figure 2-7: Generator mains connections
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-15
2
Installation
2.9.6
CPI Canada Inc.
Room Equipment
Refer to chapter 3B, 3D, 3E, and 3F for connection of the room equipment (Buckys, miscellaneous inputs
and outputs, AEC, ABS, DAP, etc.). It is suggested that these items not be connected until after the initial
run-up of the generator is complete, and the tube auto calibration has been performed as described near
the end of this chapter.
2.9.7
Emergency Power Off / Power Distribution Relay
To connect an external emergency power-off switch, disconnect the jumper from J17-1 to J17-2 on the
generator interface board. Then connect the emergency-off switch to J17-1 and J17-2. Refer to MD-0762
in chapter 9.
For installations where installer-supplied auxiliary power distribution circuits are added to the
generator, 24 VDC is available on the generator interface board to drive the coil of the power distribution
relay. Connect the coil to J17-3 (+) and J17-4 (ground). Refer to MD-0788 in chapter 9. The maximum
current available from this source is 100 mA.
2.10.0 X-RAY TUBE HOUSING GROUND
A separate ground wire (10 AWG, 6mm2) must be connected from each X-ray tube housing to one of the
ground studs on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 or 2-9. These ground locations may have other ground
wires already connected, ensure that these existing ground wires are not disconnected when making the
X-ray tube ground connection.
Failure to make this ground connection may result in intermittent operation and/or exposure errors.
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES
The X-ray tube(s) should be mounted on their normal fixtures i.e. tube stand, G.I. table or other devices.
1.
Verify that the HT cable terminations are clean, in good condition i.e. no cracks, and coated with
vapor proof compound.
2.
Remove the plastic caps that cover the high voltage terminals on the HT tank. These should be
saved in case of a future requirement to transport the generator or HT tank.
3.
Connect the high tension cables as per the installation requirements. Use the right angle
connectors for the HT transformer end. Ensure that the cables for tube 1 (and tube 2 if used) are
plugged into the proper connectors on the HT tank. Refer to figure 2-8 and 2-9.
On two tube R&F generators, the fan may need to be removed in order to install
the tube 2 HT connectors. To do this, disconnect the AC power leads from the fan. Next,
remove and temporarily set aside the two socket - head screws and washers from the fan
mounting bracket. Slide the fan assembly forward, and then remove the fan assembly to
connect the HT cables.
To re-install the fan assembly, slide the fan assembly into position under the
inverter assembly, using the tabs on the mounting bracket to support the inside end of the
bracket. Replace the screws and washers to secure the fan assembly. Lastly, reconnect
the AC power leads to the fan.
4.
Be sure that the HT cable connectors are tight and there is no play between the connector
insulator and the screw down ring.
Page 2-16
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.11.0 HIGH TENSION CABLES (cont)
Figure 2-8: HV connectors (1 tube tanks)
Figure 2-9: HV connectors (2 tube tanks)
NOTE: PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF USING METAL CENTER SECTION X-RAY TUBES
The mA feedback signals, as measured at the mA test points on the control board, represent anode mA.
X-ray emission in the tube is a result of the anode current.
The mA measured at terminals E17 - E18 of the HT tank is cathode current. In a metal center section
tube, the anode current will be less than the cathode current, the difference being body current. In a metal
center section tube, the cathode current may exceed the anode current by up to 15%. Although the
anode and cathode currents may be unequal, the anode to cathode kV regulation is not affected.
Due to the presence of body current, filament drive and emission may need to be greater than expected
for a given mA station. The power “lost” to body current may need to be considered relative to the
maximum generator output.
When installing a metal center section tube, it is essential that the center section of the X-ray tube be
securely grounded; otherwise premature tube failure may result.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-17
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.12.0 PROGRAMMING THE LOW SPEED STARTER
This section applies only to units fitted with the low speed starter.
PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING.
Before continuing, note the part number of the low speed starter in the generator. Part number 732752-00
has a 33 µF phase-shift capacitor; part number 732752-01 has a 12.5 µF capacitor, and part number
732752-02 has a 45 µF capacitor. Confirm that the phase shift capacitor is compatible with the desired
tube(s) as listed in table 1 in Supplement 746026, which follows chapter 2.
The starter boost voltage is set to approximately 240 VAC, (except where specifically noted in table 1),
and the starter run voltage is selectable to be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Boost times are selectable to be either
1.5 seconds, or 2.5 seconds. Therefore, the generator may be configured to be compatible with stator
types as per table 1 only.
If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.
WARNING:
240 VAC IS PRESENT ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE
GENERATOR IS SWITCHED ON. TAKE APPROPRIATE PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING
THIS BOARD
2.12.1 Low Speed Starter Tube Select Table
See Supplement 746026, which immediately follows this chapter.
2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection
THIS APPLIES TO ONE-TUBE GENERATORS ONLY.
Follow the steps below to verify and configure the correct low speed starter boost voltage.
1.
Page 2-18
Confirm the required BOOST VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in supplement
746026, which follows chapter 2. The requirement for the vast majority of tubes in table 1 is 240
V. For tubes that require 120 V boost, this is noted along with the run voltage, boost time, etc for
that tube.
• Refer to figure 2-10 (power supply auxiliary transformer). Locate this transformer under the
power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details.
• If there is only one connection on the 120V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer, the
boost voltage is set to 240 VAC.
• If there are two connections on the 120V tap, the boost voltage is set to 120 VAC.
• Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
• Go to 2.12.3 if the boost voltage is properly set for the selected tube type and therefore does
NOT need to be changed.
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.12.2 Low Speed Starter Boost Voltage Selection (Cont)
THIS APPLIES TO ONE-TUBE GENERATORS ONLY.
2.
If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from
240V to 120V, proceed as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the 240V tap and for the 120V tap.
• Move the boost voltage lead from the 240V tap to the 120V tap. The boost voltage lead is the
lead that connects directly to J1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other
leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps.
• Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer
terminal block.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.
• Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
3.
If the boost voltage tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed from
120V to 240V, proceed as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the 120V tap and for the 240V tap.
• Move the boost voltage lead from the 120V tap to the 240V tap. The boost voltage lead is the
lead that connects directly to J1 on the low speed starter board. Do not disturb the other
leads on the 120V and / or 240V taps
• Ensure that the wires are positioned between the two metal clamps on the transformer
terminal block.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.
• Confirm the correct boost voltage at F1 on the low speed starter board if a suitable voltmeter
is available.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-19
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.12.3 Low Speed Starter Run Voltage Selection
Follow the steps below to verify and configure the correct low speed starter run-voltage.
1.
Note the required RUN VOLTAGE for the selected tube type per table 1 in Supplement 746026
which follows chapter 2. Then confirm the low speed starter run-voltage in the generator. This is
determined by the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer. Refer to figure
2-10.
• Locate this transformer under the power input board; refer to chapter 1E for details.
• Locate the run-voltage output on the transformer. This will be set to the 52V, 73V, or 94V tap,
and must match the required run-voltage for the selected tube in table 1.
• Go to 2.12.4 if the run-voltage setting is correct for the selected tube type, and therefore does
NOT need to be changed.
2.
If the run-voltage setting on the power supply auxiliary transformer needs to be changed, proceed
as follows:
• Loosen the clamping screws for the current run-voltage tap, and for the required run-voltage
tap.
• Move the run-voltage output lead from the current tap position to the required tap position
(52V, 73V, or 94V). Ensure that the wire is positioned between the two metal clamps on the
transformer terminal block.
• Retighten both of the clamping screws.
Figure 2-10: Low speed run-voltage tap selection
Page 2-20
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.12.4 Low Speed Starter Boost Time Selection
Follow the steps below to verify and configure the low speed starter boost time.
1.
Confirm the current low speed starter boost time selection:
• Locate jumper JW1 on the auxiliary board. Refer to chapter 1E for the board location.
• Confirm that the current boost time setting matches the tube in use: Jumper position “1.5S” =
1.5 second boost, no jumper at JW1 = 2.5 second boost. Do not use the “.15S” position.
2.
If required, adjust the boost time by changing the JW1 jumper position as described above.
NOTE: CONFIRM PROPER LOW SPEED STARTER CONFIGURATION USING A SUITABLE TACHOMETER
BEFORE MAKING ANY EXPOSURES.
2.13.0 PROGRAMMING THE DUAL SPEED STARTER
This section applies only to units fitted with the dual speed starter option.
The dual speed starter must be programmed for the X-ray tube type(s) used at this site. This is done via
DIP switches SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter.
The following tube functions are set with these switches:
• High speed start and run voltages
• Low speed start and run voltages
• Brake time and brake voltage (high speed)
• Boost times
• Boost time increments. Boost time may be increased in 100 ms steps in the range of 100 to 700 ms
SW1 and SW2 on the dual speed starter must be set correctly to match the X-ray tube(s) in
use. Failure to set these correctly may result in improper anode RPM and therefore may
damage the X-ray tube.
PLEASE BE SURE TO READ AND UNDERSTAND THIS SECTION FULLY BEFORE
PROCEEDING.
2.13.1 Setting tube type
1.
Select the desired tube type from table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2.
Record the tube type number (housing and insert) and the binary code as per the third column in
the table. Please note that the tube compatibility applies only to the housing and inserts listed, i.e.
for the specific manufacturer(s) shown.
2.
If the desired tube type is not listed, please contact CPI product support for assistance.
3.
The generator is factory configured to support one type of stator only (for example “R” type
stator), therefore only stators of that type may be used with this generator. Refer to the customer
product description form in chapter 1D of this manual for compatible X-ray tubes.
REFER TO SECTION 2.13.2 IF IT IS DESIRED TO USE TUBES WITH STATOR TYPES
NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS GENERATOR, OR IF YOU ARE NOT CERTAIN THAT THIS
GENERATOR IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE STATOR IN YOUR TUBE.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-21
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)
4.
Refer to figure 2-11. Set the DIP switch SW1 (for tube 1) with the binary code for the selected
tube. The binary code shown in the table programs the tube type (housing and insert), for
example housing type Varian Diamond with standard “R” stator and inserts per table 2 in
Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, requires SW1-1 to be set OFF, SW1-2 OFF, SW13 ON, SW1-4 OFF and SW1-5 OFF. This programs the voltages, brake times, and boost times in
table 2.
Additionally, SW1-6 to SW1-8 may be set to give incremental increases in boost time
over the preselected values (for example to run an older tube with worn bearings). For example,
binary 000 gives zero increase, binary 001 gives 100 ms increase, binary 100 gives 400 ms
increase, and binary 111 gives a 700 ms increase in boost time. SW1-6 represents bit 1, SW1-7
bit 2, and SW1-8 represents bit 3.
EXAMPLE:
Binary 100 = decimal 4 = 400 ms incremental boost time increase:
1
Bit 3
SW1-8
0
Bit 2
SW1-7
0
Bit 1
SW1-6
5.
The example DIP switch setting shown in figure 2-11 is for the example in step 4 with an
incremental increase in boost time of 200 ms.
6.
If this is a two-tube installation, repeat steps 1 to 4 using DIP switch SW2 for the second tube.
7.
Please confirm all settings using a suitable tachometer to ensure proper anode RPM
before making any exposures.
NOTE:
FOR TUBES WHERE “LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY” IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR LOW SPEED ONLY, AND WHERE “HIGH SPEED
OPERATION ONLY” IS INDICATED, THE DUAL SPEED STARTER MUST BE
PROGRAMMED FOR HIGH SPEED OPERATION ONLY. REFER TO THE TUBE SELECTION
SECTION IN CHAPTER 3C FOR THE PROCEDURE TO DO THIS.
NOTE THAT THE EXAMPLE DIP SWITCH SHOWN IN FIGURE 2-11 IS REPRESENTATIVE
OF ONE STYLE OF SWITCH ONLY. DEPENDING ON MANUFACTURER, YOUR DIP SWITCH
STYLE MAY VARY. PLEASE NOTE THE ON/OFF POSITIONS CAREFULLY FOR YOUR
UNIT.
Page 2-22
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.13.1 Setting tube type (cont)
Figure 2-11: DIP switches on dual speed starter.
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type
The low speed and high speed phase shift capacitors for the stator start winding must be matched to the
desired stator type, for example the required high speed phase shift capacitor is 6 uF for “R” type stators
and 7.5 uF for GE Maxiray type stators. Therefore, for example, a dual speed starter configured for an “R”
type stator CANNOT drive a GE Maxiray type stator.
Use the steps in this section to verify that the dual speed starter is compatible with the stator in
the desired tube.
1.
Record the part number of the dual speed starter assembly in the subject generator. This is
printed on a label near the top of the dual speed starter chassis.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-23
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.13.2 Confirming/Changing DSS Starter Type (Cont)
2.
Locate that part number in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2, then note the
value of the H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and the L.S. SHIFT CAPAC per the table. Those are the values
of the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter. Only tubes requiring those capacitor
values may be connected to the dual speed starter.
3.
If it is desired to use a different tube from that shown in the compatible X-ray tubes section of the
customer product description form, confirm that the desired tube (housing and insert) is listed in
table 2 AND that the required dual speed starter part number for that tube per table 2 is the same
as is fitted in your generator.
4.
If the preceding steps confirm that the desired tube is fully compatible with the generator, you
may proceed with setting the tube type as per section 2.13.1.
5.
If in the preceding steps it is determined that the desired stator IS NOT compatible with the
generator, the phase shift capacitors in the dual speed starter will need to be changed to match
the requirements of the desired tube. Replacement capacitor kits are available to do this as noted
in the next step.
6.
Note the required H.S. SHIFT CAPAC and L.S. SHIFT CAPAC values, and the corresponding
dual speed starter part number for the desired tube per table 2. Using those capacitor values,
refer to table 2-1. From this table select the required conversion kit to convert to capacitors as
required for the selected tube. The conversion kits are available through the factory/customer
support.
IF MAKING THE ABOVE CONVERSION, PLEASE BE SURE TO CHANGE THE PART
NUMBER IDENTIFIED IN STEP 1 TO THE NEW CONFIGURATION USING AN INDELIBLE
MARKER. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT CONFIGURATION CONTROL OF THE PRODUCT IS
MAINTAINED
HIGH SPD SHIFT CAPAC
6 uF
7.5 uF
20 uF
5 uF
5 uF
3.4 uF
6 uF
5 uF / 6 uF
12.5 uF
NOTE:
Page 2-24
TABLE 2-1
LOW SPD SHIFT CAPAC
31uF
47 uF
60 uF
30 uF
45 uF
N/A
46 uF
30 / 31 uF
37.5 uF
CONVERSION KIT P/N
734424-00
734424-01
734424-02
734424-03
734424-04
734424-05
734424-07
734424-08
734424-09
CAPACITOR VALUES SHOWN IN TABLES 1 AND 2 (IN SUPPLEMENT 746026) ARE
EQUIVALENT VALUES OF THE PHASE SHIFT CAPACITORS IN THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER. FOR EXAMPLE, THE STANDARD “R” VERSION OF THE DUAL SPEED
STARTER USES TWO 12.5 uF CAPACITORS CONNECTED IN SERIES TO GIVE NOMINAL 6
uF FOR HIGH SPEED USE. THIS 6 uF CAPACITANCE IS CONNECTED IN PARALLEL WITH
A 25 uF CAPACITOR TO GIVE 31 uF FOR LOW SPEED USE AS SHOWN IN THE TABLES.
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.13.3 Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table
See Supplement 746026, which immediately follows this chapter.
2.13.4 Configuring dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08
Dual speed starter part number 733317-08 / 735925-08 is a special configuration in which the phase shift
capacitors may be set to 5 and 30 uF, or to 6 and 31 uF. This is intended for use in installations where it
may be necessary to interface to either IAE tubes, or to “R” stator tubes.
Refer to figure 2-12. In configuration “A”, (5 / 30 uF) each of the leads on the upper left capacitor
is connected to one side of the capacitor. Thus the capacitor is in-circuit in this configuration.
Configuration “B” (6 / 31 uF) has both leads connected to terminals on the same side of the capacitor,
thus the capacitor is out of the circuit.
• To change from configuration “A” to “B”, disconnect the right hand lead from the upper left capacitor
in figure 2-12, and connect it to one of the spare terminals on the terminal cluster that has the other
capacitor lead connected to it. This removes that capacitor from the circuit.
• To change from configuration “B” to “A” in figure 2-12, disconnect one of the leads from the terminal
cluster on the left side of the capacitor shown in the figure, and connect it to one of the terminals on
the other side of the capacitor. This connects the capacitor into the circuit.
After the phase shift capacitors are correctly configured, set the DIP switches as follows:
• Locate the desired IAE or “R” type tube in table 2 in Supplement 746026 which follows Chapter 2.
With dual speed starter 733317-08 / 735925-08 set to configuration “B”, it is only compatible with “R”
stator tubes using dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01. When set to configuration “A”, it is only
compatible with IAE tubes using dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05.
• Note the DIP switch setting for the desired tube as per table 2.
• Set the DIP switches as per 2.13.1.
Figure 2-12: Selection of phase shift capacitance
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-25
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.14.0 GENERATOR LOCKOUT SWITCH
A safety lockout switch (S3) is provided on the generator interface board. When this switch is in the
LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be switched on either from the console or from the adjacent
service switch S2 on the generator interface board. This prevents inadvertent switching on of the
generator while it is being serviced.
S3, the generator lockout switch, must be in the NORMAL position to enable switching the
generator on. Refer to figure 2-13 for these switch locations.
Figure 2-13: Location of lockout switch and local ON/OFF switches
Page 2-26
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.15.0 SAFETY INTERLOCKS
It is strongly recommended that the following two interlocks be wired to the generator before preparing to
make any exposures:
DOOR INTERLOCK
The room door interlock switch must be wired to TB4-4 and TB4-5 on the room Interface board. This
switch will provide a closed contact when the door is closed.
X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH
The X-ray tube(s) thermal switch(s) should be connected to the generator for tube thermal protection.
These may be connected either at the stator terminal blocks (section 2.9.4), or at the room interface
board. The connections on the room interface board are TB4-8 and TB4-9 for tube 1, and TB4-6 and
TB4-7 for tube 2.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE
It is recommended that the backup battery voltage be checked before continuing. The normal life
expectancy of these batteries is estimated at 5 years.
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm consoles):
1.
Turn the operator console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove the 6 screws
securing the base to the molded case.
2.
Open the Console carefully such that the interconnecting cables are not strained.
3.
Locate the battery on the console CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side; ground (TP2 on the board) is the negative
side.
4.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
5.
Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
6.
Re-assemble the console. DO NOT OVER TIGHTEN THE SCREWS SECURING THE BASE TO
THE MOLDED CONSOLE TOP.
CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm consoles):
The RAM backup battery and EPROM are accessible by removing an access cover on the bottom of the
console. To remove the access cover, remove the screw holding the cover, and then remove the access
cover. This cover is reinstalled by sliding the end opposite the screw hole into the slot formed in the
console bottom, then by replacing and tightening the fastening screw. Refer to figure 2-14.
1.
Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C23, the capacitor directly below
the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery.
2.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
3.
Before closing the console, refer to section 2.17.0, console CPU board DIP switch settings.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-27
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont)
Figure 2-14: Access panel on bottom of console
Follow the procedure below if you need to open the entire console. This allows access to components or
assemblies not accessible by removing the battery and EPROM access cover. The console bottom
normally needs to be removed to replace major assemblies only, i.e. the console board or display
assembly.
1.
Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the
operator console.
2.
Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the ‘D’ connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.
3.
Remove the 8 screws securing the base to the molded case.
4.
Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
5.
Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
Page 2-28
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (Cont)
CONSOLE BOARD (Rad-only consoles):
1.
Disconnect all connections, including the console ground connection, from the rear of the
operator console.
2.
Turn the console upside down carefully to protect the front panel. Remove and temporarily set
aside the jackscrews from the ‘D’ connectors on the rear of the console. Remove and temporarily
set aside the hardware from the console ground stud.
3.
Remove the 6 screws securing the base to the molded case.
4.
Gently remove the console bottom (the metal bottom panel with the feet attached).
5.
Locate the battery on the console board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage with a
DVM. The easiest way to do is to measure the voltage across C7, the capacitor directly to the left
of the battery. This capacitor is in parallel with the battery.
6.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
7.
Re-assemble the console in the reverse order of the above. Use of a removable thread locker
(loctite or equivalent) is recommended when reinstalling the jackscrews to prevent them from
loosening if the mating connectors are removed.
Reconnect the console ground and all cables removed in step 1.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD:
1.
Locate the battery on the generator CPU board, refer to figure 2-15. Measure the battery voltage
with a DVM. The top of the battery is the positive side, ground (TP21 on the board) is the
negative side.
2.
The nominal battery voltage should be approximately 3.0V, replace the battery if it is under
2.80V.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-29
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.16.0 CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE (cont)
Figure 2-15: Location of batteries on generator and console CPU boards
Page 2-30
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.17.0 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS
Before continuing, verify the DIP switch settings on the console CPU board and generator CPU board.
These switches have been factory set but may have been readjusted, particularly if this generator is a reinstall.
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 X 56 cm console) AND CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 cm console):
For the 31 X 42 cm console, DIP switch SW1 is only active if running the console software from EPROM.
Refer to the section Console software / EPROM in chapter 6 for details. If the console software is
running from flash memory, SW1 is inactive and the selections described below are accessed in console
utilities screen 2 as described in chapter 3C.
The selections described below are accessed in console utilities screen 2 on all versions of the Rad-only
console.
•
Verify the settings on SW1 (If applicable, as described above). Refer to console utilities screen 2 in
chapter 3C for a description of these functions.
LANGUAGE
English
German
French
Italian
Swedish
Spanish
SW1-5
SW1-6
SW1-7
SW1-8
SW1 -4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW1-3
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
SW1-2
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SW1-1
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
NOT USED
NOT USED
OFF > LOGO NOT DISPLAYED
ON > LOGO DISPLAYED
OFF > CONSOLE DEFAULTS OFF *
ON > LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS *
GENERATOR CPU BOARD:
•
Verify the settings on SW1. Refer to the table below for the proper settings for this switch.
GENERATOR POWER
32 kW
40 kW
50 kW
65 kW
80 kW
100 kW
SW1-4
SW1-5
SW1-6
SW1-7
SW1-8
MAXIMUM mA
400 mA
500 mA
630 mA
800 mA
1000 mA
1000 mA
SW1 -3
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
SW1-2
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
SW1-1
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF > 2 FILAMENT BOARDS
OFF > 150 kV MAXIMUM
OFF > DUAL SPEED STARTER
OFF > 2 TUBE GENERATOR
ON > I FILAMENT BOARD
ON > 125 kV MAXIMUM
ON > LOW SPEED STARTER
ON > 1 TUBE GENERATOR
OFF > SET FACTORY DEFAULTS *
ON > DEFAULTS DISABLED *
* Refer to Resetting Factory Defaults in chapter 6 for details regarding this function.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-31
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.18.0 INITIAL RUN-UP
This section describes the procedure for initial power-on of the generator after it has first been installed.
PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS REGARDING THE MAIN DISTRIBUTION
TRANSFORMER:
•
IF USING A DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER WITH AN ISOLATED SECONDARY, THE
SECONDARY WINDING MUST BE A WYE (STAR) CONFIGURATION WITH THE CENTER
POINT GROUND REFERENCED. DO NOT USE A DELTA CONFIGURED SECONDARY AS
THERE IS NO GROUND REFERENCE IN THIS CONFIGURATION.
•
IF USING AN AUTOTRANSFORMER TYPE DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER, THE A.C.
INPUT TO THE TRANSFORMER MUST BE GROUND REFERENCED.
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements
1.
Verify that the mains voltage and current capacity is correct for the generator installation. Refer to
the product ID label on the generator cabinet and chapter 1C of this manual.
2.
Temporarily remove the safety cover over the main input fuses in the generator.
3.
If the mains supply is compatible with the generator, switch on the main breaker and/or
disconnect switch and check for the following voltages:
NOTE: DO NOT SWITCH ON THE GENERATOR AT THIS TIME (ONLY THE AC MAINS TO THE
GENERATOR IS TO BE SWITCHED ON AT THIS TIME).
WARNING:
1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING THESE VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT
WITH MAINS VOLTAGES MAY CAUSE SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH.
2. MAINS VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET, EVEN WITH
THE CONSOLE SWITCHED OFF.
3. THE BUS CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD OR ON THE BUS
CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY (SINGLE PHASE UNITS ONLY), PRESENT A SAFETY HAZARD
FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER HAS BEEN REMOVED FROM THE
UNIT. CHECK THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE TOUCHING ANY
PARTS.
PLEASE NOTE THAT THE VOLTAGE MEASURED IN STEP 4 WILL NOT NECESSARILY BE THE
SAME AS THE VOLTAGE AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. THE REASON FOR
THIS IS THAT A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER MAY BE USED WITH THE GENERATOR
WHICH STEPS THE INCOMING LINE VOLTAGE TO THE GENERATOR UP OR DOWN.
GENERATORS WITH NO LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE SAME
VOLTAGE IN STEP 4 AS IS SUPPLIED AT THE MAIN DISCONNECT BOX IN THE ROOM. UNITS
WITH A LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER SHOULD HAVE THE FOLLOWING VOLTAGES AT THE
MAIN LINE FUSES IN THE POWER SUPPLY CABINET.
VOLTAGE AT MAIN DISCONNECT BOX
(LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER INPUT)
480 VAC ± 10 %
400 VAC ± 10 %
Page 2-32
Rev. AM
VOLTAGE AT MAIN FUSES IN POWER SUPPLY
(LINE ADJUSTING TRANSFORMER OUTPUT)
400 VAC ± 10 %
480 VAC ± 10 %
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.18.1 Initial Voltage Measurements (Cont)
4.
5.
Measure and record the voltage across the main line fuses in the generator. Single phase units
will only use one set of voltage measurements.
L1 phase to L2 phase: ______ VAC.
L1 phase to ground: ______ VAC.
L1 phase to L3 phase: ______ VAC.
L2 phase to ground: ______ VAC.
L2 phase to L3 phase: ______ VAC.
L3 phase to ground: ______ VAC.
Are these voltages within specification for the unit as per chapter 1C for generators without a line
adjusting transformer, or within specification per the table above for units with a line adjusting
transformer? For 3 phase units, the phase to ground voltage should be 230 V ± 10 % for 400 V
units, and 277 V ± 10 % for 480 V units. For single phase 230 V units, the line to ground voltage
should be 115 V ± 10 %.
___ Check
BEFORE CONTINUING, REFER TO SECTION 2.18.3 OR 2.18.4 FOR THE PROCEDURE FOR
ADJUSTING LINE VOLTAGE TAPS ON THE ROOM INTERFACE TRANSFORMER AND THE POWER
SUPPLY AUXILIARY TRANSFORMER.
6.
Switch OFF the mains power to the generator. Verify that there is no voltage present across any
of the mains input phases. Replace the safety cover on the main input fuse block, then switch ON
the mains and generator.
7.
Verify that the red LED (DS1) located near the center of the generator interface board is lit.
_____ Check
8.
Verify that the red LED (DC BUSS OK) located on the power input board is lit.
_____ Check
2.18.2 Initial Power Up
1.
Switch on the generator at the console and observe the startup sequence on the console APR
display.
•
•
•
2.
MEMORY TEST.... will be displayed.
HIGH FREQUENCY GENERATOR XX KW WILL BE DISPLAYED (XX will be the kW rating
for that model).
The next screen will show console software revision and power software revision.
In the upper part of the generator cabinet, verify the following:
•
•
Verify that DS1 on the room interface board is lit.
On the generator CPU board verify that the following LEDs are lit (these indicate presence of
the DC rails as indicated):
DS38
DS41
DS43
DS45
DS46
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
+5 V
+15 V
-15 V
+12 V
-12 V
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-33
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.18.2 Initial Power Up (Cont)
3.
In the lower part of the generator cabinet, verify the following:
•
On the auxiliary board verify that the following LEDs are lit:
CNTCTR CLSD
S.S. OK
+12V
-12V
+/- 35V
2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection
THIS SECTION APPLIES TO SINGLE PHASE GENERATORS ONLY. ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS
IS SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT, AND THAT ALL CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED
BEFORE PROCEEDING.
1.
Note the position of the 208 / 240V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory
set to 240 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps.
2.
Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the
previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically.
• Use the 208V tap if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
• Use the 240V tap if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
3.
Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 240
VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-18. The primary windings are connected in parallel for 200 / 240
VAC operation as per figure 2-18.
• Use the 200V taps if the line voltage is 215 VAC or less.
• Use the 240V taps if the line voltage is 216 VAC or higher.
Figure 2-16: Schematic, primary of power supply aux transformer
Page 2-34
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.18.3 Single Phase Primary Tap Selection (Cont)
Figure 2-17: Room interface transformer primary taps
Figure 2-18: Schematic, primary of room I/F transformer (200/240V)
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-35
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.18.4 Three Phase Primary Tap Selection
THIS SECTION APPLIES TO 400 VAC THREE PHASE GENERATORS ONLY. NO TAP CHANGE IS
NEEDED ON 480 VAC UNITS.
ENSURE THAT THE AC MAINS IS SWITCHED OFF AND LOCKED OUT, AND THAT ALL
CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE PROCEEDING.
1.
Note the position of the 380 / 400V tap on the power supply auxiliary transformer (this is factory
set to 400 VAC). Refer to figure 2-10, this shows the locations of the transformer taps.
2.
Based on the line voltage measured in section 2.18.1, step 4, set the tap referenced in the
previous step as follows. Refer to figure 2-16, this shows the line voltage taps schematically.
• Use the 380V tap if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less.
• Use the 400V tap if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.
3.
Note the primary voltage tap setting on the room interface transformer (this is factory set to 400
VAC). Refer to figure 2-17 and 2-19. The primary windings are connected in series for 380 / 400
VAC operation as per figure 2-19.
• Use the 380V setting (180V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 389 VAC or less..
• Use the 400V setting (200V tap on top winding) if the line voltage is 390 VAC or higher.
Figure 2-19: Schematic, primary of room I/F transformer (380/400V)
Page 2-36
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.19.0 PROGRAMMING AND CALIBRATION USING THE CONSOLE
For the touch screen console, programming and calibration must be performed using GenWare®.
Operator accessible system utilities are described in the touch screen operator’s manual. The balance of
sections 2.19 and 2.20 do not apply to touch screen, except for the section DATA LINK which does apply
to the touch screen console.
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode
This section presents a brief overview of the generator setup menu only. For more detail, refer to chapter
3C.
To enter into the programming and calibration mode for the generator follow the steps below. Refer to
Figure 2-20 for references to APR buttons. This figure shows the APR button layout for the 23 X 56 (cm)
console, the 31 X 42 (cm) console, and the Rad-only console respectively.
Figure 2-20: Programming/calibration mode reference
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-37
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.19.1 Entering Into Programming/Calibration Mode (Cont)
1.
Start with the generator switched OFF.
2.
While pressing and holding the RESET button [5], press the generator POWER ON button on the
console
3.
The generator will go through the start-up sequence, then display the message ENTER
PASSWORD.
4.
Enter the factory default password by pressing the following button sequence: [1] - [2] - [3] - [4].
5.
The APR menu will now display the following:
* GENERATOR SETUP *
APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
UTILITY
EXIT SETUP
2.19.2 Menu Selections
UTILITY
Allows access to the following functions:
SET TIME & DATE:
Allows setting of: YEAR, MONTH, DAY, HOUR, and MINUTE
ERROR LOG:
Allows review of the generators error log for recorded errors.
STATISTICS:
Allows review of the tube exposure counter(s), the fluoro exposure counter if applicable, and the
generator accumulated exposure counter. Also allows resetting of the tube exposure counter(s), and the
fluoro exposure counter if used.
CONSOLE:
Allows setting the following parameters for the installation: key speed (scroll rate for the displays),
speaker volume, LCD screen mode, and APR mode.
APR EDITOR
This enables or disables technique factor changes. When APR EDITOR is set to ENABLED, the
technique factors may be changed. The new values may then be saved to overwrite the existing values.
Refer to chapter 3C for further information.
Page 2-38
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.19.2 Menu Selections (Cont)
GEN CONFIGURATION
Allows the service engineer to access the following functions. Further details are in chapter 3C.
•
TUBE SELECTION
Selects from the available group of X-ray tubes.
•
GENERATOR LIMITS
Sets the operating limits of the generator.
•
RECEPTOR SETUP
Allows programming of each image receptor.
•
I/O CONFIGURATION
Allows setting the inputs and outputs of all image receptors.
•
AEC SETUP
Defines properties for each channel of the AEC device.
•
AEC CALIBRATION
Allows calibration of the AEC device.
•
FLUORO SETUP (all except
Rad-only console).
Allows setting of the fluoro properties.
•
TUBE CALIBRATION
Enables the X-ray tube auto calibration feature.
•
DAP SETUP
Allows setup and calibration of the optional DAP.
DATA LINK
Used with the CPI GenWare® utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in
order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A2EC2 ™ utility,
perform setup and calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included
with GenWare®.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both
ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator.
NOTE: The GenWare® program should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console.
Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to reinitialize communication with the generator.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-39
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION
It is recommended that the generator be tested at this point with only the rotor and high tension cables
connected. The generator should be able to complete an X-ray tube calibration and seasoning cycle
without other equipment connected to the generator (other than the basic interlocks as noted below). This
will allow for easier fault isolation as each section of the system is connected and tested.
Before being able to make X-ray exposures, the room door interlock must be closed and the
thermal switch must be closed.
Prior to beginning tube auto calibration, the tube(s) used in this installation must be properly
selected, and the generator limits should be programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
It is recommended that the tube(s) be conditioned (seasoned) before beginning tube auto
calibration; refer to chapter 6.
WARNING:
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES PRODUCE X-RAYS. TAKE ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
CAUTION:
ALWAYS VERIFY THE MANUFACTURER OF THE TUBE INSERT. IF THE X-RAY TUBE HAS
BEEN REBUILT, THE TUBE INSERT AND TUBE HOUSING MAY BE FROM DIFFERENT
MANUFACTURERS.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
NOTE:
Page 2-40
Action
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu
(section 2.19.1) select GEN
CONFIGURATION.
Select TUBE CALIBRATION.
Select the desired tube (tube 1 or tube
2) by pressing the TUBE button.
Press FOCAL SPOT to toggle between
SMALL and LARGE. Start with
SMALL.
Press and hold the X-RAY button (or
use the optional hand switch) to begin
the calibration procedure.
Press RETURN to repeat calibration on
the other focal spot or on the other
tube.
When auto-calibration is completed,
press EXIT to exit the tube auto
calibration menu.
Press EXIT to return to the
GENERATOR SETUP menu.
Press EXIT SETUP to exit out of the
setup and calibration mode and return
to the normal operation mode.
Result
The TUBE CALIBRATION menu will display.
The TUBE AUTO-CAL menu appears.
The selected tube will appear. Selection of the second
tube is only available on two tube generators.
The selected focal spot displays.
The menu will indicate the mA and filament current
while the generator takes a series of exposures.
The GEN CONFIGURATION menu will display.
The GENERATOR SETUP menu will display.
REFER TO THE NOTE ON THE NEXT PAGE REGARDING
A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE THAT IS ENTERED
WHEN EXITING OUT OF THE AUTO-CALIBRATION
MODE.
SHOULD AN ERROR OCCUR DURING AUTO CALIBRATION, AN ERROR MESSAGE WILL
BE DISPLAYED. THE GENERATOR WILL THEN LIMIT THE TUBES OPERATION TO THE
RANGE IN WHICH IT WAS CALIBRATED, THUS ALLOWING FOR PARTIAL OPERATION OF
THE GENERATOR.
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Installation
2
2.20.0 TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION (Cont)
NOTE:
A SPECIAL DIAGNOSTIC MODE IS INVOKED WHEN YOU EXIT THE AUTO-CALIBRATION ROUTINE. THIS
MODE REMAINS IN EFFECT UNTIL THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED OFF. THIS ALLOWS LIMITED
FUNCTIONALITY OF THE GENERATOR IN CASE THE AUTO CALIBRATION COULD NOT BE COMPLETED
DUE TO A FAULT.
WHILE IN THIS MODE, THE GENERATOR WILL DEFAULT THE FILAMENT CURRENT TO 2.0 AMPS FOR
ALL UNCALIBRATED MA STATIONS. ADDITIONALLY, THE MA TOLERANCE CHECK WILL BE DISABLED.
THIS ALLOWS ONE TO EXIT TO THE NORMAL OPERATING MODE WHERE THE PREP STATE MAY BE
ENTERED. THE FILAMENT AND ROTOR CIRCUITS CAN BE OBSERVED, AND AN EXPOSURE MAY BE
TAKEN AT THIS TIME. THE EXPOSURE WILL OBVIOUSLY BE INCORRECT AS THE FILAMENT CURRENT
IS SET TO 2 AMPS, BUT THIS ALLOWS KV MEASUREMENTS TO BE PERFORMED ALONG WITH OTHER
SYSTEM CHECKS TO AID IN TROUBLESHOOTING.
2.21.0 FINAL CHECKS
The room interface connections may now be completed. These items are described in 2.9.6.
NOTE:
•
When finished all wiring, check that all connections are tight and secure.
•
•
Check that all cables are dressed neatly inside the main cabinet, and secured as necessary.
Reconnect any grounds that have been removed from covers. Then reinstall all covers before placing
the generator into service.
THE INSTALLER SHOULD ENSURE THAT ALL CABLE CONNECTIONS TO THE
GENERATOR ARE SECURE, AND ALL CABLES EXTERNAL TO THE GENERATOR ARE
ADEQUATELY PROTECTED AGAINST ACCIDENTAL DISCONNECTION.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
Rev. AM
Page 2-41
2
Installation
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 2-42
Rev. AM
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-04
CPI Canada Inc
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
SUPPLEMENT
X-RAY TUBE STATOR COMPATIBILITY
TABLES
CONTENTS:
1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE................................................................................................ 3
3.0 DUAL SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE .............................................................................................. 6
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 1
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
1.0
CPI Canada Inc
INTRODUCTION
This supplement contains the X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables for the Low Speed Starter and the
Dual Speed Starter.
The Dual Speed Starter table does not apply to the Indico 100L model.
Page 2
Rev. D
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
CPI Canada Inc
2.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
CGR Statorix
200A/240/260
550
(50/110 Ω
24 slot)
Chirana
Rotax KA 125
20/50 Ω stator
Chirana
Rotax KA 125
20/20/20 Ω stator
Comet DO7
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO9
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO9
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO10
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DX10
25/50 Ω stator
Comet XSTAR8
XSTAR74
25/50 Ω stator
Dunlee PX1300
3” anode
“S” stator (15/30 Ω)
Dunlee PX1400
4” anode
“S” stator (15/30 Ω)
GE Maxiray 75
3” anode
23/23 Ω equal
impedance “E” stator
TABLE 1: TUBE TYPES (LOW SPEED STARTER)
TUBE TYPE
RUN
BOOST
SHIFT
(INSERT)
VOLTAGE
TIME
CAPAC
94 VAC
2.5 Sec
12.5 µF
LOW SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
732752-01
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
RIK-T 30/50
1.2/2.0
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
732752-04
DX7
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
100 µF
52 mH
Inductor
33 µF
732752-00
DX9 0.6/2.0
DX9 1.2/2.0
DX91HS
DX92HS
DX93HS
DX10HS 0.6/1.0
DX10HS 1.0/2.0
DX101HS
DX104HS
DX105HS
XST-8
XST-74
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
PX1302
PX1312
52 VAC
2.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
PX1483
0.6/1.0 11°
0.6/1.5 15°
1.0/2.0 15°
52 VAC
2.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
45 µF
732752-02
MN640
M641
MN641
M643
MS740
MSN742
RN620
RN640
RSN722
RSN742
RIK-T 12/50
0.8/2.0
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 3
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
2.0
LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE (Cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
GE Maxiray 100
4” anode
23/23 Ω equal
impedance “E” stator
Gilardoni
Rotagil S/AS
IAE
C52 Super
C100
20/40 Ω stator
IAE
C52
C352
C52 Super
20/40 Ω stator
IAE
C52
C352
20/40 Ω stator
Philips
ROT350
ROT351
Siemens
Opti-150
“S” stator (14/37 Ω)
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-106V-2
XS-RB stator
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-106V-2
XS-AL stator
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-121
XS-RB stator
Toshiba Rotanode
XH-126
Toshiba
XH-157
Page 4
CPI Canada Inc
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
0.3/1.0 11°
0.6/1.0 11°
0.6/1.2 11°
0.6/1.5 11°
0.6/1.5 12°
0.6/1.25 12.5°
1.0/2.0 15°
AR11-30
AR30-60
RTC 600HS
RTC 700HS
RTC1000HS
RTM 101H/HS
RTM 102H/HS
RTM 90H/HS
RTM 92H/HS
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
45 µF
LOW SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
732752-02
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
RTM 78H/HS
AP DX104
X40
X50/AH
RO 17/50
SRO 22/50
SRO 33/100
30/52R
20/40
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
2.5 Sec
45 µF
732752-02
E7252X
E7813X
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
E7239X
E7242X
E7252X
E7813X
E7132X
E7239X
E7240X
E7299X
E7242FX
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
E7254X
E7254FX
E7255X
Rev. D
RUN
VOLTAGE
BOOST
TIME
SHIFT
CAPAC
33 µF
732752-00
Note: The starter boost voltage is 120 VAC. This is
only available with one-tube generators.
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
732752-00
33 µF
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
73 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
CPI Canada Inc
2.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
LOW SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE (Cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Varian
B100
DX52
Std “R”stator (16/50
Ω)
Varian
B100
“STD” stator (16/50 Ω)
Varian
B130
B150
Std “R”stator (16/50
Ω)
Varian
Diamond
Std “R”stator (16/50
Ω)
Varian
Emerald
Std “R” stator
Varian
Saphire
Std “R” stator
Varian DX62
300-400 kHu,
“STD” stator (23/56 Ω)
Varian DX62U
Universal
300-400 kHu,
configured as “STD” or
“R” stator (15/36 Ω)
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
A102
A132
A142
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
LOW SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
732752-00
A102
A132
A142
A192
A272
A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
RAD13
RAD14 0.3/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
RAD 8
RAD 68
RAD 74
RAD21
RAD56 0.6/1.0
RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
52 VAC
1.5 Sec
33 µF
732752-00
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
RUN
VOLTAGE
746026-00
BOOST
TIME
Rev. D
SHIFT
CAPAC
Page 5
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
DUAL SPEED STARTER TUBE SELECT TABLE
The Dual Speed Starter synthesizes its output frequencies independently of the line frequency and will operate all tubes at 60 and 180 Hz, unless a
particular tube only has published ratings to operate at 150 Hz, as indicated in the table. In this case, the starter will output 150 Hz when set for these tubes.
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
CGR Statorix
200A/240/260
550
(50/110 Ω
24 slot)
Comet DO7
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO9
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO10
25/50 Ω stator
Comet DO10
25/50 Ω stator
Comet
DO700WX
25/50 Ω stator
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
MN640
M641
MN641
M643
MS740
MSN742
RN620
RN640
RSN722
RSN742
DX7
CODE
Switches
1........5
00111
TABLE 2: TUBE TYPES (HIGH SPEED STARTER)
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
BOOST
L.S.
L.S.
START
RUN
BRAKE BRAKE
TIME
START
RUN
VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS
TIME
VOLTS
VOLTS
450
150
120
3.0 sec
3.0 sec
HIGH SPEED
OPERATION
ONLY
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
3.4 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
N/A
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-07
* 735925-07
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
(See note 1 at end of
this table)
00000
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
(See note 1 at end of this table)
DX9 0.6/2.0
DX9 1.2/2.0
DI104 0.3/0.8
DI104 0.6/1.0
DI104 0.6/1.3
DI104 0.6/1.8
DI106 0.3/0.8
DI106 0.6/1.0
DI106 0.6/1.3
DI700 0.6/1.0
DI700 1.0/1.8
00000
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
(See note 1 at end of this table)
00011
420
80
150
3.0 sec
1.8 sec
240
80
6 uF
31 uF
10011
420
80
150
3.0 sec
2.2 sec
240
80
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
10011
420
80
150
3.0 sec
2.2 sec
240
80
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 6
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Dunlee PX1300
3” anode
“S“ stator
(15/30 Ω)
Dunlee PX1400
4” anode
“S” stator
(15/30 Ω)
(see note 2 at
end of this table)
Dunlee PX1400
4” anode
“S” stator
(15/30 Ω)
PX1302
PX1312
11100
H.S.
START
VOLTS
240
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
PX1483
01100
240
120
100
3.0 sec
4.5 sec
240
70
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
10000
400
120
100
3.0 sec
1.9 sec
240
70
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
PX1429
PX1431
PX1436
PX1482
PX1483
1.0/2.0 15°
0.6/1.0 11°
10110
340
60
100
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
70
20 uF
60 uF
733317-02
* 735925-02
01110
400
90
80
2.0 sec
0.9 sec
230
70
7.5 uF
47 uF
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
CODE
Switches
1........5
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
120
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
100
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
BOOST
TIME
2.3 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
(see note 2 at
end of this table)
Dunlee PX1400
4” anode
“Q” stator
(6/12 Ω)
GE Maxiray 75
(3” anode)
23/23Ω equal
impedance “E”
stator
GE Maxiray
100 (4” anode)
23/23 Ω equal
impedance “E”
stator
0.3/1.0 11°
0.6/1.0 11°
0.6/1.2 11°
0.6/1.5 11°
0.6/1.25 12.5°
1.0/2.0 15°
733317-03
* 735925-03
00101
400
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
90
80
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
230
70
7.5 uF
47 uF
733317-03
* 735925-03
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 7
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Gilardoni
Rotagil
Gilardoni
Rotagil
A/A5
IAE
C52 Super
C100
20/40 Ω stator
IAE
C52
C352
C52 Super
20/40 Ω stator
IAE
C52
C352
20/40 Ω stator
IAE tubes
AND
standard “R”
stator tubes
Philips
ROT350
ROT351
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
AR11-30
AR30-60
AR20-50
AR30-100
AR40-100
RTC 600HS
RTC 700HS
RTC 1000HS
RTM 101H/HS
RTM 102H/HS
RTM 90H/HS
RTM 92H/HS
CODE
Switches
1........5
10101
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
H.S.
START
RUN
BRAKE BRAKE
VOLTS VOLTS VOLTS
TIME
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
BOOST
TIME
1.4 sec
(See note 1 at end of this table)
L.S.
START
VOLTS
220
50 Hz
220
50 Hz
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
60
50 Hz
60
50 Hz
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
6 uF
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
01101
340
150 Hz
60
150 Hz
80
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
11011
440
100
120
1.8 sec
1.0 sec
220
80
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
11011
440
100
120
1.8 sec
1.0 sec
220
80
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
5 uF
30 uF
6 uF
31 uF
733317-08
* 735925-08
6 uF
31 uF
RTM 78H/HS
11011
440
100
120
1.8 sec
1.0 sec
220
80
AP DX104
X40
X50/AH
Dual speed starters 733317-08 / 735925-08 are special configurations. These may be jumperconfigured to support IAE tubes that require dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05 per this table, or
to support “R” type stators that use dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01 per this table. Please
refer to note 3 at the end of this section before attempting to use this dual speed starter
configuration.
RO 17/50
00000
1.4 sec
240
50
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
(See note 1 at end of this table)
SRO 22/50
SRO 33/100
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
733317-01
* 735925-01
Page 8
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
Philips
SRM
ROT350
ROT500
Siemens
BI 125/20/40
Biangulix
8500 RPM
(configured for
150 Hz
operation)
Siemens
30/52R
Opti-150
20/40
“S” stator
Siemens OptiTop
150/40/80HC-100L
150/40/80HC-102L
14/37 Ω stator
Siemens Optilix
SV150/40/80C-100L
SV150/30/50C-100L
Toshiba
E7252X
XH-106V-2
E7813X
Toshiba
E7239X
XH-106V-2
E7242X
XS-AL stator
E7252X
E7813X
Toshiba
E7132X
XH-121
E7239X
E7240X
E7299X
Toshiba
E7242FX
XH-126
CODE
Switches
1........5
01111
11101
H.S.
START
VOLTS
420
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
150
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
1.8 sec
400
150 Hz
90
150 Hz
80
3.0 sec
1.9 sec
BOOST
TIME
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
HIGH SPEED
OPERATION
ONLY
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
12.5 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
37.5 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-10
* 735925-10
5 uF
N/A
733317-04
(See note 1 at end of
this table)
00000
400
90
80
3.0 sec
1.9 sec
240
50
5 uF
45 uF
733317-05
* 735925-05
01011
400
80
120
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
80
5 uF
30 uF
733317-06
* 735925-06
01011
400
80
120
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
80
5 uF
30 uF
733317-06
* 735925-06
00100
400
100
100
3.0 sec
1.2 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
10111
220
60
80
3.0 sec
1.2 sec
130
50
6 uF
46 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-09
* 735925-09
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
00000
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
(See note 1 at end of this table)
00000
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
(See note 1 at end of this table)
746026-00
Rev. D
733317-01
* 735925-01
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
Page 9
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Toshiba
XH-157
Varian
B100
DX52
Std “R” stator
(16/50 Ω)
Varian
B100
“Q” stator
(6/11 Ω)
Varian
B130
B150
Std “R” stator
(16/50 Ω)
Varian
B130
B150
“Q” stator
(6/11 Ω)
Varian
B160
B180
“R” Stator
(16/50 Ω)
10011
H.S.
START
VOLTS
420
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
80
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
150
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
01000
400
100
100
A102
A132
A142
11010
290
70
A192
A272
A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
A192
A272
A282
A286
A292
G256
G292
G1082
G1086
G1092
G1582
G1592
00000
400
00110
11110
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
E7254X
E7254FX
E7255X
A102
A132
A142
CODE
Switches
1........5
BOOST
TIME
2.2 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
80
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
3.0 sec
1.0 sec
240
60
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
60
3.0 sec
0.8 sec
150
50
20 uF
60 uF
733317-02
* 735925-02
100
100
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
290
70
60
3.0 sec
1.3 sec
150
50
20 uF
60 uF
733317-02
* 735925-02
400
100
150
3.0 sec
5.0 sec
240
70
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 10
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
TUBE TYPE
(HOUSING)
Varian
Diamond
Std “R” stator
Varian
Emerald
Std “R” stator
Varian
Saphire
Std “R” stator
(20/50 Ω)
Varian DX62
300-400 kHu,
“STD” stator
(23/56 Ω)
Varian DX62U
Universal
300-400 kHu,
configured as
“STD” or “R”
stator
(15/36 Ω)
TUBE TYPE
(INSERT)
RAD13
RAD14 0.3/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.2
RAD14 0.6/1.5
RAD 8
RAD 68
RAD 74
RAD21
RAD56 0.6/1.0
RAD56 0.6/1.2
RAD60
RAD92
RAD94
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
A192B
A197
A256
A272
A282
A286
A292
CODE
Switches
1........5
00100
H.S.
START
VOLTS
400
00000
H.S.
RUN
VOLTS
100
H.S.
BRAKE
VOLTS
100
H.S.
BRAKE
TIME
3.0 sec
LOW SPEED OPERATION ONLY
BOOST
TIME
1.2 sec
L.S.
START
VOLTS
240
L.S.
RUN
VOLTS
50
H.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
6 uF
L.S.
SHIFT
CAPAC
31 uF
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
(See note 1 at end of this table)
DUAL SPD
STARTER
PART NO.
733317-01
* 735925-01
733317-01
* 735925-01
10100
400
100
100
3.0 sec
2.3 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
00000
400
100
100
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
00000
400
100
100
3.0 sec
1.4 sec
240
50
6 uF
31 uF
733317-01
* 735925-01
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 11
CPI Canada Inc.
3.0
X-Ray Tube Stator Compatibility Tables
Dual Speed Starter Tube Select Table (cont)
THE DUAL SPEED STARTER USES MODULATION STRATEGIES TO OBTAIN THE DESIRED OUTPUTS. MEASURED VOLTAGES MAY NOT AGREE WITH
THOSE LISTED IN THE TABLE. HOWEVER, THE CURRENTS FLOWING IN THE STATOR WINDINGS ARE EQUIVALENT TO THOSE THAT WOULD EXIST
IF THE STATOR WAS EXCITED WITH THESE VOLTAGES.
NOTE 1:
Tube types designated as low speed only or high speed only must be programmed for low speed only or high speed only operation.
Refer to chapter 3, section 3C.5.1 for details (Indico 100 only).
NOTE 2:
Two settings are shown for the Dunlee PX1400 tube with “S” stator. The settings with the 4.5 sec boost times are per older Dunlee data sheets. The
values with the 1.9 sec boost times are per newer Dunlee data sheets (May 2002). The installer must verify tube compatibility per the appropriate
Dunlee tube data sheet.
*
Dual speed starter part numbers 733317-XX are used in 400 VAC 3φ generators / power supplies and in 480 VAC 3φ generators / power supplies
with a line adjusting transformer.
Dual speed starter part numbers 735925-XX are used in 230 VAC 1φ generators / power supplies and in 480 VAC 3φ direct input generators /
power supplies (using no line adjusting transformer).
NOTE 3:
Dual speed starters 733317-08 / 735925-08 have a jumper selectable phase shift capacitor that allows selection of 5 uF and 30 uF capacitors for
operation with IAE tubes that use dual speed starter 733317-05 / 735925-05 as per table 2, or this may be set to 6 uF and 31 uF for operation with
“R” type stators that use dual speed starter 733317-01 / 735925-01 as per table 2. THIS STARTER IS TYPICALLY FACTORY SET TO THE 5 uF
AND 30 uF POSITION. CONFIRM PROPER CONFIGURATION PER THE SECTION “CONFIGURING DUAL SPEED STARTER 733317-08 /
735925-08” IN CHAPTER 2 BEFORE PROCEEDING.
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
746026-00
Rev. D
Page 12
CPI Canada Inc.
Interfacing and Calibration
3
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM INTERFACING, PROGRAMMING,
AEC/ABS CALIBRATION, AND DAP SETUP
AND CALIBRATION (INDICO 100)
3.0.0
INTRODUCTION
3.1.0
Purpose
This chapter describes the interfacing to the generator of the X-ray room imaging equipment, and
programming of the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators. This chapter also allows the installer to
record the necessary information to complete the installation, as well as to record the programming
values. The installation of the AEC (Automatic Exposure Control) and ABS (Automatic Brightness
Stabilization) devices and their calibration are also covered in this chapter.
Chapter 3F is used in Indico 100 manuals only, and covers setup and calibration of the optional
DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter.
This Chapter contains the following sections.
Section
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
3F
Title
Setup information.
System interfacing
Programming the generator
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC) calibration
Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS) calibration
DAP (Dose-Area Product) setup and calibration. Indico 100 only.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-03
Rev. B
Page 3-1
3
Interfacing and Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank.)
Page 3-2
Rev. B
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-03
CPI Canada Inc.
Setup Information
3A
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3A
SETUP INFORMATION
CONTENTS:
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...............................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD ................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes ..................................................................................................................................................3A-2
3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing ..............................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control ..........................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.4 Collimator .......................................................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.5 Image System ................................................................................................................................................3A-3
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.7 Table Type .....................................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor.................................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment.....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes....................................................................................................................................3A-4
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET.....................................................................3A-5
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET.....................................................................................3A-6
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET ..............................................................................................................3A-7
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-1
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
3A.1.0 INTRODUCTION
Please record the setup information for your installation in this section before programming the generator.
Enter the information appropriate for your generator model. The data tables will accommodate installations up
to a standard R&F installation with the following: tilting G.I. table with bucky, spot film device, standard image
tube with a medical T.V. system, wall bucky and an overhead tube stand, spot film camera and a digital
acquisition system.
3A.2.0 INSTALLATION RECORD
3A.2.1 X-Ray Tubes
Please enter the appropriate information.
a)
Over table X-ray tube (or TUBE # 1)
b)
Manufacturer and type:
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
n)
o)
Focal spot combination:
kW of each focal spot:
Maximum kVp:
Type of stator:
Dual or single speed:
Stator delay:
Start and run voltage, low speed:
Start and run voltage, high speed:
Brake voltage:
Maximum filament current:
Minimum filament current, stand-by:
Thermal switch included:
Under table X-ray tube (or TUBE # 2)
p)
q)
r)
s)
t)
u)
v)
w)
x)
y)
z)
aa)
bb)
cc)
Manufacturer and type:
Focal spot combination:
kW of each focal spot:
Maximum kVp:
Type of stator:
Dual or single speed:
Stator delay:
Start and run voltage, low speed:
Start and run voltage, high speed:
Brake voltage:
Maximum filament current:
Minimum filament current, stand-by:
Thermal switch included:
X-ray tube fan included:
Page 3A-2
Rev. B
large =
large =
sec =
start volts =
start volts =
volts =
amps =
amps =
large =
large =
sec =
start volts =
start volts =
volts =
amps =
amps =
small =
small =
run volts =
run volts =
small =
small =
run volts =
run volts =
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Setup Information
3A
3A.2.2 Mains Supply And Fusing
Please record the following information on the mains voltage and current capacity. Check that the information
is appropriate for the generator according to the nameplate on the generator cabinet.
Line voltage: ________ VAC
Line frequency:
50 Hz.
60 Hz.
Disconnect fuses (main):
Line capacity:
kVa
amps
3A.2.3 Automatic Exposure Control
Chamber Type (optional):
Solid State: __________________
Ion Chamber ______________
Make: _______________________
Model: _________________
PMT _____________
Receptors with AEC (optional):
Table bucky
Wall bucky
yes
yes
Spot film device
Auxiliary bucky
yes
yes
Digital System
yes
3A.2.4 Collimator
Type:
Compatible with X-ray tube:
Exposure interlock (dry contacts):
Tomo/stereo by-pass:
__________________
yes
no
yes
no
yes
no
3A.2.5 Image System
Conventional: ________________________________________ (make and model)
Digital: ______________________________________________(make and model)
Image intensifier:
24 hour supply:
Image system park/position switch.
Fluoro foot switch to initiate fluoro and spot exposure:
Spot film advance delay: greater than 850 mSec. __ yes
Remote Fluoro controller.
AEC compensation for multi-spot SFD use.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
dual mode
__ yes
__ yes
__ yes
__ no
__ yes
__ yes
Ch # 740904-04
tri-mode
__ no
__ no
__ no
__ no
__ no
Rev. B
Page 3A-3
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
3A.2.6 ABS Pickup Assembly
Optical diode: _______ PMT: _______
Proportional DC: _______
Make: _______________________
Model: _________________
Composite Video _______
3A.2.7 Table Type
Table type: ______________________________________
Grid: ___________
Ratio: __________
Model/Make: _______________________
L/P Inch: __________
Focus Distance: __________
L/P Inch: __________
Focus Distance: __________
3A.2.8 Wall Receptor
Type: ______________________________
Grid: ___________
Ratio: __________
3A.2.9 Receptor Assignment
Receptor 1: _______________________
Receptor 2: _______________________
Receptor 3: _______________________
Receptor 4: _______________________
Receptor 5: _______________________
Receptor 6: _______________________
3A.2.10 Miscellaneous Notes
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________
Page 3A-4
Rev. B
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Setup Information
3A
3A.3.0 X-RAY TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET
Note:
The information in this table is to be derived from the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Generator Model: ______________
TUBE SELECTION
Serial No: _____________
TUBE 1
DEFAULT
SELECTED
TUBE 2
DEFAULT
SELECTED
TUBE SELECTED
TUBE SPEED
MAX SF KW LS
MAX LF KW LS
MAX SF KW HS
MAX LF KW HS
MAX KV
MAX SF MA
ANODE HU WARNING
ANODE HU LIMIT
SF STANDBY
LF STANDBY
SF MAX
LF MAX
FIL BOOST
FIL PREHEAT
GENERATOR LIMITS
MAX KW
MAX MA
MIN MA
MAX MAS
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
DEFAULT
SELECTED
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-5
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
3A.4.0 IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET
IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET
DATE:___________ SERIAL #:_____________
FUNCTION
RECEPTOR
RECEPTOR
RECEPTOR
RECEPTOR
RECEPTOR
RECEPTOR
1
2
3
4
5
6
RECEPTOR
NAME
TUBE
TOMO
FLUORO
SERIAL
INTERFACE
OPTS
FUNCTIONAL
OPTS
RECEPTOR
SYM
FLUORO
HANG
RAD HANG
LAST IMAGE
HOLD
MEMORY
REM TOMO
BUT
SF/LF SWITCH
AEC BACKUP
AEC BACKUP
MAS
AEC BACKUP
MS
AEC CHANNEL
Page 3A-6
Rev. B
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc.
Setup Information
3A
3A.5.0 I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET
NOTE: BOXES WITH DOTTED LINES CANNOT HAVE THEIR STATE CHANGED!
FUNCTIONS
STANDBY
PREP
GEN RDY
RAD EXP
FLUORO EXP
***INPUTS***
REMOTE EXP
-----
-----
REMOTE PREP
-----
-----
-----
REMOTE FL. EXP
-----
-----
-----
CONSOLE EXP
-----
-----
CONSOLE PREP
-----
-----
TOMO EXP
-----
REM. TOMO SEL
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
I/I SAFETY
-----
-----
COLL. ITLK
-----
-----
BUCKY CONTACTS
-----
-----
-----
THERMAL SW 1
-----
THERMAL SW 2
-----
DOOR ITLK
---------
-----
---------
---------
-----
-----
SPARE
MULTI SPOT EXP
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
-----
***OUTPUTS***
BKY 1 SELECT
BKY 2 SELECT
BKY 3 SELECT
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL
TOMO/BKY STRT
ALE
COLL. BYPASS
ROOM LIGHT
SPARE
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-04
Rev. B
Page 3A-7
3A
Setup Information
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 3A-8
Rev. B
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-04
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3B
SYSTEM INTERFACING
CONTENTS:
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................3B-2
3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS .................................................................................................3B-3
3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections ...............................................................................................3B-3
3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter ..............................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer........................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board........................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board ..............................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.6 AEC Board................................................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen........................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional) .................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional) ................................................................................................................3B-4
3B.2.10 Room Interface Board ............................................................................................................................3B-5
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD ....................................................................................3B-5
3B.3.1 Inputs ........................................................................................................................................................3B-6
3B.3.2 Outputs .....................................................................................................................................................3B-7
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages ........................................................................................................................3B-7
3B.3.4 Typical Examples .....................................................................................................................................3B-9
3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs ...........................................................................................3B-10
3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC.............................................3B-11
3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS ....................................................................................................3B-12
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING .....................................................................................3B-13
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-1
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The Indico 100 generator may be interfaced to various tables, imaging systems, tube stands, tomographic
devices, AEC pickups, Buckys, ABS pickups, X-ray tubes and collimators.
The generator interface may be programmed to supply a voltage, an isolated contact, receive a
voltage, or an external isolated contact.
All interfacing cables enter the generator at the rear of the generator cabinet.
NOTE:
The installer must provide the necessary interfacing cables.
WARNING
NOTE:
Page 3B-2
THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD HAS 110 AND 220 VAC PRESENT AT ALL TIMES
THAT THE MAIN DISCONNECT IS SWITCHED ON. USE CAUTION WHEN SERVICING THIS
BOARD.
Rev. J
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
3B.2.0 LOCATIONS OF INPUTS AND OUTPUTS
3B.2.1 Generator Pictorial Showing Connections
Figure 3B-1: Generator to room interface
CAUTION:
ENSURE THAT ALL X-RAY TUBE HOUSINGS ARE CONNECTED TO THE GROUND STUD ON
THE HT TANK. USE A SEPARATE GROUND WIRE FOR EACH TUBE, #10 AWG (6 mm2) OR
GREATER.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-3
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.2.2 Low Speed / Dual Speed Starter
Refer to chapter 2 (installation) for instructions on wiring to the low speed or dual speed starter terminal
blocks. Note that the X-ray tube thermal switches may be connected at the starter terminal blocks, or at the
room interface board. Both sets of terminals are connected in parallel, and either may be used.
3B.2.3 High Tension Transformer
Accepts the high tension cables from either one or two x-ray tubes.
3B.2.4 Generator Interface Board
The generator interface board accepts the following (ABS only on R&F generators):
•
•
ABS - composite video (J8).
ABS - proportional DC (J7).
(Jumpers must be configured for different ABS types, refer to chapter 3E).
• Control console as per chapter 2.
3B.2.5 Generator CPU Board
The generator CPU board accepts the following (all are optional):
• Remote fluoro controller (J11).
• RS 232 Port (J1).
• RS 232 Port (J2).
3B.2.6 AEC Board
Depending on the Indico 100 generator’s configuration, different AEC boards may be fitted. Refer to
chapter 3D:
3B.2.7 Console CPU Board / Touch Screen
The optional hand switch connects to the console CPU board or to a connector on the rear of the console;
refer to chapter 2 for details. If it is desired to connect a remote fluoro footswitch (normally customer
supplied), connect to TB6 pins 5 & 6 on the room interface board, or to terminals “F” and “COM” on TB1 on
the console CPU board (23 X 56 cm consoles), or to J13 on the 31 X 42 cm console. Refer to chapter 2 for
details.
3B.2.8 I/0 Expansion Board (optional)
The optional I/0 expansion board is used when the Indico 100 generator is interfaced with digital systems,
film changers and various dedicated products.
3B.2.9 DAP Interface Board (optional)
The optional DAP interface board is used to interface with DAP chambers, used to measure dose-areaproduct. The generator will interface with two DAP devices, one for each X-ray tube, when fitted with this
option.
Page 3B-4
Rev. J
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
3B.2.10 Room Interface Board
All the necessary inputs and outputs for the external room equipment are located on this board.
•
•
•
•
•
•
TB1 - Bucky 3 and tomo Bucky select, table stepper input,
TB2 - Bucky 1 and 2 select, collimator and Bucky inputs.
TB3 - Tomographic inputs and outputs, collimator bypass.
TB4 - Room light, thermal switches, door interlock, tube indicators.
TB5 - Multiple spot input, I.I. mag. select.
TB6 - Remote prep, exposure and fluoro inputs, I.I. safety input, ALE output, spare output.
3B.3.0 FEATURES OF THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
Refer to the following schematics and figures.
•
•
Figure 3B-2, room interface board layout.
Room interface functional drawing, MD-0763.
TB1-TB6
LIVE CONTACT
JW1-JW5
LIVE CONTACT
24VDC
110AC
220AC
DRY CONTACT
JW6-JW8
24 VDC
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
Figure 3B-2: Room interface board
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-5
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.3.1 Inputs
•
•
NOTE:
All inputs are opto coupled, select inputs may be configured to use an external +/- 24 VDC source or
may be configured to accept a closed dry contact.
Note the following inputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with all inputs configured for dry
contact inputs.
JUMPER CONFIGURATION (INPUTS):
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
TB1 PINS 4 & 5 (TABLE STEPPER)
TB2 PINS 6 & 7 (COLLIMATOR)
TB2 PINS 4 & 5 (BUCKY CONTACTS)
TB3 PINS 6 & 7 (TOMO EXPOSURE)
TB3 PINS 4 & 5 (REMOTE TOMO SELECT)
TB4 PINS 8 & 9 (THERMAL SWITCH 1)
TB4 PINS 6 & 7 (THERMAL SWITCH 2)
TB4 PINS 4 & 5 (ROOM DOOR INTLK)
TB5 PINS 11 & 12 (MULT. SPOT EXPOSURE)
TB6 PINS 9 & 10 (REMOTE EXPOSURE)
TB6 PINS 7 & 8 (REMOTE PREP)
TB6 PINS 3 & 4 (I.I. SAFETY)
TB6 PINS 5 & 6 (REMOTE FLUORO EXP)
Page 3B-6
Rev. J
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
JUMPER CONFIGURATION
JW7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW7 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW9 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW9 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW10.PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW10 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW3 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW3 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW2 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW2 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
JW6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW6 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW15 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW15 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW14 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW14 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
JW8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = DRY CONTACT INPUT
JW8 PINS 2-3 = 24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT
DRY CONTACT INPUT ONLY
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
3B.3.2 Outputs
•
•
•
NOTE:
Outputs are via relay contacts, some of which may be configured to supply a dry contact closure or to
supply 24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC upon closure.
Note the following outputs and jumper configurations per the table below:
To supply power to a grounded load, use TB1 pin 12 (for example) and jumper on “dry contacts”. This
applies also to TB1 pin 1, TB2 pin 12, TB2 pin 1 and TB3 pin 12.
The Indico 100 generator is shipped from the factory with JW1 to JW5 configured for dry
contacts, and JW6 to JW8 configured for 24 VDC output on relay closure.
JUMPER CONFIGURATION (OUTPUTS):
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
TB1 PINS 11 & 12 (BUCKY 3 SELECT)
TB1 PINS 1 & 2 (TOMO BUCKY SELECT)
TB2 PINS 11 & 12 (BUCKY 1 SELECT)
TB2 PINS 1 & 2 (BUCKY 2 SELECT)
TB3 PINS 11 & 12 (TOMO/BUCKY START)
TB3 PINS 1 & 2 (COLLIMATOR BYPASS)
TB4 PINS 11 & 12 (ROOM LIGHT)
TB4 PINS 1 & 2 TUBE 2 INDICATOR
TB4 PINS 1 & 3 TUBE 1 INDICATOR
TB5 PINS 8 & 9 (I.I. MAG 1)
TB5 PINS 5 & 6 (I.I. MAG 2)
TB5 PINS 2 & 3 (I.I. MAG 3)
TB6 PINS 1 & 2 (ALE OUTPUT)
TB6 PINS 11 & 12 (SPARE OUTPUT)
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
JUMPER CONFIGURATION
JW2 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW2 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW1 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW1 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW4 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW4 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW3 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW3 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW5 DRY CONTACTS OUTPUT
JW5 LIVE CONTACTS OUTPUT
DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
JW6 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT
JW6 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
DRY CONTACT OUTPUT ONLY
JW7 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT
JW7 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
JW8 PINS 1-2, 3-4 = 24VDC OUTPUT
JW8 PINS 2-3 = DRY CONTACT OUTPUT
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages
Five outputs (K1, K2, K3, K4 and K6 for Bucky selects and Bucky start) may be jumper configured for a
choice of the following voltages:
•
•
•
NOTE:
24 VDC 4 AMPS total.
110 VAC 2.5 AMPS total.
220 VAC 1.5 AMPS total.
2.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 110 VAC OR 1.5 AMPS IS AVAILABLE AT 220 VAC, BUT BOTH
ARE NOT AVAILABLE SIMULTANEOUSLY. TOTAL POWER CONSUMPTION MUST NOT
EXCEED 350 VA.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-7
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)
The above voltage sources are not compatible with:
•
•
•
Collimator lamps (24 VDC 150 watts). These exceed the 4 Amp rating of the 24 VDC supply. Contact your
generator supplier regarding the optional 24VAC / 30VDC room power kit, which may be used for
collimators and other room electromechanical devices.
Fluorescent lamps. These have high starting currents and generate transients when the tube strikes.
Some inductive loads may cause difficulties (for example some motors, under table tube fans, and
solenoids).
IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT CLAMPING / RECOVERY DIODES BE USED ON
INDUCTIVE DEVICES SUCH AS RELAYS ETC WHICH ARE CONNECTED TO THE ROOM
INTERFACE BOARD.
Voltage selections are made by adding jumper wires from TB11 to TB8, TB9, or TB10, and placing the
jumpers on JW1, JW2, JW3, JW4, or JW5 in the live contact position.
Review figure 3B-3 for typical examples.
Figure 3B-3: Typical jumper arrangement on the room interface board
SOME INSTALLATIONS REQUIRE THAT THE OUTPUTS OF RELAYS K1, K2, K3, K4, K6 OR K8 DRIVE
THE INPUTS OF OPTO COUPLERS. IN INSTALLATIONS WHERE THESE RELAYS SOURCE 110 OR
220 VAC, THE LEAKAGE CURRENT THROUGH THE R-C SNUBBER ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS
MAY BE SUFFICIENT TO ENERGIZE THE OPTO COUPLERS WHEN THE RELAYS ARE OPEN.
IF THIS IS EXPERIENCED, THE R-C SNUBBER SHOULD BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE
CIRCUIT. CUTTING AND REMOVING THE JUMPER WIRES PER THE TABLE ON THE NEXT PAGE
WILL DISABLE THE R-C SNUBBER CIRCUIT. THE JUMPER WIRES SHOULD BE CUT AS NEAR AS
POSSIBLE TO THE PADS ON THE BOARD, THEN AS MUCH AS IS POSSIBLE OF THE WIRE JUMPER
SHOULD BE REMOVED. THIS IS NECESSARY TO WITHSTAND THE OPEN CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
ACROSS THE RELAY CONTACTS.
Page 3B-8
Rev. J
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
3B.3.3 Selecting Output Voltages (Cont)
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO PROVIDE THE PROPER INTERFACING CIRCUITS
TO THE OPTO COUPLER(S) IN THESE TYPES OF INSTALLATIONS.
For reference, the jumper wire links associated with each of the subject relays is listed below:
RELAY
K1
K2
K3
K4
K6
K8
JUMPER WIRE
JW12
JW9
JW11
JW10
JW14
JW13
3B.3.4 Typical Examples
Selected Output Relay
Plug and Jumper
Wire Jumper
K2 (24 VDC)
K1 (110 VAC)
K4 (24 VDC)
K3 (220 VAC)
K6 (dry contacts)
K12 (24 VDC)
K13 (dry contacts)
K7 (24 VDC)
JW2: Live Contact
JW1: Live Contact
JW4: Live Contact
JW3: Live Contact
JW5: Dry Contact
JW7: Live Contact 24VDC
JW8: Dry Contact
JW6: Live Contact 24VDC
(K2) TB11 - 5 to TB8
(K1) TB11 - 4 to TB9
(K4) TB11 - 3 to TB8
(K3) TB11 - 2 to TB10
(K6) TB11 - no connection
N/A
N/A
N/A
The previous examples will configure the outputs as shown below:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
K2 when selected will provide 24 VDC to a load at TB1 pins 11 and 12.
K1 when selected will supply 110 VAC to a load at TB1 pins 1 and 2.
K4 when selected will supply 24 VDC to a load at TB2 pins 11 and 12.
K3 when selected will supply 220 VAC to a load at TB2 pins 1 and 2.
K6 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB3 pins 11 and 12.
K12 when selected will supply 24 VDC at TB6 pins 1 and 2.
K13 when selected will supply closed contacts at TB6 pins 11 and 12.
K7 will supply 24 VDC at TB4 pin 3 for tube 1, or 24 VDC at TB4 pin 2 for tube 2. Ground reference will
be at TB4 pin 1.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-9
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.3.5 Wiring The Room Interface Terminal Plugs
Figure 3B-4: Terminal plug
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 3B-10
Remove the required mating connectors from TB1 to TB6 on the room interface board.
Back out the wire retaining screws as required.
Dress the interface cable with a minimum of 5 inch (130 mm) flying leads.
Strip each wire .25 inches (6 mm).
Insert the wire into the plug and tighten the terminal screw. Several wires may be inserted into a single
terminal connection.
Be sure the plug numbering matches the input/output signals.
Insert the plug into the room interface plug as shown in Figure 3B-4.
Leave sufficient cable to allow interface access.
To eliminate confusion, label each plug.
Cover plates are located on the rear access panels to provide strain relief for the interface cables.
Holes are provided on the shelf at the back of the cabinet, below the room interface board, for
attaching additional strain relief hardware such as “C” or “P” clamps as desired by the installer.
Rev. J
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
3B.4.0 GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD PROGRAMMING FOR 110/220 VAC
The 110/220 VAC supplies available at TB9 and TB10 of the room interface board may be programmed
such that:
•
110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 at all times that the generator main disconnect is switched
ON.
•
110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator itself is switched ON.
The desired selection is made using JW1 on the generator interface board. Setting the jumper to JW1 pins
1-2 selects the condition where 110/220 VAC is present at TB9 and TB10 only when the generator is
switched ON.
Setting the jumper to JW1 pins 2-3 selects 110/220 VAC to be present at TB9 and TB10 at all
times that the generator main disconnect is switched ON.
Refer to figure 3B-5, this shows the jumper position JW1 pins 1-2 which only provides for 110/220 VAC
when the generator is switched ON.
Figure 3B-5: 110/220 VAC programming
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-11
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.5.0 TYPICAL R&F ROOM CONNECTIONS
Figure 3B-6: Typical R&F room
Page 3B-12
Rev. J
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
System Interfacing
3B
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING
The following is for reference only and represents a typical R&F procedure room.
•
Cable assembly #1
1. Bucky 3 select (image receptor).
2. Table stepper input, indicates to the generator that a stepping table has moved to the
next step.
3. Tomo Bucky select, usually used to select a tomographic device.
•
Cable assembly #2
1. Bucky 1 select (image receptor), usually used to select the R&F table Bucky.
2. Collimator interlock, will prevent an exposure if the collimator inputs are not satisfied.
3. Bucky contacts, all Bucky contacts are paralleled at this connector. Diode isolation
may be required.
4. Bucky 2 select (image receptor), usually used to select vertical wall Bucky.
•
Cable assembly #3
1. Collimator bypass. Usually used with the collimator associated with the tomographic
device, to allow non-PBL operation in the tomographic mode.
2. Remote tomo select, used for selecting tomography operation from a remote R&F table.
3. Tomo start, will issue a start to sweep signal to a tomographic device.
4. Tomographic exposure; the generator waits for a switch closure during the tomographic
sweep.
•
Cable assembly #4
1. Room light. Provides a closed contact to energize the X-ray room warning light.
Maximum 250 watts.
2. Door interlock. Requires a closed dry contact to interlock the generator exposure with
the X-ray room’s entrance door.
3. Tube select indicator (source select indicator). Indicates which X-ray tube has been
selected.
4. Optional thermal switch inputs.
•
Cable assembly #5
1. Mag. select. Interfaces with the image intensifier to select the magnification modes.
2. Multiple-spot exposure. When multi-spot operation is selected at the spot film device,
(example: 4 on 1) and this input receives a closed dry contact, the AEC calibration will
be offset to compensate for the small fields.
•
Cable assembly #6
1. Interfaces to the table (conventional or remote R&F), the X-ray prep, expose and fluoro
footswitch.
2. The I.I. safety position interlock switch, used if the I.I. may be removed from the spot
film device.
3. ALE - required if an SFC or a serial changer is used.
4. Spare output.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
Rev. J
Page 3B-13
3B
System Interfacing
CPI Canada Inc.
3B.6.0 TYPICAL ROOM CABLING AND INTERFACING (CONT)
Page 3B-14
•
Cable assembly #7
1. Must be a #10 AWG (6 mm2) wire or greater, connected from the housing of both X-ray
tubes to ground at the high tension transformer.
•
Cable assemblies #8
1. Pair of H.T. cables from the over table (tube-1) X-ray tube to the HT Transformer.
2. Pair of H.T. cables from the under table (tube-2) X-ray tube to the HT transformer.
•
Cable assembly #9.
1. Interfaces the ABS signal from the TV camera as either DC proportional or composite
video.
2. Interfaces the PMT’s high voltage and signal to the generator, if used.
Refer to chapter 3E for details.
•
Cable assembly #10
1. These cables are usually supplied by the AEC vendor. Be sure these cables are placed
away from any electrical noise areas. When interfacing AEC cables be careful not to
cause ground loops. Grounding should only be at the AEC board.
Refer to chapter 3D for details.
•
Cable assembly #11
1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the remote fluoro controller interface.
•
Cable assembly #12
1. This cable is supplied by CPI for the control console interface.
•
Cable assembly #13
1. Supplied with the optional laptop computer interconnect box.
•
Cable assembly #14
1. AC mains cable.
•
Cable assembly #15
1. Cable(s) for digital imaging system.
•
Cable assembly #16
1. Cable(s) for DAP (Dose Area Product).
Rev. J
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3C
PROGRAMMING THE GENERATOR
CONTENTS:
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................................... 3C-2
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode......................................................................................................... 3C-2
3C.2.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU .................................................................................................................. 3C-3
3C.3.0 UTILITY MENU......................................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.3.1 Setting Time And Date.......................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.3.2 Error Log ............................................................................................................................................... 3C-4
3C.3.3 Statistics................................................................................................................................................ 3C-5
3C.3.4 Console................................................................................................................................................. 3C-5
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR............................................................................................................................................ 3C-7
3C.5.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................... 3C-8
3C.5.1 Tube Selection ...................................................................................................................................... 3C-9
3C.5.2 Generator Limits ................................................................................................................................. 3C-13
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup ................................................................................................................................... 3C-14
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration3C-........................................................................................................................... 3C-19
3C.5.5 AEC Setup .......................................................................................................................................... 3C-22
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration .................................................................................................................................. 3C-23
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup ....................................................................................................................................... 3C-23
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration ................................................................................................................................. 3C-23
3C.6.0 DAP SETUP ........................................................................................................................................... 3C-23
3C.7.0 DATA LINK ............................................................................................................................................. 3C-23
3C.8.0 CONSOLE TEST MODE........................................................................................................................ 3C-24
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-1
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.1.0 INTRODUCTION
The generator is programmed using the operator control console (except touch screen, as noted below).
All programming menus are displayed on the LCD display window on the console. The ten “soft key”
buttons (1 to 10 in the figure below) are used to navigate through the programming screens and to select
and enter values in this section.
In this section, SELECT means to press the button adjacent to the desired function shown in the
LCD display window.
When using the touch screen console, the generator must be programmed and calibrated via
GenWare®. This requires the GenWare® utility software, a laptop computer (or equivalent), and a
null modem cable.
The touch screen console setup is performed via the console SYSTEM UTILITIES function. Refer
to section 7 of the touch screen operator’s manual for the procedure to access the SYSTEM
UTILITIES menu for console setup and the DATA LINK mode in order to communicate with
GenWare®.
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode
To enter into the programming mode for the generator follow the steps below. Refer to figure 3C-1 for the
button locations referenced in this section. This figure depicts both the 23 X 56 (cm) console, and the 31
X 42 (cm) console.
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
9
10
RESET
Figure 3C-1: Programming/calibration mode reference
Page 3C-2
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.1.1 Entering Into Programming Mode (Cont)
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
Start with the generator switched OFF.
While pressing and holding the RESET
button, press the generator POWER ON
button on the console.
Enter the password by pressing the button
sequence: [1] - [8] - [4] - [5].
Result
The generator will go through its start-up
sequence, then display the message
ENTER PASSWORD.
The GENERATOR SETUP menu will
now be displayed as shown in the next
section.
3C.2.0 GENERATOR SETUP MENU
The GENERATOR SETUP menu presents the user with 5 main options.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY
APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
The table below shows the functions available within each of the options in the GENERATOR SETUP
menu. Select one of these options to access the corresponding function.
UTILITY
•
Set time & date
•
Error log
•
Statistics
•
Console
APR EDITOR
•
Enables / disables changes to APR
techniques
GEN CONFIGURATION
•
Tube selection
•
Generator limits
•
Receptor setup
•
I/O configuration
•
AEC setup
•
AEC calibration
•
Fluoro setup
•
Tube calibration
•
DAP Setup
DATA LINK
•
Download / upload software via a laptop
computer
EXIT SETUP
•
Returns to normal operating mode (non
setup / programming mode)
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-3
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.3.0 UTILITY MENU
The UTILITY menu presents the user with 5 options as shown below.
* UTILITY *
SET TIME & DATE
ERROR LOG
STATISTICS
CONSOLE
EXIT
3C.3.1 Setting Time And Date
The SET TIME & DATE menu allows changing or setting of the time and date.
* SET TIME & DATE *
YEAR: 2000
HOUR: 18
MONTH:
9
MIN:
29
DAY:
15
+
EXIT
Use these steps to set the time and date.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Action
From the UTILITY menu, select SET TIME & DATE.
Select YEAR and press the + or - buttons to set the year.
Select MONTH and press the + or - buttons to set the month.
Select DAY and press the + or - buttons to set the date.
Select HOUR and press the + or - buttons to set the hour (in 24 hour format).
Select MIN and press the + or - buttons to set the minutes.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3C.3.2 Error Log
The ERROR LOG menu allows the display of error messages stored in the generator’s error log.
Parameters such as kV, mA, time, receptor, focus, technique selection, field, film screen and fluoro
parameters will be displayed simultaneously on the console LED displays.
* ERROR LOG *
ERROR # 1 OF 18
DATE: 8-19-2000
TIME: 13:09
ERROR CODE: 200
+
ERROR MESSAGE: ANODE HEAT WARN
EXIT
Page 3C-4
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.3.2 Error Log (Cont)
Use these steps to access the error log.
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
From the UTILITY menu select ERROR
LOG.
Select ERROR # and press the + or buttons to scroll through the error log.
Result
The error code, error message, date and
time of the error will be displayed in the
LCD window, and the associated
parameters will be displayed on the
console displays.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY
menu.
3C.3.3 Statistics
The STATISTICS menu shows the tube exposure count, accumulated fluoro hours if applicable, and
the accumulated generator exposure count. This also allows resetting of select counters.
* STATISTICS *
TUBE 1 EXP:
500
RESET TUBE 1 EXP
TUBE 2 EXP:
600
RESET TUBE 2 EXP
FLUORO HOURS:
100
RESET FLUORO HOURS
TOTAL EXP:
1100
EXIT
Use these steps to access the statistics menu. RAD only or 1 tube generators will show a subset of
the above menu items.
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
From the UTILITY menu select STATISTICS.
To reset the tube exposure counter, select RESET TUBE 1 EXP or RESET TUBE 2
EXP. Select RESET FLUORO HOURS to reset the fluoro exposure counter.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3C.3.4 Console
The CONSOLE menus allow setting of specific console operating features to suit operator preferences,
and also for resetting of the console parameters to the factory defaults (some models).
Console utilities screen 2, which includes LOGO, LANGUAGE, and LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS
selections is only available when running the console software from flash memory on 31 X 42 cm
consoles. Otherwise, these selections are made via SW1 on the console as described in chapter 2.
CONSOLE utilities screen 1
* CONSOLE *
SLOW KEY REPEAT:
200MS
MED. KEY REPEAT:
150MS
FAST KEY REPEAT:
75MS
SPEAKER VOLUME: 15
EXIT
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
LCD SCREEN
APR MODE: NO
+
>>
Rev. H
Page 3C-5
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.3.4 Console (Cont)
CONSOLE utilities screen 2
* CONSOLE *
LOGO:
YES
LANGUAGE: ENGLISH
LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS:
NO
<<
Definition of console parameters as used in this section.
•
SLOW KEY REPEAT
Determines the speed at which displays change while the
selected key is pressed for the first 5 counts.
•
MED. KEY REPEAT
Determines the speed at which displays change while the
selected key is pressed for the next 5 counts.
•
FAST KEY REPEAT
Determines the speed at which displays change while the
selected key is pressed after 10 counts.
•
SPEAKER VOLUME:
Sets the speaker volume for the control console in the range 1
to 15.
•
LCD SCREEN
Toggles between normal and reverse video for the LCD
display.
•
APR MODE:
NO allows the operator to select an APR view, and still have
the ability to manually select receptors, focus, technique, film
screen, AEC fields, etc.
YES allows the operator to select all of the above EXCEPT the
technique selection (AEC, mAs, mA/ms) i.e. this disables the
ability to select AEC, mAs, mA/ms in APR mode.
AEC, mAs, mA/ms changes can only be made by selecting an
APR technique that has been programmed to the desired
technique.
•
YES: The predefined logo is displayed briefly after the
generator is switched on.
LOGO
NO: The logo is not displayed.
•
LANGUAGE
Selects the language for status and error messages (the APR
text must be changed via the CPI GenWare® utility software).
•
LOAD CONSOLE
DEFAULTS
YES: Initializes the console CPU’s NVRAM to the factory
default settings when the generator is switched ON. This
restores the factory defaults for the APR and the CONSOLE
settings.
NO: The NVRAM is not reset when the generator is switched
on.
The normal setting for this function is NO. Do not set to
YES unless you intend to restore the console factory
defaults.
Page 3C-6
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.3.4 Console (Cont)
Use these steps to access the CONSOLE menu.
Step
Action
From the UTILITY menu select CONSOLE. This accesses CONSOLE utilities
screen 1.
Select the desired parameter to change. SLOW, MED, FAST KEY REPEAT and
SPEAKER VOLUME are adjusted by pressing the + or - buttons. LCD SCREEN
and APR MODE are toggled by pressing the adjacent selection button.
Press >> to select CONSOLE utilities screen 2. This is only available on 31 X 42
cm Indico 100 consoles running the console software from flash memory. Refer
to the section Console software / EPROM in chapter 6 for details.
Select the parameter to be changed. Refer to the previous definitions.
Press the selection button for that parameter to toggle the available selections.
Select << to return to CONSOLE utilities screen 1.
Select EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
If the console defaults are to be reset, the generator must be switched OFF and
then ON again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults
when it is powered on again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console
and APR defaults. Selecting NO will not update the defaults.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next
time the generator is switched on.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR
The APR EDITOR enables / disables the ability of the operator to make and then save changes to APR
techniques.
* GENERATOR SETUP *
UTILITY
APR EDITOR: DISABLED
GEN CONFIGURATION
DATA LINK
EXIT SETUP
Two modes of operation are available for the APR EDITOR:
•
ENABLED
Allows the operator to change the default APR technique(s),
and then save the changes to memory. The APR will
subsequently default to the changed technique.
•
DISABLED
Allows temporary editing of APR technique(s), but does not
allow the changes to be saved to memory. The APR will
always default to the original technique when the generator is
switched OFF and then ON again.
The generator stores the last APR editor setting prior to being switched OFF. If the APR
editor was previously ENABLED, APR changes may subsequently be made and then
saved in normal operating mode without the need to manually set the APR editor to
ENABLED. To disable APR technique changes, the APR editor must be set to DISABLED.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-7
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.4.0 APR EDITOR (Cont)
Use these steps to set the APR EDITOR.
Step
Action
1.
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select APR EDITOR.
2.
Press the APR EDITOR button again to toggle to the desired selection.
APR TEXT MAY BE ALTERED BY USING A COMPUTER RUNNING THE CPI GenWare™
UTILITY SOFTWARE. FURTHER DOCUMENTATION REGARDING THIS FUNCTION IS
INCLUDED WITH THE SOFTWARE PACKAGE IN THE FORM OF AN MS WORD
DOCUMENT.
NOTE:
3C.5.0 GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
The GEN CONFIGURATION menu presents the user with 9 options as shown below. Select one of these
options to access the corresponding menu.
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION
AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS
AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP
FLUORO SETUP
I/O CONFIGURATION
TUBE CALIBRATION
EXIT
>>
*
* The >> function is only available on generators with the DAP (Dose-Area Product) option.
Refer to section 3F for details.
Page 3C-8
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.1 Tube Selection
The TUBE SELECTION menus allow the desired tube type to be selected and assigned to TUBE 1 and
to TUBE 2 (two tube generators only), and allow setting of the default limits for that tube.
This menu will not be displayed on one-tube generators.
*TUBE SELECTION *
TUBE 1
TUBE 2
EXIT
The next menus show the default tube selections. The
screens, and the actual tube selections, may not be exactly as shown.
A192B 0.6/1.2
A256 0.6/1.0
A292 0.6/1.2
A272 0.3/0.6
EXIT
RAD14
RAD21
RAD56
RAD60
0.6/1.2
0.6/1.2
0.6/1.2
0.6/1.2
<<
DX93HS 0.6/1.5
DX101HS 0.6/1.3
MX75 1.0/2.0
MX100 0.6/1.25
<<
number
of
tube
selection
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
G256 0.6/1.0
G292 0.6/1.2
G1082 0.3/1.0
RAD8 1.0/2.0
>>
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
RAD74 0.6/1.5
RAD92 0.6/1.2
DX10HS 0.6/1.0
DX92HS 0.6/1.2
>>
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
RO1750 0.6/1.3
>>
The following menu is only available if additional tubes have been downloaded via a computer
running CPI GenWare™ software.
* TUBE 1 SELECTION *
***USER DOWNLOADED TUBES DISPLAYED HERE**
<<
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
RETURN
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-9
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.1 Tube Selection (cont)
Use these steps to access the TUBE SELECTION menus.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu
select TUBE SELECTION.
Select TUBE 1 or TUBE 2. This step is not
available on one tube generators; go
directly to step 3.
Select the X-ray tube type to be assigned
to that tube location by pressing the button
adjacent to the desired selection. Use the
>> and << buttons to navigate through the
tube selection menus if the desired tube is
not displayed on the current screen.
Once the desired tube has been selected,
parameters for that tube are displayed
showing the default values. DO NOT
adjust the default values at this time.
Additional tube types may be downloaded
using the CPI GenWare™ utility software.
Refer to section 3C.7.0 DATA LINK.
Result
The available tubes to choose from will
display.
This will assign the selected X-ray tube to
the desired tube location.
See next page for further details. Do not
press RETURN or >> until this is
requested in a later step.
When the desired tube is selected, the default limits are displayed. Please consult the X-ray tube data
sheet(s) before making any changes.
The dual speed starter operates at 60 or 180 Hz (50 or 150 Hz for some tube types) independent
of line frequency. The low speed starter operates at 50 Hz for 50 Hz mains, or 60 Hz for 60 Hz mains.
Therefore for generators equipped with the low speed starter, the 60 Hz tube ratings are automatically
derated for 50 Hz operation if required.
PLEASE DO NOT CHANGE ANY DEFAULTS UNLESS THE IMPACT OF THOSE CHANGES IS
CLEARLY UNDERSTOOD. INITIAL CALIBRATION SHOULD BE PERFORMED USING THE
DEFAULT VALUES.
NOTE:
Page 3C-10
BEFORE CHANGING X-RAY TUBE DEFAULT PARAMETERS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY
TUBE AND GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE
PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0. THIS ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE
DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.1 Tube Selection (cont)
The next three menus show the default tube limits.
tube has been selected in the previous steps.
*TUBE 1: RAD60 0.6/1.2 12º REV 1.4*
TUBE SPEED: DUAL
MAX SF KW LS: 21.3
MAX LF KW LS: 58.9
MAX KV: 150
menus
appear
after
a
MAX SF KW HS: 35.2
MAX LF KW HS: 99.0
+
-
RETURN
*TUBE 1: RAD60
These
>>
0.6/1.2
12º REV 1.4*
MAX SF MA: 320
ANODE HU WARNING: 80%
ANODE HU LIMIT: 90%
+
-
<<
>>
*TUBE 1: RAD60
SF STANDBY: 2.5A
LF STANDBY: 2.5A
SF MAX: 5.2A
LF MAX: 5.5A
<<
0.6/1.2
12º REV 1.4*
FIL BOOST: 200MS
FIL PREHEAT: 800MS
+
RETURN
Definitions of tube limits as used in this section. These settings are tube specific, i.e. tube 1 and
tube 2 each have their own tube limit settings.
•
TUBE SPEED
May be altered on dual speed generators. DUAL means that
the generator determines whether to use low speed or high
speed operation.
•
MAX SF KW LS
Sets the maximum small focus low speed kW limit.
•
MAX LF KW LS
Sets the maximum large focus low speed kW limit.
•
MAX KV:
Sets the maximum kV allowed for that tube.
•
MAX SF KW HS
Sets the maximum small focus high speed kW limit.
•
MAX LF KW HS:
Sets the maximum large focus high speed kW limit.
•
MAX SF MA
Sets the maximum mA in small focus. This should be set as
low as possible to preserve the focal spot track wear and focal
spot blooming.
•
ANODE HU WARNING
Sets the limit at which the anode heat warning message is
displayed.
•
ANODE HU LIMIT
Sets the limit at which exposures will be inhibited. If the
present anode heating is under the threshold, the exposure will
be inhibited if the next exposure is calculated to exceed the
anode HU limit.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-11
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.1 Tube Selection (cont)
•
SF STANDBY
Sets the small focus standby filament current. The required
value should be obtained from the X-ray tube data sheets.
•
LF STANDBY
As above but for large focus.
•
SF MAX
Sets the small focus maximum filament current.
•
LF MAX
As above but for large focus.
•
FIL BOOST
Sets the filament rapid boost duration in order to quickly raise
the filament temperature. In installations where a spot film or
equivalent device is used, default boost and preheat values
may be increased if needed to allow for one second R/F
change over time.
•
FIL PREHEAT
The time that the filament is held at the required emission level
before an exposure is permitted
Typically, the boost time should be between 200 and 250 msec, and the preheat time should be in the
range of 700 - 800 ms.
If in doubt, monitor the filament feedback and be sure the filament is not being over or under driven
during an exposure.
Standby current must be below the emission point. If the standby current is too high, the lower
fluoro mA values may not calibrate properly resulting in a high mA fault error during fluoro
operation.
If the maximum filament current is increased, be careful not to exceed the tube manufacturer’s
specifications.
Use these steps to modify the tube defaults.
Step
Action
1.
Use the >>, <<, and RETURN buttons to navigate through the TUBE
DEFAULTS screens.
2.
Select the appropriate default value to change. Refer to the definitions on the
previous page.
3.
Use the + and - buttons to change the selected values. Pressing the TUBE
SPEED button toggles the selection between LOW, HIGH and DUAL speed
(generators with dual speed starter only).
4.
When finished altering the tube default values, press the <<, RETURN or EXIT
button(s) as required to return to the TUBE SELECTION menu (two tube
generators) or GEN CONFIGURATION menu (one tube generators).
5.
Select the second X-ray tube if desired by repeating the previous steps (two
tube generators only).
PLEASE ENSURE THAT THE SELECTED X-RAY TUBE STATOR(S) ARE COMPATIBLE
WITH THE LOW SPEED OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IN YOUR GENERATOR.
6.
Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu (two tube
generators only).
Page 3C-12
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.2 Generator Limits
The GENERATOR LIMITS menu allows the setting of generator limits as defined below.
* GENERATOR LIMITS*
MAX KW:
80
MAX MA:
1000
MIN MA:
10
+
MAX MAS
630
EXIT
Definitions of generator limits as used in this section.
•
MAX KW
Sets the maximum generator kW limit.
•
MAX MA
Sets the maximum generator mA limit.
•
MIN MA
Sets the minimum generator mA limit.
•
MAX MAS
Sets the maximum generator mAs limit.
BEFORE MAKING ANY CHANGES IN THIS SECTION, PLEASE CONSULT THE X-RAY TUBE DATA
SHEETS TO ENSURE THAT THE PROPOSED CHANGES DO NOT EXCEED THE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED LIMITS.
BEFORE CHANGING GENERATOR LIMITS, PLEASE FILL IN THE X-RAY TUBE AND
GENERATOR PARAMETER WORKSHEET. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE
PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 3.0. THIS ALLOWS RECORDING OF THE
DEFAULT VALUES AND THE NEW (CHANGED) VALUES.
NOTE:
Use these steps to set the generator limits.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select GENERATOR LIMITS.
Select a limit to be changed. Refer to the previous definitions.
Use the + and - buttons to change the selected values.
When finished altering the generator default values, press EXIT to return to the
GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-13
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup
The RECEPTOR SETUP menus allow each of the image receptors to be programmed as defined in the
table following the example menu screens. Refer to the configuration A or configuration B menu screens,
depending on the generator model.
MENU 1 (Configuration A)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] *
TUBE: 1
AEC CHANNEL: 1
TOMO: NO
INTERFACE OPTS: 0
FLUORO: NO
+
SERIAL: NO
EXIT
>>
OR
MENU 1 (Configuration B)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] *
TUBE: 1
INTERFACE OPTS: 0
TOMO: NO
FUNCTIONAL OPTS: 0
FLUORO: NO
+
SERIAL: NO
EXIT
>>
MENU 2 (Configuration A and configuration B)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
RECEPTOR SYM: [sym]
MEMORY: DEF
FLUORO HANG: 30 SEC
REM TOMO BUT: 2000 MS
RAD HANG: 0 SEC
+
LAST IMAGE HOLD: 40 MS
<<
>>
MENU 3 (Configuration A)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
SF/LF SWITCH: MAN
AEC BACKUP: FIXED
AEC BACKUP MAS: 500
AEC BACKUP MS: 3200
DEFAULTS
+
-
<<
OR
MENU 3 (Configuration B)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym]*
SF/LF SWITCH: MAN
AEC BACKUP: FIXED
AEC BACKUP MAS: 500
AEC BACKUP MS: 3200
DEFAULTS
AEC CHANNEL: 1
+
-
<<
Page 3C-14
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (cont)
NOTE:
THE DEFAULTS SELECTION IN MENU 3 IS ONLY AVAILABLE IF MEMORY IN MENU 2 WAS
SET TO DEF.
RECEPTOR MENUS 4 AND 5 BELOW ARE ONLY ACCESSIBLE IF DEFAULTS IS ENABLED.
MENU 4 (Configuration A and configuration B)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*
TECHNIQUE: AEC
LEFT FIELD: YES
FOCUS: SMALL
CENTER FIELD: YES
FILM SCREEN: 1
RIGHT FIELD: YES
<<
>>
MENU 5 (Configuration A and configuration B)
* RECEPTOR SETUP [sym] DEFAULTS*
KV:
75
MA:
320
MS:
50
DENSITY:
0
+
-
<<
Definitions of receptor setup programming as used in this section follow. The selections made
when programming a receptor apply to that receptor only. Some of the functions listed are
optional.
•
TUBE
Selects the tube assigned to that receptor. Selecting NONE
disables that receptor.
•
TOMO
Enables or disables tomographic operation (NO is disabled).
•
FLUORO
Enables or disables fluoroscopic operation (NO is disabled).
•
SERIAL
Allows repeated (serial) X-ray exposures without the need to
re-prep after each exposure. Normally used with serial film
changers (NO is disabled).
•
INTERFACE OPTS
Selects pre-defined digital interface options:
0 = None.
1 = InfiMed GoldOne.
2 = ATS ESI.
3 = Gilardoni digital pulsed RAD.
4 = Gilardoni digital HCF.
5 = Reserved.
6 = Syracuse Fluorecord.
7 = Camtronics Video plus / Imacom DigiStar.
8 = CMT SmartSpot.
9 = Apelem Paladio.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-15
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (cont)
•
FUNCTIONAL OPTS
Selects pre-defined special functional options:
0 = None.
1 = Table stepper function.
•
RECEPTOR SYM
Allows one of the predefined receptor symbols [sym] to be
associated with the selected receptor.
•
FLUORO HANG
Sets the time that the rotor will continue spinning after a fluoro
exposure has terminated.
•
RAD HANG
Sets the time that the rotor will continue spinning after a rad
exposure has terminated.
•
LAST IMAGE HOLD
Sets the time that the exposure will continue after the fluoro
footswitch has been released. This enables a frame store
device to complete the last image.
•
MEMORY
Defines the techniques that will be defaulted to when a receptor
is selected:
YES: The selected receptor will remember it’s last techniques
such that those techniques are displayed when that receptor is
re-selected.
NO: The selected receptor will not remember the last
techniques used on that receptor. The techniques used will be
the same as last used on the previous receptor.
DEF: The techniques used for that receptor will be as
programmed. See receptor setup menu 4 and 5.
•
REM TOMO BUT
Sets the default tomo backup time when tomo is selected via
the REMOTE TOMO SELECT input.
•
SF/LF SWITCH
AUTO: Small or large focus will automatically be selected by
the generator, depending on the tube current.
MAN: The operator must manually select small/large focus.
•
AEC BACKUP
Defines the AEC backup mode to be used:
FIXED: The generator will determine the maximum AEC
backup time, not to exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values
or system limits. The characters AEC will be displayed in the
time window of the LED display during AEC operation.
MAS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup mAs, not
to exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or system limits.
The mAs value will be displayed in the time window of the LED
display during AEC operation.
MS: Allows the operator to adjust the AEC backup ms, not to
exceed preset AEC backup mAs/ms values or system limits.
The ms value will be displayed in the time window of the LED
display during AEC operation.
Page 3C-16
•
AEC BACKUP MAS
Sets the maximum backup mAs, to a limit of 500 mAs (600 mAs
for some generator models).
•
AEC BACKUP MS
Sets the maximum back-up ms.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (cont)
•
DEFAULTS
This selection is available only if MEMORY was set to DEF in
RECEPTOR SETUP menu 2.
•
AEC CHANNEL
Defines which AEC channel will be used by the receptor. This
must be set to a valid AEC input channel number, or to 0 as
noted below. For example, if using an AEC board with only 3
input channels (channels 1 to 3) then selecting AEC channel 4
will cause an error. Selecting 0 disables AEC operation on that
receptor.
THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS ARE ONLY AVAILABLE IF DEFAULTS WAS ENABLED AS
PREVIOUSLY DESCRIBED.
NOTE:
•
TECHNIQUE
Defines which technique will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected. Options are AEC, MA, MAS.
•
FOCUS
Defines which focus will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected. Options are LARGE or SMALL.
•
FILM SCREEN
Defines which film screen will be defaulted to when a receptor is
selected and AEC enabled. Options are film screen 1, 2, or 3.
•
LEFT FIELD
Selects the left field on the AEC device when AEC is selected.
•
CENTER FIELD
As above, but for center field.
•
RIGHT FIELD
As above, but for right field.
•
KV
Selects the default kV value.
•
MA
Selects the default mA value.
•
MS
Selects the default time value.
•
DENSITY
Selects the default density value.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE IMAGE RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING WORKSHEET BE
FILLED IN FOR EACH RECEPTOR THAT IS PROGRAMMED. A BLANK FORM THAT
SHOULD BE PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A 4.0. THIS WILL PROVIDE A
RECORD OF THE RECEPTOR SETUP FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-17
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.3 Receptor Setup (cont)
If the image receptor defaults are changed, please record the original defaults in a copy of the
following table:
IMAGE RECEPTOR DEFAULT SETTINGS
FUNCTION
RECEPTOR
1
RECEPTOR
2
RECEPTOR
3
RECEPTOR
4
RECEPTOR
5
RECEPTOR
6
TECHNIQUE
FOCUS
FILM SCREEN
LEFT FIELD
CENTER FIELD
RIGHT FIELD
KV
MA
MS
DENSITY
DO NOT SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR WHILE IN *RECEPTOR SETUP
DEFAULTS* MENUS 4 AND 5. DOING SO WILL CAUSE THE UPDATED RECEPTOR
NOTE:
SETUP PARAMETERS NOT TO BE SAVED. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE FIRST
RECEPTOR PROGRAMMING BE COMPLETED, THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENUS BE
EXITED TO THE GEN CONFIGURATION MENU, THEN THE RECEPTOR SETUP MENU BE
RESELECTED TO PROGRAM THE NEXT RECEPTOR. THE ABOVE SHOULD BE
REPEATED UNTIL ALL RECEPTORS ARE PROGRAMMED. THIS WILL ENSURE THAT THE
UPDATED PARAMETERS ARE SAVED.
Use these steps to set up the receptor parameters.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3C-18
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select RECEPTOR SETUP.
Select the desired image receptor to be programmed.
Use the << and >> buttons to navigate through the screens. As noted earlier,
the RECEPTOR SETUP DEFAULTS menus (if enabled) are accessed by
selecting DEFAULTS in screen 3.
Select the appropriate parameter to change. Refer to the definitions on the
previous pages in this section.
Certain selections are toggled (press the selection button again to change the
value), other parameters must be selected via the adjacent selection button.
The values are then changed using the + and - buttons.
When finished setting the parameters and/or defaults for the current receptor,
press the
<< or EXIT button(s) as required to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
Reselect RECEPTOR SETUP, then select the next receptor to be
programmed.
When finished programming all receptors, return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu as per step 6.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration
The I/O CONFIGURATION menus allow programming the states of exposure for the inputs and the
outputs on the room interface board.
* INPUTS [sym] *
REMOTE EXP :
...---...---...
STANDBY STATE
REMOTE PREP:
...---...........
REMOTE FL. EXP:
.............--CONSOLE EXP:
...---...---...
EXIT
CONSOLE PREP:
TOMO EXP:
REM. TOMO SEL.:
I/I SAFETY:
<<
COLL. ITLK:
BUCKY CONTACTS:
SPARE:
THERMAL SW 1:
<<
THERMAL SW 2:
DOOR ITLK:
MULTI SPOT EXP:
<<
BKY 1 SELECT:
BKY 2 SELECT:
BKY 3 SELECT:
TOMO/BKY 4 SEL:
<<
⇑
>>
* INPUTS [sym] *
...---.........
........ ---...
---............
...---...-----⇑
>>
* INPUTS [sym] *
...---...-----.........---...
------...-----------...-----⇑
⇑
STANDBY STATE
>>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
---------------------------------------------------------
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
STANDBY STATE
>>
* INPUTS [sym] *
-----...--------- ...-------............
⇑
STANDBY STATE
STANDBY STATE
>>
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-19
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (cont)
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
-------------------------------------------
TOMO/BKY STRT:
ALE:
COLL. BYPASS:
⇑
<<
>>
* OUTPUTS [sym] *
-----------------------------
ROOM LIGHT:
SPARE:
⇑
<<
STANDBY STATE
STANDBY STATE
RETURN
The STATE button on the upper right hand side of the menu selects the current state. The word STATE
will be preceded by the description of the state: for example, STANDBY.
The arrow in the lower middle area points to one of the five states described below. Moving to the
next state is accomplished by pressing the STATE button. The states are as follows:
•
STANDBY
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator is in standby or idle
mode. Standby mode also defines the state when the generator
is in fluoroscopic hangover.
•
PREP
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator first enters PREP
mode.
•
GEN RDY
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator has completed
PREP mode and is ready to expose.
•
RAD EXP
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator starts a
radiographic exposure.
•
FLUORO EXP
Sets the state of the I/O when the generator starts a
fluoroscopic exposure.
Pressing one of the buttons next to the selected function on the left of the display selects that function.
The logic level of the selected state is then changed by pressing the selection button again (low = off /
inactive, high = on / active).
For inputs, a logic “low” means that the input is ignored during that state. A Logic “high” requires
that the input be satisfied before the generator will advance to the next state. If multiple inputs are
programmed “high”, for example if REMOTE PREP and CONSOLE PREP are both high in the prep state,
then both inputs will need to be active before the generator will enter the prep state.
Setting an output to logic “low” causes the relay associated with that output to be de-energized
during the selected state. Logic “high” will cause the associated relay to be energized during the selected
state.
Certain functions have states indicated by a dotted line. The dotted line indicates invalid states,
which cannot be altered. Only states shown by a solid line can be changed. Refer to figure 3C-2 for
examples of a TYPICAL input configuration.
Page 3C-20
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.4 I/O Configuration (cont)
1 2 3 4 5
REMOTE EXP:
... ... ...
1 = STANDBY STATE (cannot be changed)
2 = PREP STATE (shown low/inactive)
3 = GEN RDY STATE (cannot be changed)
4 = RAD EXP STATE (shown high/active)
5 = FLUORO EXP STATE (cannot be changed)
FILE: ML_IOSTE.CDR
Figure 3C-2: Example of input states
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE I/O CONFIGURATION WORKSHEET BE FILLED IN FOR
EACH INPUT OR OUTPUT THAT IS PROGRAMMED. A BLANK FORM THAT SHOULD BE
PHOTOCOPIED IS LOCATED IN SECTION 3A.5.0. THIS WILL PROVIDE A RECORD OF THE
I/O CONFIGURATION FOR FUTURE REFERENCE.
NOTE:
Use these steps for programming the I/O functions
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu, select I/O CONFIGURATION.
Select the desired receptor to be programmed.
Select the desired input(s) or output(s) to program. Use the >>, <<, and RETURN
buttons to navigate through the screens.
Press the STATE button to cycle through and select the desired state to program.
Select the function to be programmed (example REMOTE EXP). Press the
selection button again to change the logic level for that state. States with dashed
lines (...) CANNOT BE CHANGED.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each state in the selected I/O function.
Repeat steps 3 to 6 for each input or output to be programmed.
When finished the I/O programming for the current receptor, press the << or EXIT
button(s) as required to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Reselect I/O CONFIGURATION, then select the next receptor to be programmed.
When finished programming all receptors, return to the GEN CONFIGURATION
menu as per step 8.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-21
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.5.5 AEC Setup
The AEC SETUP menu(s) allows the setting of AEC parameters for each AEC channel.
MENU 1 (All models)
* AEC SETUP*
CHANNEL:
1
LEFT FIELD:
CENTER FIELD:
RIGHT FIELD:
EXIT
YES
YES
YES
CHAMBER TYPE:
FILM SCREEN 1 :
FILM SCREEN 2 :
FILM SCREEN 3 :
>>
ION
YES
YES
YES
MENU 2 (Some models only). Do not adjust these values at this time.
* AEC SETUP*
C FIELD COMP:
L FIELD COMP:
R FIELD COMP:
<<
0
0
0
+
-
Definitions of AEC SETUP parameters as used in this section. Some of the functions listed are
optional.
Page 3C-22
•
CHANNEL
Selects the AEC channel to be programmed.
•
LEFT FIELD
Enables or disables the left field for the selected AEC channel
(NO is disabled).
•
CENTER FIELD
As above but for center field.
•
RIGHT FIELD
As above but for right field.
•
CHAMBER TYPE
Selects ION CHAMBER, S/S (Solid State), or APL (Apelem)
chamber for the selected AEC channel.
•
FILM SCREEN 1
Enables or disables the selection of FILM SCREEN 1 for that
AEC channel (NO is disabled).
•
FILM SCREEN 2
As above, but for film screen 2.
•
FILM SCREEN 3
As above, but for film screen 2.
•
R FIELD COMP
Allows AEC field matching by setting the output compensation
for the right AEC field.
•
C FIELD COMP
As above, but for the center AEC field.
•
L FIELD COMP
As above, but for the left AEC field.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.5.5 AEC Setup (Cont)
Use these steps to perform the AEC SETUP.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Action
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
Select the AEC channel to be setup. Pressing the CHANNEL button will scroll
through the available AEC channels.
Select the desired parameter to change for that AEC channel. DO NOT adjust
the R, C, or L field compensation settings at this time (if available); these are
part of the AEC calibration procedure.
Press the selection button for that parameter to toggle the available selections.
Repeat steps 2 to 4 to program each AEC channel.
When finished the AEC SETUP, press EXIT to return to the GEN
CONFIGURATION menu.
3C.5.6 AEC Calibration
For AEC calibration, refer to chapter 3D, AEC CALIBRATION.
3C.5.7 Fluoro Setup
For fluoro setup and calibration, refer to chapter 3E, ABS CALIBRATION.
3C.5.8 Tube Calibration
Refer to chapter 2, the section TUBE AUTO CALIBRATION.
3C.6.0 DAP SETUP
For setup and calibration of the optional DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter, refer to chapter 3F, DAP
SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
3C.7.0 DATA LINK
Used with the CPI GenWare® utility software. This allows for data communication with a computer in
order to download additional tube types, transfer APR data, edit APR text, run the A2EC2 ™ utility,
perform setup and calibration functions, and for other minor functions. Further documentation is included
with GenWare®.
A computer (i.e. laptop) and a 9 pin null modem cable with socket connectors (female) on both
ends are required to run this software and interface to the generator.
NOTE: The GenWare® program should be closed before exiting the DATA LINK function on the console.
Failure to do so may require that the console be switched off and then on again in order to reinitialize communication with the generator.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-23
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
3C.8.0 CONSOLE TEST MODE
A console diagnostics mode is available in the 31 X 42 (cm) console for Indico 100. This tests the CPU
and associated components, the LED’s and display drivers, and the selector buttons and input buffers.
This mode is only available with 31 X 42 cm consoles when running the console software from
flash memory. Refer to the section Console Software / EPROM in chapter 6 for details.
If the console software has been updated and is running from EPROM, the console diagnostics
mode will be available by temporarily selecting the FLASH BOOT position as described in chapter
6. If doing so, please ensure that the EPROM BOOT position is selected when finished.
•
To enter this special mode, press and hold button 5 (figure 3C-1) while pressing the generator
POWER ON button.
The part number and revision of the boot loader software will be displayed for approximately 5
seconds after power-up.
A special utility menu will be entered next, with the following options.
•
•
•
CONSOLE TEST
This is a basic console diagnostic test, which tests the
functions described above.
•
FLASH LOAD
This utility is used to load the operating software into flash
memory. DO NOT SELECT THIS OPTION UNLESS YOU
INTEND TO REPROGRAM THE FLASH MEMORY. YOU
MUST HAVE THE REQUIRED EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE TO
DO SO, ALONG WITH UPGRADED CONSOLE SOFTWARE.
CONTINUING WILL ERASE THE FLASH MEMORY,
DISABLING THE CONSOLE.
•
MAIN APPLICATION
Returns to the normal operating mode (non setup /
programming mode).
Use these steps to perform the CONSOLE TEST.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3C-24
Action
From the special UTILITY MENU, select CONSOLE TEST.
The logo will be displayed for several seconds in normal video, and then in
reverse video. The LCD contrast may be adjusted at this time.
After the logo display is finished, a prompt is displayed asking if you wish to
test the RAM. Press YES or NO to proceed with the RAM test.
Testing the RAM by pressing YES will erase the contents of the RAM. If
the RAM is erased, you will need to restore the console defaults, and use
GenWare® to restore the APR data.
At the prompt ARE YOU DOING ESS?, press NO.
A serial loop back test is performed next. Pressing START to test ch. A will test
serial channel A (the port connected to J5, the generator interface).
Testing serial channel B (the port connected to J2, the data link) requires a
special loop back connector. This may be made by simply connecting a wire
jumper from pin 2 to pin 3 of a 9 pin female “D” connector. Plug this “loop back”
connector into J2 on the console for this test.
Press START if using a loop back connector. Press SKIP to omit this test if a
loop back connector is not available.
The 7 segment LEDs in the radiographic and fluoroscopic display window are
tested next. The individual segments of the first LED will be lit in sequence.
Confirm that only one segment lights at one time on the LED being tested.
If all segments plus the decimal point light sequentially on the first LED being
tested, press PASSED to test the next LED.
Repeat step 7 to test all 7 segment LEDs.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
Programming the Generator
3C
3C.8.0 CONSOLE TEST MODE (Cont)
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
The backlight LEDs for the radiographic kV, mAs, mA, etc indicators are lit
next. The term “EYE” on the LCD display refers to the X-ray exposure indicator,
which should light during this sequence.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The backlight LEDs for the fluoroscopic ABS, kV, mA, etc indicators are lit next.
The term “REMOTE” on the LCD display refers to the optional remote fluoro
control, which is also tested at this time, if fitted.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The image receptor LEDs and the prep LED are tested next.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The technique selector LEDs, focus, and film screen LEDs are tested next.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
The fluoro magnification, dose, ABS, pulsed fluoro, fluoro exposure, and AEC
field select LEDs are tested next.
Press PASSED when finished this test.
All LEDs and displays are lit next.
Press YES or NO when finished this test.
All LEDs and displays are turned off next.
Press YES or NO when finished this test.
The buttons on the console are tested next. Press each button as prompted.
The external prep and external X-ray buttons (hand switch) are tested next.
Press the hand switch as requested. If no hand switch is used, the console
prep and X-ray button may be pressed at the “external” prep and exposure
prompt.
The fluoro foot switch is tested next. Press the foot switch if applicable, press
SKIP if a foot switch is not used.
The console prep and X-ray buttons are tested next. Press each button as
prompted.
Speaker 1 is tested next. The speaker volume will continuously be ramped
from 1 (low) to 8 (maximum).
Press PASSED when finished this test.
Speaker 2 is tested next. The speaker volume will continuously be ramped
from 1 (low) to 8 (maximum).
Press PASSED when finished this test.
This completes the console self test. Note any tests that failed, and discontinue
use of the suspected faulty equipment until repairs are made.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
Rev. H
Page 3C-25
3C
Programming the Generator
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 3C-26
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-05
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3D
AEC CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................................3D-2
3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time ................................................................................................3D-3
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times ..............................................................................................3D-4
3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp....................................................................................................................3D-5
3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range ................................................................................................................................3D-6
3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation ........................................................................................................................3D-7
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP ............................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet .................................................................................................................................3D-8
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation ..........................................................................................................................3D-10
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview) ........................................................................................................3D-12
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)...........................................................................................................3D-13
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) .......................................................................................................................3D-15
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) ...........................................................................................................3D-17
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) ..............................................3D-19
3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES: .........................................................................................................................3D-21
3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT........................................................................................................................................3D-22
3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE...................................................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)..........................................................................................................3D-23
3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet ..............................................................................................................3D-28
3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) ...........................................................................3D-30
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION......................................................................................................................3D-31
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION ..................................................................................................................................3D-35
3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION..........................................................................................................3D-38
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) .........................................................................................................3D-40
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC).......................................................................................................3D-43
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-1
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section covers interfacing and calibration of the various AEC board assemblies that are used in Millenia
and Indico 100 X-ray generators for ion chambers, solid state chambers, or PMT pickups; and in CMP 200
X-ray generators for ion and solid state chambers.
THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR SPECIFIC AEC DEVICE(S). REFER TO
THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT DESCRIPTION IN CHAPTER 1D (MILLENIA AND
INDICO 100), OR CHAPTER 1 (CMP 200) FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED AEC COMPATIBILITY OF
THIS GENERATOR.
The introduction in this section contains background information relevant to AEC operation. It is strongly
suggested that this be read and understood prior to beginning AEC calibration.
AEC calibration requires that a calibration curve be established which relates optical density to various kV
breakpoints.
The 75 kV knee breakpoint is calibrated at the slowest film screen combination. The remaining kV
breakpoints are calibrated next, then the breakpoint calibration is repeated at the next highest film speed,
with the highest film speed being calibrated last.
After breakpoint calibration, ± density setup is done at the slowest film speed, and then RLF
compensation and multiple spot compensation are done if desired.
Page 3D-2
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.1.1 AEC Limitations: Minimum Response Time
The X-ray generator (including the AEC pickup chamber) has a minimum response time from start of the
exposure command to a kV value sufficient to start X-rays. There is a further delay to the start of current flow
from the AEC device. Likewise, there is a minimum response time from when the AEC stop command is
issued to when the kV has actually decreased to the point that X-rays are no longer produced. Figure 3D-1
depicts this graphically.
Figure 3D-1: Relative timing of AEC ramp vs exposure command and kVp
•
1 to 2 is the time from the exposure start command to kVp start.
Time = 1 to 3 ms.
•
2 to 3 is the reaction time of the solid state / ion chamber to start a current flow.
Time = 1 to 3 ms.
•
3 to 4 is the required exposure time.
•
4 is the AEC stop command from the generator AEC circuits.
•
4 to 5 is the generator shut down time including cable discharge time etc.
Time = 1.5 to 3.0 ms.
•
1 to 6 is the total time the exposure switch is activated.
•
FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 AND 3D-11)
AEC TECHNIQUES SHOULD HAVE MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN 5 MS. FOR
ALL OTHER AEC BOARDS MINIMUM EXPOSURE TIMES SHOULD BE GREATER THAN 15
MS.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-3
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.2 AEC Limitations: Maximum Exposure Times
AEC exposures should normally be kept well under one second. When X-ray techniques are used that result
in longer exposures, the film density will not be correct due to failure of reciprocity of the film.
RLF (reciprocity law failure) compensation is provided to compensate for longer AEC exposure
times. An offset may be added to each AEC calibration set (each film screen combination) to increase the
AEC ON time as exposure time increases. RLF compensation is applied to the following range of times:
•
•
•
50 ms to 500 ms.
500 ms to 1000 ms.
1000 ms and above.
Care must be exercised when using table buckys with low kV values because most tabletops and grids
absorb considerable radiation in the range of 60 - 65 kVp. This will adversely affect AEC operation.
Figure 3D-2 shows the effect of kVp, optical density, and radiation. Note particularly the nonlinear change in
density at 85-90 kVp.
Figure 3D-2: kVp vs. optical density vs. dose
Page 3D-4
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.1.3 Film/Screen Response vs. kVp
Film screen response to kVp is not linear; therefore compensation must be provided in order to maintain
constant film density as kVp is changed for different anatomical studies. By selecting and calibrating various
kV breakpoints, the overall system response will be compensated such as to yield a constant film density.
Up to eight breakpoints per film screen combination are available. The eight breakpoints are spread
over three kV ranges as shown below:
•
•
•
Low kV:
Knee kV:
High kV:
50, 55, 65 kV
75 kV
85, 95, 110, 130 kV.
Refer to figure 3D-3.
Figure 3D-3: kV breakpoints vs relative density
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-5
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.1.4 AEC Calibration Range
Since the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators allow for up to three separate film screen
combinations to be calibrated, the following points must be considered:
•
The AEC board allows for a 0 to a maximum of 10 volt ramp at the comparator input. All AEC signals
must fit within this range (for all film / screens, densities, and techniques).
•
Most X-ray applications require the use of two or more different film screen combinations, all of which
will require different exposure doses.
•
Using the slowest film screen combination, the required film input dose will be determined.
•
Once this value is determined (during AEC calibration), the density calibration is performed to allow
100% (double the dose) and 50% (half the dose) values. These are typical values, and will determine
the maximum required range of the AEC reference voltage (the output from the D/A converter).
•
Figure 3D-4 illustrates the different windows required for various film screen combinations.
Figure 3D-4: Film/screen speed vs. D/A output
Page 3D-6
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.1.5 Multiple Spot Compensation
Separate density compensation is provided when a SFD (Spot Film Device) is used for multiple film splits.
This allows compensation when the SFD diaphragm is in the X-ray field.
An external output from the SFD must be provided when multiple spots are requested to enable this
function.
3D.1.6 A Typical R&F Room
Figure 3D-5 shows source-image distances and image receptors as used in a typical R&F installation.
Figure 3D-5: Typical R&F installation
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-7
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.0 PRECALIBRATION SETUP
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet
Before continuing, it is suggested that a copy of the table below be filled in with all required information.
Refer to the example AEC setup worksheet on the next page.
FUNCTION
Film/Screen
RECEPTOR 1
RECEPTOR 2
RECEPTOR 3
RECEPTOR 4
1.
2.
3.
Nominal optical density:
Grid ratio/SID:
Min - max kVp range:
± Density steps
Density dose
change
(per step)
+%:
-%:
Chamber type:
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?
Is film processing maintained?
Assigned receptor name:
Are all cassettes similar?
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-1: AEC setup worksheet
ALL RECEPTORS MUST HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF DENSITY STEPS AND THE SAME DENSITY DOSE
CHANGE PER STEP (DENSITY SETTINGS ARE COMMON TO ALL FILM SCREENS AND RECEPTORS).
Page 3D-8
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.2.1 AEC Setup Worksheet (Cont)
Note:
The example below is supplied for reference only. It does not represent an actual installation.
FUNCTION
Film/Screen
RECEPTOR 1
RECEPTOR 2
RECEPTOR 3
Lanex/reg
RECEPTOR 4
1.
Lanex/reg
Lanex/reg
PMT/I.I.
2.
Lanex/med
Lanex/chest
Nominal optical density:
1.2
1.1
1.4
Grid ratio/SID:
12:1
8:1
10:1
10:1
Min - max kVp range:
60 - 120
65 - 140
80 - 110
70 - 120
± Density steps
±8
±8
±8
±8
+%:
12.5
12.5
12.5
12.5
-%:
6.25
6.25
6.25
6.25
Chamber type:
Ion
Solid state
Ion
PMT
Regulatory AEC dose
requirements?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Is film processing maintained?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Assigned receptor name:
Table
Wall
SFD
Digital
Are all cassettes similar?
Yes
Yes
Yes
N/A
3.
Density dose
change
(per step)
Additional notes:
Additional notes:
Table 3D-2: Sample AEC setup worksheet
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-9
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.2 AEC Precalibration Checks
It is recommended that a copy of the form below be filled in with the required information before attempting
AEC calibration.
1.
Verify that the AEC chambers are mounted correctly
in the Bucky or spot film device. Note that some
chamber types must be physically isolated from
equipment ground, refer to figure 3D-6 as an
example.
CHECK:
2.
Verify that each AEC chamber / pickup is properly
connected to its intended input channel on the AEC
board.
CHECK:
Refer to AEC board pictorials, figure 3D-8 to 3D11 for input channel designations
3.
Make and type of AEC chamber/pickup:
AEC Ch 1_____________________________
AEC Ch 2_____________________________
AEC Ch 3_____________________________
AEC Ch 4_____________________________
4.
Verify signal grounding for the AEC chamber. The
only electrical ground should be at the AEC board in
the generator. This applies to the ground braid
(shield) for the AEC signal cable and to the ground
return conductor(s) in the AEC signal cable.
CHECK:
5.
Verify that the AEC board is fully inserted into the
mating edge connector (if applicable), that all
connections to the AEC board are secure, and that
the AEC board is securely fastened.
CHECK:
6.
Before calibrating, verify that the AEC system is
functioning. This includes the AEC chambers /
devices and the AEC circuits in the generator. Each
of the fields on the AEC device must be able to
terminate the exposure.
CHECK:
7.
Radiographic techniques to be performed with the
equipment (high kV chest, G.I. studies etc)?
8.
Normal exposure factors used by the customer
(typical mAs / kV range)?
Table 3D-3: Precalibration checklist
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation
Figure 3D-6 shows an installed AEC chamber. Note particularly the use of a suitable insulating material to
isolate the body of the chamber from the receptor ground. This is required for non-insulated AEC chambers.
Page 3D-10
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.2.3 AEC Chamber Installation (Cont)
Figure 3D-6: AEC chamber installation
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-11
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.4 AEC Pickup Connections (Overview)
Review the applicable sections of chapter 3 section B and C for interfacing AEC devices and programming
the image receptors to select the correct AEC device (or no AEC if desired). It should be ensured that each
receptor used for AEC has a Bucky or equivalent. A typical R&F room configuration will consist of the
following:
•
•
•
•
Table Bucky
Wall Bucky
Spot film Bucky
Aux - digital acquisition
Refer to Figure 3D-7 for typical AEC connections. This is a simplified view only, refer to figures 3D-8 to 3D11 for AEC board layouts used in Millenia and Indico 100 generators. Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board
location in your generator.
Figure 3D-7: AEC pickup connections
Page 3D-12
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of solid state chambers (i.e. Comet,
Ziehm, Gilardoni). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those AEC chamber
types.
This board will be fitted with 6 pin circular connectors (J1 to J4) or with 5 pin in-line connectors (J11
to J14), depending on the application.
Figure 3D-8: Dedicated solid state AEC board
AEC board input assignment:
•
•
•
•
Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device
Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:
•
•
•
•
R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-13
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.5 AEC Board (Solid State Chambers) Cont
The following tables show the pin outs for both the 6 pin circular connectors and for the 5 pin in-line
connectors on the AEC board in figure 3D-8.
FUNCTION
Anode
Anode
Anode
Cathode, left
Cathode, right
Cathode, middle
Ground
PIN
1
NOTE: PINS 1, 2, AND 3 ON THE
2
CIRCULAR CONNECTOR ARE
3
ALL CONNECTED IN PARALLEL.
4
5
6
Connector shell
Table 3D-4: Pin outs for 6 pin circular connector
FUNCTION
Anode
Cathode, left
Cathode, right
Cathode, middle
Ground
PIN
2
3
5
4
1
Table 3D-5: Pin outs for 5 pin in-line connector
If the AEC input signal has excessive electrical noise superimposed on the signal, it is suggested that
jumpers JW1 to JW4 as appropriate be temporarily installed. If this improves the signal to noise ratio, the
jumper(s) should be left in. Excessive signal to noise ratio generally shows up as inconsistent AEC exposure
times at low mAs values.
It is the responsibility of the installer to determine the need for these jumper(s).
Page 3D-14
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers)
The AEC board shown below is compatible with various makes / models of ion chambers (i.e. AID, GE,
Vacutec, Philips Amplimat, etc). This AEC board is used in various models of generators requiring those
AEC chamber types.
This board will be fitted with 9 pin D connectors (J11 to J14), or with 12 pin in-line connectors (J1 to
J4), depending on the application.
CPI CANADA INC
Made in Canada
AEC DEDICATED ION CHAMBER
R79
J14
J5
JW2 JW1
J4
J13
JW4 JW3
J3
J12
JW6 JW5
J2
J11
R11 R12 R13 R14
JW8 JW7
R1
J1
R2
R3
R4
ML_IONBD.CDR
Figure 3D-9: Dedicated ion chamber AEC board
AEC board input assignment:
•
•
•
•
Ch 1 = J1 / J11 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 = J2 / J12 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 = J3 / J13 - Spot Film Device
Ch 4 = J4 / J14 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:
•
•
•
•
R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-15
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.6 AEC Board (Ion Chambers) Cont
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
•
•
•
•
R11 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.
R12 is used for channel 2 short exposure time compensation.
R13 is used for channel 3 short exposure time compensation.
R14 is used for channel 4 short exposure time compensation.
R79 adjusts the output of the high voltage bias supply. This is only fitted on versions of this board intended
for use with ion chambers that require a separate high voltage bias supply. R79 adjusts the value of the
+300 / +500 VDC, and the +45 VDC outputs, and should be set as per the ion chamber manufacturer
specifications.
The following tables show the pin outs for both the 9 pin D connectors and for the 12 pin in-line connectors
on the AEC board in figure 3D-9. The 9 pin connectors are compatible with most models of AID ionization
chambers. However, the installer should verify compatibility of the pin outs with the chamber(s) being used.
FUNCTION
+300 VDC output
PIN
1
Left / right field select
Middle field select
Start command output
Signal input
Right / left field select
-12 VDC output
+12 VDC output
Ground
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
NOTE
Only provided on configurations of this board that
require the +300 VDC output.
See note below.
See note below.
Table 3D-6: Pin outs for 9 pin D connector
NOTE:
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select
signal to pin 6.
FUNCTION
+500 VDC output
+ or - 300 VDC output
+45 VDC output
+12 VDC output
-12 VDC output
-24 VDC output
Ground
Start command output
Left field select
Middle field select
Right field select
Signal input
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE
The +500, + or -300, and +45 VDC outputs are
only provided on configurations of this board
designed to interface to ion chambers requiring
these voltage outputs.
+12, -12, -24 VDC outputs are typically used as
the DC supply for a pre-amplifier, often part of
the ion chamber. -24 VDC is not available on
CMP 200.
Table 3D-7: Pin outs for 12 pin in-line connector
Page 3D-16
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board)
The AEC board shown below is factory configured to be compatible with most makes / models of AEC
chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also contains a low current, high voltage supply
for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on the upper board, which also contains the
connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-10: Universal AEC board
AEC board input / output assignment:
•
•
•
•
•
Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:
•
•
•
•
R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
R26 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
R27 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
R28 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.
Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-17
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont
The following table shows the pin outs for the 12 pin connectors J1 to J4 on the AEC board in figure 3D-10
and 3D-11. The pins on J7 are all connected in parallel, thus the PMT high voltage may be taken from any of
the pins on that connector.
The connections to the AEC pickup chamber vary considerably between ion chambers and solid
state chambers. For clarity two tables are shown below, the first for ion chambers and the second for solid
state chambers.
FUNCTION
+500 VDC output
+300 VDC output
+50 VDC output
+12 VDC output
-12 VDC output
-24 VDC output
Ground
Start command output
Left field select
Middle field select
Right field select
Signal input
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE
+500, +300, +50 VDC outputs are provided for
ion chamber use if required. +12, -12, -24 VDC
outputs are typically used as the DC supply for
a pre-amplifier, often part of the ion chamber.
The start command, and left, middle, right
field select outputs are jumper configured to
be active high or active low as per the AEC
chamber requirements. The signal input is
jumper configured to accept a positive going
or negative going ramp or DC signal as per
the AEC chamber output.
Table 3D-8: Ion chamber connections
FUNCTION
+500 VDC output
+300 VDC output
+50 VDC output
+12 VDC output
-12 VDC output
-24 VDC output
Ground
Start
Left
Middle
Right
Signal input
PIN
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
NOTE
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Connect pin 8 to pin 7 (ground). Connect the
common anodes for left, middle, right to pin 8.
Connect cathode (left) to LEFT, cathode middle
to MIDDLE, and cathode right to RIGHT.
Cable shield (if used) connects to pin 8.
Not used for solid state AEC chambers
Table 3D-9: Solid state chamber connections
Page 3D-18
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.2.7 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board) Cont
R10, R19 and R24 adjust the output voltage from the high voltage power supply on the AEC interface board
(the upper board on the universal AEC board assembly in figure 3D-10 and 3D-11). This high voltage supply
generates the PMT high voltage, up to approximately -1000 VDC available at J7, and also the nominal +500,
+300 and +50 VDC supplies noted in table 3D-8. The +500, +300 and +50 VDC supplies are available to
bias ion chambers if needed and are adjustable as defined below.
These potentiometers are switched into the circuit electronically by logic circuits connected to the
AEC channel select commands. Only one potentiometer will be active at any given time, the condition under
which each potentiometer is active is described below, along with the function of that potentiometer.
•
R10 adjusts the high voltage supply output for the PMT when ABS operation is selected. This is
described in chapter 3E.
•
R24 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected. AEC channels 1, 2,
3 are normally used with an AEC chamber.
R24 will be used to adjust the +500, +300 and +50 VDC bias voltage outputs if required for ion
chamber(s) connected to AEC channels 1, 2 or 3. Refer to the AEC chamber manufacturers
recommendations to adjust this voltage.
•
R19 adjusts the high voltage supply output when AEC channel 4 is selected. AEC channel 4 is normally
used for digital acquisition or spot film work using a PMT pickup for AEC control. This will typically be the
same PMT used for ABS control during fluoroscopy operation.
Refer to 3D.4.0 for further details if using a PMT for AEC control on AEC channel 4.
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation)
The AEC board shown below has short AEC time compensation, and is factory configured to be compatible
with most makes / models of AEC chambers (ion and solid state) on the market. This assembly also
contains a low current, high voltage supply for a photo multiplier tube (PMT). The PMT supply is located on
the upper board, which also contains the connectors to interface to the AEC pickup device(s).
Figure 3D-11: Universal AEC board with short AEC time compensation
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-19
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.2.8 AEC Board (Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation) Cont
In order to clearly show the adjustment pots on the lower (AEC) board, the upper board which
contains the AEC and PMT interface connectors and the high voltage supply is shown shifted from
its actual position.
AEC board input / output assignment:
•
•
•
•
•
Ch 1 = J1 - Table Radiographic Bucky.
Ch 2 = J2 - Vertical Wall Bucky.
Ch 3 = J3 - Spot Film Device.
Ch 4 = J4 - Aux. (Extra Bucky, Digital Acquisition, etc.).
J7 = High voltage output for the PMT (if used)
The following potentiometers are used for AEC gain adjustment:
•
•
•
•
R1 is used for channel 1 gain adjustment.
R2 is used for channel 2 gain adjustment.
R3 is used for channel 3 gain adjustment.
R4 is used for channel 4 gain adjustment.
The following potentiometers are used for short AEC exposure time compensation:
•
•
•
•
R91 is used for channel 1 short exposure time compensation.
R92 is used for channel 2 short exposure time compensation.
R93 is used for channel 3 short exposure time compensation.
R94 is used for channel 4 short exposure time compensation.
Refer to tables 3D-8 and 3D-9 for the connector pin outs. Refer to the end of subsection 3D.2.7 for the
procedure for adjusting R10, R19, and R24.
Page 3D-20
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.3.0 PRECALIBRATION NOTES:
This section contains information that must be understood and confirmed prior to and / or during AEC
calibration.
CAUTION:
THE PROCEDURES IN THESE SECTIONS REQUIRE X-RAY EXPOSURES. TAKE ALL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
SHOULD AN IMPROPER TECHNIQUE BE SELECTED, OR AN AEC FAULT OCCUR CAUSING NO
AEC FEEDBACK SIGNAL TO THE GENERATOR, THE EXPOSURE WILL TERMINATE IF THE RAMP
VOLTAGE FAILS TO REACH 4% OF THE EXPECTED RAMP VOLTAGE WHEN THE EXPOSURE TIME
REACHES 20% OF THE SELECTED BACK UP TIME.
•
When using PMTs or photo diodes for AEC from the output of an image intensifier, there is normally
no need to iterate all the kV break points. It is usually sufficient to use the 75 kV breakpoint
calibration value for that film screen at all kV breakpoints. If doing this, the calibration values should
be confirmed at all kV breakpoints using the acquired digital images.
•
During AEC calibration, all AEC exposures should be done using mA values such that the
exposures are in the 30 to 100 ms range UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE.
•
During AEC calibration, always ensure that the central ray is centered relative to the image receptor.
•
Prior to placing the absorbers, ensure that the collimator is opened sufficiently to irradiate ALL fields
on the AEC pickup device.
•
The recommended absorber in table 3D-12 is water. This should be in a plastic container of uniform
thickness. Lexan of a similar thickness is also a suitable absorber.
•
Ensure that the absorber is positioned to fully cover the X-ray field. The absorber must extend a
minimum of 3/8 in. (10 mm) beyond the X-ray field.
•
All components and assemblies used during AEC calibration must be those that will be used during
procedures, and must be positioned as they will be in actual use of the X-ray room.
•
The generator must be known to be calibrated before proceeding.
•
During AEC calibration, if exposure times do not change if the mA is varied, it may be that the input
signal level to the AEC board may be too high. If this is experienced, check the ramp voltage at the
output of the first gain stage (the first operational amplifier output) on the AEC board for the subject
AEC channel. This voltage must never exceed 10 V. If this voltage does exceed 10 V, reduce the
input signal level as required.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-21
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.4.0 AEC USING A PMT
This section applies if a PMT is to be used for AEC control on AEC channel 4. AEC channels 1, 2, and 3 (as
applicable) should be calibrated first (sections 3D.6.0 to 3D.12.0), before calibrating AEC channel 4.
WARNING:
SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR BEFORE CONNECTING A PMT, AND USE APPROPRIATE
HIGH VOLTAGE PRECAUTIONS WHEN MEASURING THE PMT HIGH VOLTAGE.
Figure 3D-12: Connections for PMT AEC
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 3D-22
Action
Connect the PMT output to J7 on the generator interface board (the ABS input) as
shown in figure 3D-12. If the “PMT for AEC on channel 4” configuration was factory
ordered, the generator will be pre-wired as shown above. The ABS input is at J7-12, and
the signal will be divided for the AEC board via the resistor from J7-12 to J7-10.
Appropriate high voltage shielded cable should be used for the PMT signal connections.
Set the PMT voltage to approximately -650 VDC for AEC operation using R19 on the
AEC interface board. AEC channel 4 must be selected in order for R19 to be active.
USE ONLY TP5 ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD (FIGURE 3D-10, 3D-11) FOR
THE HV METER GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT
THE GROUND LEAD FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT
ATTEMPT TO MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
Configure AEC channel 4 as per 3D.6.0 steps 6 to 14, but use the following settings in
the AEC SETUP menu: Select ION chamber, and enable FILM SCREEN 1 only, and
CENTER FIELD only. If AEC SETUP menu screen 2 is available, set C FIELD COMP to
0 (this is model dependent, refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C).
Enter the calibration value 45 into EACH of the kV breakpoints. The procedure for
setting the 75 kV knee breakpoint is detailed in 3D.6.0, step 16. The remaining
breakpoints are set in a similar manner (refer to the balance of 3D.6.0 for details on
accessing those breakpoint settings).
Adjust the channel 4 gain adjustment potentiometer on the AEC board to achieve the
desired I.I. input dose at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, using absorber thickness per table
3D-12.
The PMT voltage that was set in step 2 may need to be adjusted up or down if the gain
adjustment potentiometer does not provide the desired adjustment range in step 5.
Repeat the exposures at other kV breakpoints that cover the desired kV operating
range, checking the I.I. input dose at each kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per
table 3D-12.
Readjust the breakpoint calibration values in step 7, if necessary, to achieve the desired
I.I. input dose at those kV values. DO NOT READJUST THE AEC GAIN POT OR PMT
VOLTAGE.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.5.0 AEC FIELD BALANCE
If your generator does NOT have AEC SETUP menu 2 (see the section AEC SETUP in chapter 3C),
follow the AEC chamber manufacturers recommendations for AEC field balancing.
If your generator has AEC SETUP menu 2, follow the AEC chamber manufacturers
recommendations for AEC field balancing if available. If the AEC chamber has no provision for AEC
field balancing, follow the steps below.
PERFORM THE FOLLOWING STEPS IMMEDIATELY BEFORE DOING AEC CALIBRATION AT
THE 75 kV KNEE BREAKPOINT IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS:
1.
Enter AEC SETUP menu 2, and ensure that each of the field compensation values is set
to 0.
2.
When set up to do dose measurements at the 75 kV knee breakpoint, evaluate the AEC
field balance by measuring the dose at the film plane during an AEC exposure as each
of the three AEC fields is individually selected.
3.
If the AEC chamber field balance is not acceptable, go to AEC SETUP menu 2 and
adjust the right or left compensation values up or down as required. Do not adjust the
middle field (C) compensation value.
4.
Repeat steps 2 and 3. The right and left AEC field compensations are adjusted to match
the middle field. This process may need to be repeated several times until the three
AEC fields are suitably balanced.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY)
Figure 3D-13: Equipment setup for table Bucky AEC calibration
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-23
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
Step
Action
SETUP FOR AEC CALIBRATION
IF THE AEC BOARD BEING CALIBRATED HAS SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION
(FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11), THE SHORT EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION MUST FIRST BE
DISABLED.
TO DO THIS, ADJUST ALL SHORT AEC EXPOSURE TIME COMPENSATION
POTENTIOMETERS TO ZERO, I.E. SUCH THAT THE WIPERS ON EACH POT ARE GROUNDED.
VERIFY THE CORRECT SETTINGS BY USING AN OHMMETER ON LOW OHMS RANGE AND
ENSURING A NEAR ZERO OHMS READING FROM THE WIPER OF EACH SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POT TO GROUND. REFER TO TABLE 3D-14 FOR THE SHORT AEC TIME
COMPENSATION POTENTIOMETER DESIGNATIONS.
FAILURE TO PRESET THESE POTS WILL RESULT IN DIFFICULTY IN PERFORMING
AEC CALIBRATION.
1.
Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-13.
2.
Align the tube stand and table Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
3.
Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
4.
Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
place the probe on the table top. Ensure that the R-probe is located as close as possible
to the central ray, but not blocking any pickup areas on the AEC device. The R meter
must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
5.
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
6.
Place the generator into the programming mode. Refer to section 3C.1.1.
7.
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
8.
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC SETUP.
9.
Set up the AEC parameters in the AEC SETUP menu FOR EACH ACTIVE AEC
CHANNEL. Refer to AEC SETUP in chapter 3C.
10.
Set up the image receptors in the RECEPTOR SETUP menu such that each receptor
has the desired AEC channel assigned to it. Refer to RECEPTOR SETUP in chapter
3C.
11.
In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, set MEMORY to NO for each image receptor. This
will ensure that the next receptor being calibrated will not remember the techniques from
the previous receptor.
The MEMORY function may be reset as desired after AEC calibration is completed.
12.
In the RECEPTOR SETUP menu, ensure that the AEC BACKUP MAS and AEC
BACKUP MS are set sufficiently high that the generator backup timer will not terminate
the exposure.
13.
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select AEC CALIBRATION.
14.
From the AEC CALIBRATION menu select FILM SCREEN 1 (the slowest film screen
combination).
CAUTION:
DURING THE FOLLOWING CALIBRATION PROCEDURE, BE SURE THAT THE SELECTED
TECHNIQUES WILL NOT OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. USE CAUTION WHEN REPEATING
EXPOSURES AS THIS MAY QUICKLY OVERLOAD THE X-RAY TUBE. MOST X-RAY TUBE
MANUFACTURERS RECOMMEND NO MORE THAN TWO HIGH SPEED STARTS PER
MINUTE.
NOTE:
BE SURE TO USE THE SAME CASSETTE FOR EACH EXPOSURE AT THAT FILM SPEED.
Page 3D-24
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
NOTE:
FOR THE CMP 200 AND THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LCD SCREEN DETAILS
NOT RELEVANT TO AEC CALIBRATION WILL DIFFER SLIGHTLY FROM THE EXAMPLES IN
THIS SECTION. HOWEVER, THE AEC CALIBRATION MENUS WILL APPEAR AS SHOWN IN
THIS SECTION.
RLF COMPENSATION AND MULTI-SPOT COMPENSATION IS NOT AVAILABLE ON CMP200.
The following screens are used for AEC calibration
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
50KV: 84.0:
55KV: 78.0:
65KV: 66.0:
75KV: 54.0
3200MS <<
AEC CAL, F/S 1*
*TUBE?
0%HU
110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION
MULT. SPOT COMP:
3200MS <<
AEC CAL, F/S 1*
Step
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
85KV: 42.8
95KV: 38.0
+
>>
+
-
0%
Action
75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the table Bucky image receptor.
Select the 75 kV knee breakpoint and enter the value 45 using the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display.
Select the appropriate mA for the first film speed being calibrated per table 3D-12,
remembering that the slowest film screen used in that installation must be calibrated first
(example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select large focus, center field.
Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
Referring to table 3D-11, select the estimated dose required for the film speed being
calibrated i.e. 1025 ± 25 µR (see note on next page regarding conversion of µR to µGy if
desired) at the 75 kV knee breakpoint for 100 speed film.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on the R-probe being located at
the film plane. If the probe was placed in front of the grid the dose values shown
in the tables must be increased accordingly. The dose in front of the grid will
typically be approximately double the dose at the film plane.
Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
• CHANNEL 1 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE TABLE
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD.
• REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-25
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
AEC BOARD
Solid State (Fig 3D-8)
Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9)
Universal (Fig 3D-10)
Universal (Fig 3D-11)
CHANNEL 1
R1
R1
R1
R1
CHANNEL 2
R2
R2
R26
R2
CHANNEL 3
R3
R3
R27
R3
CHANNEL 4
R4
R4
R28
R4
Table 3D-10: AEC board gain pot designations
FILM SPEED
100
200
400
800
FILM PLANE DOSE @ 75 kV
1025 ± 25 uR
550 ± 25 uR
260 ± 12 uR
135 ± 12 uR
Table 3D-11: Film speed vs. approximate dose @ 75 kV
These are APPROXIMATE dose inputs to the film cassette plane at an SID of 40 in. (100 cm), using a
grid with a 12:1 ratio.
NOTE: To convert from µR to µGy divide the value in µR by 114.5. This will give the value in µGy (for
example 114.5 µR = 1 µGy).
Step
21.
Action
Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique as in the previous step, expose the film and develop it.
22.
Measure the optical density. The desired value should have been previously recorded in
a copy of table 3D-1.
23.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 20) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
24.
Once the desired film density is achieved, record the mAs, dose, calibration number and
O.D. in a copy of table 3D-13.
FOR EACH BREAKPOINT IN THE REMAINDER OF THIS SECTION, START WITH THE
APPROXIMATE DOSE AS PER TABLE 3D-12. AFTER THAT DOSE IS ACHIEVED, A FILM MUST
BE EXPOSED AND THE O.D. VERIFIED. FURTHER DOSE ITERATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED TO
ACHIEVE THE DESIRED OPTICAL DENSITY.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT AFTER THE 75KV KNEE
BREAKPOINT IS CALIBRATED. DOSE / DENSITY ADJUSTMENTS WILL ONLY BE DONE
BY ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION VALUES FOR THE OTHER KV BREAKPOINTS.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Page 3D-26
55 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Change the absorber thickness per table 3D-12. As before, ensure that the absorber
fully blocks the X-ray field.
Select the 55 kV breakpoint.
Make an exposure and note the dose. Use mA values as per table 3D-12.
Adjust the 55 kV calibration numbers using the + or - buttons such that the actual dose
is equal to the target dose at 55 kV for the selected film speed per table 3D-12.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
3D
AEC Calibration
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
100 speed film screen
Break point
75 kV knee pt.
55 kV
50 kV
65 kV
110 kV
130 kV
85 kV
95 kV
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
1025 µ/R
1808 µ/R
1832 µ/R
1436 µ/R
1088 µ/R
848 µ/R
1060 µ/R
1008 µ/R
mAs
59.2 mAs
54 mAs
128 mAs
44 mAs
24 mAs
16 mAs
54 mAs
44 mAs
Generator mA
320 mA
320 mA
320 mA
320 mA
200 mA
200 mA
320 mA
320 mA
Generator BUT mAs
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
320 mAs (MAX)
200 speed film screen
Break point
75 kVp knee pt.
55 kVp
50 kVp
65 kVp
110 kVp
130 kVp
85 kVp
95 kVp
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
518 µ/R
904 µ/R
916 µ/R
718 µ/R
544 µ/R
484 µ/R
530 µ/R
504 µ/R
mAs
30 mAs
26 mAs
64 mAs
22 mAs
12 mAs
8 mAs
27 mAs
22 mAs
Generator mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
250 mA
Generator BUT mAs
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
250 mAs (MAX)
400 speed film screen
Break Point
75 kVp knee pt.
55 kVp
50 kVp
65 kVp
110 kVp
130 kVp
85 kVp
95 kVp
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
259 µ/R
452 µ/R
458 µ/R
359 µ/R
272 µ/R
424 µ/R
265 µ/R
252 µ/R
mAs
14.8 mAs
13 mAs
32 mAs
11 mAs
6 mAs
4 mAs
13.5 mAs
11 mAs
Generator mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
200 mA
Generator BUT mAs
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
200 mAs (MAX)
800 speed film screen
Break Point
75 kVp knee pt.
55 kVp
50 kVp
65 kVp
110 kVp
130 kVp
85 kVp
95 kVp
Absorber
15 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
10 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
25 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
20 cm H2O
Dose
129 µ/R
226 µ/R
229µ/R
179 µ/R
136 µ/R
212 µ/R
132 µ/R
126 µ/R
mAs
7.4 mAs
6.5 mAs
16 mAs
5.5 mAs
3 mAs
2 mAs
6.7 mAs
5.5 mAs
Generator mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
100 mA
Generator BUT mAs
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
120 mAs (MAX)
Table 3D-12: Breakpoint calibration factors
2
For SID’s other than 40 in. (100 cm) multiply the dose by the factor [new SID / 40 in. (100 cm)]
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-27
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
3D.6.1 Break point calibration worksheet
Record the final measurements in a copy of the table below. The final measurements are those obtained
AFTER films have been developed to verify the correct O.D. at each breakpoint.
FILM SCREEN 1
SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
FILM SCREEN 2
SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
FILM SCREEN 3
SPEED =
#1 BK. POINT = 75 kV
#2 BK. POINT = 55 kV
#3 BK. POINT = 50 kV
#4 BK. POINT = 65 kV
#5 BK. POINT = 110 kV
#6 BK. POINT = 130 kV
#7 BK. POINT = 85 kV
#8 BK. POINT = 95 kV
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
mAs
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
DOSE =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
CAL. NO. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
O.D. =
Table 3D-13: Breakpoint worksheet
Page 3D-28
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
Step
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
Action
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
Measure the optical density. The optical density should be as per step 22.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the 55 kV calibration
number using the + or - buttons, then repeat the previous two steps.
DO NOT READJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT.
Once the desired film density is achieved, record the required values in a copy of table
3D-13.
50 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
If special techniques are NOT used which require the 50 kV range, simply enter the 55
kV calibration number into the 50 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
Note that at approximately 55 kV and under, the film screen sensitivity becomes too low
for practical AEC operation when used with a Bucky.
If the 50 kV range IS used, the 50 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select
the 50 kV breakpoint. The 50 kV step will use the same absorber as used for the 55 kV
step.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 50 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 50 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.
65 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 65 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 65 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 65 kV breakpoint, substituting 65 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
IN THE FOLLOWING STEPS, SELECT >> AND << AS REQUIRED TO NAVIGATE
BETWEEN THE TWO BREAKPOINT SCREENS (SCREEN 1 LISTS BREAKPOINTS
50 KV TO 95 KV, SCREEN 2 SHOWS BREAKPOINTS 110 AND 130 KV).
110 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 110 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 110 kV
breakpoint. Use the appropriate mA for this breakpoint as per table 3D-12.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 110 kV breakpoint, substituting 110 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
130 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
If special high kV techniques are NOT used which require the 130 kV range, enter the
110 kV calibration number into the 130 kV breakpoint using the + and - buttons.
If the 130 kV range IS used, the 130 kV breakpoint must be calibrated. To do this, select
the 130 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 130 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 130 kV breakpoint if desired, substituting 130 kV
where applicable in place of 55 kV.
85 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 85 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 85 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 85 kV breakpoint, substituting 85 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-29
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.6.0 AEC CALIBRATION (TABLE BUCKY) Cont
Step
46.
47.
48.
Step
49.
50.
Action
95 KV BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select the 95 kV breakpoint. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 95 kV
breakpoint.
Repeat steps 27 to 32 to calibrate the 95 kV breakpoint, substituting 95 kV where
applicable in place of 55 kV.
Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Action
FILM SCREEN 2 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select FILM SCREEN 2.
Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:
WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 2, DO
NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY
BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.
FILM SCREEN 2 MUST BE THE NEXT HIGHEST FILM SPEED AFTER FILM
SCREEN 1.
Step
51.
52.
Action
FILM SCREEN 3 BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION:
Select FILM SCREEN 3.
Repeat steps 16 to 48 as described for film screen 1 except:
WHEN CALIBRATING THE 75 KV KNEE BREAKPOINT FOR FILM SCREEN 3, DO
NOT ADJUST THE AEC BOARD GAIN POT. DOSE ADJUSTMENTS MUST ONLY
BE MADE BY VARYING THE BREAKPOINT CALIBRATION NUMBERS.
FILM SCREEN 3 MUST BE THE HIGHEST FILM SPEED.
3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE)
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Page 3D-30
Action
THIS SECTION ONLY APPLIES FOR AEC BOARDS WITH SHORT AEC EXPOSURE
TIME COMPENSATION (FIGURE 3D-9 OR 3D-11) IF AEC EXPOSURES LESS
THAN APPROXIMATELY 15 MS ARE REQUIRED.
Select the image receptor to be short AEC time compensated, i.e. table Bucky.
Select the highest film speed used on the selected receptor, and then select the 75 kV
breakpoint.
Set the mA per table 3D-12 for the film speed being used. Reinstall the absorber as per
table 3D-12 for the 75 kV breakpoint.
Make an exposure and confirm the dose (or mAs) readings as previously recorded in
table 3D-13.
Reduce the absorber thickness such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 10 ms.
Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as previously recorded (step 4). The
short AEC time compensation potentiometer designations are given in table 3D-14.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.7.0 SHORT AEC TIME COMPENSATION (IF APPLICABLE) Cont
AEC BOARD
Ion Chamber (Fig 3D-9)
Universal (Fig 3D-11)
CHANNEL 1
R11
R91
CHANNEL 2
R12
R92
CHANNEL 3
R13
R93
CHANNEL 4
R14
R94
Table 3D-14: Short AEC time compensation pot designations
Step
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Action
Reduce the absorber thickness again such as to decrease the AEC exposure time to
approximately 6 ms (but not less).
Adjust the short AEC time compensation pot for the AEC channel being calibrated such
that the dose (or mAs) is approximately the same as it was in step 6.
The short AEC time compensation adjustments affect the AEC calibration at longer
exposure times. Therefore, it may now be necessary to readjust the gain pot for the AEC
channel being calibrated to restore the dose (or mAs) values to the values previously
recorded in table 3D-13. Ensure that the absorber thickness and mA values are as per
table 3D-12 when readjusting the AEC gain pot.
Films should be exposed and developed, and the O.D. checked at the 75 kV breakpoint
at AEC exposure times of approximately 6 ms and approximately 100 ms. If the film
density is not acceptable at both short and long AEC exposure times, it will be
necessary to iterate the adjustments of both the short AEC time compensation pot and
the AEC gain pot by repeating steps 3 to 8.
Repeat steps 1 to 10 for each image receptor (AEC channel) to be short AEC time
compensated.
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION
The following screens are used for density calibration
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
-8: -7: -6: -5: 62%
3200MS EXIT
*DENS. SETUP*
*TUBE?
0%HU
-4: 50%
-3: 37%
-2: 25%
-1: 12%
3200MS <<
*DENS. SETUP*
+
>>
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
+
>>
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-31
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)
*TUBE?
0%HU
+1: 12%
+2: 25%
+3: 37%
+4: 50%
3200MS <<
*DENS. SETUP*
*TUBE?
0%HU
+5: 62%
+6: +7: +8: 3200MS <<
*DENS. SETUP*
+
>>
+
RETURN
Please note the following points regarding density calibration:
•
Up to eight density plus and eight density minus steps are available. If ± 8 density steps are not
required, the unwanted density steps may be programmed out per the procedure below. For example, if
only ± 5 density steps are desired, then density steps ± 6, 7, 8 may be deprogrammed.
•
Once the desired number of ± density steps are known, the relative minimum and maximum dose
values must be determined. Typically the minimum density step will result in half (50%) of the nominal
dose and the maximum density step will typically give double the nominal dose (100% increase). The
nominal dose is the value that was recorded at 0 density in table 3D-13.
•
The relative dose change per density step must be determined next. To do this, note the relative
minimum and maximum dose as determined above (i.e. 50% at min density and 100% increase at max
density), then calculate the number of - density steps and the number of + density steps that will be
required.
The relative dose change between density steps will then be the minimum density (i.e. 50) divided
by the number of density minus steps or the maximum density (i.e. 100) divided by the number of
density plus steps. This will yield the required dose increment for each density minus step and for each
density plus step respectively.
For ± 8 density steps, this gives a dose decrease of 6.25% per density minus step (8 steps x 6.25%
per step = 50% dose at -8 density) or a dose increase of 12.5% per density plus step (8 steps x 12.5%
per step = 100% dose increase at +8 density).
Refer to table 3D-15 for two typical examples of density steps vs. calibration numbers. For 8 minus
density steps the dose decrease is 6.25% per step, and for 8 + density steps the dose increase is 12.5%
per step as per the example calculation above.
For 5 minus density steps the dose decrease is 10% per step, and for 5 + density steps the dose
increase is 20% per step.
Page 3D-32
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)
DENSITY
STEP
-8
-7
-6
-5
-4
-3
-2
-1
+1
+2
+3
+4
+5
+6
+7
+8
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 8
DENSITY
CALIBRATION NUMBER (- 5
DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +8
STEP
DENSITY = HALF THE DOSE, +5
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
DENSITY = DOUBLE THE DOSE)
50
44
38
31
-5
50
25
-4
40
19
-3
30
13
-2
20
6
-1
10
0 DENSITY: SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
13
+1
20
25
+2
40
38
+3
60
50
+4
80
63
+5
99
75
88
99
Table 3D-15: Example density values
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Action
Reselect FILM SCREEN 1. Use absorber thickness per table 3D-12 for the 75 kV
breakpoint.
Reselect the 75 kV knee breakpoint.
Select << to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Select DENSITY SETUP.
Referring to table 3D-13, note the dose at 75 kV for film screen 1. This will be referred to
as the 0 density dose.
Select the highest density minus step desired i.e. - 8 from the density setup menu. If it is
not intended to use this step, select the highest density minus step to be used i.e. - 5,
then set the unused steps to - to disable those steps. To disable density steps, press the
- button to scroll down until the - symbol is displayed.
Set the calibration number for the highest density minus step to the desired relative
density value (example 50, this will give approximately 1/2 the 0 density dose).
Make an exposure and confirm that the measured dose is approximately the desired
value.
If the measured dose is not as expected, adjust the calibration number for that density
step and repeat step 8.
Select the next density step (i.e. - 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number for
that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and the notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
Repeat the previous step for each remaining density minus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps in this procedure.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-33
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.8.0 AEC DENSITY CALIBRATION (Cont)
Step
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3D-34
Action
Set the calibration number for the highest density plus step to the desired relative
density value (example 100, this will result in approximately double the 0 density dose).
Repeat step 8 and 9.
Select the next lowest density step (i.e. 7) and enter the appropriate calibration number
for that step. Refer to table 3D-15 and notes preceding table 3D-15. Repeat steps 8 and
9.
Repeat the previous step for each remaining density plus step. Use the >> and <<
buttons to navigate through the DENS SETUP menu in order to access all the density
steps.
When the density setup is complete and verified via dose measurements, use the <<
and EXIT buttons to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION
The following points should be noted regarding RLF compensation. RLF compensation is normally only
needed if special techniques are used which result in AEC exposures greater than 100 ms.
•
If perfect, film would provide linear density changes with linearly increasing exposure times. In reality, at
longer exposures, film effectively becomes slower. This effect is known as reciprocity law failure. To
compensate, exposure times must be increased at longer exposures.
This compensation is achieved by increasing the AEC reference voltage at longer exposure times.
RLF compensation is applied to three ranges (50-500 ms, 500-1000 ms, and 1000- 1500 ms) as shown
below.
The examples below are not meant to represent actual RLF compensation percentages in your
installation. Actual values will need to be determined per the procedure following.
•
Between 0 and 50 ms no RLF compensation is applied. Per figure 3D-14, the AEC reference voltage is
constant at 1 unit between 0 and 50 ms.
•
At 50 ms, RLF compensation = 10% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
10% between 50 ms and 500 ms in a linear fashion. At 500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.0 X 1.10
= 1.10 units.
•
At 500 ms, RLF compensation = 20% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
20% between 500 ms and 1000 ms in a linear fashion. At 1000 ms the reference voltage is then 1.10 X
1.20 = 1.32 units.
•
At 1000 ms, RLF compensation = 30% is applied. This means that the reference voltage will increase by
30% between 1000 ms and 1500 ms in a linear fashion. At 1500 ms the reference voltage is then 1.32 X
1.30 = 1.72 units
•
The rate of increase of the reference voltage beyond 1500 ms will be constant, up to limit of the B.U.T.
(backup timer).
•
The compensation curve resulting from the RLF values described above is depicted in the graph below.
Figure 3D-14: Example RLF compensation curve
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-35
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)
The following screens are used for RLF compensation
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
DENSITY SETUP
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
50KV: 84.0:
55KV: 78.0:
65KV: 66.0:
75KV: 54.0
3200MS <<
AEC CAL, F/S 1*
*TUBE?
0%HU
110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION
MULT. SPOT COMP:
3200MS <<
AEC CAL, F/S 1*
*TUBE?
0%HU
50MSEC: 0%
500MSEC: 4%
1000MSEC: 0%
RLF COMP, F/S 1*
3200MS
Page 3D-36
85KV: 42.8
95KV: 38.0
+
>>
0%
+
-
+
-
<<
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.9.0 RLF COMPENSATION (Cont)
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Action
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
Select >>.
Select RLF COMPENSATION.
From the LF COMP menu, select 50MSEC and set the value to 0 using the + or buttons.
Select mA appropriate to the film speed i.e. 100 mA for 100 speed film.
Make an exposure and adjust the mA if necessary to give an exposure time of
approximately 50 ms.
Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs, then develop the film.
Note the O.D. This should be within 10% of the O.D. that was noted during AEC
calibration.
Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 500
ms.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
Enter an RLF offset at 50MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 10%.
Load a test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 50 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the required O.D. is achieved.
Make an exposure and reduce the mA to give an exposure time of approximately 1000
ms.
Select the 500MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
Enter an RLF offset at 500MSEC to give a mAs increase of approximately 20%.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 500 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 21 and 22 until the desired density is achieved.
THE FOLLOWING STEPS ONLY APPLY IF TECHNIQUES ARE USED RESULTING
IN AEC EXPOSURE TIMES GREATER THAN APPROXIMATELY 1500 MS.
Make an exposure and reduce the mA such as to give an exposure time of
approximately 1500ms.
Select the 1000MSEC RLF adjustment and set the value to 0 using the + or - buttons.
Make an exposure using the same techniques. Record the mAs.
Enter an RLF offset at 1000MSEC to give an mAs increase of approximately 30%.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Make an
exposure and develop the film.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the value in step 10, adjust the 1000 ms RLF
offset value as appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 28 and 29 until the desired density is achieved.
Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 31 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-37
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION
The following screens are used for multiple spot compensation
* AEC CALIBRATION *
FILM SCREEN 1
DENSITY SETUP
FILM SCREEN 2
FILM SCREEN 3
EXIT
*TUBE?
0%HU
50KV: 84.0:
55KV: 78.0:
65KV: 66.0:
75KV: 54.0
3200MS <<
AEC CAL, F/S 1*
*TUBE?
0%HU
110KV: 34.0:
130KV: 28.0:
RLF COMPENSATION
MULT. SPOT COMP:
3200MS <<
AEC CAL, F/S 1*
85KV: 42.8
95KV: 38.0
+
>>
0%
+
-
•
Multiple spot compensation may be required when doing multiple exposures on a single film. In this
mode of serial recording, the X-ray field is usually coned down to a small area. Due to the lack of scatter
and possible AEC field cutoff, an AEC density offset may be added if required. This offset is known as
multiple spot compensation.
•
In order to activate the multiple spot compensation feature, the R & F table must supply a closed dry
contact when the SFD is operated in multi-spot mode. The multi-spot input to the generator is at TB5
pins 11 and 12 on the room interface board.
Page 3D-38
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.10.0 MULTIPLE SPOT COMPENSATION (Cont)
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Action
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 85 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Select the slowest film screen combination to compensate. This will normally be FILM
SCREEN 1.
Select >>.
Select MULT SPOT COMP.
Enter the value 0% using the + and - buttons.
Select 85 kV via the kV + or - buttons in the radiography section of the console.
Select mA appropriate to the film speed per table 3D-13.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the SFD.
Make an exposure and record the mAs, then develop the film.
Verify that the film is evenly exposed, and that the O.D. is the desired value
Enable the SFD multi-spot function, then make several exposures and record the mAs.
Develop the film and record the O.D. for each exposure.
If the measured optical densities are not within 5% of the desired value, enter a multispot compensation offset percentage that increases or decreases the mAs as
appropriate using the + and - buttons.
Repeat steps 8 to 13 until the desired O.D. is achieved on all exposures.
Select << as required to return to the AEC CALIBRATION menu.
Repeat steps 2 to 15 for FILM SCREEN 2 and FILM SCREEN 3 if required.
Select EXIT to return to the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Select EXIT, then EXIT SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-39
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY)
Figure 3D-15: Equipment setup for wall Bucky AEC calibration
Please note the following points regarding wall Bucky calibration:
•
If the wall Bucky is dedicated to chest radiography, a focused grid with a 10:1 or 12:1 ratio should be
used along with an SID of 72 in. (180 cm).
•
If the wall Bucky will be used for conventional as well as chest radiography, then two grids should ideally
be used. See the note at the bottom of this page.
A reasonable compromise if a single grid must be used is a 10:1 ratio, 60 in. (150 cm) grid.
NOTE:
Page 3D-40
SINCE MOST WALL BUCKYS ARE USED AT 40 AND 72 IN. (100 AND 180 CM) SID, THE GRID
MUST BE CHOSEN WITH CARE WITH RESPECT TO CUT-OFF. A TYPICAL GRID WILL HAVE
AN 8:1 RATIO, WITH 85 LINE PAIR / INCH OR 10:1 RATIO WITH 150 LINE PAIR / INCH
(STATIONARY). TYPICALLY, 400 SPEED FILM SCREEN WILL BE USED WITH 90 SECOND
PROCESSING.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont
Grid Absorption
The following information may aid in selecting a grid and / or estimating doses in front of the Bucky if
required: The percentages listed are approximate.
NOTE:
∗
A 10:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 18%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 40%
∗
A 12:1 ratio 60 in. (150 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 20%
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 50%
∗
A 10:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 65%
∗
A 12:1 ratio 72 in. (180 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 40 in. (100 cm) absorption = 75%
∗
A 10:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 65%
∗
A 12:1 ratio 40 in. (100 cm) focused grid will exhibit the following absorption when measured 5 in. (13
cm) from center:
At 72 in. (180 cm) absorption = 75%
BREAKPOINT CALIBRATIONS MAY HAVE BEEN DONE FOR ALL THREE FILM SCREEN
COMBINATIONS DURING TABLE BUCKY AEC CALIBRATION. IF SO, THE REMAINING
IMAGE RECEPTORS MUST USE THE CALIBRATION CURVES PREVIOUSLY ESTABLISHED
FOR THOSE FILM SCREENS.
IF AN UNUSED FILM SCREEN COMBINATION IS AVAILABLE FOR WALL BUCKY
USE, IT IS SUGGESTED THAT TWO RECEPTOR SELECTOR BUTTONS ON THE CONSOLE
BE ASSIGNED TO SELECT THE WALL BUCKY. THE FIRST WALL BUCKY SELECTOR
SHOULD BE USED FOR 40 IN. (100 CM) SID’S WITH THE APPROPRIATE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN. THE SECOND WALL BUCKY SELECTOR SHOULD THEN BE
USED WITH THE PREVIOUSLY UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AT 72 IN. (180 CM) SID’S.
THIS METHOD WILL ALLOW THE GRID TO BE OPTIMIZED FOR EACH SID, AS A
SEPARATE DEDICATED FILM SCREEN WITH ITS OWN CALIBRATION CURVE CAN BE
ASSIGNED TO THE 72 IN. (180CM) SID.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-41
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3D.10.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3D-42
Action
USE OF ONE FILM SCREEN FOR BOTH SID’S USING PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED
FILM SCREENS
Set up the X-ray tube stand as shown in figure 3D-15.
Align the tube stand and wall Bucky such that the central ray is centered relative to the
image receptor.
Open up the collimator to expose all three fields of the AEC pickup. Ensure that the
central ray remains centered relative to the image receptor.
Place the R probe at the film plane, i.e. behind the grid. If this cannot be done, then
attach the probe to the front of the Bucky. Ensure that the R-probe is located directly
under the central ray. The R meter must be set to measure in the micro-R range.
Place the absorber (with thickness selected for 75 kV per table 3D-12) in the X-ray field,
ensuring that the radiation is COMPLETELY blocked by the absorber.
Select the wall Bucky image receptor.
Select the slowest film screen used for the wall Bucky, then select the appropriate mA
for that film screen per table 3D-12 (example 320 mA for 100 speed film). Select 75 kV,
large focus, center field.
Make an exposure and note the dose and mAs.
Referring to table 3D-13, select the previously established dose required at the 75 kV
knee breakpoint for the film speed being calibrated.
Note that the dose values in the table are based on a specific R-probe placement
during table Bucky calibration (either at the film plane, or alternately in front of the
Bucky). If the probe placement for wall Bucky calibration is not the same as it was
for table Bucky calibration, use the estimated dose correction factor in this
subsection under GRID ABSORPTION.
Adjust the required gain potentiometer on the AEC board (see note below) while taking
exposures until the dose noted in the previous step is obtained.
• CHANNEL 2 ON THE AEC BOARD IS TYPICALLY USED FOR THE WALL
BUCKY AEC CHAMBER. YOUR INSTALLATION MAY USE A DIFFERENT
CHANNEL ON THE AEC BOARD. DO NOT READJUST THE GAIN POT FOR
THE CHANNEL THAT WAS PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED (FOR TABLE BUCKY).
• REFER TO TABLE 3D-10 FOR THE AEC BOARD GAIN POTENTIOMETER
(GAIN POT) DESIGNATIONS FOR THE VARIOUS AEC BOARDS.
Load the test cassette with fresh film and install it in the image receptor. Using the same
technique, expose the film and develop it.
Measure the O.D. The desired value should have been previously recorded in a copy of
table 3D-1.
If the measured O.D. is not within 5% of the desired value, adjust the gain pot (as per
step 10) to increase or decrease the density, then repeat the previous two steps.
Change the SID to 40 in. (100 cm) and repeat steps 11 to 13. Adjust the gain pot if
necessary to achieve an acceptable compromise between both SID’s.
Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
USE OF TWO FILM SCREENS (ONE FOR EACH SID) USING ONE PREVIOUSLY
CALIBRATED FILM SCREEN AND ONE UNCALIBRATED FILM SCREEN
Select the wall bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 40 in. (100 cm)
SID.
Repeat steps 1 to 13 at the 40 in. (100 cm) SID position using the appropriate previously
calibrated film screen.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
AEC Calibration
3D
3D.11.0 AEC CALIBRATION (WALL BUCKY) Cont
Step
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Action
Verify the O.D. at a range of different kV’s.
Switch the generator OFF. Re-enter the programming mode as detailed in the TABLE
BUCKY AEC calibration section.
Select the wall Bucky image receptor via the selector configured for the 72 in. (180 cm)
SID.
Calibrate the film screen assigned to this SID as per the table Bucky procedure. The
calibration pot is NOT to be adjusted during this procedure (this was calibrated in the
preceding procedure). All breakpoints, including the 75 kV knee breakpoint, are to be
calibrated by adjusting the calibration numbers ONLY.
When complete, exit the AEC CALIBRATION and GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
3D.12.0 AEC CALIBRATION (AUX, SFD, ETC)
The remaining image receptors are calibrated in a similar manner to the table Bucky receptor. Only the gain
pot for that channel is to be adjusted at the slowest film screen used on that receptor. DO NOT READJUST
THE GAIN POT FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED RECEPTORS, AND DO NOT READJUST THE
CALIBRATION VALUES IN THE AEC CALIBRATION MENU FOR PREVIOUSLY CALIBRATED FILM
SCREENS.
Refer to 3D.4.0 if a PMT is to be used for AEC during digital acquisition or spot film work.
THE MEMORY FUNCTION THAT WAS TEMPORARILY CHANGED TO OFF EARLIER IN THIS
CHAPTER MAY NOW BE RESET TO THE DESIRED VALUE.
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
Rev. J
Page 3D-43
3D
AEC Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 3D-44
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 / CMP 200 Service Manual
Ch # 740904-06
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3E
ABS CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................3E-2
3E.1.1 Overview of ABS Operation ...................................................................................................................3E-2
3E.1.2 Image Intensifier Light Output................................................................................................................3E-3
3E.1.3 ABS Pickup Devices ..............................................................................................................................3E-4
3E.1.4 Required Test Equipment ......................................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION / WIRING ..................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................................................3E-5
3E.2.2 ABS Jumper Matrix. ...............................................................................................................................3E-6
3E.2.3 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube) ..................................................................................................................3E-7
3E.2.4 Photo Diode ...........................................................................................................................................3E-7
3E.2.5 DC Proportional .....................................................................................................................................3E-8
3E.2.6 Composite Video....................................................................................................................................3E-8
3E.3.0 FLUORO SETUP AND CALIBRATION.....................................................................................................3E-8
3E.3.1 Fluoro Setup Menu Structure.................................................................................................................3E-9
3E.3.2 High Level Fluoro (HLF).......................................................................................................................3E-11
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup ........................................................................................................................3E-14
3E.3.4 ABS Defaults........................................................................................................................................3E-20
3E.3.5 I.I. Input Dose Calibration ....................................................................................................................3E-24
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-1
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.1.0 INTRODUCTION
3E.1.1 Overview of ABS Operation
Refer to figure 3E-1, this is a block diagram of the ABS system.
X-rays pass through the patient and excite the input cesium phosphor of the image intensifier
(I.I.). This will cause the output of the I.I. to fluoresce and project the image to the TV camera via the
collimating lens. A sample of the light output is then sensed by a photodiode or photomultiplier tube
(PMT), or composite or proportional video will be fed back from the camera.
The feedback signal is processed by the ABS circuits on the generator interface board. The
result, regardless of the type of ABS sensor used, will be a DC voltage proportional to the brightness of
the image. This DC signal is then processed by the generator CPU board. The CPU compares the
feedback voltage with a reference value determined by dose rate, mA, kVp, and mA ranges set during
ABS calibration. The CPU will attempt to maintain constant image brightness by varying the kVp and / or
mA output of the power supply according to a predetermined algorithm.
Figure 3E-1: ABS block diagram
Page 3E-2
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.1.2 Image Intensifier Light Output
The following variables affect the transmitted light output of an I.I. tube.
•
•
•
•
Image Intensifier gain.
Field size - input to output.
System components.
Choice of X-ray techniques.
Image Intensifier Gain.
Image tube gain is affected by two different factors, the ratio of the input to output phosphor area and the
electron gain due to the electron acceleration from the cathode to anode. A third effect that slowly
reduces the I.I. tube’s gain is age. The emissivity of the cesium cathode decays with time and usage.
Gain = Area of input divided by the area of the output multiplied by the energy of a photon
(E = hc/λ [where h = Plank’s constant, c = speed of light and λ is the light wavelength])
Example: Consider the difference of I.I. tube gain when a 12 inch I.I. tube is switched between 6 inches
and 12 inches.
Gain with tube in NORMAL mode:
Gain =(6 X 6 X π)/(.5 X .5 x π) = 144 X E
Gain with tube in the MAG mode:
Gain =(3 X 3 X π)/(.5 X .5 x π) = 36 X E
Field Size - Input to Output.
Most modern I.I. tubes are the multi-mode type where the effective input area may be changed per the
nature of the procedure. To change the field size of an I.I. tube when a MAG mode is selected, the
electron beam over-scans the output target. This in effect reduces the ratio of input size to output size
and reduces the gain or light output of the I.I. tube.
Figure 3E-2: I.I. input and output area
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-3
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.1.3 ABS Pickup Devices
Shown below are pictorial representations of the three basic types of light sensors that generate the DC
reference signal used by the generator. These are simplified schematics only; refer to section 3E.2.0 for
actual wiring of the ABS pickup device.
Photo-multiplier tube
HIGH VOLTAGE
TO J7 PIN 1 OF UNIVERSAL
AEC INTERFACE BOARD
TO J7 PIN-12
TO J7 PIN-7
GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
NOTE: MINIMUM DYNODE LOAD
1 MEG OHM OR GREATER
Photo Diode
Composite Video or Proportional DC
Figure 3E-3: ABS Pickup Devices
Page 3E-4
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.1.4 Required Test Equipment
The following test equipment is required for ABS calibration.
•
•
•
•
•
Resolution test pattern for imaging focusing.
Central ray alignment fixture.
Collimator centering test pattern.
A selection of Al filters for HVL determination.
Water or lexan (or equivalent) absorbers in various thickness. Water should be in a plastic container
of uniform thickness.
3E.2.0 ABS PICKUP INSTALLATION / WIRING
Sections 3E.1.3 and 3E.2.1 present an overview of the various ABS pickup types that may be used with
the Millenia and Indico 100 family of generators. The generator must be specifically configured to accept
each pickup type as per table 3E-2 and sections 3E.2.3, 3E.2.4, 3E.2.5 and 3E.2.6.
NOTE THAT THE GENERATOR IS FACTORY CONFIGURED FOR ONE SPECIFIC TYPE OF
ABS PICKUP ONLY. REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / CUSTOMER PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION FORM IN CHAPTER 1D FOR THE FACTORY CONFIGURED ABS COMPATIBILITY
OF THIS GENERATOR.
3E.2.1 Overview
The generator has been factory configured to be compatible with one of the following ABS pickup types.
Field reconfiguration to accept other ABS pickup types, listed below, is possible if required.
•
•
•
•
PMT (photo multiplier tube).
Light sensitive optical diode. The output may be 0 to +5 VDC, 0 to -5 VDC, or +/- VDC centered at 0
VDC.
A proportional (to the brightness of the I.I.) DC voltage. The output polarity may be 0 to +5 VDC or 0
to -5 VDC.
A terminated or non - terminated composite video signal.
Refer to chapter 1E for the AEC board and generator interface board location in your generator.
Figure 3E-4: ABS interface to the generator (overview)
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-5
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.2.2 ABS Jumper Matrix.
The table below details the generator interface board jumper positions as required to be compatible with
the listed ABS pickups. Refer to the generator interface board schematic, or to the ABS functional
drawing in conjunction with this table. This table should be used in conjunction with sections 3E.2.3,
3E.2.4 3E.2.5, and 3E.2.6.
ABS PICKUP TYPE
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD INPUTS & JUMPER CONFIGURATIONS
INPUT
JW4
JW5
JW11
JW12
JW13
JW19
JW20
JW21
Photo Multiplier Tube
J7
OUT
Photo Multiplier Tube
J8
OUT
Photo Diode
(negative output)
Photo Diode
(positive output)
Photo Diode
0-5 VDC neg/pos
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC positive
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC positive
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC negative
Proportional DC
0-5 VDC negative
Composite video
terminated 75 Ω
Composite video
high impedance
Via optional
expansion board in
digital system
J7
OUT
J7
OUT
J7
OUT
J7
OUT
J8
OUT
J7
OUT
J8
OUT
J8
OUT
IN
J8
IN
OUT
Via
J13
OUT
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
PINS
1-2
PINS
1-2
PINS
1-2
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
1-2
PINS
1-2
PINS
3-4
PINS
3-4
OUT
OUT
*
*
OUT
OUT
PINS
1-2
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
OUT
OUT
PINS
1-2
OUT
OUT
OUT
*
*
OUT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
PINS
1-2
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
*
*
*
*
*
IN
IN
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
2-3
PINS
1-2
* = Don’t care i.e. jumper may be in any position
Table 3E-1: ABS jumper matrix
THE TABLE ABOVE SHOWS THE OPTION OF CONNECTING THE OUTPUTS FROM A PMT OR
PROPORTIONAL DC TO J8 INSTEAD OF J7. THIS ALTERNATE CONNECTION IS NOT SHOWN IN THE
SIMPLIFIED PICTORIAL DIAGRAMS, FIGURES 3E-3 OR 3E-4.
Page 3E-6
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
WARNING:
CAPACITORS
SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR AND ENSURE THAT ALL
DISCHARGED BEFORE CONNECTING ANY ABS PICKUP DEVICES.
3E
ARE
3E.2.3 PMT (Photo Multiplier Tube)
The generator must be fitted with the “Universal AEC Board” assembly if using a PMT. The high voltage
supply for the PMT is located on this assembly.
1. Dress the PMT cable from the imaging system such as to allow the dynode high voltage lead to plug
into the “universal AEC interface board” at J7. Refer to figure 3E-4. J7 is the high voltage output for
the PMT; all pins on this connector are connected in parallel and thus any of the 4 pins on J7 may be
used. Ensure that the high voltage lead is rated at 1000 VDC minimum.
NOTE: The total resistive load of all dynodes must be greater than 1 megohm to prevent excess PMT
power supply loading.
2. Dress the signal (coax) cable from the PMT to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator interface
board. Wire to J7 as per figure 3E-3. Alternately, the PMT output may be connected to BNC
connector J8 on the generator interface board.
3. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cables such that the cabinet door (Millenia generators)
does not strain these cables when opening and closing. Secure the cables in place such as to
prevent mechanical stress on the connections.
4. The signal ground must be at the generator interface board only to avoid ground loops.
5. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Photo Multiplier Tube,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the input is at J7 or J8.
6. The PMT high voltage calibration will be done at a later step.
3E.2.4 Photo Diode
1. Dress the signal cable from the photo diode circuit to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator
interface board. Connect the photodiode to J7 as follows: Output signal to pin 12, ground to pin 7,
+12 VDC to pin 4, and -12 VDC if used to pin 5.
2. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cable such that the cabinet door (Millenia generators) does
not strain this cable when opening and closing. Secure the cables in place such as to prevent
mechanical stress on the connections.
3. Note that there are three types of photo diodes for this application with outputs as listed below:
•
a zero to positive DC voltage for increasing light flux
•
a zero to negative DC voltage for increasing light flux
•
a negative DC voltage to positive DC voltage for increasing light flux. The required dose is set for
0 volts. The output will be negative for reduced light due to increased patient absorption, then
swinging positive for increased light due to reduced patient absorption.
4. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Photo Diode. Please
ensure that the correct configuration is selected per your photo diode type as detailed above.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-7
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.2.5 DC Proportional
1. Dress the signal cable from the camera to allow it to connect to J7 on the generator interface board.
Wire to J7 as per figure 3E-3. Alternately, the DC proportional signal output may be connected to
BNC connector J8 on the generator interface board.
2. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cable such that the cabinet door (Millenia generators) does
not strain this cable when opening and closing. Secure the cable in place such as to prevent
mechanical stress on the connections.
3. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Proportional DC,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the input is at J7 or J8 and whether the
polarity is negative or positive.
3E.2.6 Composite Video
1. Dress the composite video output from the camera to allow it to connect to J8 on the generator
interface board.
2. Ensure that there is sufficient slack in the cable such that the cabinet door (Millenia generators) does
not strain this cable when opening and closing. Secure the cable in place such as to prevent
mechanical stress on the terminations.
3. Position the jumpers on the generator interface board as per table 3E-1 for Composite Video,
selecting the correct configuration depending on whether the video is 75 ohm-terminated or high
impedance (it must be determined beforehand whether the 75 ohm termination must be made at the
generator).
Composite video ABS is not recommended with pulsed fluoro applications.
3E.3.0 FLUORO SETUP AND CALIBRATION
Before the ABS system can be calibrated, the imaging system must be functional and properly set up.
Please verify the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 3E-8
Image intensifier and its power supply are functional.
TV camera is calibrated for this application.
All beam attenuating devices are in place.
Table top is in position.
Fluoro grid is in path of X-ray beam.
Imaging system is in the operational position.
Imaging collimator functional.
Collimator opening varies as S.I.D. is changed. (S.I.D. = source-image distance).
Collimator opening varies as the image intensifier’s MAG mode switch is changed.
The ABS pickup device (as per the previous section) must be installed and functional.
Sufficient filters are added to the X-ray tube to provide the required HVL.
The fluoro imaging and receptor devices have been programmed. Refer to chapter 3C.
kVp and mA must be in calibration. Refer to chapter 4.
Ensure that JW22 on the generator interface board is set properly for the application: Jumper JW22
pins 1-2 to provide line frequency sync pulses (for conventional imaging systems), or jumper JW22
pins 2-3 for external sync input (for digital imaging systems).
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.1 Fluoro Setup Menu Structure
Figures 3E-5 and 3E-6 show the fluoro setup menu structure. Figure 3E-5 is used for generators without
optional pulsed fluoro, and figure 3E-6 is used on generators with pulsed fluoro. Information on the top
and bottom lines of the LCD display, such as tube number, I.I. magnification, dose setting, etc is omitted
on these figures for clarity.
*FLUORO SETUP*
DOSE LIMITS
ABS SETUP
MIN FLUORO KV:
I/I MODES:
FL-RAD KV XFER:
50
2
6
+
-
>>
EXIT
*FLUORO SETUP*
ABS DEFAULT: OFF
FL TIMER MODE: 10MIN
<<
LOOP GAIN: 60
NOMINAL DOSE:
DOSE 1: 100
DOSE 2: 100
<<
*ABS SETUP*
AUTO MA/KV CURVE: 1
ABS CHANNEL: 5
80
+
-
*DOSE LIM - ABS*
1.0MA:
2.0MA:
3.0MA:
4.0MA:
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
125KV
125KV
>>
*DOSE LIM - MAN*
1.0MA:
2.0MA:
3.0MA:
4.0MA:
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
125KV
125KV
RETURN
FILE: V_A_ABS.CDR
Figure 3E-5: Fluoro setup menus, non - pulsed fluoro generators
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-9
Page 3E-10
Rev. H
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
125KV
125KV
125KV
125KV
<<
1.0MA:
2.0MA:
3.0MA:
4.0MA:
1.0MA:
2.0MA:
3.0MA:
4.0MA:
LOOP GAIN: 60
NOMINAL DOSE:
DOSE 1: 100
DOSE 2: 100
<<
<<
PF MA:
PF MS:
>>
20
6
+
-
2
6
+
-
*DOSE LIM - MAN*
*DOSE LIM - ABS*
125KV
125KV
+
-
125KV
125KV
+
-
3 PPS:
7.5 PPS:
15 PPS:
30 PPS:
<<
<<
125
125
125
125
KV
KV
KV
KV
*DOSE LIM - PF*
*ABS SETUP*
FL SIGNAL GAIN: 20
PF SIGNAL GAIN: 20
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
+
FILE: V_B_ABS.CDR
RETURN
RETURN
*HLF SETUP*
HLF ABS DEF. : NONE
HLF: OFF
20
HLF MAX MA:
HLF DEFAULT: OFF
+
HLF ABS RANGE: HIGH
HLF MA/KV CURVE: 0
<<
<<
*FLUORO SETUP*
ABS DEFAULT: OFF
FL TIMER MODE: 10MIN
HIGH LEVEL FLUORO
ABS Calibration
>>
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
>>
5.0MA:
6.0MA:
*ABS SETUP*
AUTO MA/KV CURVE: 1
ABS CHANNEL: 5
80
+
>>
*PF SETUP*
50
I/I MODES:
FL-RAD KV XFER:
*FLUORO SETUP*
PF: ON
PF DEFAULT:
ON
PPS DEFAULT: NONE
DOSE LIMITS
ABS SETUP
PULSED FLUORO
MIN FLUORO KV:
EXIT
3E
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.1 Fluoro Setup Menu Structure (Cont)
Figure 3E-6: Fluoro setup menus, pulsed fluoro generators
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.2 High Level Fluoro (HLF)
High level fluoro (HLF) is optional, and is intended for use with therapy simulators only. High level fluoro
operates at mA levels up to 20 mA, resulting in higher than normal patient dose. Please observe the note
below.
WARNING:
HIGH LEVEL FLUOROSCOPY IS COMPATIBLE WITH THERAPY SIMULATORS ONLY. HIGH
LEVEL FLUORO MUST NOT BE ENABLED FOR OTHER APPLICATIONS
WARNING:
USE OF HIGH LEVEL FLUORO MAY CAUSE INCREASED TUBE HEATING. PLEASE
ENSURE THAT THE X-RAY TUBE THERMAL SWITCH IS FUNCTIONING PROPERLY, THAT
THE THERMAL SWITCH IS PROPERLY CONNECTED TO THE GENERATOR, AND THAT
THE GENERATOR THERMAL INTERLOCK CIRCUITS ARE FUNCTIONING NORMALLY.
Definitions of HLF SETUP menu items.
•
HLF
Selects or deselects HLF mode.
OFF: HLF mode is disabled.
ON: HLF mode is enabled.
•
HLF DEFAULT
Determines the HLF mode when a fluoroscopic receptor is
selected.
OFF: HLF defaults to OFF when a fluoro receptor is selected.
ON: HLF defaults to ON when a fluoro receptor is selected.
•
HLF ABS RANGE
Determines the HLF mode of operation for ABS.
OFF: ABS mode is disabled when HLF is on.
HIGH: ABS will operate between 5.0 mA and the HLF MAX MA
value, a maximum of 20 mA.
FULL: ABS will operate between 0.5 mA and the HLF MAX MA
value, a maximum of 20 mA.
•
HLF MA/KV CURVE
This allows selection of one-of-three mA / kV curves for HLF ABS
operation.
0 deselects this function. The ABS will only vary the fluoro kV
during HLF operation, holding the mA constant.
1, 2, or 3 selects one of the mA / kV curves on page 3E-13. The
ABS will vary the mA and the kV as per the selected curve during
HLF operation. Note that there are two sets of curves, one for the
HIGH ABS range, and one for the FULL ABS range.
•
HLF ABS DEF
Determines whether ABS will default to ON or OFF when a
fluoroscopic receptor is selected.
NONE: ABS will remain at its previous setting when HLF mode is
selected.
OFF: ABS will default to OFF when HLF mode is selected.
ABS: ABS will default to ON when HLF mode is selected.
•
HLF MAX MA
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Sets the maximum allowed HLF mA. The maximum HLF mA range
is 10 to 20 mA. This may be used to set the maximum HLF dose
limit.
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-11
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.2 High Level Fluoro (HLF) Cont
Use these steps to set the HLF SETUP menu items.
Step
1.
2.
Page 3E-12
Action
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select HIGH LEVEL FLUORO.
In the HLF SETUP menu, set the HLF parameters described on the previous page as
required.
The parameters HLF, HLF DEFAULT, HLF ABS RANGE, and HLF ABS DEF are set
by toggling the buttons adjacent to these functions.
HLF MA/KV CURVE and HLF MAX MA are set by pressing the adjacent button to
select these functions, then by using the + or - buttons to select the desired value.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.2 High Level Fluoro (HLF) Cont
Curve 1 - HLF ABS Range = High
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
Curve 1 - HLF ABS Range = Full
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
F
L
U
O
R
O
F
L
U
O
R
O
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 125
40
50
60
FLUORO kV
70
80
90 100 110 120 125
FLUORO kV
Curve 2 - HLF ABS Range = High
Curve 2 - HLF ABS Range = Full
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
F
L
U
O
R
O
F
L
U
O
R
O
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 130
40
50
60
FLUORO kV
80
90 100 110 120 125
FLUORO kV
Curve 3 - HLF ABS Range = High
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
70
Curve 3 - HLF ABS Range = Full
20
18
16
14
12
10
8
6
M 4
A 2
0
F
L
U
O
R
O
F
L
U
O
R
O
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 125
40
50
FLUORO kV
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 125
FLUORO kV
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-13
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup
Figure 3E-7: Dose limits test setup
Page 3E-14
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup (Cont)
This procedure sets the maximum kV allowed for each mA step in both manual and ABS mode of
operation, and sets the maximum kV allowed for each PPS rate (for optional pulsed fluoro).
CAUTION:
MAXIMUM INPUT DOSE VALUE IS USUALLY GOVERNED BY LOCAL, STATE OR
COUNTRY REGULATIONS. THESE LIMITS MUST BE DETERMINED IN ADVANCE OF
ATTEMPTING DOSE LIMITS SETUP, AND ADHERED TO DURING GENERATOR
CALIBRATION.
NOTE:
REFER TO LOCAL REGULATIONS TO DETERMINE THE REQUIRED DISTANCE BETWEEN
THE FOCAL SPOT AND RADIATION DETECTOR. THIS FOCAL SPOT TO DETECTOR
DISTANCE MUST BE USED WHEN SETTING UP THE RADIATION DETECTOR FOR DOSE
LIMITS CALIBRATION.
CAUTION:
PROCEDURES IN THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE INSTALLER TO FOLLOW ESTABLISHED GUIDELINES
TO PROTECT ALL PERSONNEL FROM RADIATION EXPOSURE.
Use these steps to set the DOSE LIMITS.
Step
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
6.
7.
8.
Action
Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-7 in the position indicated Max. Patient
Input Dose. Refer to the note above re focal spot to radiation probe distance. No
absorber is required at this point in the setup.
Temporarily unplug the ABS pickup at J7 or J8 of the generator interface board.
Temporarily de-energize the I.I. power supply, or cover the I.I. with approximately 1/16
in. (1.6 mm) lead.
Enter into the generator programming mode. Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.1.1.
From the GENERATOR SETUP menu select GEN CONFIGURATION.
From the GEN CONFIGURATION menu select FLUORO SETUP. Select a
fluoroscopic image receptor.
Select ABS SETUP. Select AUTO MA/KV CURVE, then use the + or - buttons to
select auto mA/kV curve 1.
Select << to return to the FLUORO SETUP menu.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-15
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup (Cont)
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT COPIES BE MADE OF ALL PAGES WHERE RESULTS ARE TO BE
RECORDED. THE RESULTS SHOULD THEN BE RECORDED ON THE COPIES, LEAVING THE
ORIGINALS BLANK.
Step
9.
Action
Record the maximum permissible input
dose values for ABS, non-ABS (manual),
and PF (optional) modes of fluoroscopy as
per local regulations.
Result
Maximum permitted input dose:
ABS mode:______________ R/Min.
Non ABS mode:__________ R/Min.
PF mode:_______________ R/Min.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3E-16
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select
DOSE LIMITS.
From the DOSE LIM - ABS menu, select
>>.
Ensure that ABS is switched OFF via the
console. Also, ensure that PF is switched
OFF via the console (if applicable).
Set the default kV for each mA station in
the DOSE LIM - MAN menu to the
maximum permissible value (110 or 125
kV) as per local regulations. To do this,
select the desired mA in the LCD display,
then use the + or - buttons adjacent to the
LCD display to set the maximum kV.
Enter the value 6.0 mA in the fluoro control
section of the console.
While observing the dosimeter, make a
fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the kV via
the fluoro section of the console such that
the maximum permitted dose as recorded
in step 9 for ABS mode is not exceeded.
Record the kV value as determined in the
previous step for the 6.0 mA setting.
17.
Repeat steps 14 to 16 for 5.0 mA.
18.
Repeat steps 14 to 16 for 4.0 mA.
19.
Repeat steps 14 to 16 for 3.0 mA.
20.
Repeat steps 14 to 16 for 2.0 mA.
21.
Repeat steps 14 to 16 for 1.0 mA.
22.
Re-enter the value 6.0 mA in the fluoro
control section of the console.
Rev. H
The DOSE LIM. - ABS menu will be
displayed.
The DOSE LIM. - MAN menu will be
displayed.
Max kV limit for 6.0 mA = ______(ABS)
Max kV limit for 5.0 mA = ______(ABS)
Max kV limit for 4.0 mA = ______(ABS)
Max kV limit for 3.0 mA = ______(ABS)
Max kV limit for 2.0 mA = ______(ABS)
Max kV limit for 1.0 mA = ______(ABS)
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup (Cont)
Step
23.
24.
Action
While observing the dosimeter, make a
fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the kV via
the fluoro section of the console such that
the maximum permitted dose as recorded
in step 9 for non-ABS mode is not
exceeded.
Record the kV value as determined in the
previous step for the 6.0 mA setting.
25.
Repeat steps 22 to 24 for 5.0 mA.
26.
Repeat steps 22 to 24 for 4.0 mA.
27.
Repeat steps 22 to 24 for 3.0 mA.
28.
Repeat steps 22 to 24 for 2.0 mA.
29.
Repeat steps 22 to 24 for 1.0 mA.
30.
Enter the kV limit for non-ABS mode as
recorded in step 24 for the 6.0 mA station
into the 6.0 mA dose limit step in the LCD
display by selecting the 6.0 mA step in the
DOSE LIM - MAN menu, then entering the
required kV value using the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display.
Repeat the previous step for the 5.0 mA to
1.0 mA stations (non-ABS kV limits).
Select << to return to the DOSE LIM-ABS
menu.
Enter the kV limit for ABS mode as
recorded in step 16 for the 6.0 mA station
into the 6.0 mA dose limit step in the LCD
display by selecting the 6.0 mA step in the
DOSE LIM - ABS menu, then entering the
required kV value using the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display.
Repeat the previous step for the 5.0 to 1.0
mA stations (ABS kV limits).
Select << to return to the FLUORO
SETUP menu.
If PF is not available, go to section 3E.3.4.
If the PF option is available, continue with
the next step.
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select
PULSED FLUORO.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Result
Max kV limit for 6.0 mA = ______(MAN)
Max kV limit for 5.0 mA = ______(MAN
Max kV limit for 4.0 mA = ______(MAN
Max kV limit for 3.0 mA = ______(MAN
Max kV limit for 2.0 mA = ______(MAN
Max kV limit for 1.0 mA = ______(MAN)
The PF SETUP menu will be displayed.
Rev. H
Page 3E-17
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup (Cont)
Definitions of PF SETUP menu items.
•
OFF disables pulsed fluoro operation.
PF
ON allows pulsed fluoro to be selected via the console.
•
Determines the fluoro mode when a fluoroscopic receptor is
selected.
PF DEFAULT
NONE defaults fluoroscopy to the previously selected mode. If PF
was ON when fluoro was last used, PF will default to ON when
fluoro is re-selected.
OFF defaults to continuous fluoro mode when a fluoro receptor is
selected.
ON defaults to pulsed fluoro mode when a fluoro receptor is
selected.
•
Determines the PPS rate when pulsed fluoroscopy mode is
selected.
PPS DEFAULT
NONE defaults the PPS rate to the last selected value. If the last
used PPS was 15, the PPS will default to 15 when PF is reselected.
Selecting one of the available PPS rates (3, 7.5, 15, or 30 PPS) will
default the PPS to that value when PF is selected.
The PF SETUP menu displays 60 Hz based PPS rates only. For
systems with 50 Hz based sync input, select the PPS rate nearest
to the desired PPS (2.5, 6.25, 12.5, or 25 PPS).
•
PF MA
Sets the pulsed fluoro mA. Typical pulsed fluoro mA is 15 to 20 mA.
•
PF MS
Sets the PF pulse width in milliseconds. Typical pulse widths are 5
to 8 ms.
Step
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Page 3E-18
Action
Set PF, PF DEFAULT, and PPS
DEFAULT as appropriate. These items
are set by selecting the button adjacent to
the desired parameter, then toggling the
button to make the desired selection.
Set the PF MA and PF MS by pressing the
button adjacent to the desired selection,
then setting the desired value using the +
or - buttons adjacent to the LCD display.
Select << to return to the FLUORO
SETUP menu.
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select
DOSE LIMITS.
From the DOSE LIM - ABS menu, press
>> two times.
Select a fluoroscopic image receptor.
Ensure that pulsed fluoro is ON.
Rev. H
Result
Use care in choosing these parameters.
High mA and / or high ms settings may
require that the kV be limited to an
unsuitably low value.
The DOSE LIM - ABS menu will be
displayed.
The DOSE LIM - PF menu will be
displayed.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.3 Dose Limits / PF Setup (Cont)
Step
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
Action
Set the default kV for each PPS station in
the DOSE LIM - PF menu to the maximum
permissible value as per local regulations.
To do this, select the desired PPS in the
LCD display, then use the + or - buttons
adjacent to the LCD display to set the
maximum kV.
Select 3 PPS in the fluoro control section
of the console.
While observing the dosimeter, make a
pulsed fluoroscopy exposure. Adjust the
kV via the fluoro section of the console
such that the maximum permitted dose as
recorded in step 9 for PF mode is not
exceeded.
Record the kV value as determined in the
previous step for the 3 PPS setting.
Max kV limit for 3 PPS = ________(PF)
Repeat steps 44 to 46 for the 7.5 PPS
step.
Max kV limit for 7.5 PPS = _______(PF)
48.
Repeat steps 44 to 46 for the 15 PPS step.
49.
Repeat steps 44 to 46 for the 30 PPS step.
Result
Max kV limit for 15 PPS = _______(PF)
Max kV limit for 30 PPS = _______(PF)
50.
Enter the kV limit as recorded in step 46
for 3 PPS into the 3 PPS dose limit step in
the LCD display by selecting the 3 PPS
step in the DOSE LIM - PF menu, then
entering the required kV value using the +
or - buttons adjacent to the LCD display.
51.
Repeat the previous step for the 7.5 to 30
PPS settings.
IF PF MA OR PF MS ARE CHANGED AS PER STEP 38, THE PULSED FLUORO DOSE LIMITS
MUST BE RECALIBRATED, AS THESE WILL INFLUENCE THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE KV.
52.
Select << as required to return to the
The FLUORO SETUP menu will be
displayed.
FLUORO SETUP menu.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-19
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.4 ABS Defaults
Step
1.
2.
3.
Page 3E-20
Action
From the FLUORO SETUP menu, select MIN FLUORO KV. Press the + or - buttons
to select the minimum kV to be allowed in fluoro.
Select I/I MODES. Press the + or - buttons to select the number of magnification
modes in the I.I. (2 corresponds to 2 mag modes plus normal mode). If this is set to 0,
the console and remote fluoro control will not display the mag status. This may be
desired if an external mag mode control and display are used.
Select FL-RAD KV XFER. Press the + or - buttons to select the desired fluoro - rad kV
transfer curve.
This allows selection of one-of-seven fluoro to rad kV transfer curves (Millenia) or oneof-ten fluoro to rad kV transfer curves (Indico 100). When in fluoro operation with ABS
on, the fluoro kV value is transferred to the RADIOGRAPHY section of the console at
the end of the fluoro exposure. This presets the rad kV in preparation for a rapid
follow-on radiographic exposure for digital acquisition or spot film work. Selecting 0
disables this function.
Graphs of the fluoro kV to rad kV transfer function are shown on the next two pages.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.4 ABS Defaults (Cont)
CURVE 1
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
80
90
CURVE 2
100 110 120 130
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
FLUORO kV
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130
50
60
70
60
70
80
90
80
90
100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV
CURVE 5
50
100 110 120 130
CURVE 4
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
FLUORO kV
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
90
FLUORO kV
CURVE 3
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
80
CURVE 6
100 110 120 130
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
FLUORO kV
80
90
100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV
FILE: ABS_CURVES1.CDR
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-21
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.4 ABS Defaults (Cont)
CURVE 8 *
CURVE 7
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 130
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
FLUORO kV
50
60
70
80
100 110 120 130
CURVE 10 *
90 100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV
90
FLUORO kV
CURVE 9 *
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
80
150
140
130
R 120
A 110
D 100
90
80
k
V 70
60
50
40
40
50
60
70
80
90
100 110 120 130
FLUORO kV
* Fluoro - Rad kV curves 8 to 10 only apply to Indico 100
FILE: ABS_CURVES2.CDR
Page 3E-22
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.4 ABS Defaults (Cont)
Step
4.
5.
Action
From the FLUORO SETUP menu select >>. The above menu will display.
Select ABS DEFAULT. Toggle to select NONE, OFF, or ABS.
6.
NONE: No default selected, ABS remains at its last setting.
OFF: Defaults to ABS OFF.
ABS: Defaults to ABS ON.
Select FL TIMER MODE. Toggle to select 5MIN or 10MIN.
5MIN: Alarms at 5.0 minutes, and stops incrementing the timer. Fluoro exposures will
continue.
10MIN: Alarms at 5.0 minutes, stops incrementing the timer at 9.6 minutes. Fluoro
exposures will be inhibited at 9.6 minutes.
Select << to return to the FLUORO SETUP menu.
Select ABS SETUP. The ABS SETUP menu will display as shown below.
Select ABS CHANNEL. This selects the hardware ABS input. This must be set to 5.
Select AUTO MA/KV CURVE. Press the + or - buttons to select the desired fluoro mA
/ kV curve.
This sets how the kV and mA change during ABS operation.
7.
8.
9.
10.
0: Changes kV only (mA set manually).
1: kV linear mA.
2: mA leading kV.
3: kV leading mA #1.
4: kV leading mA #2 (reduced dose).
Refer to the graph of these curves as shown below.
ABS mA/kV CURVES
M
A
4.5
4
3.5
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
kV linear mA
mA leading kV
kV leading mA #1
kV leading mA #2
40
50
60
70
80
90 100 110 120 130
KV
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-23
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.5 I.I. Input Dose Calibration
This procedure sets the actual operating input dose to the I.I. Please note the following:
•
•
•
Ensure that the collimator is adjusted to only expose the I.I. input.
The central ray from the X-ray tube must coincide with the center of the I.I.
The required I.I. input dose must be known before proceeding.
Figure 3E-8: PMT high voltage adjustment (AEC interface board)
•
•
Page 3E-24
R10 adjusts the PMT high voltage during ABS operation.
R19 and R24 adjust the ion chamber bias voltage and PMT high voltage during AEC operation. Refer
to chapter 3D for details.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.5 I.I. Input Dose Calibration (Cont)
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Action
Reconnect the ABS pickup plug that was temporarily disconnected from J7 or J8 of
the generator interface board in an earlier step.
Re-energize the I.I. power supply or remove the lead that was temporarily installed in
an earlier step.
Set up the radiation probe as per figure 3E-7 in the position indicated I.I. Input Dose.
This must be able to read dose values as low as 2 to 3 mR / min.
Set up the absorber as shown in figure 3E-7. 1 1/2” (40 mm) of aluminum or 20 cm of
water is recommended. Ensure that the absorber covers the full input field of the I.I.
Ensure that the ABS is switched off. Select 75 kV and 1.5 mA.
Ensure that the I.I. is in the NORMAL mode (MAG = 0). Ensure that an anti-scatter
grid, if used, is properly installed.
Make a fluoro exposure and measure the I.I. input dose.
Adjust the fluoro kV to achieve the desired input dose.
Connect a DVM or ‘scope to TP8 and ground of the generator interface board.
FOR GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARDS WITH ABS GAIN ADJUST
POTENTIOMETER R48 (no pulsed fluoro option):
Adjust R48 on the generator interface board to achieve 1.50 VDC at the test points
connected to in the previous step.
FOR GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARDS WITH DIGITAL ABS GAIN ADJUST
POT (units with pulsed fluoro option):
• From the ABS SETUP menu, select >>.
• Select FL SIGNAL GAIN, then use the + or - buttons to adjust the digital gain pot
to achieve 1.50 VDC at the test points connected to in the previous step.
• Select PF SIGNAL GAIN, then use the + or - buttons to adjust the I.I. input dose
to achieve the desired frame rate dose.
Setting the PF signal gain to 0 causes the generator to use the FL SIGNAL GAIN
setting with PF. This may be used when a conditioned ABS signal is provided to the
generator where the continuous and PF signal levels are scaled to be equal.
• Select << to return to the ABS SETUP menu.
From the ABS SETUP menu, select LOOP GAIN. Press the + or - buttons to select
the initial value of 100.
ENSURE THAT THE DOSE IS SET TO 0 ON THE CONSOLE.
From the ABS SETUP menu, select NOMINAL DOSE. Press the + or - buttons to
select a value of 200.
Switch the ABS on. The LED adjacent to the ABS switch will light.
NOTE: STEPS 14 TO 16 APPLY ONLY IF USING A PMT. IGNORE THESE STEPS
FOR OTHER ABS PICKUP DEVICES
WARNING: SWITCH OFF THE GENERATOR AND ENSURE THAT ALL
CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED BEFORE MAKING AND REMOVING THE PMT
CURRENT MEASURING EQUIPMENT
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-25
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
3E.3.5 Dose1/Dose2 Calibration (Cont)
Step
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Page 3E-26
Action
Connect a micro ammeter in series with the PMT signal output. Alternately, if a micro
ammeter is not available, follow this procedure:
• Temporarily connect a resistor of known value (100K is suggested) from either
end of R61 on the generator interface board to ground. A DVM can then be used
to measure the voltage developed by the PMT current across this resistor.
However, this is not the preferred method of measurement.
Adjust the PMT high voltage using R10 (refer to figure 3E-6) on the AEC interface
board while pressing the fluoro footswitch such that the PMT current is 20 ± 5 uA at
the desired I.I. input dose. This corresponds to a voltage of 2.00 ± 0.50 VDC for a
100K resistor if using the voltmeter method in the above step. The high voltage should
be approximately -750 VDC at this point.
The PMT high voltage is adjusted to yield the PMT current noted in this step. The
approximate value of PMT voltage is stated for reference only. The PMT voltage does
not normally need to be measured in this step, however, if it is desired to do so for
troubleshooting purposes please note the following:
USE TP5 ONLY ON THE AEC INTERFACE BOARD FOR THE HV METER
GROUND WHEN MEASURING PMT HIGH VOLTAGE. CONNECT THE GROUND
FIRST BEFORE MEASURING THE HIGH VOLTAGE. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
MEASURE THIS WITHOUT A SUITABLE METER.
Disconnect the meter (and resistor if applicable) that was connected in step 3.
Reconnect the PMT signal lead if required.
Verify stability of the ABS system with continuous fluoroscopy. Check stability with
and without the absorber. The ABS should quickly stabilize without hunting or settling
on the wrong kV value.
If the ABS is unstable, try reducing the sensitivity of the ABS pickup device first. If this
does not work, try reducing the LOOP GAIN. However, be aware that reducing the
loop gain increases the hysterisis (“deadband”), consequently the kV may stabilize on
any value within the deadband range.
Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. If this value is not as
desired adjust the NOMINAL DOSE using the + or - buttons as required. Record the
nominal dose calibration value as indicated in the LCD display in the next step.
Record the NOMINAL DOSE calibration
value as determined in the previous step.
Nominal Dose (cal value): _______
Record the desired dose 1 and dose 2
Desired dose values:
input values.
Dose 1:______________ mR / Min
Dose 2:______________ mR / Min
To disable the ability to make incremental dose changes, set the DOSE 1 and DOSE
2 calibration values the same as the nominal dose value. If doing so, skip steps 21 to
25.
Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. Adjust to the desired
dose 1 value by altering the NOMINAL DOSE calibration value as required using the
+ or - buttons.
When the desired dose 1 value has been achieved, enter the new NOMINAL DOSE
value in the DOSE 1 location using the + or - buttons.
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
ABS Calibration
3E
3E.3.5 Dose1/Dose2 Calibration (Cont)
Step
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Action
Initiate fluoro operation and measure the input dose to the I.I. Adjust to the desired
dose 2 value by altering the NOMINAL DOSE calibration value as required using the +
or - buttons.
When the desired dose 2 value has been achieved, enter the new NOMINAL DOSE
value in the DOSE 2 location using the + or - buttons.
Reset the original NOMINAL DOSE value by entering the value recorded in step 19 of
this table into the NOMINAL DOSE location using the + or - buttons.
Verify each dose (nominal, dose 1, and dose 2) by initiating fluoro operation and
measuring the I.I. input dose.
Press <<, then EXIT to exit out of FLUORO SETUP mode. Press EXIT, then EXIT
SETUP to return to the normal operating mode.
This completes the fluoro calibration.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
Rev. H
Page 3E-27
3E
ABS Calibration
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 3E-28
Rev. H
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-07
CPI Canada Inc.
DAP Setup
3F
CHAPTER 3
SECTION 3F
DAP SETUP AND CALIBRATION
CONTENTS:
3F.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.2.0 DAP INTERFACING ..................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.2.1 DAP Compatibility ..................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.2.2 DAP Installation......................................................................................................................................3F-2
3F.3.0 DAP SETUP...............................................................................................................................................3F-3
3F.3.1 DAP Setup Menu ...................................................................................................................................3F-3
3F.3.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items .......................................................................................................................3F-4
3F.4.0 DAP CALIBRATION ..................................................................................................................................3F-6
3F.4.1 Equipment Required ..............................................................................................................................3F-6
3F.4.2 DAP calibration overview .......................................................................................................................3F-7
3F.4.3 DAP Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................3F-7
3F.4.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet.................................................................................................................3F-10
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-1
3F
DAP Setup
CPI Canada Inc.
3F.1.0 INTRODUCTION
This section details setup and programming of the DAP (Dose-Area Product) meter, optional on Indico
100 X-ray generators.
Any references made to tube 2 or the ability to switch tubes in this section apply to two tube generators
only.
3F.2.0 DAP INTERFACING
3F.2.1 DAP Compatibility
The Indico 100 generator, when equipped with the DAP option, is compatible with the DAP devices listed
in section 3F.3.2. The correct DAP device must be selected in the DAP SETUP menu as described in
3F.3.2 in order to ensure device compatibility.
The DAP chamber, when fitted with the proper interconnect cable, plugs directly into the DAP interface
board in the generator. When ordering the DAP chamber from the DAP manufacturer, specify the CPI
compatible interconnect cable, if available. This is a special cable terminated with a 9 pin male “D”
connector that is designed to plug directly into the DAP interface board in the generator. If this cable is
not available from the DAP device manufacturer, consult CPI product support for the required cable to
connect the DAP chamber to the generator. Refer to the table below for the CPI cable assembly part
numbers.
DAP DEVICE
PTW PX-T11020
Gammex-RMI 841S
VacuTEC VacuDAP 2004
Scanditronix 120-131
INTERCONNECT CABLE
736145-00
736146-00
Contact VacuTEC for this cable assembly.
736148-00
3F.2.2 DAP Installation
1.
Switch OFF the AC line voltage to the generator at the main disconnect switch. Allow sufficient
time for all capacitors in the generator to discharge.
2.
Install the DAP chamber as per the manufacturers instructions. The interconnect cable to the
generator must be as per 3F.2.1.
3.
Route the DAP interconnect cable(s) through the access covers in the upper part of the generator
cabinet, then route the cables toward the DAP interface board.
4.
Plug the cable from DAP device 1 (for tube 1) into J2, and the cable from DAP device 2 (for tube
2) into J3 of the DAP interface board. Tighten the screw locks on the connectors to secure the
cables.
5.
Proceed with DAP setup and calibration as per the remainder of this procedure.
Page 3F-2
Rev. C
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
CPI Canada Inc.
DAP Setup
3F
3F.3.0 DAP SETUP
3F.3.1 DAP Setup Menu
NOTE:
GEN CONFIGURATION MENUS 1 AND 2, SHOWN BELOW, APPLY TO R&F CONSOLES
ONLY. THE GEN CONFIGURATION MENU APPLIES TO THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE.
FOR THE INDICO 100 RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, LCD SCREEN DETAILS NOT RELEVANT TO
DAP SETUP DIFFER SOMEWHAT FROM THE EXAMPLES SHOWN IN THE REMAINDER OF
THIS SECTION. HOWEVER, THE ACTUAL DAP SETUP PORTION OF THE MENUS IS
SIMILAR TO THAT SHOWN (MINOR DIFFERENCES, WHERE APPLICABLE, ARE NOTED).
To access the DAP SETUP menu, press the >> button when the GEN CONFIGURATION menu is
displayed (R&F consoles). For Rad-only consoles, the DAP SETUP function may be accessed directly
from the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
Refer to chapter 3C, section 3C.1.1, 3C.2.0, and 3C.5.0 to access the GEN CONFIGURATION menu.
MENU 1 (GEN CONFIGURATION) R&F Consoles
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION
AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS
AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP
FLUORO SETUP
I/O CONFIGURATION
TUBE CALIBRATION
EXIT
>>
MENU 2 (GEN CONFIGURATION) R&F Consoles
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
DAP SETUP
<<
GEN CONFIGURATION menu (Rad-only consoles)
* GEN CONFIGURATION *
TUBE SELECTION
AEC SETUP
GENERATOR LIMITS
AEC CALIBRATION
RECEPTOR SETUP
TUBE CALIBRATION
I/O CONFIGURATION
DAP SETUP
EXIT
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-3
3F
DAP Setup
CPI Canada Inc.
3F.3.1 DAP Setup Menu (Cont)
The DAP SETUP menus shown below allow setup and calibration of the DAP meter(s).
MENU 1 (DAP SETUP)
TUBE 1
0%HU
DAP: ON
DAP MODE: IND
DEVICE TYPE 1:
0
CAL. VALUE 1: 10
4mAs
<<
MAG:0
* DAP SETUP *
DAP
0mGycm2
TEST VALUE 1: 1000
DEVICE TYPE 2:
0
+
>>
On the Indico 100 Rad-only console, the DAP function is located under the MENU button.
MENU 2 (DAP SETUP)
TUBE 1
0%HU
* DAP SETUP *
0mGycm2
CAL. VALUE 2: 10
DAP RATE DISPLAY: ON
TEST VALUE 2: 1000
ACC ALARM (mGycm2):
100000
+
2
RATE ALARM (mGycm /S):
1000
4mAs
<<
DAP
>>
MAG:0
RATE ALARM and DAP RATE DISPLAY are not used on Indico 100 Rad-only units.
MENU 3 (DAP RESET AND TEST)
DAP = 0mGycm2
DAP TEST: OK
[ 200 PULSES ]
RESET
EXIT
TEST
On the Indico 100 Rad-only console, the EXIT function is located under the MENU button.
3F.3.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items
Definitions of the DAP SETUP parameters per the previous menus follow.
•
Enables or disables the DAP device. The setting of ON or
OFF applies to both DAP devices, if two DAP devices are
used.
DAP
ON: The DAP meter is enabled.
OFF: The DAP meter is disabled.
Page 3F-4
Rev. C
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
CPI Canada Inc.
DAP Setup
3F
3F.3.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items (Cont)
•
Selects the DAP mode of operation as defined below.
DAP MODE
IND: The generator makes and displays individual DAP
measurements for each tube.
SUM: The generator sums the DAP measurement from both
tubes, and displays the single summed measurement when
either tube is selected.
•
Selects the DAP device.
DEVICE TYPE
0 = PTW PX-T11020.
1 = Gammex RMI 841S.
2 = VacuTec VacuDAP 2004.
3 = Scanditronix 120-131.
•
CAL. VALUE
Allows the DAP reading to be calibrated by adjusting this
parameter.
•
TEST VALUE
A numeric value, supplied by the DAP device manufacturer,
that represents the number of pulses generated by the DAP
device during TEST mode.
The generator counts the number of pulses generated by the
DAP device during TEST mode, and reports a DAP failure
error message if the actual number of test pulses are not the
same as the manufacturer - supplied test count, within an
allowable margin of error.
•
ACC ALARM (mGycm2)
Sets the alarm level for accumulated DAP. The console will
present an audible alarm, and a visual warning via the LCD
display when the accumulated dose exceeds this limit.
•
RATE ALARM (mGycm2/S)
Sets the alarm level for the maximum DAP rate. The console
will present an audible alarm, and a visual warning via the
LCD display when the current dose rate exceeds this limit.
•
DAP RATE DISPLAY
Enables or disables the display of the DAP rate during fluoro
operation.
ON: DAP rate is displayed during fluoroscopic operation.
When the fluoro run is finished, the accumulated DAP will be
displayed.
OFF: Displays the accumulated DAP only during fluoroscopic
operation.
•
DAP
Allows access to a submenu used to reset the DAP display,
and test the DAP device. This submenu is accessed by
selecting DAP when menu 1 or menu 2 in 3F.3.1 is displayed.
•
RESET
Resets the DAP display to zero.
•
TEST
Tests the DAP by counting the number of test pulses (refer to
TEST VALUE, above). The message “DAP TEST: OK” will be
presented if the DAP has passed its test, and the actual
number of test pulses counted will be displayed.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-5
3F
DAP Setup
CPI Canada Inc.
3F.3.2 DAP SETUP Menu Items (Cont)
Use these steps to set up the DAP device. DAP calibration is done after DAP setup; refer to 3F.4.0.
Step
Action
1.
Select DAP SETUP. Refer to 3F.3.1 to access the DAP SETUP menu.
Use the << or >> buttons to select DAP SETUP menu 1 or menu 2 as required in the
following steps.
2.
Press the DAP button to select ON or OFF. This will enable or disable both
DAP devices, if two DAP devices are used.
3.
Press the DAP MODE button to select IND for individual, or SUM for summed
DAP readings.
4.
Select DEVICE TYPE 1. Use the + or - buttons to select the DAP device for
tube 1. Refer to the table on the previous page for compatible DAP device
manufacturers.
5.
Repeat step 4 for DEVICE TYPE 2, this sets up the DAP device for tube 2 if
applicable.
6.
Select TEST VALUE 1. Use the + or - buttons to enter the test-pulse count
supplied by the DAP device manufacturer for DAP device 1. Typical terms used
by DAP device manufacturers for this function are “Test Pulses”, “Test Value”,
or “Test Count”, but other names may be used.
7.
Repeat step 6 for TEST VALUE 2. This enters the test-pulse count for DAP
device 2, if applicable.
8.
Select ACC ALARM (mGycm2). Use the + or - buttons to select the maximum
permissible accumulated DAP.
9.
Select RATE ALARM (mGycm2/S). Use the + or - buttons to select the
maximum permissible DAP rate for fluoro operation.
10.
Press the DAP RATE DISPLAY button to select ON or OFF. This enables or
disables the display of the DAP rate during fluoro operation.
3F.4.0 DAP CALIBRATION
The DAP device must be calibrated before use, and the calibration must be periodically checked as per
the DAP device manufacturers requirements, or as per local regulations.
3F.4.1 Equipment Required
The following equipment is required for DAP calibration.
• An X-ray cassette and film. The speed of the film / screen is not relevant, as the film is only used to
determine the area that is irradiated at the dose measurement plane.
An X-ray cassette and film is the preferred method to measure the irradiated area, but if this is
not readily available, for example if this is a digital only system, a procedure is given to determine the
required area using the imaging system.
• A film processor to develop the film, if required.
• A calibrated dosimeter.
• A ruler or tape measure with centimeter markings. This will be needed to measure the exposed area
of the film. If measuring in inches, use a calculator and multiply inches by 2.54 to obtain the
measurement in centimeters.
Page 3F-6
Rev. C
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
CPI Canada Inc.
DAP Setup
3F
3F.4.2 DAP calibration overview
The first step involved in calibrating the DAP meter in the generator is to carefully make a dose
measurement at a given distance from the X-ray source. The next step is to expose a test film at the
same distance from the X-ray source as the dose measurement that was just made.
The dose-area product is calculated by multiplying the measured dose, in mGy, by the exposed
area of the film, in cm2. This gives the actual dose-area product, in mGycm2.
After the reference dose-area product is determined as described above, it is compared to the
DAP reading as measured by the generator. Adjustments are made to the CAL. VALUE parameter in the
DAP SETUP menu such that the consoles DAP display corresponds to the calculated dose-area product.
This procedure may need to be repeated several times until the required accuracy is obtained.
The reason the DAP device (a specialized ion chamber) is able to accurately measure the dosearea product at its location at the bottom of the collimator is that although the radiation level falls off at a
rate inversely proportional to the square of the distance from the source, the irradiated area increases as
the square of the distance from the source. For example, by doubling the distance, the dose falls to (½)2
= ¼ of the previous dose BUT the area increases to 22 = 4 times the area. Therefore, the dose-area
product will remain constant at a given distance from the source. This is also the reason that care must
be taken to ensure that the area measurement is done at the same distance from the X-ray source as the
dose measurement.
3F.4.3 DAP Calibration Procedure
CTM
TUBE 1
DAP chamber 1
70 cm
Dosimeter plane and film plane
20 cm
DAP chamber 2
TUBE 2
TYPICAL SETUP FOR DAP CALIBRATION
FILE: DAP.CDR
Figure 3F-1: DAP setup
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-7
3F
DAP Setup
CPI Canada Inc.
3F.4.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)
Use these steps to calibrate the DAP meter(s) in the generator.
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Page 3F-8
Action
Set up the dosimeter as per figure 3F-1.The probe should be centered relative
to the central ray from the X-ray tube, and sufficiently far off the table top to
minimize scatter radiation. Do not use any absorber during this procedure.
Open the collimator such that the field size at the location of the probe is
approximately 12 cm X 12 cm. Ensure that the probe is fully irradiated.
Temporarily set the DAP MODE to IND. Refer to section 3F.3.2.
Enter DAP SETUP menu 1 or menu 2 as required to display the CAL. VALUE
1 parameter for DAP device 1, or the CAL. VALUE 2 parameter for DAP
device 2.
Select the desired DAP device to calibrate by selecting tube 1 or tube 2 via an
appropriate image receptor. Start with the over-table tube.
Set the generator to 70 kV, 100 mA, 20 ms.
Press DAP to access the RESET / TEST menu, then press RESET to reset the
DAP display to zero. Press EXIT to return to DAP SETUP menu 1 or menu 2.
Make an X-ray exposure and note the dose per the dosimeter. Record the mR
or mGy value in a copy of table 3F-1. Convert the mR value to mGy, if
necessary.
Note the DAP value as displayed on the console, and record the value in a
copy of table 3F-1.
Replace the dosimeter with an X-ray cassette and film if available. The film
plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter was in step 8.
If using an image sensor such as an I.I., or flat panel, or other non-film image
sensor, the image pickup plane must be at the same location as the dosimeter
was in step 8.
THE IMPORTANCE OF THIS STEP CANNOT BE OVERSTATED: THE
IRRADIATED AREA MEASUREMENT MUST BE MADE AT A POINT THAT
IS THE SAME DISTANCE FROM THE X-RAY SOURCE AS THE DOSE WAS
MEASURED AT.
Ensure that the collimator field at the measurement plane is smaller than the
active area of the image pick-up device (film, I.I., or other). Refer to figure 3F-2.
Do not readjust the collimator from the setting that was used in step 8.
Make another exposure using the same settings as in step 6.
Develop the film (if used).
Measure the irradiated image area. For film, measure the length and width of
the exposed area, and record the results in table 3F-1. Refer to figure 3F-2.
If using a digital imaging system, some systems have a cursor available that
allows measurement of the length and width of the area in question. If the
digital imaging system does not allow image size measurement, it is suggested
that an X-ray opaque item of known dimensions be placed at the image plane.
(A collimator test tool would be useful in this application). The length and width
of the irradiated area can then be extrapolated by comparison to the size of the
reference object. Record the length and width of the irradiated area at the
measurement plane in table 3F-1.
Calculate the irradiated image area, in cm2. Use the length and width recorded
in table 3F-1.
Calculate the dose-area product by multiplying the area from table 3F-1 X the
dose in mGy from table 3F-1. Record the resulting value at step 3 in table 3F-1.
Rev. C
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
CPI Canada Inc.
DAP Setup
3F
3F.4.3 DAP Calibration Procedure (Cont)
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Calculate the percentage error between the manually calculated DAP
measurement (table 3F-1, step 3) and the measured DAP value (table 3F-1,
step 4). Record the percentage error in step 5 of the table.
If the consoles DAP reading does not meet the required accuracy, increase or
decrease CAL. VALUE 1 or CAL. VALUE 2 by the same percentage as the
percentage error.
Repeat steps 7 to 18 until the required accuracy is obtained. Make as many
copies of table 3F-1 as required to record the results from all required
iterations.
Repeat the above procedure for the second DAP device (tube 2).
Reset the DAP MODE as desired. This was temporarily set to IND in step 3.
X-RAY CASSETTE
13.2
EXPOSED
AREA
ILLUMINATED
COLLIMATOR
FIELD
13.6
DEVELOPED FILM
Figure 3F-2: Irradiated area vs. available image area
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-9
3F
DAP Setup
CPI Canada Inc.
3F.4.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet
STEP
1.
2.
ACTION
RESULT
Measured dose:
_____________ mR
Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X
0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy.
_____________ mGy
Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length
X Width).
_____________ Length (cm)
_____________ Width (cm)
Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).
3.
Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step
2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in
mGycm2.
_____________ Area (cm2)
_____________
(mGycm2)
DAP
DAP
4.
Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console.
_____________
(mGycm2)
5.
Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at
the end of this section.
_____________ % error
THIS TABLE IS REPEATED BELOW FOR THE SECOND ITERATION OF THE DAP CALIBRATION.
STEP
1.
2.
ACTION
RESULT
Measured dose:
_____________ mR
Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X
0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy.
_____________ mGy
Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length
X Width).
_____________ Length (cm)
_____________ Width (cm)
Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).
3.
Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step
2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in
mGycm2.
_____________ Area (cm2)
_____________
(mGycm2)
DAP
DAP
4.
Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the console.
_____________
(mGycm2)
5.
Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at
the end of this section.
_____________ % error
Table 3F-1: DAP worksheets
Page 3F-10
Rev. C
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
CPI Canada Inc.
DAP Setup
3F
3F.4.4 DAP Calculation Worksheet (Cont)
Refer to the sample DAP worksheet below:
STEP
1.
2.
ACTION
RESULT
Measured dose:
____23.3_____ mR
Convert mR to mGy if necessary by multiplying mR X
0.00873. Example 23.3 mR X 0.00873 = 0.203 mGy.
____0.203____ mGy
Measure and record the exposed area of the film (Length
X Width).
____13.6_____ Length (cm)
____13.2_____ Width (cm)
Calculate the exposed area in cm2 (length X width).
___179.52____ Area (cm2)
3.
Multiply the dose in mGy (step 1) X the area in cm2 (step
2). This will yield the actual dose-area product, in
mGycm2.
4.
Record the DAP, in mGycm2, as displayed on the
console.
____40_______ DAP (mGycm2)
5.
Calculate the percentage error: Refer to the example at
the end of this section.
____-8.9______ % error
____36.44____ DAP (mGycm2)
Sample percentage error calculation (step 5):
(36.44 - 40)
-3.56
X 100 =
X 100 = -8.9 %
40
40
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
Rev. C
Page 3F-11
3F
DAP Setup
CPI Canada Inc.
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 3F-12
Rev. C
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-09
CPI Canada Inc.
Acceptance Testing
4
CHAPTER 4
ACCEPTANCE TESTING
CONTENTS:
4.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.0 REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION. ....................................................... 4-2
4.3.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS) ............................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 Console Rad Tests..................................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.3.2 Console Fluoro Tests ................................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3.3 Generator Preliminary Tests ...................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.4 Low Speed Starter Verification................................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.5 Dual Speed Starter Verification .................................................................................................................. 4-8
4.4.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS).................................................................................... 4-9
4.4.1 Generator Rad Tests.................................................................................................................................. 4-9
4.4.2 Generator Fluoro Tests ............................................................................................................................ 4-13
4.5.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES) .................................................................................. 4-15
4.6.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC) ..................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.7.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS) ..................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.8.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP) ..................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.9.0 ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY) ...................................................... 4-16
4.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This section details acceptance testing, which verifies that the generator is performing within limits. It is
recommended that this be done whenever the generator is reconfigured, or component(s) are replaced
which may affect the X-ray output. Examples of such components are the X-ray tube, HT tank, generator
CPU board, generator interface board, AEC board, control board 1 and control board 2 in the HF power
supply (Millenia) or the control board (Indico 100), and the filament supply board(s).
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-1
4
Acceptance Testing
CPI Canada Inc.
WARNING:
1. USE EXTREME CARE IN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES. ACCIDENTAL CONTACT MAY
CAUSE INJURY OR DEATH.
2. EVEN WITH THE GENERATOR SWITCHED OFF AT THE CONSOLE, (OR THE LOCKOUT
SWITCH INSIDE THE MAIN CABINET LOCKED OUT), MAINS VOLTAGE IS STILL
PRESENT INSIDE THE GENERATOR CABINET. THIS VOLTAGE IS EXTREMELY
DANGEROUS; USE EXTREME CAUTION.
3. THE ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITORS, LOCATED ON THE BASE OF THE HF POWER
SUPPLY, PRESENT A HAZARD FOR A MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES AFTER THE POWER
HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF. VERIFY THAT THESE CAPACITORS ARE DISCHARGED
BEFORE SERVICING OR TOUCHING ANY PARTS.
WARNING:
THE PROCEDURES IN THIS CHAPTER REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF X-RAYS. TAKE
ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL FROM X-RADIATION.
WARNING:
1. ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE EQUIPMENT UNDER TEST AND ALL ASSOCIATED TEST
EQUIPMENT IS PROPERLY GROUNDED.
2. ENSURE THAT THE HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES ARE INTACT / UNDAMAGED AND
PROPERLY CONNECTED BEFORE ATTEMPTING EXPOSURES.
ENSURE THAT THE FOLLOWING ITEMS ARE COMPLETED PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE
ACCEPTANCE TESTING:
•
•
•
•
•
•
4.2.0
The generator is interfaced to room equipment noted in the product description / compatibility
statement.
The tube auto calibration has been done as per chapter 2 of this manual.
The receptors have been programmed as per chapter 3C of this manual.
If the installation has AEC, verify that all receptors have been calibrated as per chapter 3D of this
manual.
If the installation has ABS, verify that the imaging system has been calibrated as per chapter 3E of
this manual.
Acceptance testing shall only be started after the installation is complete i.e.; generator in final
position and installed as per the previous chapters of this manual.
REQUIRED TEST EQUIPMENT FOR GENERATOR VERIFICATION.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Page 4-2
kV measuring device such as a Dynalyzer (or equivalent). This will be required for verifying kV and
mA calibration during preventative maintenance or if recalibration is necessary, for example after
replacing the generator CPU board or control board 1 in the HF power supply. See note on page 11
regarding use of a Dynalyzer on Indico 100 generators.
Storage oscilloscope.
mA / mAs meter.
Radiation meter 0-1000 mR and 1-15 R/min.
Lead diaphragm or equivalent to collimate the beam.
General purpose DVM.
Strobe or reed tachometer.
Current probe 0 to 20 amps AC.
A set of HVL filters.
Calculator.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
Acceptance Testing
4.3.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (BASIC FUNCTIONS)
4.3.1
Console Rad Tests
4
For the touch screen console, check the console functionality by pressing the equivalent switch position
on the touch screen for the functions described in section 4.3.1 and 4.3.2. Verify the correct response on
the touch screen console for each function that is tested.
Step
1.
Action
Press the power ON then power OFF buttons
on the console.
Press power ON again to switch the unit on.
Press each of the receptor buttons that are
active (those that have been enabled during
generator configuration).
Result
Check
Unit switches on and off.
Unit switches on.
Verify that the adjacent LED
lights for each receptor. For
receptor 6 on the 23 X 56 cm
console (adjacent to the power
ON button) only the top LED will
light.
Note: The TECHNIQUE / MODE SELECT button used to select AEC / mAs / mA/ms in steps 4, 5, 6 will
only be functional if APR mode has been disabled during generator configuration (the TECHNIQUE
SELECT function is disabled if APR mode is enabled).
4.
Select an active radiographic receptor that has A: The AEC LED lights.
AEC programmed.
B: kV value is displayed.
Press the technique select button to select
C: mA value is displayed.
AEC.
D: “AEC”, mAs value or ms
Verify the following displays:
value is displayed depending
on the AEC backup mode
selected.
E: Density value is displayed.
5.
Press the technique select button to select
A: The mAs LED lights.
mAs.
B: kV value is displayed.
Verify the following displays:
C: mAs value is displayed.
6.
Press the technique select button to select
A: The mA/ms LED lights.
mA/ms.
B: kV value is displayed.
Verify the following displays:
C: mA value is displayed.
D: ms value is displayed.
7.
kV increases if kV + is pressed.
Press the kV +/- buttons.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
8.
Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms).
mA increases if mA + is pressed.
Press the mA +/- buttons.
mA decreases if mA - is pressed.
9.
Ensure that three-point operation is selected
(mA/ms).
ms increases if ms + is pressed.
Press the ms +/- buttons.
ms decreases if ms - is pressed.
10.
Ensure that AEC is selected.
Density increases if density + is
pressed.
Press the DENSITY +/- buttons.
Density decreases if density - is
pressed.
11.
Press the focus select button.
The large and small focal spot
LED’s alternately light as the
switch is toggled.
12.
Ensure that AEC is selected.
The three film-screen LED’s (I, II,
Press the film-screen select button.
III) alternately light as the switch
is toggled.
2.
3.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-3
4
Acceptance Testing
4.3.1
Console Rad Tests (Cont)
Step
13.
14.
4.3.2
CPI Canada Inc.
Action
Select 60 kV, 50 mA, 100 ms.
Press the PREP button.
Press the X-ray button.
15.
Ensure that AEC is selected.
Press the FIELD select button (23 X 56 cm
console) or press the individual AEC field
select buttons in sequence (all other
consoles).
16.
Press the power OFF button on the console.
Result
The adjacent LED lights.
Check
The X-ray warning indicator
lights during an X-ray exposure,
and an audible tone is heard
from the console.
The three field indicator LED’s
light to indicate field selection
[L+C+R], [R], [C], [R+C], [L],
[L+R], [L+C] as the switch is
toggled (23 X 56 cm console).
For other consoles, the LEFT,
CENTER, and RIGHT field
selection LED’s should light as
each field is selected.
The unit switches off.
Console Fluoro Tests
This section applies only to R&F units.
BEFORE CONTINUING, ENSURE THAT THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL IS CONNECTED (IF
USED WITH THIS INSTALLATION).
Page 4-4
Step
1.
2.
Action
Press the power ON button on the console.
Select an active fluoro receptor.
3.
Press the DOSE button.
4.
Press the MAG button on the console.
Press the MAG +/- buttons on the remote
fluoro control if used.
Rev. J
Result
Unit switches on.
A: The fluoro display area of the
console lights.
B: The remote fluoro control
panel lights (if used).
The dose display on the LCD
display changes as the switch is
toggled.
A: The MAG display on the
console LCD and remote
fluoro display changes (IF I/I
MODES IS ENABLED
DURING GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION) as the
MAG button is toggled.
B: The Mag display on the
console LCD and remote
fluoro display increases if
MAG + button is pressed,
decreases if MAG - button on
the remote fluoro control is
pressed (IF I/I MODES IS
ENABLED DURING
GENERATOR
CONFIGURATION.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Check
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
4.3.2
4.3.3
Acceptance Testing
4
Console Fluoro Tests (Cont)
Step
5.
Action
Press the ABS button on the console to enter
ABS mode.
6.
Press the ABS button on the remote fluoro
control if used, else press the ABS button on
the console.
7.
Press the fluoro kV +/- buttons on the console
and remote fluoro control if used.
8.
Press the fluoro mA +/- buttons on the console
and remote fluoro control if used.
9.
Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on
the console.
10.
Press the ACCUMULATED TIME button on
the remote fluoro control if used.
11.
Press the pulse fluoro button on the console (if
the pulse fluoro option is fitted).
12.
Press the power OFF button on the console.
Result
A: The LED adjacent to the
button lights.
B: The LED adjacent to the ABS
button on the remote fluoro
control (if used) lights.
The ABS indicator LED’s
adjacent to the ABS buttons on
the console and the remote
fluoro control (if used) switch off.
kV increases if kV + is pressed.
kV decreases if kV - is pressed.
Confirm tracking of the kV
displays on the console and the
remote fluoro control.
mA increases if mA + is pressed.
mA decreases if mA - is
pressed.
Confirm tracking of the mA
displays on the console and the
remote fluoro control.
The accumulated time indicator
will light, then extinguish on the
console as the switch is toggled.
The ACC indicator will light, then
extinguish on the remote fluoro
control as the switch is toggled.
The pulse fluoro indicator will
light, then extinguish as the
switch is toggled.
Unit switches off.
Check
Generator Preliminary Tests
WARNING:
NOTE:
USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN MEASURING HIGH VOLTAGES.
VERIFY THE POSITION OF EACH OF THE SWITCHES OF SW1 ON THE
GENERATOR CPU BOARD FOR THE GENERATOR UNDER TEST AS PER THE
FOLLOWING TABLE. THESE SWITCHES MUST BE SET CORRECTLY PRIOR
TO CONTINUING. REFER TO THE COMPATIBILITY STATEMENT / PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION (SECTION 1D) AS NECESSARY FOR THE PRODUCT
DEFINITION.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-5
4
Acceptance Testing
4.3.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont)
For GENERATOR POWER, refer to copy of the compatibility statement / product
description (PD) form in Chapter 1D
GENERATOR POWER
SW1-3
SW1-2
SW1-1
30 kW (350 Series)
ON
ON
OFF
Millenia only
ON
ON
OFF
32 kW (Indico 100 only)
ON
OFF
ON
40 kW (Indico 100 only)
50 kW (650 Series)
OFF
ON
ON
65 kW (850 Series)
OFF
ON
OFF
80 kW (1050 Series)
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
100 kW (Indico 100 only) OFF
SW1-4: OFF for two filament boards, ON for one filament board.
SW1-5: OFF for 150 max kV, ON for 125 max kV.
SW1-6: OFF for dual speed, ON for low speed.
SW1-7: OFF for 2 tube, ON for 1 tube.
SW1-8: ON. Do not inadvertently switch this to OFF! Setting to OFF resets to the factory
defaults (calibration, configuration, etc).
Step
1.
Action
Ensure unit is switched OFF.
2.
Press the power ON button on the console.
3.
Switch OFF the console.
Switch the NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch on the
generator interface board to LOCKOUT.
Switch the console ON.
Switch the NORMAL/LOCKOUT switch to the
NORMAL position.
Switch the console ON.
Verify that each active receptor (those that
have been enabled during generator
configuration) displays the desired X-ray tube
on the LCD display.
4.
5.
Page 4-6
Rev. J
Result
DS1 on generator interface
board is lit.
One or more LED’s on the
driver/auxiliary board in HF
power supply are lit. Millenia
generators only.
Check
The generator will not switch on
with the switch in the lockout
position.
The unit switches on.
Receptor 1 Tube # _____
Receptor 2 Tube # _____
Receptor 3 Tube # _____
Receptor 4 Tube # _____
Receptor 5 Tube # _____
Receptor 6 Tube # _____
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
4.3.3
Acceptance Testing
4
Generator Preliminary Tests (Cont)
6.
7.
Verify that each active receptor selects the
desired AEC channel. This must be done by
measuring the voltage at specified pins on the
AEC board edge connector.
Logic low (approx. 1 VDC) means CHANNEL
ENABLED, logic high (approx. 11.5 VDC)
means CHANNEL DISABLED.
Refer to figure 4-1 for pin assignments on the
AEC board:
CHANNEL 1 = PIN 8
CHANNEL 2 = PIN 7
CHANNEL 3 = PIN 6
CHANNEL 4 = PIN 5
Switch OFF the console.
Receptor 1 Ch # _______
Receptor 2 Ch # _______
Receptor 3 Ch # _______
Receptor 4 Ch # _______
Receptor 5 Ch # _______
Receptor 6 Ch # _______
N/A
Figure 4-1: AEC board pin assignments
THE MILLENIA AND INDICO 100 FAMILY OF GENERATORS ARE FITTED WITH A LOW SPEED
STARTER, OR OPTIONAL DUAL SPEED STARTER. USE SECTION 4.3.4 OR 4.3.5, AS
APPLICABLE, FOR YOUR GENERATOR.
4.3.4
Low Speed Starter Verification
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
Result
Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 1.
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Switch ON the console.
less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button.
prep complete.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost.
Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
FOLLOW STEPS 4 TO 6 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (LOW SPEED STARTER)
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Check
Page 4-7
4
Acceptance Testing
4.3.4
Low Speed Starter Verification (Cont)
4.
5.
6.
7.
4.3.5
CPI Canada Inc.
Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 2.
Press and hold the PREP button.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at the
end of boost.
Switch OFF the console.
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should be approximately 1.5 sec.
Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
N/A
Dual Speed Starter Verification
From the product description, be sure the actual tube being used is correctly selected at the dual speed
starter. Refer to the dual speed starter table in chapter 2.
Tube 1 selection verified _______
Tube 2 selection verified _______
THE GENERATOR MUST BE PROGRAMMED FOR DUAL SPEED STARTER OPERATION IN ORDER
TO BE ABLE TO VERIFY BOTH MODES OF OPERATION IN THIS SECTION.
***** PLEASE OBSERVE A MAXIMUM OF 2 HIGH SPEED BOOSTS PER MINUTE *****
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 4-8
Action
Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 1.
Switch ON the console.
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms.
Press and hold the PREP button.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small
focus.
Press and hold the PREP button.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Result
Check
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 1 and 3
to select low and high-speed modes
Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
respectively.
High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
After a high-speed prep, verify that the
Will hear the X-ray tube slow
dynamic brake is applied.
down to 60 Hz.
FOLLOW STEPS 7 TO 12 IF TUBE 2 IS USED (DUAL SPEED STARTER)
Connect a current probe to the common lead
of tube 2.
A 60 Hz waveform dropping to
Select 70 kVp, minimum mA, 50 ms.
less than half amplitude after
Press and hold the PREP button.
prep complete.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
4.3.5
Acceptance Testing
4
Dual Speed Starter Verification (Cont)
Step
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Action
Select 100 kVp, maximum mA, 50 ms, small
focus.
Press and hold the PREP button.
Measure the rotor boost time.
Use a strobe or reed tachometer and verify
that the tube(s) reach operating speed at end
of boost. Use the techniques in steps 7 and 9
to select low and high-speed modes
respectively.
After a high-speed prep, verify that the
dynamic brake is applied.
Switch OFF the console
4.4.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (KVP, TIME, MA AND MAS)
4.4.1
Generator Rad Tests
Result
A 180 Hz waveform dropping to
less than half amplitude after
prep complete.
Should agree with the value in
the dual speed starter table in
chapter 2.
Check
Low Speed ≥ 3300 RPM.
High Speed ≥ 9500 RPM.
Will hear the X-ray tube slow
down to 60 Hz.
N/A
Measurement of kVp, mA, and time may be done via test points at the generator CPU board as per figure
4-2. These are direct feedback voltages and are scaled to represent the actual kVp and X-ray tube
current AS LONG AS THE GENERATOR IS CALIBRATED.
REFER TO NOTES ON PAGE 11.
NOTE:
TEST EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES MUST BE ALLOWED FOR IN THE MEASUREMENTS IN
THE FOLLOWING SECTIONS. LIMITS STATED ARE THE MAXIMUM ALLOWED LIMITS,
INCLUDING EQUIPMENT TOLERANCES AND MEASUREMENT ERROR.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-9
4
Acceptance Testing
4.4.1
CPI Canada Inc.
Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
TP8
TP6
TP7
TP9
TP11
TP13
TP10
TP12
TP14
TP15
TP24
TP25
TP22
TP23
TP16
TP17
TP18
TP19
TP20
TP21
FILE: ML_CPU1.CDR
KVP
- +
TP8
1VOLT = 20 KV
TP10
1 VOLT = 100 mA
TP6
RAD mA
AEC RAMP
- +
- +
TP7
TP12
TP9
FLUORO mA TP11 - +
TP13 + ABS
TP14
1 VOLT = 2.5 mA
TP15
THE SCALING FACTORS LISTED ABOVE ARE NOMINAL VALUES.
NOTE: THIS DIAGRAM IS TYPICAL, ACTUAL GENERATOR CPU
BOARDS MAY DIFFER IN DETAIL
Figure 4-2: Test point locations
Page 4-10
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
4.4.1
Acceptance Testing
4
Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
CAUTION: THE FOLLOWING TESTS REQUIRE THE PRODUCTION OF
APPROPRIATE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS TO PROTECT PERSONNEL.
X-RADIATION.
USE
NOTE:
IF USING TEST POINTS TP6 & 8, TP7 & 10, TP11 & 14 IN FIGURE 4-2 FOR
ACCEPTANCE TESTING, THE SCALING FACTORS SHOWN MUST BE
VERIFIED USING AN APPROPRIATE CALIBRATED REFERENCE STANDARD.
THE ACTUAL MEASURED SCALING VALUES SHOULD THEN BE USED IN THIS
PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
A DYNALYZER IS NOT RECOMMENDED FOR MA MEASUREMENTS WITH INDICO 100
GENERATORS. BANDWIDTH LIMITATIONS OF THE DYNALYZER WILL RESULT IN
INACCURATE MA MEASUREMENTS AT MA VALUES LESS THAN APPROXIMATELY 100 MA.
MA MEASUREMENTS SHOULD BE MADE WITH AN MA / MAS METER CONNECTED TO THE
MA TEST JACKS ON THE HT TANK. EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE GREATER THAN 100 MS TO
ENSURE ACCURATE MEASUREMENTS.
Refer to figure 4-2 for test point locations referenced in the following section(s).
Step
1.
2.
3.
4.
Action
SEE NOTE ABOVE RE USE OF TEST
POINTS FOR VERIFYING CALIBRATION
Connect ‘scope probe channel 1 input to TP6
and TP8 (kVp)
Connect ‘scope probe channel 2 input to TP7
and TP10 (Rad mA).
Adjust ‘scope gains as required. Use the KV
signal to trigger the ‘scope.
Switch ON the generator and after initialization
select the following radiographic technique:
kVp = 100, mA = 100, Time = 50 ms
Select an off-table receptor.
Make an exposure and measure the kVp at
TP6 and TP8 and the Rad mA at TP7 and
TP10. Using scaling factors in figure 4-2,
verify the following results:
Repeat step 3 but set the values to
kVp = 65, mA = 200.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Result
Check
N/A
N/A
kVp = 100 KV ± 3%.
mA = 100 mA ± 4% (Millenia).
mA = 100 mA ± 5% (Indico 100).
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
kVp = 65 KV ± 3%.
mA = 200 mA ± 4% (Millenia).
mA = 200 mA ± 5% (Indico 100).
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-11
4
Acceptance Testing
4.4.1
CPI Canada Inc.
Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
Step
5.
Action
Repeat step 3 but set the values to
kVp = 125, mA = 200.
6.
Select 75 kVp, 200 mA.
Select the exposure times shown below (3
point operation).
Result
kVp = 125 KV ± 3%.
mA = 200 mA ± 4% (Millenia).
mA = 200 mA ± 4% (Indico 100).
Time = 50 ms ± 2 ms.
Check
(Measure time and mA on the ‘scope and
check that their product is as per the RESULT
column).
Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.
7.
A: 10 ms (2 mAs)
B: 20 ms (4 mAs)
C: 63 ms (12 mAs)
D: 100 ms (20 mAs)
Select 75 kVp.
Select the mAs shown below (2 point
operation).
Measure time at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.
8.
A: 2 mAs (time per LCD display)
B: 8 mAs (time per LCD display)
C: 25 mAs (time per LCD display)
D: 63 mAs (time per LCD display)
Select 200 mA, 50 ms (3 point operation).
A: 2 mAs ± 5%.
B: 4 mAs ± 5%.
C: 12 mAs ± 5%.
D: 20 mAs ± 5%.
NOTE: The time associated with
each mAs setting will vary
depending on generator
configuration.
Use the time displayed in the
LCD window as the reference for
the measurements below.
time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
time per LCD disp ± (2% + 1ms).
Select the kVp values shown below.
The measurements may be done noninvasively or from TP6 and TP8 using the
‘scope.
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Page 4-12
50 kVp
60 kVp
80 kVp
100 kVp
125 kVp
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
Rev. J
50 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
60 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
80 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
100 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
125 kVp ± (3% + 1 kVp).
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
4.4.1
Acceptance Testing
4
Generator Rad Tests (Cont)
Step
9.
Action
Select 75 kVp, 50 ms (3 point operation).
Result
Check
Select the mA values shown below.
Measure mA at 75% of the peak kVp
waveform.
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
50 mA
100 mA
200 mA
400 mA
800 mA
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
50 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
100 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
200 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
400 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
800 mA ± (5% + 1 mA).
Note: The higher mA values will not be
available on all generator models and /
or programmed tube types.
4.4.2
Generator Fluoro Tests
This section applies only to R&F units.
Step
1.
2.
3.
Action
Place the generator into the fluoro mode of
operation.
Connect ‘scope probe channel 1 input to TP6
and TP8 (kVp).
Connect ‘scope probe channel 2 input to TP11
and TP14 (fluoro mA).
Use the kV signal to trigger the ‘scope.
Place imaging system into non-ABS mode or
cover the I.I. input with lead.
Set 3 mA fluoro.
Select the kV values shown below using the
remote fluoro control if fitted, or the fluoro
section of the console.
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
50 KV
65 KV
80 KV
100 KV
110 KV
Result
Check
N/A
N/A
A:
B:
C:
D:
E:
50 kVp ± (10% + 1 kVp).
65 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
80 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
100 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
110 kVp ± (5% + 1 kVp).
Measure the kVp at TP6 and TP8. Using
scaling factors in figure 4-2 verify kV values
per the RESULTS column:
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-13
4
Acceptance Testing
4.4.2
CPI Canada Inc.
Generator Fluoro Tests (Cont)
Step
4.
Action
Select 70 kVp fluoro.
Select the fluoro mA values shown below:
A:
B:
C:
D:
5.
6.
Page 4-14
1.0 mA
2.0 mA
4.0 mA
6.0 mA
Result
A:
B:
C:
D:
Measure the fluoro mA at TP11 and TP14.
Using scaling factors in figure 4-2 verify mA
values per the RESULTS column:
Press the PPS + and - buttons (if the pulse
fluoro option is fitted).
Run a sufficiently long fluoro exposure to
accumulate some time on the console fluoro
display, and on the remote fluoro control if
used
Press the ZERO button on the console and on
the remote fluoro control if applicable.
Rev. J
Check
1.0 mA ± 20%.
2.0 mA ± 20%.
4.0 mA ± 15%.
6.0 mA ± 15%.
Verify that the pulsed fluoro rate
increases and decreases.
Verify that the accumulated time
is reset to zero after pressing
each of the ZERO buttons.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc.
4.5.0
Acceptance Testing
4
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (OPTIONAL INTERFACES)
Refer to separate supplements in this manual for further information IF APPLICABLE.
4.6.0
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (AEC)
This section applies only to generators with AEC.
•
•
4.7.0
Review Section 3D: AEC Calibration.
Recheck the mAs, Dose, and O.D. as recorded during initial installation. Follow the appropriate steps
in section 3D to verify the AEC calibration.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (ABS)
This section applies only to non-digital R&F generators with ABS.
•
•
4.8.0
Review section 3E: ABS calibration.
Recheck the dose limits and input dose as described in the procedure.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (DAP)
This section applies only to Indico 100 X-ray generators with DAP.
•
•
Review Section 3F: DAP SETUP AND CALIBRATION.
Follow the appropriate steps in section 3F to verify the DAP calibration.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
Rev. J
Page 4-15
4
Acceptance Testing
4.9.0
CPI Canada Inc.
ACCEPTANCE TESTS (HVL, LINEARITY AND REPRODUCIBILITY)
The procedure for performing reproducibility, linearity and HVL testing is contained in a separate
document, part number 740917 that immediately follows this page.
Page 4-16
Rev. J
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-08
CPI Canada Inc
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
SUPPLEMENT
REPRODUCIBILTY, LINEARITY,
& HVL TESTING
CONTENTS:
1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.0 EQUIPMENT SETUP........................................................................................................................................... 3
3.0 REPRODUCIBILITY............................................................................................................................................. 3
4.0 LINEARITY........................................................................................................................................................... 7
5.0 H.V.L. EVALUATION ........................................................................................................................................... 9
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 1
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
1.0
CPI Canada Inc
INTRODUCTION
This supplement describes reproducibility, linearity, and half - value layer (HVL) tests which may be used
to verify performance of medical X-ray generators.
Page 2
NOTE:
THIS SUPPLEMENT DETAILS TYPICAL REPRODUCIBILITY, LINEARITY, AND HVL
TESTS. LOCAL REGULATIONS SHOULD ALWAYS BE CONSULTED PRIOR TO
PERFORMING THESE TESTS, AS DETAILS MAY VARY IN SOME JURISDICTIONS,
OR ADDITIONAL TESTS MAY NEED TO BE PERFORMED.
WARNING:
SOME EXPOSURES IN
GENERATOR KVP. THE
OPERATION AT THAT
SEASONED TO ENSURE
PROBLEMATIC.
Rev. A
THIS SECTION MUST BE TAKEN AT THE MAXIMUM
X-RAY TUBE MUST BE KNOWN TO BE CAPABLE OF
KVP VALUE, AND THE TUBE SHOULD FIRST BE
THAT OPERATION AT HIGH KVP VALUES WILL NOT BE
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
CPI Canada Inc
2.0
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
EQUIPMENT SETUP
1.
Place the radiation probe above the table approximately 25 cm (10”). Select an SID of
approximately 100 cm (40”).
2.
Place a lead diaphragm over the detector and adjust its height so that the X-ray beam covers the
detector but does not over radiate the sides of the ‘R’ probe. Refer to figure 1.
Figure 1: mR measurement setup
3.0
REPRODUCIBILITY
Calculate reproducibility as follows:
1.
Using kV and mA/ms or mAs values per tables 1 to 4, make a series of 5 exposures.
2.
Record each of the measured mR values in the appropriate table. Refer to step 3 before
beginning step 2.
3.
Record the preselected mAs for each series of exposures in the header of each table. For 3 point
generators, this is the calculated mAs value where mAs = mA X time in seconds (example for
160 mA and 125 ms, mAs = 160 X 0.125 = 20 mAs).
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 3
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
3.0
CPI Canada Inc
REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
4.
Calculate and record the average dose mR.
5.
Calculate the difference mR - mR for each exposure.
6.
Square each difference from the previous step.
7.
Calculate the sum of the differences squared.
8.
Calculate the standard deviation (S) by using the formula.
9.
Calculate reproducibility by dividing S by mR.
10.
Table 5 shows example reproducibility calculations.
11.
If linearity is to be measured, it is suggested that dose measurements be taken at this time for
entry into tables 6 and 7. Refer to 4.0 LINEARITY for details.
IN TABLES 1 TO 4, 3 POINT MEANS THAT FOR GENERATORS WHERE KV, MA, AND TIME
SELECTION IS AVAILABLE, THE KV, MA AND MS VALUES SHOWN SHOULD BE USED. FOR
GENERATORS WHERE 2 POINT OPERATION ONLY IS AVAILABLE, THE KV AND MAS VALUES
SHOWN SHOULD BE USED.
3 point = Minimum kV, maximum mA, 100 ms.
2 point = Minimum kV, maximum mAs.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
mAs = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
Calculate each of the differences
ie: DIFF1 = mR1 - mR.
Repeat for each remaining mR
value.
Square each difference. Then
calculate the sum of the difference2.
Sum of difference2 = _________
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section:
Calculate reproducibility =
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 1: Reproducibility
Page 4
Rev. A
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
CPI Canada Inc
3.0
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
3 point = Maximum kV, minimum mA, 100 ms.
2 point = Maximum kV, minimum mAs.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
mAs = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
Calculate each of the differences
ie: DIFF1 = mR1 - mR.
Repeat for each remaining mR
value.
Square each difference. Then
calculate the sum of the difference2.
Sum of difference2 = _________
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section:
Calculate reproducibility =
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 2: Reproducibility
3 point = 50% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose.
2 point = 50% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
mAs = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
Calculate each of the differences
ie: DIFF1 = mR1 - mR.
Repeat for each remaining mR
value.
Square each difference. Then
calculate the sum of the difference2.
Sum of difference2 = _________
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section:
Calculate reproducibility =
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 3: Reproducibility
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 5
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
3.0
CPI Canada Inc
REPRODUCIBILITY (Cont)
3 point = 80% of maximum kV, 250 ms, mA to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose.
2 point = 80% of maximum kV, mAs to give 100 - 500 µR (1 - 5 µGy) dose.
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
MAS = __________
DIFFERENCE2
DIFFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
mR =
________
Calculate each of the differences
ie: DIFF1 = mR1 - mR.
Repeat for each remaining mR
value.
Square each difference. Then
calculate the sum of the difference2.
Sum of difference2 = _________
Calculate standard deviation (S) using formula at beginning of this section:
Calculate reproducibility =
S = __________
S
= _________ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 4: Reproducibility
EXAMPLE
mAs = _20_
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
DIFFERENCE
DIFFERENCE2
1
249.0
4.4
19.36
2
245.0
0.4
0.16
3
244.0
0.6
0.36
4
242.0
2.6
6.76
5
243.0
1.6
2.56
Calculate each of the differences
ie: DIFF1 = mR1 - mR.
Repeat for each remaining mR
value.
mR =
_244.6_
Square each difference. Then
calculate the sum of the difference2.
Sum of difference2 = _29.2_
Calculate standard deviation (s) using formula at beginning of this section:
Calculate reproducibility =
S = _2.70_
S
= _0.011_ (not to exceed 0.045)
mR
Table 5: Reproducibility
Page 6
Rev. A
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
CPI Canada Inc
4.0
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
LINEARITY
1.
Record two additional series of dose measurements for entry into tables 6 and 7:
• For table 6, use settings per table 3 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 3.
• For table 7, use settings per table 4 EXCEPT use an mA (or mAs) value adjacent to the mA
(or mAs) setting used in table 4.
• Record the mAs in the header of tables 6 and 7 as per 3.0 step 3.
1.
Calculate and record the average dose mR for table 6 and 7.
2.
Record the preselected mAs and the average dose values taken from tables 3 and 4, and from
tables 6 and 7, at the top of the next page.
3.
Using the appropriate mAs and mR values, calculate X3, X4, X6, and X7 in tables 8 and 9.
4.
Calculate the coefficient of linearity, L, as per tables 8 and 9.
mAs = __________
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
1
2
3
4
5
mR = ________
Table 6: Linearity
mAs = __________
EXP No.
DOSE (mR)
1
2
3
4
5
mR = ________
Table 7: Linearity
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 7
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
4.0
CPI Canada Inc
LINEARITY (Cont)
Record the mAs and mR values taken from tables 3, 4, 6, and 7 below.
Table 3
mAs3 = _____
mR3 = _____
Table 4
mAs4 = _____
mR4 = _____
Table 6
mAs6 = _____
mR6 = _____
Table 7
mAs7 = _____
mR7 = _____
mR3
X3 =
= ________
mAs3
mR6
X6 =
= ________
mAs6
X3 - X6
L =
= ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X3 + X6
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X3 - X6
(disregard the minus sign).
Table 8: Linearity
mR4
X4 =
= ________
mAs4
mR7
X7 =
= ________
mAs7
X4 - X7
L =
= ________ (not to exceed 0.095)
X4 + X7
In the numerator of the above equation, use the absolute value of X4 - X7
(disregard the minus sign).
Table 9: Linearity
Page 8
Rev. A
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
CPI Canada Inc
5.0
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
H.V.L. EVALUATION
1.
Be sure the X-ray source assembly (X-ray tube and beam limiting device) is fully assembled and
functional.
2.
Use the test setup as per figure 1.
3.
Set the generator as follows: 3 point generators, 80 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 80 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs.
4.
Take a series of three exposures and record the mR values in table 10. Calculate and record the
average of the three exposures.
5.
Place 2 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 2 mm added), repeat the exposure and
record the mR value in table 10.
6.
Place an additional 1 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 3 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the mR value in table 10.
7.
Place an additional 3 mm of Al on top of the lead diaphragm (total of 6 mm added), repeat the
exposure; and record the mR value in table 10.
8.
The relative transmission for the average of the three mR values where no Al was added is
assigned a value of 1.00. Using that base, assign relative transmission values to the remaining
mR values. For example, if the average mR value was 247 and has a relative transmission factor
of 1.00, then 162 mR will have a relative transmission of 162 / 247 = 0.66.
9.
Plot the relative transmission values in figure 1. This should produce a straight line on the graph
since the X-axis is logarithmic.
10.
Interpolate to determine the HVL. The Al thickness at a relative transmission of 0.5 will be the
required HVL value.
11.
Repeat steps 4 to 10: 3 point generators, 100 kV, 200 mA, 50 ms, large focus. For 2 point
generators use 100 kV, 200 mA if this can be set, and 10 mAs. Use table 11 to record the values
and figure 2 to plot the results
12.
Table 12 and figure 3 show example HVL determination.
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 9
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
5.0
CPI Canada Inc
H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)
ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER
DOSE (mR)
RELATIVE TRANSMISSION
0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings)
1.00
2
1
3
Table 10: HVL dose values 80 kVp
Figure 1: HVL plot 80 kVp
For 80 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 2.3 mm Al.
Page 10
Rev. A
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
CPI Canada Inc
5.0
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)
ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER
DOSE (mR)
RELATIVE TRANSMISSION
0
0
0
0 (Average of three readings)
1.00
2
1
3
Table 11: HVL dose values 100 kVp
Figure 2: HVL plot 100 kVp
For 100 kVp, the HVL must be ≥ 2.7 mm Al.
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
Rev. A
Page 11
Reproducibility, Linearity, & HVL Testing
5.0
CPI Canada Inc
H.V.L. EVALUATION (Cont)
ADDED ALUMINUM FILTER
DOSE (mR)
RELATIVE TRANSMISSION
0
249
0
244
0
247
0 (Average of above three readings)
247
1.00
2
162
.66
1
131
.53
3
70
.28
Table 12: HVL dose values (example)
Figure 3: HVL plot (example)
By interpolating the thickness of Al at a relative transmission value of 0.5, it can be seen that the HVL is
approximately 3.3.
Page 12
Rev. A
X-Ray Generator Service Manual Supplement
740917-00
CPI Canada Inc.
Troubleshooting
5
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING
CONTENTS:
SECTION
TITLE
5.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN)................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen) .......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen)................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.2.3 Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen) ................................................................................................................ 5-3
5.3.0 STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN) .......................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.1 Operator Messages (Touch Screen)................................................................................................................ 5-10
5.3.2 Limit Messages (Touch Screen)....................................................................................................................... 5-10
5.3.3 Error Messages (Touch Screen) ...................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.0 MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS................................................................................................................................ 5-18
5.4.1 Erratic Console Faults ...................................................................................................................................... 5-18
5.1.0
INTRODUCTION
The Millenia and Indico 100 console will display status messages on the LCD display during normal and
abnormal operation of the generator. This chapter contains tables of those messages and suggests actions to
be taken by service personnel to correct any malfunctions that may occur.
Section 5.2.0 details status and error messages for generators with the “standard” (non-touch screen console).
Refer to section 5.3 for status and error messages for the touch screen console.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
Page 5-1
5
Troubleshooting
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.0
STATUS AND ERROR CODES (NON-TOUCH SCREEN)
5.2.1
Operator Messages (Non-Touch Screen)
These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required.
MESSAGE
INITIALIZATION
SPINNING ROTOR
X-RAY READY
X-RAY ON
DAP NOT READY
5.2.2
DESCRIPTION
Displayed during power up sequence.
Displayed when prep state is active.
Displayed when generator is ready to expose
Displayed during both a rad and fluoro exposure.
The optional DAP (Indico 100 only) is in its “warm up” state, and not ready to
make DAP measurements.
Limit Messages (Non-Touch Screen)
These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.
MESSAGE
TUBE KV LIMIT
CAL LIMIT
PROBLEM
Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit
has been reached.
Requested kV not allowed as generator kV
limit has been reached.
Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit
has been reached.
Requested mA not allowed as generator
mA limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not allowed as tube
kW limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not allowed as
generator kW limit has been reached.
Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs
limit has been reached.
Requested mAs not allowed as generator
mAs limit has been reached.
Requested ms not allowed as generator ms
limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not calibrated.
AEC DENSITY LIM
Requested density not programmed.
ANODE HEAT WARN
Anode has exceeded programmed warning
level.
FL TIMER WARN
Fluoro interval timer ≥ 5.0 mins.
Generator detected invalid parameter within
received message, message ignored.
GEN KV LIMIT
TUBE MA LIMIT
GEN MA LIMIT
TUBE KW LIMIT
GEN KW LIMIT
TUBE MAS LIMIT
GEN MAS LIMIT
GEN MS LIMIT
INVALID PARAM
Page 5-2
Rev. G
ACTION
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
Select another density
or program requested
density step.
Wait for anode to cool.
Reset fluoro timer.
Select valid
parameter.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.2
Troubleshooting
Limit Messages (Cont)
HOUSE HEAT WARN
GEN DUTY WARNING
DAP ACCUM WARN
DAP RATE WARN
5.2.3
5
X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded
housing warning limit.
The generator has reached its duty cycle
warning limit.
The accumulated DAP value has reached
the programmed DAP limit.
The current DAP rate exceeds the
programmed DAP rate limit.
Wait for housing to
cool.
Re-evaluate technique
factors. Allow
generator to cool if
possible. If exposures
are continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
Reset the DAP.
Reduce the dose.
Error Messages (Non-Touch Screen)
These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors
should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action.
ERROR CODE
MESSAGE
APR MEMORY ERROR
PROBLEM
APR data has been
corrupted.
Generator CPU EPROM
has been corrupted.
E001
GEN EPROM ERR
E003
GEN NVRAM ERR
Generator CPU NVRAM
data has been corrupted.
E004
GEN RTC ERROR
E005
PS CONTACT ERR
E006
ROTOR FAULT
Generator CPU real time
clock is not functioning.
Main contactor in HF power
supply did not energize.
1. Rotor starter may have
detected a current fault
in the stator.
E007
FILAMENT FAULT
2. Power supply was not
ready to start rotor.
Power supply has detected
filament current <2 amps.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
See note 1 near end
of this section.
Call product support
for new generator
CPU EPROM.
Re-initialize
generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
Reset time and date.
Call product support.
Power unit off and
retry rotor start.
1. Check for open
filament in X-ray
tube.
2. Check for poor
connections in the
cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on
filament board(s).
Page 5-3
5
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
Page 5-4
ERROR CODE
E008
MESSAGE
KV/MA FAULT
PROBLEM
Power supply has detected
a fault in the kV or mA
output during an exposure
and immediately terminated
the exposure. This may be
caused by arcing in the Xray tube, arcing of the HV
cables, or HT tank.
E009
PS NOT READY
E011
HIGH MA FAULT
E012
LOW MA FAULT
E013
MANUAL TERMIN
Power supply is not ready to
make an exposure.
Generator CPU detected
mA greater than allowed
tolerance.
Generator CPU detected
mA less than allowed
tolerance.
Operator released exposure
switch during exposure.
E014
AEC BUT ERROR
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up time.
E015
AEC BU MAS ERR
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up mAs.
E016
TOMO BUT ERROR
Tomo exposure exceeded
back up time.
Rev. G
ACTION
1. If arcing of the Xray tube is
suspected, check
condition of tube.
The X-ray tube
may be damaged
or simply require
“seasoning”.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
Retry exposure.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
1. Re-take exposure
if necessary.
2. Check for faulty
switch contacts or
wiring.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.3
Troubleshooting
5
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E017
MESSAGE
NOT CALIBRATED
PROBLEM
Selected mA not calibrated
for selected kV.
Generator has been in prep
state too long.
Selected parameters will
cause X-ray tube to exceed
its programmed anode heat
limit.
X-ray tube # 1 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
X-ray tube # 2 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
Door is open.
Collimator is not ready.
Generator did not receive a
Bucky contact closure in a
reasonable time after start
of Rad expose state.
II safety is not ready.
Spare input is not ready.
Prep input active during
power on initialization
phase.
X-ray input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Fluoro input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Communication error
detected with remote fluoro
control unit.
E018
PREP TIMEOUT
E019
ANODE HEAT LIMIT
E020
THERMAL INT #1
E021
THERMAL INT #2
E022
E023
E024
DOOR INTERLOCK
COLLIMATOR ERR
CASSETTE ERROR
E025
E026
E028
II SAFETY INT
SPARE INT
PREP SW CLOSED
E029
X-RAY SW CLOSED
E030
FLUORO SW CLOSED
E031
REMOTE COMM ERR
E032
CONSOLE COMM ERR
Generator has detected
error in communication to
console.
E033
GEN BATTERY LOW
Generator detects lithium
battery voltage is low.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
Recalibrate X-ray
tube.
Reduce length of
time in prep state.
Reduce parameters
or wait for tube to
cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
1 to cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
2 to cool.
Close door.
Check collimator.
Check for grid
movement and drive
signal to Bucky.
Check II safety.
Check spare input.
Check prep switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check X-ray switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check fluoro switch
and input for short
circuit.
1. Check remote
fluoro control cable
for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off
and then on to
Reset Generator.
1. Check console
cable for damage
and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and
then on to reset
generator.
Replace lithium
battery.
Page 5-5
5
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
Page 5-6
ERROR CODE
E034
MESSAGE
+12VDC ERROR
E035
-12VDC ERROR
E036
+15VDC ERROR
E037
-15VDC ERROR
E038
CAL DATA ERROR
E039
AEC DATA ERROR
E040
FLUORO DATA ERROR
Generator detects corrupt
Fluoro data.
E041
REC DATA ERROR
Generator detects corrupt
receptor data.
E042
TUBE DATA ERR
Generator detects corrupt
tube data.
E043
KV ERROR
KV detected in non x-ray
state.
E044
COMM ERROR
E045
NOT SUPPORTED
E046
MODE INHIBITED
E047
FL TIMER LIMIT
E048
FOCUS MISMATCH
Received communication
message not valid and
ignored.
Received message valid,
but not supported by this
system.
Received message valid,
but not allowed during
present state.
Fluoro Timer has exceeded
time limit.
Focus selected does not
match current focus enabled
by power supply.
E049
NOT ENABLED
Rev. G
PROBLEM
+12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
-12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
+15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
-15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Generator detects corrupt
calibration data.
Generator detects corrupt
AEC data.
Requested function not
programmed to be enabled.
ACTION
Check +12VDC rail.
Check -12VDC rail.
Check +15VDC rail.
Check -15VDC rail.
Re-calibrate X-ray
tube(s).
Reprogram AEC data
or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram fluoro
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram receptor
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram tube data
or set factory
defaults.
Switch OFF
generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
Reset error.
Reset error.
Reset error.
Reset Fluoro timer.
Check power supply
interface cables
between power
supply and generator
CPU board.
Reprogram to enable
function.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.3
Troubleshooting
5
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E050
MESSAGE
GEN DATA ERROR
PROBLEM
Generator detects corrupt
generator limit data.
E051
AEC DEVICE ERR
Generator has detected no
feedback signal from AEC
device.
E052
HIGH SF CURRENT
E053
HIGH LF CURRENT
E054
AEC OUT OF RANGE
Generator detects small
focus filament current
greater than limits in
standby mode.
Generator detects large
focus filament current
greater than limits in
standby mode.
AEC reference has reached
a maximum or minimum
limit.
E055
NO FIELDS ACTIVE
E056
NO TUBE SELECTED
E057
AEC STOP ERROR
E058
CONSOLE BUT ERR
E059
HOUSE HEAT LIMIT
AEC enabled but no fields
are selected.
All Receptors have no X-ray
tube programmed.
AEC stop signal (P.T. stop
signal) is active low
indicating exposure is
finished during prep state.
Console has detected
exposure exceeded backup
time and terminated
exposure.
X-ray tube housing has
exceeded limit.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
Reprogram generator
limit data or set
factory defaults.
1. Check that X-ray
tube is pointing at
correct AEC
device.
2. Check AEC cable
for damage and
proper
connection.
Check small focus
filament board.
Check large focus
filament board.
Re-adjust AEC
calibration including
density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
Select AEC field(s).
Program receptor(s)
with tube number.
1. Check that P.T.
ramp does not
exceed P.T.
reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device
for proper
operation.
Call product support.
Wait for tube to cool.
Page 5-7
5
Troubleshooting
5.2.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
Page 5-8
ERROR CODE
E060
MESSAGE
EXP KV HIGH
PROBLEM
KV exceeds high KV
tolerance level.
E061
EXP KV LOW
KV exceeds low KV
tolerance level.
E062
EXP_ SW ERROR
E063
FACTORY DEFAULTS
The EXP_SW signal on the
generator Interface and
generator CPU board is
enabled when it should be
disabled.
SW1 switch 8 on the
generator CPU board is set
to default the generator
CPU NVRAM with factory
defaults.
E066
NO SYNC PULSE
Pulsed fluoro has been
requested, but no sync
pulse is present.
E070
SOFTWARE KEY ERR
E071
DAP OVERFLOW
Defective or missing GAL
U29 on generator CPU
board 734573.
The accumulated DAP
value exceeds the display
limit.
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
Call product support.
Set SW1 switch 8 to
its non default
position. The
generator will not exit
the initialization
phase until this
switch is set.
1. Check that the
imaging system is
active, and cables
are connected
properly.
2. Check JW22 on
the generator
interface board.
Call product support
for new GAL U29.
Reset the DAP.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.2.3
Troubleshooting
5
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E072
MESSAGE
DAP DEVICE ERROR
PROBLEM
The DAP device is not
functional.
E073
DAP DATA ERROR
The DAP configuration data
is corrupted.
E100
CAL_MAX MA ERR
Maximum mA has been
exceeded during auto
calibration.
E101
CAL_DATA LIMIT
Auto calibration has
exceeded data table length
due to an excessive number
of exposures.
E102
CAL_MAX FIL ERR
Maximum filament current
for the selected focus has
been exceeded.
E103
CAL_MAN TERM
E104
CAL_NO MA
Operator released exposure
button during auto
calibration.
No mA feedback detected
during auto calibration.
E105
CAL_MIN MA ERR
Minimum generator mA was
exceeded at start of
calibration. This is usually
caused by too high a
filament standby current on
the primary and or
secondary filament.
(Primary is the current
filament being calibrated,
secondary is the other
filament and applies only to
generators with two
independent filament
supplies).
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check the DAP
wiring.
2. Check the DAP
interface board.
Reset factory
defaults.
Repeat auto
calibration and/or
decrease standby
current.
1. Check to see if
the filament
standby current is
too low.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
1. Check to see if
the maximum
filament current
limit can be
increased.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
Retry auto
Calibration.
Check power supply
Interface cables
between HF power
supply and generator
CPU board.
Reduce filament
standby current on
primary and/or
secondary filament.
Page 5-9
5
Troubleshooting
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.0
STATUS AND ERROR CODES (TOUCH SCREEN)
5.3.1
Operator Messages (Touch Screen)
These messages indicate the status of the generator. No action is required.
MESSAGE
Generator Ready
Unable to establish
generator
communication.
Communication with
generator reestablished
5.3.2
DESCRIPTION
Indicates that the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Indicates that the console is unable to communicate with the generator.
Ensure that the generator is switched on, and that the console cable is properly
connected to J2 on the rear of the console.
Indicates that the console has re-established communication with the
generator.
Limit Messages (Touch Screen)
These messages indicate that an exposure has been requested that exceeds one or more limits.
MESSAGE
Anode warning level exceeded
Calibration limit: selected
parameter not calibrated.
PROBLEM
Anode has exceeded programmed warning
level.
Requested parameter not calibrated.
Deselect tomo table
Request operator to deselect tomo table.
Fluoro timer warning level
exceeded
Generator AEC density limit
Fluoro interval timer ≥ 5.0 mins.
Generator duty cycle warning
The X-ray generator has reached its duty
cycle warning limit.
Generator kV limit
Requested kV not allowed as generator kV
limit has been reached.
Requested parameter not allowed as
generator kW limit has been reached.
Requested mA not allowed as generator
mA limit has been reached.
Requested mAs not allowed as generator
mAs limit has been reached.
Requested ms not allowed as generator ms
limit has been reached.
Generator kW limit
Generator mA limit
Generator mAs limit
Generator ms limit
Page 5-10
Requested density not programmed.
Rev. G
ACTION
Wait for the anode to
cool.
Recalibrate X-ray tube
or select a calibrated
parameter.
Deselect the tomo
receptor.
Reset fluoro timer.
Select another density
or program requested
density step.
Re-evaluate technique
factors. Allow
generator to cool if
possible. If exposures
are continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
None.
None.
None.
None.
None.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.2
Troubleshooting
Limit Messages (Cont)
MESSAGE
Generator PPS limit
Invalid communication
parameter
Select tomo table.
PROBLEM
Generator PPS limit has been reached.
Generator detected invalid parameter within
received message, message ignored.
Request operator to select tomo table.
Tube housing heat warning
X-ray tube housing heat has exceeded
housing warning limit.
Requested kV not allowed as tube kV limit
has been reached.
Requested parameter not allowed as tube
kW limit has been reached.
Requested mA not allowed as tube mA limit
has been reached.
Requested mAs not allowed as tube mAs
limit has been reached.
Tube kV limit
Tube kW limit
Tube mA limit
Tube mAs limit
5.3.3
5
ACTION
None.
Select valid
parameter.
Select the tomo
receptor
Wait for the tube
housing to cool.
None.
None.
None.
None.
Error Messages (Touch Screen)
These messages indicate that an error has occurred. The errors are logged in the error log, previous errors
should be reviewed by service personnel before taking further action.
ERROR CODE
E001
MESSAGE
Generator CPU EPROM
checksum error
PROBLEM
Generator CPU EPROM
has been corrupted.
E003
Generator CPU NVRAM
error
Generator CPU NVRAM
data has been corrupted.
E004
E005
Generator CPU Real Time
Clock error.
Main Contactor Error
E006
Rotor Fault
Generator CPU real time
clock is not functioning.
Main contactor in HF power
supply did not energize.
1. Rotor starter may have
detected a current fault
in the stator.
ACTION
Call product support
for new generator
CPU EPROM.
Re-initialize
generator CPU
NVRAM using
generator factory
defaults.
Reset time and date.
Call product support.
Power unit off and
retry rotor start.
2. Power supply was not
ready to start rotor.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
Page 5-11
5
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E007
MESSAGE
Filament Fault
PROBLEM
Power supply has detected
filament current <2 amps.
E008
mA Fault
Power supply has detected
a fault in the kV or mA
output during an exposure
and immediately terminated
the exposure. This may be
caused by arcing in the Xray tube, arcing of the HV
cables, or HT tank.
E009
Power Supply Not Ready
E011
MA During Exposure Too
High
E012
MA During Exposure Too
Low
E013
Manually Terminated
Exposure
Power supply is not ready to
make an exposure.
Generator CPU detected
mA greater than allowed
tolerance.
Generator CPU detected
mA less than allowed
tolerance.
Operator released exposure
switch during exposure.
E014
AEC Back-up Timer Exposure Terminated
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up time.
Page 5-12
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check for open
filament in X-ray
tube.
2. Check for poor
connections in the
cathode cable.
3. Check fuses on
filament board(s).
1. If arcing of the Xray tube is
suspected, check
condition of tube.
The X-ray tube
may be damaged
or simply require
“seasoning”.
Refer to chapter 6
for tube
seasoning
procedure.
2. If failure of HT
tank is suspected,
contact product
support.
Retry exposure.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
Recalibrate X-ray
tube. *
1. Re-take exposure
if necessary.
2. Check for faulty
switch contacts or
wiring.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
Troubleshooting
5
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E015
MESSAGE
AEC mAs Exceeded Exposure Terminated
PROBLEM
AEC exposure exceeded
allowed back up mAs.
E016
Tomo Back-up Timer Exposure Terminated
Tomo exposure exceeded
back up time.
E017
E018
Uncalibrated Exposure
Parameter
Preparation Timeout
E019
Anode Heat Limit
E020
Thermal Switch Interlock #1
Error
E021
Thermal Switch Interlock #2
Error
E022
E023
E024
Door Interlock
Collimator Interlock Error
Cassette Interlock Error
E025
Image Intensifier Safety
Interlock Error
Spare Input Interlock Error
Receptor Timeout Error Receptor did not respond
within the timeout period
Prep Input Active During
Initialization Phase
Selected mA not calibrated
for selected kV.
Generator has been in prep
state too long.
Selected parameters will
cause X-ray tube to exceed
its programmed anode heat
limit.
X-ray tube # 1 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
X-ray tube # 2 too hot and
its thermal switch has
opened.
Door is open.
Collimator is not ready.
Generator did not receive a
Bucky contact closure in a
reasonable time after start
of Rad expose state.
II safety is not ready.
E026
E027
E028
E029
X-Ray Input Active During
Initialization Phase
E030
Fluoro Input Active During
Initialization Phase
Spare input is not ready.
The receptor is not
responding
Prep input active during
power on initialization
phase.
X-ray input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Fluoro input active during
power on initialization
phase.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Check that correct
AEC chamber is
energized.
1. Check exposure
technique
settings.
2. Increase tomo
back up time if
necessary.
Recalibrate X-ray
tube.
Reduce length of
time in prep state.
Reduce parameters
or wait for tube to
cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
1 to cool.
Wait for X-ray tube #
2 to cool.
Close door.
Check collimator.
Check for grid
movement and drive
signal to Bucky.
Check II safety.
Check spare input.
Wait for receptor to
be ready, then retry
exposure.
Check prep switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check X-ray switch
and input for short
circuit.
Check fluoro switch
and input for short
circuit.
Page 5-13
5
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E031
MESSAGE
Remote Fluoro
Communication Error
PROBLEM
Communication error
detected with remote fluoro
control unit.
E032
Console Communication
Error
Generator has detected
error in communication to
console.
E033
E034
Warning Lithium Battery
Voltage Low
+12VDC Error
E035
-12VDC Error
E036
+15VDC Error
E037
-15VDC Error
E038
E039
Calibration Data Corrupt
Error
AEC Data Corrupt
Generator detects lithium
battery voltage is low.
+12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
-12VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
+15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
-15VDC rail is out of
tolerance.
Generator detects corrupt
calibration data.
Generator detects corrupt
AEC data.
E040
Fluoro Data Corrupt
Generator detects corrupt
Fluoro data.
E041
Receptor Data Corrupt
Generator detects corrupt
receptor data.
E042
Tube Data Corrupt
Generator detects corrupt
tube data.
E043
High Voltage Error - kV
detected in non X-ray state
KV detected in non x-ray
state.
E044
Invalid Communication
Message
Received communication
message not valid and
ignored.
Page 5-14
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check remote
fluoro control cable
for damage and
proper connection.
2. Turn power off
and then on to
Reset Generator.
1. Check console
cable for damage
and proper
connection.
2. Turn power off and
then on to reset
generator.
Replace lithium
battery.
Check +12VDC rail.
Check -12VDC rail.
Check +15VDC rail.
Check -15VDC rail.
Re-calibrate X-ray
tube(s).
Reprogram AEC data
or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram fluoro
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram receptor
data or set factory
defaults.
Reprogram tube data
or set factory
defaults.
Switch OFF
generator. Prevent
further use of
generator. Call
product support.
Reset error.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
Troubleshooting
5
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E045
MESSAGE
Communication Message
Not Supported
PROBLEM
Received message valid,
but not supported by this
system.
Received message valid,
but not allowed during
present state.
Fluoro Timer has exceeded
time limit.
Focus selected does not
match current focus enabled
by power supply.
E046
Mode Inhibited
E047
Fluoro Timer Limit
E048
Focus mismatch error
E049
Not Enabled
E050
Generator Limit Data
Corrupt
E051
AEC Feedback Error (No
Feedback Signal Detected)
Generator has detected no
feedback signal from AEC
device.
E052
High Small focus filament
current error in standby
E053
High Large focus filament
current error in standby
E054
AEC Reference out of range
Generator detects small
focus filament current
greater than limits in
standby mode.
Generator detects large
focus filament current
greater than limits in
standby mode.
AEC reference has reached
a maximum or minimum
limit.
E055
No fields selected in AEC
E056
Receptor Disabled
Requested function not
programmed to be enabled.
Generator detects corrupt
generator limit data.
AEC enabled but no fields
are selected.
All Receptors have no X-ray
tube programmed.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
Reset error.
Reset error.
Reset Fluoro timer.
Check power supply
interface cables
between power
supply and generator
CPU board.
Reprogram to enable
function.
Reprogram generator
limit data or set
factory defaults.
1. Check that X-ray
tube is pointing at
correct AEC
device.
2. Check AEC cable
for damage and
proper
connection.
Check small focus
filament board.
Check large focus
filament board.
Re-adjust AEC
calibration including
density to operate
within AEC range (O
to 1OVDC).
Select AEC field(s).
Program receptor(s)
with tube number.
Page 5-15
5
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E057
MESSAGE
AEC Stop Signal In Wrong
State
PROBLEM
AEC stop signal (P.T. stop
signal) is active low
indicating exposure is
finished during prep state.
E058
Console Back-up Timer
E059
E060
Housing Heat Limit
Exceeded
High kV Error
Console has detected
exposure exceeded backup
time and terminated
exposure.
X-ray tube housing has
exceeded limit.
KV exceeds high KV
tolerance level.
E061
Low kV Error
KV exceeds low KV
tolerance level.
E062
EXP_SW Signal Active in
Standby State
E063
Factory Defaults Set
The EXP_SW signal on the
generator Interface and
generator CPU board is
enabled when it should be
disabled.
SW1 switch 8 on the
generator CPU board is set
to default the generator
CPU NVRAM with factory
defaults.
Page 5-16
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check that P.T.
ramp does not
exceed P.T.
reference during
prep state.
2. Check AEC device
for proper
operation.
Call product support.
Wait for tube to cool.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
1. Check the output
of the kV
reference DAC on
the generator
CPU board.
2. Measure the
output of the
generator with a
dynalyzer or a
non-invasive kVp
meter.
Call product support.
Set SW1 switch 8 to
its non default
position. The
generator will not exit
the initialization
phase until this
switch is set.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc.
5.3.3
Troubleshooting
5
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E066
MESSAGE
No Sync Signal
PROBLEM
Pulsed fluoro has been
requested, but no sync
pulse is present.
E067
Power Supply Duty Cycle
Limit
Power supply duty cycle
limit exceeded.
E070
Generator software key
error
E071
DAP overflow error
E072
DAP device error
Defective or missing GAL
U29 on generator CPU
board 734573.
The accumulated DAP
value exceeds the display
limit.
The DAP device is not
functional.
E073
DAP data error
The DAP configuration data
is corrupted.
E100
Calibration Error - Maximum
mA Exceeded
Maximum mA has been
exceed during auto
calibration.
E101
Calibration Error Calibration Data Table
Exceeded
Auto calibration has
exceeded data table length
due to an excessive number
of exposures.
E102
Calibration Error - Maximum
Filament Current Exceeded
Maximum filament current
for the selected focus has
been exceeded.
E103
Calibration Error - Manually
Terminated
Operator released exposure
button during auto
calibration.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual Ch # 740904-09
Rev. G
ACTION
1. Check that the
imaging system is
active, and cables
are connected
properly.
2. Check JW22 on
the generator
interface board.
Re-evaluate
technique factors.
Allow generator to
cool if possible. If
exposures are
continued, serious
generator damage
may result due to
overheating.
Call product support
for new GAL U29.
Reset the DAP.
1. Check the DAP
wiring.
2. Check the DAP
interface board.
Reset factory
defaults.
Repeat auto
calibration and/or
decrease standby
current.
1. Check to see if
the filament
standby current is
too low.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
1. Check to see if
the maximum
filament current
limit can be
increased.
2. Retry auto
calibration.
Retry auto
Calibration.
Page 5-17
5
Troubleshooting
5.3.3
CPI Canada Inc.
Error Messages (Cont)
ERROR CODE
E104
MESSAGE
Calibration Error - No mA
PROBLEM
No mA feedback detected
during auto calibration.
E105
Calibration Error - Minimum
mA Not Calibrated
Minimum generator mA was
exceeded at start of
calibration. This is usually
caused by too high a
filament standby current on
the primary and or
secondary filament.
(Primary is the current
filament being calibrated,
secondary is the other
filament and applies only to
generators with two
independent filament
supplies).
ACTION
Check power supply
Interface cables
between HF power
supply and generator
CPU board.
Reduce filament
standby current on
primary and/or
secondary filament.
*
The generator purges the existing X-ray tube auto calibration data before starting the auto calibration
routine and saving new calibration data. Therefore, auto calibration should be a last resort during
general troubleshooting, and should only be done to recalibrate the tube. For example, if a low mA
fault is presented, you should ensure that the generator is fully functional, and actually needs
recalibration. If calibration is attempted on a partially functional generator, the auto calibration routine
may be aborted before any calibration is done, and the generator will inhibit further exposures until the
selected mA is calibrated for the selected kV.
1.
For an APR MEMORY ERROR fault, the console factory defaults must be restored or the APR must
be restored via GenWare®. The procedure for resetting console factory defaults is described in
chapter 6.
5.4.0
MISCELLANEOUS FAULTS
5.4.1
Erratic Console Faults
SYMPTOM: In some environments that are “electrically noisy”, the console may exhibit erratic faults i.e. RAM
data error, intermittent loss of communication, or random fault messages may be displayed.
SOLUTION: Connect a separate ground wire, #14 AWG (2.3 mm2) or larger from the ground stud on the rear
of the console (marked CONSOLE GROUND in the figure “rear of control console” in chapter 2)
to the ground stud located to the left of the main input fuse block. This is marked GROUND in the
figure “generator mains connection” in chapter 2.
Page 5-18
Rev. G
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-09
CPI Canada Inc
Regular Maintenance
6
CHAPTER 6
REGULAR MAINTENANCE
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
6.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.0 X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD ........................................................................................... 6-2
6.3.0 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.4.0 OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK) .................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.1 Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check ............................................................................................................................... 6-4
6.4.2 Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check ........................................................................................................................... 6-5
6.5.0 CLEANING ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.6.0 EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE ........................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.1 Console Software / EPROM............................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.6.2 Power EPROM ................................................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6.3 Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted) ................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.6.4 Resetting Factory Defaults ................................................................................................................................. 6-7
6.7.0 SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT.......................................................................................... 6-9
6.8.0 BATTERY REPLACEMENT................................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.9.0 TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING ............................................................................................................... 6-10
6.9.1 Tube Conditioning (Overview).......................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.9.2 Tube Conditioning (Procedure) ........................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE .................................................................................................................................. 6-12
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-1
6
Regular Maintenance
6.1.0
CPI Canada Inc
INTRODUCTION
This chapter of the manual provides a recommended schedule for periodic maintenance of the Millenia and
Indico 100 family of generators.
NOTE:
6.2.0
REFERENCES IN THIS SECTION TO CONSOLE SERVICING (CONSOLE EPROM
REPLACEMENT, SETTING CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS, CONSOLE BATTERY
REPLACEMENT, ETC) DO NOT APPLY TO THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
THE TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE IS NOT FIELD SERVICEABLE, PLEASE CONTACT THE
FACTORY FOR SERVICE.
X-RAY GENERATOR UPDATE/SERVICE RECORD
The X-ray generator update / service record is stored in the upper cabinet of the generator (Millenia) or on the
back of the panel which accesses the control boards in the lower cabinet (Indico 100). The installation date
and location should be recorded on this form at the time of the original site installation.
Service and repairs must be recorded in the update / service record. The record should be as
thorough as possible, detailing the scope and type of work that was performed (all service and a record of all
replacement parts that were installed). Additionally, the person performing the work should date and sign the
record.
This information will be invaluable in the future for traceability and to ensure continued compatibility of
the generator.
6.3.0
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
WARNING:
MAINTENANCE IS TO BE PERFORMED ONLY BY COMPETENT, TRAINED PERSONNEL WHO
ARE FAMILIAR WITH THE POTENTIAL HAZARDS ASSOCIATED WITH THIS EQUIPMENT.
NOTE:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE FREQUENCY MAY BE DETERMINED BY CERTAIN REGULATORY
REQUIREMENTS OF THE COUNTRY OR STATE IN WHICH THE INSTALLATION IS LOCATED.
ALWAYS CHECK THE LOCAL CODES AND REGULATIONS WHEN DETERMINING A
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
WARNING: ALWAYS SWITCH OFF MAINS POWER TO THE GENERATOR AND WAIT A
MINIMUM OF 5 MINUTES FOR CAPACITORS TO DISCHARGE BEFORE
BEGINNING ANY PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE, INCLUDING CLEANING.
WARNING: OBSERVE ESD PRECAUTIONS. KEEP ALL STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS
AND CIRCUIT BOARDS IN THEIR STATIC - SHIELDING PACKAGING UNTIL
READY TO INSTALL. ENSURE THAT YOU ARE GROUNDED AT ALL TIMES
WHEN HANDLING STATIC - SENSITIVE COMPONENTS AND CIRCUIT BOARDS.
Page 6-2
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
6.3.0
Regular Maintenance
6
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (Cont)
Maintenance
Frequency
As governed by local
regulations.
Every 6 Months AND
whenever a related
certifiable X-ray
component is replaced:
Every 12 months:
Every 5 years:
Description of Preventative Maintenance
Check and recalibrate the DAP meter in the generator.
1.
Clean and re-grease all HV connections using vapour proof
compound.
2.
Clean the control console, remote fluoro control (if used) and main
cabinet as needed. REFER TO 6.5.0 CLEANING BEFORE
PROCEEDING
3.
Perform the X-ray tube auto calibration routine, refer to chapter 2.
4.
Verify the calibration of the generator; refer to chapter 4 of this
manual.
5.
Test the X-ray tube thermal switch circuits in the generator.
Disconnect the tube thermal switch(s) and verify the correct error
message, and that X-ray exposures are inhibited.
6.
For fan cooled Indico 100 generators in particular, remove
accumulated dust from the cooling vents. Vacuuming is
recommended.
7.
Perform any additional tests required by laws governing this
installation.
1.
Examine the following for any visible damage and replace any
damaged components:
• The exterior of the control console and remote fluoro control if
used, including the membrane switch assembly.
•
The cable between the control console and the generator main
cabinet and between the remote fluoro control (if used) and
generator main cabinet.
•
The hand switch and fluoro footswitch (if used) and the cables
connecting these to the console.
2.
Open the generator cabinet and examine the unit for any visible
damage: missing or loose ground connections, oil leaks, damaged
cables etc.
3.
Ensure that there are no obstructions blocking any of the ventilation
holes or louvers on the generator cabinet.
Replace the lithium battery on the CPU board in the control console
and on the generator CPU board in the main cabinet. Refer to the
spares list in chapter 8 for the required part number. Refer to
subsection 6.7.0 for battery replacement procedure.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-3
6
Regular Maintenance
6.4.0
CPI Canada Inc
OIL FILL/LEVEL CHECK (HT TANK)
The insulating oil level in the HT transformer does NOT require periodic checking under normal conditions.
However, if there is evidence of possible oil loss, the procedure for checking the correct oil level follows. Refer
to 6.4.1 for Millenia generators, and to 6.4.2 for Indico 100 generators.
6.4.1
Millenia Oil Fill/Level Check
1.
Using a suitable wrench, remove the oil fill cap on top of the HT transformer.
2.
Measure the oil level from the TOP surface of the oil fill flange using a clean ruler. The oil level should
be in the range of 7/8” (22 mm) to 1 3/8” (35 mm) from the top of the flange. Add oil if the oil level is
low, that is greater than 1 3/8” (35 mm) from the top.
3.
Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. Take care not to damage delicate components
inside the tank if using a funnel for oil fill.
4.
Replace the oil filler cap and tighten when finished. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber
in compliance with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations.
Figure 6-1: Millenia HT tank oil fill
Page 6-4
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
6.4.2
Regular Maintenance
6
Indico 100 Oil Fill/Level Check
1.
Loosen the oil fill plug screw on the Indico 100 tank lid.
2.
With the screw sufficiently loosened, remove the rubber (neoprene) plug.
3.
Use a clean ruler, strip of cardboard, or other equivalent material to determine the oil level -measured always from the TOP surface of the HT tank’s lid.
• Normally the oil level should be between 0.88 - 1.25 inches (22 - 32 mm) from the top of the tank
lid.
•
If the oil level is between 1.25 - 1.6 inches (32 - 41 mm) from the top of the tank lid, then clean oil
should be added as needed.
•
If the oil level is greater than 1.6 inches (41 mm) below the top of the tank lid, please consult the
factory.
Figure 6-2: HT tank oil level
4.
5.
Use only fresh oil, type Shell DIALA AX or equivalent. It is critical that air is not added when topping up
the oil. The following procedure is strongly recommended when adding oil.
• Use a new clean syringe to remove oil from the container. A 60 cc catheter tip syringe is
recommended. Approximately 60 cc of oil is required to raise the oil level by one millimeter.
•
Turn the syringe upright and expel any trapped air.
•
Place the tip of the syringe through the oil-fill plug and into the oil, ensuring that it is below the
surface of the oil.
•
Gently eject the oil from the syringe into the HT tank, while making sure that the tip of the syringe
remains below the surface of the oil until all of the oil is emptied from the syringe.
•
Repeat the previous steps until the required amount of oil has been added.
Replace the oil fill plug. Once the plug is installed and the screw properly seated, tighten the screw 4
turns. This will secure the oil fill plug. Wipe up any oil spills. Dispose of soiled absorber in compliance
with government requirements and ensure conformity to local disposal regulations. THE OIL DOES
NOT CONTAIN PCBs.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-5
6
Regular Maintenance
6.5.0
CLEANING
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
6.6.0
Never use anything other than soap and water to clean plastic surfaces. Other cleaners may damage the
plastic.
Never use any corrosive, solvent or abrasive detergents or polishes.
Ensure that no water or other liquid can enter any equipment. This precaution prevents short circuits and
corrosion forming on components.
Methods of disinfection used must conform to legal regulations and guidelines regarding disinfection and
explosion protection.
If disinfectants are used which form explosive mixtures of gases, these gases must have dissipated before
switching on the equipment again.
Disinfection by spraying is not recommended because the disinfectant may enter the X-ray equipment.
If room disinfection is done with an atomizer, it is recommended that the equipment be switched OFF,
allowed to cool down and covered with a plastic sheet. When the disinfectant mist has subsided, the
plastic sheet may be removed and the equipment be disinfected by wiping.
EPROM REPLACEMENT / SOFTWARE UPGRADE
WARNING:
6.6.1
CPI Canada Inc
PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN
HANDLING THE EPROM’s.
Console Software / EPROM
1.
Console software for the 23 X 56 cm console and for the Rad-only console resides in an EPROM.
When the software for these consoles needs to be field upgraded, a replacement EPROM will be
supplied.
2.
Console software for the 31 X 42 cm console initially resides in flash memory on the console board.
The console software will be field upgraded by one of the following methods:
•
The flash memory may be reprogrammed in the field if the required hardware is available (a
suitable computer, a flash loader, and the proper cables). For details, please consult the factory.
•
Alternatively, an EPROM may be supplied containing the updated software. Continue with the
following steps if upgrading the software via an EPROM.
3.
With the generator mains power switched OFF, open the console to gain access to the console
EPROM. Refer to chapter 2, the section CHECKING THE RAM BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE, for
the procedure to access the console CPU board.
4.
Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the console CPU board (refer to figure 1E-4).
This does not apply if the console software currently resides in flash memory as described in step 2.
5.
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-4.
6.
For Indico 100 with the 31 X 42 cm console:
•
Ensure that JW1 on the console board is set to the EPROM BOOT position in order to run the
updated software on EPROM. Refer to figure 1E-4. This jumper is initially set to the FLASH
BOOT position in order to boot from flash memory.
•
JW1 on the console board must be set to the FLASH BOOT position in order to run existing or
upgraded console software from flash memory.
7.
Re-assemble the console as per the procedure in chapter 2.
8.
Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.
Page 6-6
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
6.6.2
6.6.3
Regular Maintenance
6
Power EPROM
1.
With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate and carefully remove the existing power
EPROM on the generator CPU board (U38 or U41, refer to figure 1E-1).
2.
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-1.
NOTE THAT THE REPLACEMENT EPROM MAY HAVE FOUR LESS PINS THAN THE SOCKET IT
IS TO BE INSERTED INTO. IF THIS IS SO, THE EMPTY PINS MUST BE ON THE PIN 1 SIDE OF
THE EPROM AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1E-1.
3.
Refer to 6.6.4 before re-energizing the generator.
Dual Speed Starter EPROM (If fitted)
1.
Switch the generator mains power OFF, AND WAIT 5 MINUTES FOR THE DC BUS CAPACITORS
TO FULLY DISCHARGE.
STEPS 2 AND 3 APPLY TO MILLENIA GENERATORS ONLY. IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS, THE
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD IS FULLY ACCESSIBLE WITH THE APPROPRIATE GENERATOR
SIDE PANEL(S) REMOVED.
6.6.4
2.
Loosen the two nuts securing the clamping bracket at the top of the dual speed starter. Slide the
bracket up and gently remove the dual speed starter assembly. The cables connected to the dual
speed starter do not need to be removed in order to change the EPROM.
3.
Carefully rotate the dual speed starter chassis to fully expose the dual speed starter board inside the
unit.
4.
Locate and carefully remove the existing EPROM on the dual speed starter board (U26, refer to figure
1E-6).
5.
Carefully insert the replacement EPROM into the socket observing the orientation per figure 1E-6.
6.
Reinstall the dual speed starter assembly by reversing steps 2 and 3 (Millenia).
Resetting Factory Defaults
If the part number (not revision) of the replacement EPROM is different from the EPROM being replaced,
then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed below. This will initialize the CPU’s
NVRAM as required by the new software and sets the data to its factory-configured state. Note that there are
separate procedures for the console CPU board and for the generator CPU board.
For Indico 100 with the 31 X 42 cm console, the console software is initially programmed into flash memory on
the console board. If the console software needs to be field-upgraded, an EPROM may be supplied containing
the updated software. As noted above, if the part number (not revision) of the replacement firmware is
different from that being replaced, then the FACTORY DEFAULT procedure(s) must be performed as detailed
below.
The part number and revision of the software in flash memory is displayed at the password screen, below the
message ENTER PASSWORD: _____, when initially entering into programming mode. This is only
displayed if running the software from flash memory. Refer to the section EPROM REPLACEMENT,
Console EPROM for details regarding the use of flash memory vs. EPROM.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-7
6
Regular Maintenance
6.6.4
CPI Canada Inc
Resetting Factory Defaults (Cont)
CONSOLE CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:
31 X 42 CM CONSOLE USING AN EPROM AND 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE:
1.
With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its ON position.
2.
Power ON the generator. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to loading defaults for two
conditions (console settings and APR memory). Select YES to both.
3.
Power OFF the console. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the console CPU board to its OFF position.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR to the
factory default settings.
31 X 42 CM CONSOLE USING FLASH MEMORY AND RAD-ONLY CONSOLE:
1.
In chapter 3C, refer to LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS. This is in the UTILITY menu, under the
CONSOLE submenu. Set LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS to YES.
2.
Select << and EXIT to return to the UTILITY menu.
3.
Select EXIT again to return to the GENERATOR SETUP menu.
4.
Briefly switch the generator OFF, and then ON again. The console will prompt for a YES or NO to
loading defaults when it is powered on again. Select YES to both prompts to reset the console and
APR defaults.
5.
This will initialize both the CONSOLE settings (refer to CONSOLE settings in chapter 3C) and the APR
to the factory default settings.
The LOAD CONSOLE DEFAULTS setting automatically resets to NO the next time the generator is switched
on.
GENERATOR CPU FACTORY DEFAULTS:
1.
With the power OFF, set switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its OFF position.
2.
Power ON the generator. After the initialization is complete, the console will display the message
FACTORY DEFAULTS.
3.
Power OFF the generator. Reset switch 8 of SW1 on the generator CPU board to its ON position.
This will initialize all generator data to the factory defaults (tube selection, generator limits, receptor setup, I/O
configuration, AEC setup, AEC calibration, fluoro setup, tube calibration, time & date, error log and statistics).
Page 6-8
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
6.7.0
Regular Maintenance
6
SOFTWARE KEY INSTALLATION / REPLACEMENT
WARNING:
PLEASE TAKE APPROPRIATE ELECTROSTATIC PRECAUTIONS AT ALL TIMES WHEN
HANDLING THE “SOFTWARE KEY” I.C.
This feature is available on Indico 100 generators only. The “software key” activates specific options in the
Indico 100 X-ray generator, and may need to be installed to add certain options, or may need to be replaced if
it is desired to alter the current configuration of the generator. To install or replace the software key follow the
procedure below.
1.
With the generator mains power switched OFF, locate the socket for the “software key”, U29, on the
generator CPU board. Refer to figure 6-3.
2.
Remove the existing I.C. U29, if fitted. The original I.C. should be placed in anti-static packaging, and
may be set aside for future use in a generator that requires the options that are activated by that I.C.
3.
Carefully insert the replacement “software key” into the U29 socket observing the orientation per figure
6-3.
4.
Perform setup and calibration, if required, of the new features that have been activated by the new
software key. Refer to the applicable sections of the service manual.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
U29
EPROM U41
FILE: ML_CPU2.CDR
Figure 6-3: Software key location and orientation
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-9
6
Regular Maintenance
6.8.0
CPI Canada Inc
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
To replace the battery on the console CPU board or on the generator CPU board, follow the procedure below.
Refer to the figure showing the location of these batteries in chapter 2, in the section “CHECKING THE RAM
BACKUP BATTERY VOLTAGE”. Refer to that section in chapter 2 for console disassembly instructions to gain
access to the console CPU board if required.
THE CONSOLE BATTERY SHOULD BE REPLACED WITH THE GENERATOR POWERED UP.
THIS WILL PREVENT THE CONSOLE DATA FROM BEING LOST WHEN THE BATTERIES ARE
REMOVED.
NOTE:
THIS IS THE ONLY EXCEPTION TO THE RULE OF NOT SERVICING THE GENERATOR WHILE
THE POWER IS ON. FAMILIARIZE YOURSELF WITH THE HIGH VOLTAGE LOCATIONS AND
HAZARDS BEFORE REPLACING THIS BATTERY.
6.9.0
1.
Remove the battery from the holder by gently prying under the battery at the access slot in the battery
holder using a small screwdriver. Slide the battery over the edge of the holder and remove it when it is
free.
2.
Check the voltage of the new battery prior to inserting it. This should be nominally 3.0V, do not use if it
is under 2.80 V.
3.
Wipe the replacement battery with a clean cloth, and ensure that the holder is clean and free of debris
before inserting the battery.
4.
Gently lift the spring contact on the holder and insert the replacement battery positive (+) side up
TUBE CONDITIONING / SEASONING
Tube conditioning or “seasoning” is particularly important for new tubes or tubes that have not been used for
several days. This should be performed on each X-ray tube before attempting auto calibration, as an
unseasoned tube may not operate properly at higher kV values without arcing. Refer to the X-ray tube
manufacturer’s instructions, if available, for the tube conditioning or “seasoning” procedure. If the X-ray tube
manufacturers instructions are not available, the following procedure may be used:
6.9.1
Tube Conditioning (Overview)
The generator does X-ray tube auto calibration at 50 kV, 60 kV, 70 kV, 80 kV, 100 kV and 120 kV. The tube
normally needs to be seasoned before it can be operated at the higher voltages encountered during auto
calibration.
Tube seasoning is started by auto calibrating the kV stations up to and including part of the 70 kV
station. The tube is then seasoned at 70 kV. Progressively higher kV stations are then auto calibrated and
seasoned. Finally the entire kV and mA range is auto calibrated, then the tube is seasoned at the remaining
high kV values.
Manually releasing the exposure button during auto calibration of a particular kV station in the
following procedure prevents the generator from attempting operation beyond that kV/mA value.
NOTE:
Page 6-10
THE TUBE MANUFACTURER’S RECOMMENDED SEASONING PROCEDURE, IF AVAILABLE,
MUST ALWAYS BE USED IN PLACE OF THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
6.9.1
Regular Maintenance
6
Tube Conditioning (Overview) Cont
NOTE:
LOW SPEED ONLY EXPOSURES ARE RECOMMENDED FOR THE SEASONING EXPOSURES,
TO PREVENT EXCESSIVE HEAT BUILD-UP IN THE HOUSING FROM THE STATOR WINDINGS
OR THE ROTOR BEARINGS.
X-ray tubes that have not been used for more than 8 hours may suffer thermal shock if operated at
high mA and kV without a warm-up procedure. A cold anode (Molybdenum) is very brittle and when
suddenly heated over a small area may experience thermal cracking of the anode surface, eventually
leading to permanent tube damage.
6.9.2
Tube Conditioning (Procedure)
X-ray tube seasoning should be done on LARGE focus in order to minimize tube wear.
The procedure below is intended for seasoning an X-ray tube prior to attempting tube auto calibration. To
season a tube that does not need to be calibrated, simply follow steps 2, 4, 6, 8, and 9.
1.
Start the tube auto calibration sequence, and manually terminate the exposure at 70 kV and 250 mA.
2.
Season the tube at 70 kV by taking approximately 10 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
3.
Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 100 kV and 250 mA.
4.
Season the tube at 100 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 200 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
5.
Restart the auto calibration sequence and manually terminate the exposure at 120 kV and 160 mA.
6.
Season the tube at 120 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 160 mA and 100 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
7.
Restart the auto calibration sequence and allow the auto calibration sequence to complete.
8.
Season the tube at 130 kV by taking approximately 5 exposures of 100 mA and 50 ms. These
exposures should be taken at the rate of approximately one every 15 seconds.
9.
Repeat step 8 at 140 kV, and then at 145 kV.
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
Rev. L
Page 6-11
6
Regular Maintenance
CPI Canada Inc
6.10.0 END OF PRODUCT LIFE
If the generator has completed its useful service life, local environmental regulations must be complied with in
regard to disposal of possible hazardous materials used in the construction of the generator.
In order to assist with this determination, the noteworthy materials used in the construction of this
generator are itemized below:
ITEM
•
Electrical insulating oil in HT tank. This is a mineral oil with trace additives (60 Litre (17 U.S. gal) for
Millenia, 25 Litre (6.5 U.S. gal) for Indico 100).
•
Solder (lead/tin).
•
Epoxy fiberglass circuit board materials, tracks are solder on copper.
•
Wire, tinned copper. Insulated with PVC, tefzel, or silicone.
•
Steel and / or aluminum (generator cabinet and console chassis).
•
Plastic (console enclosure and console membrane).
•
Electrical and electronic components: IC’s, transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, etc.
WARNING:
DO NOT DISASSEMBLE, INCINERATE, OR SHORT-CIRCUIT THE BATTERY(S) IN THIS
PRODUCT. DO NOT PUT IT IN TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT
AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL ORDINANCES.
THE FLUORESCENT LAMP IN THE LCD DISPLAY CONTAINS MERCURY. DO NOT PUT IT IN
TRASH THAT IS DISPOSED OF IN LANDFILLS; DISPOSE OF IT AS REQUIRED BY LOCAL
ORDINANCES.
THE LCD IS MADE OF GLASS. IF THE LCD BREAKS DUE TO ROUGH HANDLING OR
DROPPING, AND THE INTERNAL FLUID GETS IN YOUR EYES OR ON YOUR HANDS,
IMMEDIATELY WASH THE AFFECTED AREAS WITH WATER FOR AT LEAST 15 MINUTES.
SEEK MEDICAL ATTENTION IF ANY SYMPTOMS ARE PRESENT AFTER WASHING.
Page 6-12
Rev. L
Millenia / Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740904-10
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
7
CHAPTER 7
THEORY OF OPERATION
CONTENTS:
7.1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.0 FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 System ON (MD-0762).............................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.2 DC bus & power distribution (MD-0788) ................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2.3 Room interface (MD-0763)........................................................................................................................ 7-6
7.2.4 X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (MD-0761) .................................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.5 kV control and feedback (MD-0759) ....................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.6 Filament drive and mA control (MD-0760) .............................................................................................. 7-11
7.2.7 Low speed starter (MD-0764) ................................................................................................................. 7-14
7.2.8 Dual speed starter (MD-0765)................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.2.8 Dual speed starter (Cont) ........................................................................................................................ 7-16
7.2.9 Rad / fluoro and power mode select (MD-0786) ..................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (MD-0787).................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.11 AEC (MD-0757)..................................................................................................................................... 7-17
7.2.12 ABS (MD-0758) ..................................................................................................................................... 7-20
7.2.13 Remote fluoro control (MD-0766).......................................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.14 Digital interface (MD-0767) ................................................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.15 DAP (MD-0828)..................................................................................................................................... 7-25
7.2.16 Serial communications (MD-0829)........................................................................................................ 7-25
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-1
7
Theory of Operation
7.1.0
CPI Canada Inc
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the theory of operation for the Indico 100 series of X-ray generators. The theory of
operation is organized by functional blocks as depicted in the functional drawings in chapter 9.
7.2.0
FUNCTIONAL THEORY OF OPERATION
Refer to the appropriate functional block diagram in chapter 9 in conjunction with the theory of operation
in this chapter. Waveforms and voltages at the pertinent test points are shown on the last page of each
functional drawing.
7.2.1
System ON (MD-0762)
The left side of this drawing shows the wiring from the ON and OFF switches on the console “keyboard
assemblies” to J4-10, J4-11 and J4-12 on the generator interface board for the various Indico 100
consoles (J16-3, J16-6, J16-7 for the Rad-only console).
The generator interface board on the Indico 100 X-ray generator includes power ON and OFF switches
S2 and S1 that may be used to switch the generator on and off locally while working on the equipment.
These switches are connected in parallel with the main generator power ON and OFF switches that are
located on the console.
Pressing either of the power ON switches described above turns on Q2 on the generator interface board.
This turns on Q3, holding the collector of Q3 low. This latches Q2 on by holding the base of Q2 low when
the ON button is released.
The collector of Q3 is connected to K2 and K3 via D16. These relays will energize if S3 is in the NORMAL
position when the generator is switched on. If S3 is in the LOCKOUT position, the generator cannot be
inadvertently switched on.
When K2 and K3 are energized, the DC rails (+5 V, +12 V, +15 V, +24 V, -12 V, -15 V, and -24 V) on the
generator interface board are established, and +24 V is supplied to the console via K3 (see MD-0788,
sheet 4).
The generator CPU will issue a P/S ON (power supply ON) command after the +5 V rail is detected as
described in 7.2.2.
JW1 on the generator interface board may be jumpered such that K1 is energized only when the
generator is switched on, or such that K1 is energized at all times that the AC mains to the generator is
on. K1 switches the 110 and 220 VAC supplies for the room interface board, as shown on sheet 4 of MD0788.
Pressing either of the OFF switches turns on Q1 on the generator interface board. This turns off Q2,
turning off Q3. This will de-energize K2, K3, and / or K1 on the generator interface board, removing the
DC rails from the generator interface board and removing the +24 V supply from the console. Deenergizing K1 (if applicable) will disconnect the 110 / 220 VAC supplies to the room interface board.
In normal operation, J17-1 and J17-2 are joined via a wire jumper. An emergency-off switch may be
connected to the generator by removing the jumper between J17-1 and J17-2, and then wiring the
emergency-off switch to J17-1 and J17-2.
Page 7-2
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.2
Theory of Operation
7
DC bus & power distribution (MD-0788)
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 1:
Sheet 1 of MD-0788 applies to three phase units. Portions of sheet 1 are common to single phase and
three phase units. Sheet 2 details the circuits that are different between single and three phase
generators.
Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of room
interface transformer T2 via F1 and F2. This will establish the 24 VDC supply via F5 and D3 on the
generator interface board, as shown on sheet 4.
Several seconds after the generator has been switched on as per 7.2.1, the generator CPU will issue a
P/S ON (power supply ON) command, resulting in 24 VDC being applied to J5-3 and J5-4 on the auxiliary
board as described under MD-0788, sheet 3. This will energize K1 and K2 on the power input board via
relay K1 on the auxiliary board (K1 is shown in the normal, i.e. no soft-start fault position).
With K2 on the power input board energized, line voltage is applied to power supply auxiliary transformer
T1. The primary of T1, an autotransformer, supplies 120 VAC for the fans and for the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid in the HT tank, 120 or 240 VAC for rotor boost, and 52 / 73 / 94 VAC for rotor-run as described
later in this section. The secondary of T1 supplies low voltage AC to the auxiliary board as per sheet 3.
When K1 on the power input board is energized, line voltage is applied to the input of D1 via soft-start
current limit resistors R10 and R11, thus pre-charging the DC bus capacitors. Normal charging of the DC
bus is sensed by U1 via R5 to R8, D3, R18 / R19 and R16 / R17.
The emitter of U1 will rise toward +6 V as the DC bus charges. The emitter is connected to the soft-start
protection circuit on the auxiliary board. If the DC bus capacitors charge normally, K1 on the auxiliary
board will remain de-energized, D3 will be lit, and the soft start driver circuit (U3B, Q6, etc) will issue a
contactor-closed signal after approximately 20 seconds. This will light D2 on the auxiliary board, output a
logic low signal to the CPU via J5-7 of the auxiliary board to indicate that the main contactor is closed,
and close the main power contactor K5 on the power input board. The line voltage will then be directly
rectified by D1 to produce approximately 560 VDC for 400 V units, or approximately 670 VDC for 480 V
units. This DC bus voltage is switched by the inverter board(s) to produce the drive for the primary of the
HT transformers as described in 7.2.5.
If U1 on the power input board does not indicate normal bus charging, the soft start protection circuit will
energize K1 on the auxiliary board. This will open K1 on the power input board, but leave K2 energized
via R1 / R2. De-energizing K1 on the power input board opens the soft-start charging path via R10 and
R11. With K1 on the auxiliary board energized, Q6 on the auxiliary board cannot turn on. This keeps K5
on the power input board de-energized, and holds J5-7 of the auxiliary board high to indicate to the
generator CPU that the main contactor is open.
For R&F generators, a logic circuit (U11, Q9, etc) on the auxiliary board controls the cooling fans in the
generator. During fluoroscopic operation, and for approximately 20 minutes after switching from fluoro to
Rad operation, the output of the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit will be low, lighting D37 on the auxiliary
board and energizing K4 on the power input board. This will supply 120 VAC to the cooling fans from T1
via F4 and K4 on the power input board.
When tube 2 is selected (two tube units only), J1-6 on the auxiliary board is pulled low via the control
board. This will close K3 on the power input board, supplying 120 VAC to energize the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid in the HT tank. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is also taken to J2-9 on the low speed starter
board as described in 7.2.7.
When the generator is switched off, the loss of the DC rails on the generator interface board (which
supplies the generator CPU board) will remove the drive for K1 and K2 on the power input board, causing
these relays to open. Line voltage will then be removed from the power supply auxiliary transformer T1,
causing loss of the DC rails on the auxiliary board. When the 12 V rail has collapsed, U2 on the power
input board will turn off. This allows the DC bus discharge circuit to be biased on by R20, rapidly
discharging the DC bus capacitors through R16 / R17 and R18 / R19.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-3
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.2
CPI Canada Inc
DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
Depending on the tap settings on T1, the low speed starter boost voltage will be 120 or 240 VAC, and the
run-voltage will be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Refer to chapter 2 of the service manual for the procedure for
setting these taps.
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 2:
Sheet 2 of MD-0788 applies to single-phase units. The circuits that are common to single phase and
three phase units are described on sheet 1.
Assuming that the AC mains is connected and switched on, line voltage is applied to the primary of room
interface transformer T2 via F1 and F2. This will establish the 24 VDC supply via F5 and D3 on the
generator interface board, as shown on sheet 4.
Several seconds after the generator has been switched on as per 7.2.1, the generator CPU will issue a
generator-ON command, resulting in 24 VDC being applied to J5-3 and J5-4 on the auxiliary board as
described under MD-0788, sheet 3. This will energize K1 and K2 on the power input board.
With K2 on the power input board energized, line voltage is applied to power supply auxiliary transformer
T1. The primary of T1, an autotransformer, supplies 120 VAC for the fans and for the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid in the HT tank, 120 or 240 VAC for rotor boost, and 52 / 73 / 94 VAC for rotor-run as described
later in this section. The secondary of T1 supplies low voltage AC to the auxiliary board as per sheet 3.
When K1 on the power input board energizes, line voltage is applied to the voltage doubler circuit via
soft-start current limit resistors R10 and R11, thus pre-charging the DC bus capacitors. Normal charging
of the DC bus is sensed by U1 via R6 to R8, R16 to R21, D3, etc. D2 will light to indicate that U1 is
energized (indicating that the DC bus is charged).
The emitter of U1 will rise toward +6 V as the DC bus charges. The emitter is connected to the soft-start
protection circuit on the auxiliary board, and is described on sheet 1. If the DC bus capacitors charge
normally, the main contactor K5 on the power input board will close, applying the line voltage directly to
the voltage doubler circuit where it is rectified and doubled to produce approximately 650 VDC. This DC
bus voltage is switched by the inverter board(s) to produce the drive for the primary of the HT
transformers as described in 7.2.5.
If U1 on the power input board does not indicate normal bus charging, the soft start protection circuit will
energize K1 on the auxiliary board, and K5 will remain de-energized as described previously
The operation of the cooling fans via K4 on the power input board and the operation of the tube 1 / tube 2
solenoid via K3 is described on the previous page.
The power down sequence is similar to that described on the previous page, except that single phase
units do not have a rapid discharge circuit. The DC bus capacitors will discharge through bleeder
resistors connected across the bus capacitors, with a time constant ≤ 5 minutes.
Depending on the tap settings on T1, the low speed starter boost voltage will be 120 or 240 VAC, and the
run-voltage will be 52, 73, or 94 VAC. Refer to chapter 2 of the service manual for the procedure for
setting these taps.
Page 7-4
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.2
Theory of Operation
7
DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 3:
Line voltage is connected to the primary of power supply auxiliary transformer T1 when the generator is
switched ON, i.e. when K2 on the power input board is energized. The DC rails on the auxiliary board will
then be established (+/- 35 V via F3, F4 and D32, and +/- 12 V via F1, F2, D33, U5 and U6 which are
connected in parallel, and U4).
The required DC rails are then distributed to the filament supply board(s) and to the control and dual
speed starter boards as shown on sheet 3. Regulators on the control board and dual speed starter board
supply +5 V for those boards as shown.
When the main contactor K5 on the power input board closes, J5-7 of the auxiliary board is taken low.
This logic low signal is taken to the control board, where it enables the prep signal to the dual speed
starter board as described in 7.2.8, and also turns on Q16 on the control board, turning on opto-coupler
U9 on the generator CPU board. The output of U9, which indicates the contactor-closed status, is
monitored by the CPU via U24. U9 also drives contactor-closed status LEDs DS9 / DS10, where DS9
lights to indicate that the contactor is closed.
When the +5 V rail on the generator interface board is established, the generator CPU will start to
function. The CPU will perform its start-up diagnostics, and then output data (bit 0) via U27, U19, and
U16 to energize opto coupler U17 on the generator CPU board. This will turn on Q4, applying ±15 V to
J5-3 and J5-4 on the auxiliary board via current limit resistors R27 / R32 and the control board, resulting
in approximately 24 VDC to close K1 and K2 on the power input board, as described earlier. DS34 /
DS35 indicate the P/S ON status, where DS34 lights to indicate that the power supply is on.
The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal (bit 2) is generated by the CPU, then latched and buffered by U27 and
U19 on the generator CPU board. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is then applied to U16 and to the tube
1 / tube 2 tellback logic circuit as per 7.2.10. The output of U16 drives U7 on the control board, which inturn drives Q1. Q1 turns on when tube 2 is selected, pulling J1-6 on the auxiliary board low. This
energizes K3 on the power input board as described earlier. The tube 1 / tube 2 select signal is also fed
to the dual speed starter as described in 7.2.8.
For continuous fluoro mode, the CPU sends data (bit 7) to data latch U27 on the generator CPU board.
This is then applied to driver U16, and to DS22 / DS23 which indicate continuous fluoro (FLUORO) or
Rad / pulsed fluoro (FLUORO bar) operation. The output of U16 drives opto coupler U40 on the control
board, which pulls J1-5 on the auxiliary board high for Rad / pulsed fluoro operation and low for
continuous fluoro operation. This high / low signal is applied to the fluoro fan timer / driver circuit (sheet
1), and to the Rad / fluoro and power mode select circuits as described in 7.2.9.
When pulsed fluoro or low power Rad operation is selected, the CPU sends data (bit 3) to data latch U49.
The data latch drives Q1 and DS2 / DS4 on the generator CPU board. DS2 lights to indicate low power /
pulsed fluoro operation, while DS4 indicates high power Rad operation. Q1 on the generator CPU board
drives opto coupler U41 on the control board, which pulls J1-3 on the auxiliary board high for PF / low
power operation, and low for high power Rad mode. This signal is then applied to the fluoro fan timer /
driver circuit (sheet 1), and to the Rad / fluoro and power mode select circuits as described in 7.2.9.
U3C and U3D on the auxiliary board monitor the + and -12 V supplies on that board. The outputs of U3C
and U3D will switch low if either of these supplies drops below predefined limits, lighting DS1 and sending
a fault signal to the control board and to the driver for K1 on the low speed starter board.
A soft-start fault signal is generated if the DC bus capacitors do not charge normally (SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL from the soft start driver circuit on page 1). This signal is fed to U3A on the auxiliary
board, whose output will switch low if a soft-start fault exists. This is OR’ed together with the outputs of
U3C and U3D, and has the same effect as described above for a +/-12 V fault.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-5
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.2
CPI Canada Inc
DC bus & power distribution (Cont)
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 4:
Line voltage is connected to the primary of room interface transformer T2 whenever the AC mains is
connected and switched on. With the generator switched on, K2 on the generator interface board will
close, establishing the DC rails on the generator interface board via F3 / F4 and D1 (+/- 24 V, + 15 V via
U5, +5 V via F6 and the +5 V / +16 V power supply circuit, + 12 V via U3, -12 V via U2, and -15 V via U4).
The required DC rails are then distributed to the digital I/O board, to the AEC board, to the room interface
board, and to the generator CPU board, where DS33 and DS36-DS39 indicate the presence of the
associated DC rails.
The 24 VDC supply that is derived from D3 / C10 is used by the on / off circuit on the generator interface
board (MD-0762), and is also fed to the console when the on / off circuit closes K3. Power supplies and /
or voltage regulators on the console produce the required DC rails for the console circuits. Additionally,
the console includes a 300 VAC power supply that drives the cold-cathode fluorescent lamp that
backlights the LCD display.
110 and 220 VAC is supplied to the room interface board. The 110 / 220 VAC supplies are only present
when K1 on the generator interface board is closed. K1 may be configured to be closed at all times that
AC mains is supplied to the generator, or K1 may be configured to close only when the generator is
switched on. Refer to 7.2.1, SYSTEM ON, for details.
24 VDC is available at J17-3 and J17-4 to drive the coil of a power distribution relay in installations with
installer supplied power distribution circuits. The maximum current available from this source is 100
mA.
Refer to MD-0788, sheet 5:
Sheet 5 shows the power distribution (DC rails) to the remote fluoro control, and to the Indico 100
consoles other than those shown on page 4.
7.2.3
Room interface (MD-0763)
Refer to MD-0763, sheet 1:
Sheet 1 shows the room interface inputs. These are shown on the left side of the drawing. Nine of the
inputs energize opto couplers via 4-pin jumpers; the remaining inputs energize the associated opto
coupler directly. The inputs that have a connector (JW7, JW10, JW15, etc) in series with the opto
coupler(s) may be configured such that shorting the input turns on the opto coupler, or may be configured
such that applying 24 VDC across the input energizes the opto coupler. The remaining inputs are only
active when the inputs are shorted.
For inputs with a 4-pin jumper in series with the opto coupler, the jumper must be across pins 2 and 3 of
the connector if the input is a 24 VDC source. If using this configuration, observe the polarity of the 24
VDC source to ensure that the opto coupler is correctly driven. Jumper across pins 1 and 2 and pins 3
and 4 of the connector if it is desired to activate the opto coupler by shorting across that input.
For the REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE input and the REMOTE EXPOSURE input, two or three opto
couplers are connected in series. MD-0763 shows the opto coupler relevant to the room interface
function. The second and / or third opto coupler is shown on MD-0761 and described in 7.2.4.
One set of thermal switch inputs is available on the room interface board as shown. A second set of
thermal switch inputs is available on the stator terminal block. The thermal switch inputs on the stator
terminal block are routed to T1 and T2 (at R33 and R34 respectively) on the generator interface board.
The generator CPU monitors the output of each opto coupler via logic circuits on the generator interface
board.
Page 7-6
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.3
Theory of Operation
7
Room interface (Cont)
Refer to MD-0763, sheet 2:
Sheet 2 shows the room interface outputs. These are shown on the right side of the drawing. Five of the
outputs may be configured to supply +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220 VAC or to provide a dry contact closure
when the output is active. Three of the outputs may be configured to supply +24 VDC or to provide a dry
contact closure when the output is active, and the remaining three outputs are permanently configured to
provide a dry contact closure when the output is active.
When any of the outputs on the room interface board are to be made active, the generator CPU will send
data to address decoders, latches, and driver circuits on the generator interface board. These circuits
decode the data, and drive relays K1 to K13 on the room interface board. The contacts of each of these
relays drive the room interface outputs.
JW1 to JW5 may be configured such that the corresponding output is a dry relay contact by placing the
jumper in the DRY position. Placing the jumper in the LIVE position will cause +24 VDC, 110 VAC, or 220
VAC to be output, depending on the voltage source selected at TB11. To select the desired voltage
source, a wire jumper must be connected from TB11 pins 1-5 to TB10 to select 220 VAC, to TB9 to select
110 VAC, or to TB8 to select 24 VDC. For example, if it is intended that the TOMO / BUCKY 4 SELECT
output should provide 110 VAC when that output is active, JW1 must be jumpered in the LIVE position
and a wire jumper must be connected from TB11-4 to one of the available positions on TB9.
With JW1 to JW5 in the LIVE position, relays K1 - K4 and K6 switch the return side of the circuit. If
multiple switched voltage outputs are required, jumper the desired voltage to TB11, select the DRY
position on JW1 to JW5, connect the switched output to the relay output (example TB1-1 for JW1), and
connect the common return directly to TB7.
Relays K1 to K4 and K6 have R-C snubbers connected across the contacts to quench contact arcing
when the relay opens while driving inductive loads. If the output is configured to supply 110 or 220 VAC,
and the load is an opto coupler or other low-current device, sufficient AC current may flow through the
snubber to energize the load when the relay is open. If this is the case, the jumper that is in series with
the snubber may need to be removed. Further details on this may be found in chapter 3B.
JW6 to JW8 may be configured such that the corresponding output is a dry relay contact by placing the
jumper in the DRY position. Placing the jumper in the LIVE 24 VDC position will cause +24 VDC to be
output.
The remaining outputs (collimator bypass, room light, and mag 1 to mag 3) are permanently configured to
provide dry contact closures when the output is active.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-7
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.4
CPI Canada Inc
X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (MD-0761)
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 1:
The keyboard assembly and console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the 31 X 42 cm console. The
console portion of these circuits for the other Indico 100 console types is shown on sheet 3 and 4.
Pressing PREP pulls J4-7 on the generator interface board low via U25 on the console board. This turns
on U15 on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U15 via U18 and
U25, with a valid prep command being recognized when the output of U15 is low.
Pressing X-ray will pull J4-8 on the generator interface board low via U26 on the console board. This will
turn on U37 and U38 on the generator interface board. The generator CPU monitors the output of U37 via
U18 and U25. The software will recognize a logic low at the output of U37 as a hardware X-ray request
(X-ray switch pressed), and consequently will pull the emitter of U38 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the
emitter of U38 held low and U38 energized, the collector of U38 will be held low. This energizes U22 on
the generator interface board, turning on U46 on the generator CPU board. The generator CPU monitors
the output of U46, recognizing a valid X-ray request when the output of U46 is low. DS42 on the
generator CPU board will light to indicate that an X-ray request is being made.
An input via the REMOTE TOMO SELECT input will energize U8 and U10 on the generator interface
board (refer also to 7.2.3). The generator CPU monitors the output of U10 via U18 and U25, and
recognizes a logic low at the output of U10 as a remote tomo X-ray request. When a remote tomo
exposure request is received, the CPU will pull the emitter of U8 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the
emitter of U8 held low and U8 energized, the collector of U8 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46
as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid remote tomo request is being made.
A remote X-ray exposure request via the REMOTE EXPOSURE input will energize U41and U43 on the
generator interface board (refer also to 7.2.3). The generator CPU monitors the output of U41 via U18
and U25, and recognizes a logic low at the output of U41 as a remote exposure request. When a remote
exposure request is received, the CPU will pull the emitter of U43 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the
emitter of U43 held low and U43 energized, the collector of U43 will be held low. This turns on U22 and
U46 as described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid X-ray request is being made.
Pressing the fluoro foot switch (if connected to the console) will pull J4-6 on the generator interface board
low via U24 on the console board. This will turn on U30, U42, and U44 on the generator interface board.
These same opto couplers will be energized if the fluoro foot switch is connected to the room interface
board (refer to 7.2.3), and the fluoro foot switch is pressed. The generator CPU monitors the output of
U30 via U18 and U25. The software will recognize a logic low at the output of U30 as a fluoroscopic X-ray
request, and consequently will pull the emitter of U42 low via U25, U12, and U7. With the emitter of U42
held low and U42 energized, the collector of U42 will be held low. This turns on U22 and U46 as
described above, indicating to the CPU that a valid X-ray request is being made.
The generator interface board contains a last image hold circuit consisting of U44, U32, U39, C30, etc.
The last image hold circuit will keep U32 energized for approximately 100 milliseconds after the fluoro
foot switch has been released. The emitter of U32 will be held low by the generator CPU for the time of
the “last image hold” setting (up to 99 ms) in the receptor setup menu (chapter 3C). This will hold the
collector of U32 low, keeping U22 and U46 energized as previously described, and allowing the frame
store device to complete the last image.
The console CPU (U18) monitors the output of U24, U25, and U26 on the console board, recognizing a
console fluoroscopic X-ray request when the output of U24 is low, a prep request when the output of U25
is low, and a console X-ray request when the output of U26 is low.
Page 7-8
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.4
Theory of Operation
7
X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (Cont)
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 2:
When a prep request has been made as described on page 1, the CPU will write data to the kV enable
and prep latches within U27 on the generator CPU board. The kV enable and prep commands light DS30
and DS27 on the generator CPU board when active, and drive U4 and U2 respectively on the control
board via U19 and U16 on the generator CPU board.
The emitter of U4 on the control board is held low when the HT tank is properly connected. If the output of
U4 is high (HT tank not connected, or kV enable command not present), the ENABLE line (TP10) will be
held low by the comparator circuit consisting of U11A, RN8, etc. This will hold the output of the “PREP
ENABLED” and “X-RAY REQUEST” comparator circuits low via D21 and D24, inhibiting the prep and Xray functions. If the kV ENABLE command is present, the output of U4 will be low, and the kV enable line
(TP10) will be high. This will reverse bias D21 and D24, allowing the PREP and X-RAY lines to be pulled
high when requested. The RESET command resets kV and mA faults that are latched by circuits on the
control board. Pressing the MENU / RESET button on the console toggles the kV enabled circuit,
resetting the fault latches.
The output of U2 on the control board will be low when PREP is active, causing the prep line (TP18) to be
pulled high by the comparator circuit consisting of U11B, U10C, etc. The prep command is taken to the
“GENERATOR READY” detector circuit and the logic “OR / NOR” circuits via D25. If the prep command
is present, and no faults exist, the base of Q12 will be pulled low, turning on Q12, thus indicating a
generator-ready condition. The prep command also initiates the boost cycle on the low speed or dual
speed starter (refer to 7.2.7 and 7.2.8).
When the generator CPU has received a valid X-ray request, the CPU will send an X-ray command to
data latch U27 on the generator CPU board. This will light DS26 on the generator CPU board, and will
pull the anodes of U5 and U3 on the control board high. The cathodes of U5 and U3 are held low by the
EXPOSURE ENABLE command from U22 (the line connected to the cathode of U46 on the generator
CPU board, page 1) during an X-ray request. Therefore, opto couplers U5 and U3 will only be energized
if both the hardware and software X-ray commands are present. Because these opto couplers and the
comparator circuits (U11D, RN7, U10D, etc) are connected in parallel, both opto couplers must be turned
on for TP12 to be pulled high. The X-ray request line is taken to the “OR / NOR” circuits consisting of Q4,
Q13, D91, etc. If the prep request is present, and no faults exist at the time of the X-ray request, the line
at TP14 will be pulled high. This enables the output of the VCO as described in 7.2.5.
The “GENERATOR READY” detector and the logic “OR / NOR” circuits are shown as a functional block
with six inputs as shown (PREP input, X-RAY input, and four fault inputs), and three outputs
(GENERATOR READY, DRIVE ENABLE, and HV / MA FAULT). The generator-ready and drive enable
signals are inhibited if any of the fault inputs are active (+/- 12V/SS FAULT, FILAMENT FAULT,
STATOR FAULT, HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT, or HIGH MA FAULT). This will disable the inverter
drive, preventing any kV output.
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 3:
Opto coupler U6 on the generator CPU board will be turned on when the power supply ready signal that
originates on page 2 is present. The generator CPU monitors the output of U6 via U24, and DS17 on the
generator CPU board will light to indicate the generator-ready status.
For the Rad-only console, pressing PREP and X-RAY energizes U9 and U10 respectively. The inputs to
the generator interface board at J16-4 and J16-5 are pulled low via the LED portion of U9 / U10 and the
closed prep or X-ray exposure switch.
For the 23 X 56 cm console, the operation is similar to that for the 31 X 42 cm console as described on
sheet 1, except that the component reference designations are different.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-9
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.4
CPI Canada Inc
X-ray exposure Rad / fluoro (Cont)
Refer to MD-0761, sheet 4:
Sheet 4 shows the console prep and X-ray exposure circuits for the touch screen console. Pressing prep
or X-ray on the console directly pulls J4-7 and J4-8 on the generator interface board low, initiating the
appropriate action in the generator as described earlier.
7.2.5
kV control and feedback (MD-0759)
Refer to MD-0759, sheet 1:
When the CPU is satisfied that all requirements have been met to allow an X-ray exposure as described
in 7.2.4, the kV reference voltage will be produced by D/A converter U22 on the generator CPU board.
This is buffered by U14A, inverted by U13A on the control board, and then summed with the positive
going kV feedback signal from U16B at the input of error amplifier U13B. Error amplifier U13B will
regulate the kV by producing a DC output that is proportional to the difference between the kV reference
voltage and the kV feedback voltage.
The HT primary current is sampled by T1, and rectified by D27 to D30 to produce a current limit signal (a
negative voltage proportional to the primary current). This is applied to the input of U21A, where it will
limit the kV demand if the primary current exceeds normal limits. This current limit signal is also fed to
comparator U15, which generates a fault pulse if excessive primary current is sensed. The fault pulse is
detected by latch U32D and inverted by U33D. A primary (resonant) over current fault will light D70 and
pull the input of U33E low via D66. This will force the output of U33E high. The output of U33E is one of
the inputs to the “GENERATOR READY” detector and logic “OR / NOR” circuits described in 7.2.4. The
presence of a fault will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting the
inverter gate drive, thus preventing inverter damage due to the over-current condition.
The output of U21A will swing increasingly negative for increased kV demand. This kV demand voltage is
buffered and inverted by U21B, and then applied to the VCO (voltage controlled oscillator).
The VCO generates complementary output pulses that vary in frequency. The frequency of these pulses
is inversely proportional to demanded generator output power. The current sense feedback from T2
synchronizes the start of the pulses.
The output pulses from the VCO are applied to AND gates U24A and U24B. The drive enable signal from
MD-0761 is applied to the control inputs of U24, holding these inputs high if all logic conditions to allow an
X-ray exposure are satisfied. The pulses are inverted and level shifted by U26A and U26B, and then
applied to the gate-drive circuit as described on page 2.
The differential kV feedback voltage from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the generator control board.
This is applied to the inputs of U12A and U12B, where the kV feedback scaling is precisely set by R215.
The differential feedback signals are then summed by U16B. The output of U16B supplies a kV feedback
signal to error amplifier U13B as described earlier. The kV feedback signal is also fed to the CPU via
U16A on the control board, and U15A, U15B, and A/D converter U37 on the generator CPU board where
it is used to monitor the output voltage during an exposure. The kV feedback signal is also routed to the
high kV detector and latch, which drives D69 and U33E. The output of U33E, when high, will inhibit the
inverter gate drive as described previously.
The outputs of U14A and U15A on the generator CPU board are summed and compared by the HV ON
DETECTOR CIRCUIT, consisting of U30D, Q6, etc. This produces a HV ON signal when the actual kV is
greater than approximately 75% of the demanded kV. The HV ON signal is brought to the digital interface
board, where it is made available to those digital imaging systems that require this signal to synchronize
the exposure.
Page 7-10
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.5
Theory of Operation
7
kV control and feedback (Cont)
The generator control board contains circuits that protect against an inverter “shoot-through” fault. If a
shoot through fault is sensed, current sense transformers on the inverter board(s) will supply a current
pulse that is fed to the control board at J14-1 & J14-3, J15-1 & J15-3, and / or J16-1 & J16-3. An inverter
fault is then detected by comparator circuits on the control board, latched, and inverted (a logic low at the
outputs of the INVERTER 1, INVERTER 2, or INVERTER 3 FAULT LATCH & LOGIC INVERTER circuits
indicates a fault). An inverter fault will light D80, D81, or D82, and will pull the output of the logic OR
circuit (D87-D89, U35C) low. This will take the input of U33E low, forcing the output of U33E high, thus
inhibiting the inverter gate drive as per high primary current and high kV faults described earlier.
The fault latches that drive the input of U33E are reset by the RESET command, which originates on MD0761.
Refer to MD-0759, sheet 2:
The drive pulses from page 1 are applied to the input of the gate-drive circuit on the control board. The
gate-drive circuit utilizes MOSFETs that form a full bridge inverter circuit. This circuit provides current
gain for the gate pulses. The high frequency gate pulses are then applied to the power MOSFETS on the
inverter board(s) via J10 and / or J11 and / or J12 on the control board.
The inverter board(s) produce the high power drive for the HT transformers (Indico 100 X-ray generators
use one, two, or three inverter boards, depending on output power). The output of the inverter board(s)
drive the primaries of the HT transformers via the resonant capacitor and the fluoro / EMC / sharing
inductors.
During radiographic operation, contactor K1 shorts out the fluoro inductor. This inductor is in-circuit during
fluoroscopy, and optimizes the output tuning during fluoroscopic operation. The drive circuit for K1 is
detailed in 7.2.9.
For 65, 80, and 100 kW units, the drive to inverter board #3 is disabled by a relay on the power mode
select board during low power operation. Refer to 7.2.9 for details.
Refer to MD-0759, sheet 3:
The HT tank has similar anode and cathode sections. The cathode and anode sections each have their
own high voltage transformer and high voltage multiplier board. The anode section generates the anode
voltage, 0 to 75 kV, and the cathode section generates the cathode voltage, 0 to -75 kV. The anode and
cathode sections contain voltage dividers that supply kV anode and cathode feedback voltages. The kV
feedback from the HT tank is brought to J9 on the control board as described earlier in this section.
The HT tank is not field-repairable. Defective HT tanks must be exchanged with equivalent units.
7.2.6
Filament drive and mA control (MD-0760)
Refer to MD-0760, sheet 1:
When the CPU receives a prep request, D/A converter U18 or U22 on the generator CPU board will
output the filament reference voltage (1 volt = 1 amp of filament current). For units with two filament
supplies, U18 outputs the small filament drive and U22 outputs the large filament drive. For units with a
single filament board, U22 supplies the filament drive. The filament drives are buffered by U14D and
U14B, and then routed to the filament supply board via J3 and J10 of the generator CPU board.
The filament reference voltage is applied to U1B on the filament supply board. The output of U1B is
summed with the output of current limit clamp U1A. The filament current limit is set at 5.5 or 6.5 amps via
JW1.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-11
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.6
CPI Canada Inc
Filament drive and mA control (Cont)
The filament reference voltage may be measured at the cathode of D6 on the filament board (at the
output of U1B). Attempting to measure the filament reference at the input to U1B will provide erroneous
results.
The filament reference voltage is then summed with the filament feedback voltage at the input of error
amplifier U4B. When the filament reference is greater than the feedback, the output of U4B rises, causing
the pulse width at the output of U3 to increase.
The filament supply blocks are shown in very limited detail on sheet 1 of MD-0760. Refer to sheet 3 for a
more detailed functional diagram of the filament supply board.
PWM (pulse width modulator) U3 drives MOSFETS Q6, Q7, Q12, and Q13, which form a full bridge
inverter. The MOSFETS convert the + and - 35 V supplies to high frequency AC to drive the primary of
the filament transformers at the filament switching frequency, approximately 40 kHz, via C22, the primary
of T1, J4 / J8 / K1, J5 on the filament supply board, and J4 on the tank lid board.
The output of filament current sense transformer T1 on the filament supply board is rectified by D12, D13,
D27, and D28, and fed to the RMS converter circuit consisting of U7 and associated components. The
output of the RMS converter drives U4A, which is a variable gain amplifier. The filament current feedback
is calibrated such that 1 volt = 1 amp of filament current. The calibrated filament feedback voltage
(representing actual filament current) appears at the input of buffer U2B and at the summing input of error
amplifier U4B as previously described.
The output of U2B is brought to J2-2 or J2-4 on the filament supply board, depending on configuration.
This filament current feedback signal is then fed to the CPU as shown on sheet 2 and 3.
The filament feedback signal from the output of U2B is compared with a 1.7 volt reference by U2A. The
output of U2A will swing low if the filament current drops below approximately 1.7 amps, indicating a
filament fault. This will turn off Q1 on the filament supply board, taking J2-10 on the filament board and
J3-10 on the control board high. The FILAMENT FAULT signal is taken to one of the inputs on the
“GENERATOR READY” detector and logic “OR / NOR” circuits described in 7.2.4, where a fault will
inhibit inverter drive by removing the generator-ready and drive enable signals. A filament fault condition
will also turn off Q15 on the control board, turning off opto coupler U7 on the generator CPU board. The
output of U7 drives filament fault status LEDs DS13 /DS14 and the input of U24, which is monitored by
the generator CPU.
The HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT and the HIGH MA FAULT signals from MD-0759 and MD-0760
respectively are OR’ed together, and designated as the HV / MA FAULT signal. This is fed to the base of
Q14 on the control board, and will be high for a fault. During a HV / mA fault, Q14 will be turned off,
turning off opto coupler U8 on the generator CPU board. The output of U8 is monitored by the CPU via
U24. U8 also drives DS11 / DS12, with DS12 being lit for a HV / mA fault condition.
For generators with a single filament board, U27 on the generator CPU board outputs the large / small
filament select command. The output of U27 will be low for large focus, lighting DS24. U19 and U16
invert the large / small focus signal and drive U1 on the control board. The output of U1 will be low for
large focus, causing the large / small select line, J3-11 on the control board, to be pulled high by the
comparator circuit consisting of U11C, Q2 etc. This de-energizes K1 on the filament board, selecting
large focus.
The logic high signal at J3-11 drives the base of Q3 on the control board, holding Q3 off when large focus
is selected. Q3 drives opto coupler U10 on the generator CPU board, turning off U10 for large focus. The
output of U10 is monitored by the CPU via U24.
Page 7-12
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.6
Theory of Operation
7
Filament drive and mA control (Cont)
Refer to MD-0760, sheet 2:
The filament drive from page 1 is applied to the secondaries of the filament transformers, which provide
high voltage isolation and drive the X-ray tube filaments via the HV cathode board and the cathode high
voltage connector as shown.
When an exposure is being made, X-ray tube current flows through series resistors on the HV anode and
cathode boards. The voltage developed across these resistors, which is proportional to the X-ray tube
current, is taken to J9 of the control board. Transient protectors on the high voltage boards clamp the
voltage across the series resistors during high voltage arcs.
The “ground” side of the high voltage boards in the HT tank is connected to the mA test jacks E17 / E18
on the tank lid board. Transient protectors on the tank lid board clamp the voltage across the mA
measuring device during high voltage arcs, and prevent the voltage at E17 and E18 from rising above
approximately 15 volts if the mA test jack shorting strap is removed.
The anode mA feedback that appears at J9-1 and J9-2 of the generator control board is scaled
approximately 0.4 volts = 100 mA of anode current, and is applied to the input of differential amplifier
U6B. The output of U6B is taken to the anode over current detector, whose output is applied to the high
anode current latch and inverter circuit. The output of U33C will be low for a high anode current condition.
This will light D72 and pull the input of U33E low via D65, forcing the output of U33E high. The output of
U33E is one of the inputs to the “GENERATOR READY” detector and logic “OR / NOR” circuits described
in 7.2.4. An over current condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals,
preventing possible damage due to the over-current condition.
The ANODE OVERVOLTAGE signal from MD-0759 is also fed into the anode over current detector
circuit. Therefore, an anode over voltage condition will disable the inverter gate drive as described above.
The output of U6B is also applied to the input of U9 and U30B. U30B provides a scaled mA feedback
voltage, calibrated by R216, such that 1 volt = 100 mA at the output of U30B. The output of U30B is fed to
the generator CPU board as shown on sheet 3.
U9 is a high gain amplifier, and provides a scaled mA feedback voltage 1 volt = 2.5 mA. R212 calibrates
the mA feedback, and R213 provides offset voltage adjustment. The output of U9 is fed to the generator
CPU board as shown on sheet 3.
The cathode mA feedback at J9-4 and J9-3 of the generator control board is used for cathode overcurrent detection only. The cathode mA feedback is applied to the input of differential amplifier U6A. The
output of U6A is taken to the cathode over current detector, whose output is applied to the high cathode
current latch and inverter circuit. The output of U33B will be low for a high cathode current condition. This
will light D71 and pull the input of U33E low via D64, inhibiting the inverter drive as described above for
an anode over voltage fault.
The CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE signal from MD-0759 is also fed into the cathode over current detector
circuit. Therefore, a cathode over voltage condition will disable the inverter gate drive as described
above.
The high anode and high cathode current fault latches are reset by the RESET command, which
originates on MD-0761.
The large and small filament current feedback signals from page 1 are brought to J3 on the control board,
and then routed to J2 and J1 on the control board. From there, these signals are taken to the generator
CPU board as shown on sheet 3.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-13
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.6
CPI Canada Inc
Filament drive and mA control (Cont)
Refer to MD-0760, sheet 3:
The large and small filament current feedback signals from page 2 are fed to differential amplifiers U30A
and U30B respectively on the generator CPU board. The CPU monitors the outputs of U30A and U30B
via A/D converter U37.
The Rad mA feedback voltage (1 volt = 100 mA) is applied to U15C on the generator CPU board, and the
fluoro mA feedback signal (1 volt = 2.5 mA) is applied to U23A. The outputs of U15C and U23A are fed to
A/D converter U37, which supplies the mA feedback values to the CPU. The CPU uses the Rad and
fluoro mA feedback information to regulate the X-ray tube mA and to perform mA monitoring functions
during exposures.
The figure on the right of sheet 3 is an expanded functional schematic of the Indico 100 filament supplies,
showing more detail than the figures on page 1.
7.2.7
Low speed starter (MD-0764)
Refer to MD-0764, sheet 1:
The 120 / 240 VAC and the 52 / 73 / 94 VAC supplies originate on MD-0788. The boost voltage (120 or
240 VAC) and the run-voltage (52, 73, or 94 VAC) is supplied by the power supply auxiliary transformer
T1. These voltages must be properly selected via taps on T1 as described in chapter 2 of the service
manual.
When the CPU receives a prep request, the ENABLE command is generated as described in 7.2.4. This
command originates on the control board, and is brought to the cathode of D17 on the auxiliary board.
This is OR’ed with the TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN and 12 VDC / SOFT
START FAULT signal in the base circuit of Q15. If all three of these lines are high, i.e. if the ENABLE
command is present and no tube 1 / tube 2 mismatch & thermostat open or 12 VDC / soft start faults
exist, the base of Q15 will be pulled high, turning on Q15. This will energize K1 on the low speed starter
board. K1 is a protection relay that is closed during normal operation, and open-circuits the stator drive if
any of the above faults are present.
Also when a prep request is made, the PREP command will be applied to the boost and run logic circuit
on the auxiliary board. This will pull J4-11 on the control board low, energizing U2 on the low speed
starter board, initiating the boost cycle. The boost duration is 1.5 seconds or 2.5 seconds, and is
determined by the setting of JW1 on the auxiliary board.
At the completion of the boost cycle, the boost and run logic circuit will pull J4-11 high, turning U2 on the
low speed starter off. Approximately 100 milliseconds after U2 turns off, J4-12 will be pulled low, turning
on U1 on the low speed starter board, initiating the rotor-run cycle.
Q2 and Q1 are triacs that are triggered on the zero crossing points of the AC waveform when U2 or U1 is
energized. These act as low resistance switches when triggered, with Q2 switching the stator boost
voltage, and Q1 switching the stator run-voltage. The output of the triacs is OR’ed together; therefore
their common output will carry the boost voltage or run-voltage, depending on which triac is energized.
The COMMON line (AC return), connects to the “common” terminal on the stator terminal blocks via K1.
The boost / run voltages that are controlled by Q2 and Q1 are brought to protection relay K1, and then
applied to the main winding via K3 and K4, and to the shift winding via K2, shift capacitor C3, and K4.
K4 switches the main and shift currents to tube 1 or tube 2. The TUBE SELECT signal that drives K4 is
described in 7.2.2. K3 and K2 are current sense relays that are energized when the stator current is
above preset limits. With K3 and K2 closed, Q3 on the auxiliary board is supplied with base current. This
will turn on Q3, turning on Q18 on the control board.
Page 7-14
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.7
Theory of Operation
7
Low speed starter (Cont)
The STATOR FAULT line (J6-10) on the control board will be low if there is no stator fault, and high for a
fault. This is one of the inputs to the “GENERATOR READY” detector and logic “OR / NOR” circuits
described in 7.2.4. A stator fault condition will immediately remove the generator-ready and drive enable
signals, inhibiting kV output. When the CPU detects a stator fault condition (via the circuits depicted on
sheet 2), the kV enable and prep signals are immediately removed, opening relay K1 on the low speed
starter board.
Refer to MD-0764, sheet 2:
When Q18 on the control board is turned on as described on sheet 1, indicating no stator fault, U5 on the
generator CPU board will be turned on. The CPU monitors the output of U5 via U24, and DS20 / DS21
indicate the stator fault status (DS20 indicates no stator fault, and DS21 indicates a stator fault).
7.2.8
Dual speed starter (MD-0765)
Refer to MD-0765, sheet 1:
The CPU will determine whether the pending exposure should be made at low speed or high-speed
operation. Based on this determination, the CPU will output the high speed / low speed command via U27
on the generator CPU board. The output of U27 drives DS8 and DS7 on the generator CPU board, and
energizes U12 on the dual speed starter board via U19 and U16. The dual speed starter CPU monitors
the output of U12, and sets low or high-speed operation based on the state of U12.
The CONTACTOR CLOSED signal that originates on the auxiliary board and closes the main contactor
K5, is also brought to the emitter of Q7 on the control board via R94. This signal is low when the
contactor is closed, turning on U13 on the dual speed starter board if the prep command is present.
The PREP COMMAND is brought to the cathode of D47 on the control board. This is low when prep is
not requested, turning on Q7. With Q7 on, the cathode of U13 on the dual speed starter will be held high,
keeping U13 off. During prep, the prep command will be high. This turns off Q7, allowing U13 to turn on.
The dual speed starter CPU monitors the output of U13, and starts the boost cycle when the output of this
opto coupler is low.
The TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 select signal from MD-0788 is applied to J4-16 of the control board. This will be
low when tube 2 has been selected, energizing U14 on the dual speed starter board. The dual speed
starter CPU monitors the output of U14, and selects tube 1 or tube 2 based on the state of U14. K1 on
the dual speed starter board will close to select tube 1, and K2 will close to select tube 2, all at the start of
prep. K4 is energized only when K1 or K2 is energized, thus isolating the high voltage from the stator
terminals at all times except during normal operation of the dual speed starter.
The dual speed starter contains an inverter (Q1 to Q4) that produces the required stator current at 50, 60,
150, or 180 Hz by precisely switching the 560 / 650 volt DC bus. The dual speed starter CPU controls the
switching of the inverter via the driver circuit consisting of U1-U10 and T1-T4, etc. The setting of DIP
switches SW1 and SW2 determines all stator drive parameters (boost voltage and boost time, run
voltage, brake voltage and brake time, etc).
The modulated output from the inverter is applied to the common stator terminal via one leg of the
inverter. The shift and main currents are taken from the other leg of the inverter via K5 and K6. K1-A and
K2-A switch the main current, and K1-A and K1-B switch the shift current.
K3 is open for high-speed operation. Therefore, only the high-speed phase shift capacitor will be in the
circuit. K3 will close for low-speed operation, connecting the low-speed phase shift capacitor in parallel
with the high-speed phase shift capacitor.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-15
7
Theory of Operation
7.2.8
CPI Canada Inc
Dual speed starter (Cont)
The contacts of current sense relays K5 and K6 will be closed when the stator current is above preset
limits. With K5 and K6 closed, Q5 on the dual speed starter board is supplied with base current. This will
turn on Q5, whose output is monitored by the dual speed starter CPU. If a stator fault is detected, the
CPU will output a high at J1-10 on the dual speed starter board. This signal is fed to the “GENERATOR
READY” detector and logic “OR / NOR” circuits described in 7.2.4. A fault condition will immediately
remove the generator-ready and drive enable signals, inhibiting kV output. Also, the dual speed starter
CPU will open K1 or K2 and K4 on the dual speed starter board, removing the stator drive.
The stator fault signal is also applied to the base of Q18 on the control board. The base of Q18 will be low
if there is no stator fault, turning on Q18. This will turn on U5 on the generator CPU board. The generator
CPU monitors the output of U5 via U24, and DS20 / DS21 indicate the stator fault status.
7.2.9
Rad / fluoro and power mode select (MD-0786)
The circuits shown on MD-0786 control the Rad / fluoro contactor on the resonant board, and the relay on
the power mode select board, both described in 7.2.5.
The Rad / fluoro select signal from J1-5 of MD-0788 is applied to the base of Q5 on the auxiliary board
via R79. This is high for Rad / pulsed fluoro mode, and low for continuous fluoro mode. When in Rad /
pulsed fluoro mode, Q5 will be turned on, lighting D36 and energizing K1 on the resonant board. K1
shorts out the fluoro inductor as described in 7.2.5. In continuous fluoro mode, Q5 is off, de-energizing
K1.
Inverter # 3 on 65, 80, and 100 kW generators is disabled during low power operation (pulsed fluoro,
continuous fluoro, or low power Rad exposures). This is accomplished as described below.
When in continuous fluoro mode, and the collector of Q5 is high, the base of Q4 will be pulled high via
D38. This will turn on Q4, energizing K1 on the power mode select board. This removes gate drive from
inverter #3.
The low / high power select signal from J1-3 of MD-0788 is applied to the base of Q4 on the auxiliary
board via D44. This is low for high power Rad exposures, and high for pulsed fluoro / low power Rad
operation. Q4 will be turned on during pulsed fluoro / low power operation, energizing K1 on the power
mode select board, removing gate drive from inverter #3.
7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (MD-0787)
For R&F generators, JW4 on the auxiliary board is jumpered in the ON position, and a thermal switch is
mounted on the inverter heat sink. This switch will open if an inverter over temperature is detected. This
pulls J2-4 on the auxiliary board high, turning on Q10 and lighting D42. With J2-10 pulled high, Q8 is
turned on via D26 and R7. The output of Q8, low for a fault, holds the base of Q15 on the auxiliary board
low as described in 7.2.7. The output of Q8 is also OR’ed with the kV ENABLE signal on MD-0761,
inhibiting the prep and X-ray functions when the output of Q8 is low.
The tube 1 / tube 2 tellback portion of MD-0787 ensures that the actual tube selection matches the
requested tube selection. Logic circuits compare the tube 1 / tube 2 request signal to the feedback from a
contact closure in the HT tank.
The TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT command from MD-0788 is low when tube 2 is selected, and high for
tube 1. This is applied to one input of the tube 1 / tube 2 tellback logic circuit. The output of U7 is
connected to the other input of this logic circuit.
Page 7-16
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
7
7.2.10 Interlocks & tube 1 / tube 2 tellback (Cont)
When the tank is in the tube 1 position, U7 and U8 on the auxiliary board are off, and the collector of U7
will be high. In the tube 2 position, U7 and U8 are turned on, and the collector of U7 will be low. If a
mismatch is detected, the base of Q8 is pulled high, turning Q8 on. With Q8 turned on, Q15 on the
auxiliary board will be turned off, and the prep command will be inhibited as described above.
When U8 on the auxiliary board is on (tube 2 position), U3 on the generator CPU board will be turned on.
The output of U3 and the TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT signal are connected to U35 on the generator CPU
board. U35 decodes the binary inputs, and lights DS5 or DS6 as appropriate.
7.2.11 AEC (MD-0757)
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 1:
This shows the circuits on the generator interface board that connect to the A2EC2 detector, and the
circuits between the generator CPU and the AEC board. Eight lines supply the AEC chamber select
signals, the field select signals, and the start signal to the AEC board via U25 / U23 and driver U33 on the
generator interface board. The AEC start signal is also connected to the base of Q7 on the generator
interface board, where it turns Q7 on when the start signal is present, taking J14-3 high.
The AEC ramp (PT RAMP) from the AEC board is buffered by U23C on the generator CPU board, and
fed to A/D converter U37 such that it can be monitored by the CPU.
D/A converter U18 on the generator CPU board generates the AEC reference voltage. This is buffered by
U14C, and fed to the AEC board via J10-10 on the generator interface board. The magnitude of the AEC
reference voltage is determined by the CPU, and will be a value between 0 and 10 volts. The AEC
reference is also taken to the A2EC2 detector via J14-1.
The AEC board generates the PT stop signal when the magnitude of the AEC ramp is equal to the AEC
reference voltage. This signal will switch low when the exposure is to be terminated. An active PT stop
signal will pull the base of Q5 low, turning Q5 off, thus turning Q6 on. The output of Q6 is connected to
one of the interrupt inputs on the CPU via U45C on the generator CPU board, where it will terminate the
AEC exposure immediately when the interrupt is received.
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 2:
The A2EC2 system, in conjunction with GenWare®, establishes AEC calibration curves by using a pair of
photo diode detectors to measure the light output from the cassette screens. When A2EC2 calibration is
about to be performed, and the exposure starts, the opto coupler that is connected to J2-3 / J2-4 on the
A2EC2 detector circuit is energized. This releases the short on the integrating capacitor, which is part of
the integrator circuit, via the analog switch. The integrator will then generate a ramp whose slope is
proportional to the light sensed by the photo diode detectors.
The integrator output is amplified and compared to the AEC reference voltage. The output of the
comparator circuit drives U46 on the generator interface board when S1 is closed. The output of U46 will
be low when the magnitude of the ramp at the comparator input is equal to the AEC reference voltage.
This will terminate the exposure by generating an interrupt at the CPU as described for the PT stop signal
on the previous page.
The A2EC2 detector assembly includes on-board +/-8 VDC regulators.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-17
7
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.11 AEC (Cont)
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 3:
This page shows the functional schematic of the AEC board used with solid-state AEC chambers. The
signal from the AEC chamber is applied between the common anode and the cathode inputs of J1/J11,
J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be fitted with 5 pin in-line connectors, or
circular style connectors, depending on the application. U11A, U11B, U1A, and U1B are extremely high
gain preamplifiers that convert the current output from the AEC diodes (several hundred pico amps,
typically) to a useable voltage.
The output of each preamplifier is connected to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometers, R1 to R4, used
for AEC calibration. The AEC signal is then taken to the input of analog switches U6A to U6D.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator interface board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may
be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U2A to U2D; and then connected to the control inputs of analog
switches U6A to U6D. The analog switch corresponding to the selected AEC input channel will be closed
when that channel is selected, thus connecting the preamplifier for the active channel to gain stage U9B.
The field select signals from the generator interface board are also active-low. An active field select signal
will pull the base of Q1, Q2, or Q3 low. This will turn on that transistor, supplying +12 V at the field select
lines connected to D30, D18, or D19. More than one field may be active at one time.
The field select signals are connected to the control inputs of analog switches at the inputs of U11A,
U11B, U1A, and U1B. This will switch the selected combination of AEC inputs (L, M, R) to the summing
node of each preamplifier. The voltage output of the preamplifiers will be proportional to the number of
fields selected, i.e. the preamplifier output when 3 fields are selected will be 3 times that with a single field
selected.
The field select signals are also connected to three analog switches in the feedback loop of U9B. One of
these switches will be closed for each AEC field that is selected. With one field selected, the gain of this
stage will be maximum; with three fields selected the gain of this stage will be divided by three. The
variable gain of U9B, which depends on the number of fields selected, compensates for the variable
voltage output of the preamplifiers as described in the previous paragraph, thus keeping the signal output
from U9B constant relative to the number of fields that are selected. The output of U9B drives the input of
difference amplifier U10B, which subtracts the sample and hold voltage from the input voltage as
described in the next paragraph.
The start signal also exits from the generator interface board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on
the AEC board to light. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U2F and U2E, and will be logic low at
the output of U2E when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U10B, and also opens analog switch U12 during an AEC exposure. These
analog switches are closed at all other times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise
at the output of U9B during standby operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC
exposure. This ensures that the output of U10B is proportional to the AEC chamber output current only,
and is not influenced by noise.
The output of 10B drives integrating amplifier U10A. Analog switch U12 opens when an AEC exposure
starts, allowing C37 to start integrating the AEC voltage. This will produce a ramp whose slope is
proportional to the input voltage at U10A.
The AEC ramp is taken to the generator interface board where it is processed as described earlier in this
section, and also fed to comparator U13 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC reference
voltage. The output of U13 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp equals
the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator interface board.
Page 7-18
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
7
7.2.11 AEC (Cont)
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 4:
This is the functional schematic of the AEC board used with ionization type AEC chambers. The AEC
chambers are connected to J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and / or J4/J14. The AEC board will either be fitted
with 12 pin in-line connectors, or 9 pin ‘D’ connectors, depending on the application. The AEC signal from
the AEC chamber(s) is routed to the input of analog switches S1A to S1D on the AEC board. These
analog switches are controlled by the chamber-select signals.
The chamber-select signals exit on the generator interface board as per sheet 1. Only one chamber may
be active at one time, and the active channel is indicated by DS1 to DS4 on the AEC board. The
chamber-select signals are inverted by U3B, U3C, U3D, and U3F; and connected to the control inputs of
the analog switches described in the previous paragraph. The analog switch corresponding to the
selected AEC input channel will be closed when that channel is selected, thus connecting the AEC signal
to preamplifier U1A, which provides voltage gain. The input of U1A will be configured such that U1A is a
non-inverting amplifier for use with AEC chambers that have a positive going output, and as an inverting
amplifier for use with chambers with a negative voltage output.
The start signal also exits from the generator interface board. This signal, when active, will cause DS5 on
the AEC board to be lit. The start signal is buffered and inverted by U3E and U3A, and will be logic low at
the output of U3A when the start signal is active. This opens the analog switch that is part of the sample
and hold circuit at the input of U2A during an AEC exposure. This analog switch is closed at all other
times. The sample and hold circuit will sample any electrical noise at the output of U1A during standby
operation, and subtract this noise from the AEC signal during an AEC exposure. This ensures that the
output of U2A is proportional to the AEC chamber output voltage only, and is not influenced by noise.
The output of U2A connects to the common inputs of analog switches S2A to S2D. These analog
switches are controlled by the chamber-select signal, and the switch corresponding to the active channel
will be closed. This connects the output of U2A to the AEC gain adjustment potentiometer R1 to R4
corresponding to the active channel. The AEC signal, which will be either a ramp or a DC voltage
depending on AEC chamber type, is now fed to the input of U2B. This will be factory configured as an
integrating amplifier by connecting C4 into the circuit for use with AEC chambers that output a DC output
voltage, or U2B will be configured as a linear amplifier by connecting R32 into the circuit for use with AEC
chambers that provide a ramp voltage. The start signal also connects to analog switch S4. This switch
opens when an AEC exposure starts, allowing U2B to start integrating or amplifying the AEC signal.
The output of U2B will be a positive going ramp regardless of the AEC chamber type in use. This ramp
voltage is processed by U4A and U4B, and also fed to the short AEC exposure time compensation circuit
consisting of R11 to R14, S3A to S3D, R53 and C11. Analog switches S3A to S3D are controlled by the
chamber-select signal. The switch corresponding to the active channel will be closed, connecting the
phase-lead network C11 / R53 to the wiper of the AEC short-time adjustment potentiometer. This circuit is
disabled when the wipers of R11 to R14 are at the ground end of the potentiometers, and maximum
short-time compensation is provided when the wipers are set to the end of the potentiometers connected
to U2B.
The AEC ramp from U4B is taken to the generator interface board where it is processed as described
earlier in this section, and also fed to comparator U6 on the AEC board where it is compared to the AEC
reference voltage. The output of U6 is normally high, switching low when the magnitude of the AEC ramp
equals the reference voltage. This PT stop signal is further processed on the generator interface board.
The START, and LEFT, MIDDLE, and RIGHT field select signals are brought to the AEC chambers via
J1/J11, J2/J12, J3/J13, and J4/J14. The AEC board will be factory configured to directly output the active
low signal from the generator interface board to the AEC chamber if required, or to output +12 V or +24 V
if the chamber requires active high signals. For AEC chambers that require active high outputs, the start,
left, middle, or right field select signal is taken from the collector of Q1 to Q4, respectively. The active low
signals from the generator control board turn on Q1 to Q4, outputting either +12 V or +24V (depending on
factory configuration) at the collector when active.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-19
7
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.11 AEC (Cont)
Jumpers JW1 to JW8 swap the left and right fields on J11 to J14. Jumpering pins 2-3 of the field selector
jumpers (JW7 / JW8 for channel 1, JW5 / JW6 for channel 2, JW3 / JW4 for channel 3, JW1 / JW2 for
channel 4) connects the right field select signal to pin 6 and the left field select signal to pin 2. Jumpering
pins 1-2 of the field selector jumpers connects the right field select signal to pin 2 and the left field select
signal to pin 6.
The AEC board also contains a DC to DC converter that produces +45 V, + or - 300 V, and +500 VDC.
The converter circuit consists of U7, T1, output voltage adjustment potentiometer R79, and associated
components. The +45 V output is hard wired to all of the AEC chamber connectors, and + or - 300 V is
permanently connected to J1 to J4. Additionally, the AEC board will be factory configured to supply either
+ or - 300 V or +500 V to J11 to J13, and to pin 1 on J1 to J4 (in addition to the + or - 300 V fixed output
at pin 2).
Refer to MD-0757, sheet 5:
Refer to schematics 734628 and 728401 for the universal AEC board. Schematic 728401 shows the DC
to DC converter (U3 and associated components) that produces +50, +300 and +500 VDC for use with
ion chambers, and up to -1000 VDC for photo multiplier tubes. R10 adjusts the high voltage output when
ABS operation is selected. R24 adjusts the high voltage output when AEC channel 1, 2, or 3 is selected.
R19 adjusts the high voltage output when AEC channel 4 is selected. Refer to chapter 3D, the section
Universal AEC Board With Short AEC Time Compensation for further details.
The AEC chambers are connected to J1 to J4, and the high voltage for the PMT is taken from J7 on the
AEC interface board. J6 interconnects the signals between the AEC board and connectors J1 to J4 on
the AEC interface board.
Schematic 734628, sheet 1, shows the amplifier and control portion of the AEC circuits. These boards are
factory configured via jumpers JW2, JW3, and JW5-74 such that the AEC board is compatible with the
AEC chamber types that were specified at the time of the generator order. The individual AEC channels
are selected under software control, with the switching being done via analog switches on the AEC board.
R1 to R4 are the AEC gain potentiometers, and R91 to R94 are used for short time compensation.
Schematic 734628, sheet 2, shows the switching circuits for the start and field select signals. This also
shows the analog switches that switch the inputs from solid-state AEC chambers.
Schematic 734628, sheets 3 to 5 show the required jumper positions and circuit modifications needed for
compatibility with various AEC chambers. It is not recommended that the universal AEC board be field
reconfigured.
7.2.12 ABS (MD-0758)
The composite video signal is fed into J8 on the generator interface board, and proportional DC is applied
to J7. The jumpers (designated JW__) select the input source, input polarity, gain, etc. Refer to chapter
3E for the required positions for these jumpers.
Composite video applied to J8 is amplified by U17D and applied to gain stages U17A and U17B.
Generators with the conventional fluoro option are fitted with analog gain potentiometer R48, and units
with the pulsed fluoro option use digital pot U49.
The processed ABS signal exits the generator interface board at J11-3, and is buffered by U23D on the
generator CPU board. The ABS signal is then fed to the sample and hold circuit, which smoothes out the
ABS feedback signal during pulsed fluoro operation. The CPU monitors the output of the sample and hold
circuit via A/D converter U37, and uses this information to maintain constant image brightness by
regulating the fluoro kV and / or mA.
Page 7-20
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
7
7.2.12 ABS (Cont)
The output of the PMT at J7-12 of the generator interface board is split by R118 and fed to J7-10 such
that the PMT output is also available for AEC control. This is applicable if a PMT is to be used for AEC
control on AEC channel 4. Refer to chapter 3D, the section AEC USING A PMT for further details.
7.2.13 Remote fluoro control (MD-0766)
The remote fluoro control communicates with the generator via an RS-232 protocol. Serial
communication is handled by U20 and U11 on the generator CPU board, and U7 on the remote fluoro
control board. DS15 on the generator CPU board will flash to indicate that the generator is sending data
to the remote fluoro control, and DS19 will flash to indicate that the remote fluoro control is sending data
back to the generator.
The micro controller on the remote fluoro control board handles all remote fluoro functions. It decodes
serial data from the generator and decodes inputs from the remote fluoro keyboard assembly. The micro
controller drives the speaker on the remote fluoro control board, transmits data to the data latches on the
remote fluoro display board in order to drive the desired LEDs, and sends data to the generator in order
to set up the requested fluoro parameters.
7.2.14 Digital interface (MD-0767)
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 1:
This page shows the interface circuits between the generator CPU and the digital I/O board. Included are
eight data and address lines, and four control lines for the data and address bus.
The HV ON signal that originates on the generator CPU board is described in 7.2.5, and is routed to the
digital I/O board as shown.
The EXPOSURE ENABLE command is generated by some imaging systems, and is OR’ed with the
output of U22 on the generator interface board as shown in MD-0761. When this line is pulled low, U46
on the generator CPU board is energized, enabling an X-ray exposure as described in 7.2.4.
Some imaging systems generate a “DIGITAL IMAGING” ABS signal. This is fed into the input of U17B
on the generator interface board when JW21 is in the appropriate position to select that ABS signal
source. Refer to 7.2.12 for details.
A sync signal that synchronizes the start of exposures is fed to the CPU via U51, U45A / U45B, and U28
on the generator CPU board. Depending on the position of JW22 on the generator interface board, the
sync signal will be either 50 / 60 Hz line frequency pulses from the zero crossing circuit U40 on MD-0788,
or these may be sync pulses supplied by the digital imaging system. DS40 on the generator CPU board
will light when sync pulses are present.
This document does not detail the imaging system pin-outs. Refer to the imaging system documentation
and the appropriate CPI digital imaging supplement for this information.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 2:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733752. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current
gain to drive the output devices. The emitter of U10 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an
exposure, and the imaging system will request an exposure by taking the cathode of U10 low. This
results in the collector of U10 being pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system
requests an exposure. The output of U10 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1.
DS4 and DS6 to DS10 indicate the status of the outputs.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-21
7
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont)
Multiplexer U7 selects one of two ABS feedback signals, these are designated as the “DIGITAL
IMAGING” ABS signal, and fed back to the generator interface board as shown on sheet 1.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 to U13.
When active, these opto couplers will light DS3 to DS1 respectively, and pull the inputs of U8 low. The
output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
The HV ON signal is applied directly to U6, which drives DS4 (EXON) and the corresponding input on the
imaging system.
U14 and U16 provide isolation for the corresponding outputs on the digital I/O board.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 3:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 733947. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U13 and U14 latch the output data, and drivers U15 and U16 provide
the required current gain to drive the output devices. Q2 and Q3 provide level translation for these two
outputs (Q2 and Q3 source +24 VDC when active).
The HV ON signal is applied to Q1 via D3. This takes the collector of Q1 low when the high voltage is on.
Monostable timer U17 is triggered at the start of the HV ON signal, generating a 13 millisecond pulse.
This ensures that the high voltage remains on for a minimum of 13 milliseconds, while having no effect on
high voltage pulses longer than 13 milliseconds.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U3 to U8.
When active, these opto couplers will pull the inputs of U12 low. The output of U12 is read by the
generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 4:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 735921. The circuits that interface with the
digital imaging system are the same as those on assembly 733947. These circuits are shown reduced in
size on sheet 4 (within the dashed outline), and full size on sheet 3.
Digital I/O board assembly 735921 is used with some imaging systems that have integrated generator
control functions. Such installations do not need a separate console to control and monitor the X-ray
exposure parameters, but require “X-ray mini consoles” with on / off and prep / X-ray controls, and prep
and X-ray exposure indicators.
Assembly 735921 includes the circuits described on sheet 3, plus data latch U18, driver U19, and
connectors J4 to J7. J4 on this board connects to the control console connector, J4, on the generator
interface board. The X-ray mini consoles connect to J6 and J7.
The on / off and prep and X-ray commands originate on the X-ray mini console as described on page 5.
These signals are then taken from J6 on the digital I/O board to J4 on the generator interface board.
These functions are as described in MD-0762 and MD-0761 when using the X-ray mini console.
U18 latches the data to drive the speakers and the prep / exposure indicators on the mini consoles, and
U19 provides the required current gain to drive these devices.
A version of this board exists without the digital imaging interface circuits that are shown within the
dashed outline. This board is used with some imaging systems that have integrated generator control
functions, and connect to the generator via a serial port instead of the digital I/O board.
Page 7-22
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
7
7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont)
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 5:
This sheet shows the optional CPI “mini consoles”. These are typically used in installations where the
digital imaging system has integrated generator control functions. Such systems allow control and
monitoring of generator exposure parameters, but typically do not contain on / off and prep / X-ray
controls and indicators. The CPI mini consoles provide these control and monitoring functions in
installations requiring them.
The X-ray mini console connects to J6 on the digital I/O board. This includes on / off and prep / X-ray
controls as shown. These functions are routed to J4 on the generator interface board, and perform the on
/ off and prep / X-ray functions as described in MD-0762 and MD-0761. An optional hand switch connects
to E1, E2, and E3 on the X-ray mini console board.
Power ON indicator DS4 is connected to J6-5 (ground), and lights whenever the generator is switched
on. The appropriate bit in U18 is latched high or low in order to turn on / turn off LS1, LS2 and DS1 to
DS3. Driver U19 provides current gain to drive these devices via J6-3, J6-4, and J6-6 to J6-8.
The optional mini console X-ray exposure indicator connects to J7 on the digital I/O board, and contains
prep and exposure indicators and two speakers. U19 drives DS1, DS2, and LS1, LS2 via J7-1, J7-4, J75, and J7-7 as described above.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 6:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 735406. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current
gain to drive U7, U10, and U16. U7 and U10 pull the associated inputs on the imaging system low when
active.
The emitter of U14 is taken low when the generator is ready to make an exposure, and the imaging
system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U14 high. This results in the collector of U14
being pulled low when the generator is ready and the imaging system requests an exposure, turning on
U16. The output of U16 is the EXPOSURE ENABLE command, described on sheet 1. The output of U15,
which will also be low when an exposure is requested, is monitored by generator CPU via U8 and the
address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and
U13. When active, these opto couplers will pull the corresponding inputs of U8 low. The output of U8 is
read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O board.
This I/O board assembly includes an on-board +5 VDC regulator, U12, that connects to J2-21 and to the
anode of U11.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-23
7
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.14 Digital interface (Cont)
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 7:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 736153. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U4 latches the output data, and driver U6 provides the required current
gain to drive U7, U10, and U13 to U15. These opto couplers pull the associated inputs on the imaging
system low when active. DS3, DS4, and / or DS7 to DS9 light to indicate the active outputs.
The HV ON signal is NAND’ed with an output from U4 at the input of U3C. With both inputs to U3C high,
the output of U3D will be high. This energizes U15 via driver U6 and DS9 / R9.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U11 and
U12. When these inputs are active, DS5 and / or DS6 will light, and the corresponding inputs of U8 will be
low. The output of U8 is read by the generator CPU via the address decoder circuits on the digital I/O
board.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 8:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 736894. CPLD U1 decodes the address
and data bus, and latches the output data. The output data is applied to driver U3, U11, and U17. U3 and
U11 provide the required current gain to drive the corresponding inputs on the imaging system. The
associated LEDs will light to indicate which outputs are active. U17 drives the base of Q1, which provides
level translation for that output (sources +24 VDC when active). U17 also energizes K1, and pulls the
emitters of U5, U7, U14, and U16 low when the generator is ready to make an exposure.
Signals from the table or imaging system will request an exposure by taking the anode of U4, U6, U13, or
U15 high. This will energize opto couplers U4 / U5, U6 / U7, U13 / U14, or U15 / U16 respectively. The
outputs of U5, U7, U14, and U16 are OR’ed together, and provide the EXPOSURE ENABLE command,
described on sheet 1.
The outputs of U4, U6, U13, U15, and U8 are monitored by the generator CPU via U1.
The digital outputs from the imaging system (inputs to the digital I/O board) are connected to U2, U9,
U10, and U12. The outputs of these drivers are monitored by the generator CPU via U1. The LED in
series with each input will light to indicate the status of that input.
The “DIGITAL IMAGING” ABS signal is taken directly from the imaging system to J1-20.
Refer to MD-0767, sheet 9:
This is the functional schematic of digital I/O board assembly 737950. The address decoder circuits
decode the address and data bus. U4, U6, and U17 latch the output data, and driver U18 provides the
required current gain to drive outputs via J6 and J7. U11 – U13 provide level translation for the X-ray,
prep, and generator outputs, resulting in TTL level (5V) differential outputs. The output associated with
U14 is not used at this time.
The HV ON signal is applied to U10 via U3D and U3C. This takes the output of U3C high when the high
voltage is on. Monostable timer U7 is triggered at the start of the HV ON signal, generating a 13
millisecond pulse. This ensures that the high voltage remains on for a minimum of 13 milliseconds, while
having no effect on high voltage pulses longer than 13 milliseconds. U10 provides level translation for the
HV ON signal, providing a TTL level differential output.
With the input to U16 low, the base of Q1 will be pulled high, taking the collector of Q1 low. The collector
of Q1 is monitored by the generator CPU via U8. U15 is not used at this time.
SW1 must be set as defined in the digital imaging supplement. This configures the software specifically to
be compatible with the imaging system in use.
Page 7-24
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Theory of Operation
7
7.2.15 DAP (MD-0828)
The DAP circuit consists of micro-controller U1, RS-232 driver U2, and associated components on the
DAP interconnect board. Micro-controller U1 operates under control of the CPU on the generator CPU
board via U31 and U38, and controls all DAP functions (switches the +15 V supply via Q1, Q2, Q3 / Q4,
Q5 / Q6, Q7 / Q8, and Q9 / Q10 as required to control and test the DAP devices. The micro-controller
also counts the DAP pulses via U5 for DAP chamber #1, and U6 for DAP chamber #2).
DS2 and DS3 on the DAP interconnect board indicate that the DAP chambers are sending pulses back to
the micro-controller, and DS29 and DS32 on the generator CPU board indicate that the CPU is
transmitting and receiving data respectively.
+24 VDC is supplied to the DAP interconnect board from the room interface board. Regulators on the
DAP interconnect board regulate this to +15 V and +5 V.
7.2.16 Serial communications (MD-0829)
Refer to MD-0829, sheet 1:
The console board shown on sheet 1 is used on the 31 X 42 cm console. The console for the other Indico
100 console types is shown on sheet 2.
When the generator is switched on and the start-up diagnostics are completed, the console CPU will
attempt to communicate with the generator CPU. The console will send data to the generator, and then
wait for a response from the generator. If the console receives a response, communication may continue.
If the console CPU does not receive a response from the generator CPU, a communication error
message will be presented.
When the console is sending data to the generator, DS41 on the console board and DS3 on the
generator CPU board will flash. DS1 on the generator CPU board and DS42 on the console board will
flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console.
The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 drivers U23 (console board) and U12
(generator CPU board).
U27 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J2. DS44 and DS43 will flash to indicate
that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port.
The generator CPU board may include optional communications ports J1 and J2. These are driven via
U31 and U42 / U38. Communication to and from these ports is indicated by DS29, DS32, DS43, and
DS44.
DS40 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
Refer to MD-0829, sheet 2:
Sheet 2 shows the console board for the 23 X 56 cm console, and for the Rad only console. Also shown
are optional communications ports on the generator CPU board.
The generator CPU board may include optional communications ports J15 and J16. These are driven via
U50. Communication to and from these ports is indicated by DS45 to DS48.
DS16 on the generator CPU board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
Rev. L
Page 7-25
7
Theory of Operation
CPI Canada Inc
7.2.16 Serial communications (Cont)
For the 23 X 56 cm console:
When the console is sending data to the generator, D4 on the console board will flash. D3 on the console
board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console.
The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 driver U6, or RS-422 drivers U5 / U9 for
special applications.
U20 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J2. D2 and D1 will flash to indicate that
data is being sent to, and received from the serial port.
D6 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
For the Rad-only console:
When the console is sending data to the generator, DS2 on the console board will flash. DS3 on the
console board will flash to indicate that the generator CPU board is sending data to the console.
The console communicates with the generator via RS-232 driver U8.
U11 on the console board is an RS-232 driver for the serial port, J4. DS4 and DS5 will flash to indicate
that data is being sent to, and received from the serial port.
DS1 on the console board will flash at a consistent 1 Hz rate if the CPU is operational.
Sheet 3 does not apply to Indico 100.
Page 7-26
Rev. L
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-06
CPI Canada Inc
Spares
8
CHAPTER 8
SPARES
CONTENTS:
Section
Title
8.1.0 INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.0 SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR................................................................................................. 8-2
8.1.0
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the list of recommended spare parts for the various models of Indico 100 generators.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-1
8
Spares
8.2.0
CPI Canada Inc
SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR
DESCRIPTION
Generator CPU board
Generator interface board
Room interface board
Power supply control board
Filament board
Auxiliary board
Inverter board
Power input board
Resonant Board
AEC board
Console CPU board
Console display board
Display assy, LCD
Remote fluoro display board
Remote fluoro control board
Low speed starter board
Digital I/O board
DAP interface board
Dual speed starter board
Dual speed starter subassembly
Hand switch assembly
Battery, lithium 3.0V
Capacitor, DC bus 470 uF 450 VDC
Capacitor, DC bus 9000 uF 400 VDC
Contactor, line
Diode, mains rectifier 160MT120K
Diode, mains rectifier DD89N12K,
DD90N12L, IRKD91-12
Fuse, A70QS10-14F
Fuse, FNM-3
Fuse, FNQ-2
Fuse, FNQ-10
Fuse, GDC-1.6
Fuse, GDC-2
Fuse, GDC-2.5
Fuse, GDC-5
Fuse, MDA-2
Fuse, MDA-5
Fuse, MDA-7
Fuse, MDA-10
Fuse, MDA-12
Fuse, MDL-1 1/2
Page 8-2
PART NUMBER
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
733184-00
732816-03
See note ⇒
732221-02
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
729053-00
729038-00
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
735992-00
728877-03
See note ⇒
See note ⇒
7412290100
4150394100
4155001400
SC2715
6623071100
NOTE
1b
1c
2
1a
3
4
5
6
7
8
1b
9
19
10
10
11
17
22
12
12
20
2
13
14a
2
13
SUGGESTED QTY
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
1
1
⇐ See note
1
⇐ See note
1
1
1
⇐ See note
1
1
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
2
6
4
1
1
6623507000
6739951800
6711907400
5550005300
6711905500
5550033300
5550032600
5550034400
5550035600
6713000400
6713000100
6713000500
6713000200
6713746500
6713541500
14a
12
21
21
13
2
2
2
2
2
11
2
14a
2
14b
1
7
⇐ See note
⇐ See note
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Rev. V
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-07
CPI Canada Inc
8.2.0
Spares
8
SPARE PARTS LIST INDICO 100 GENERATOR (Cont)
DESCRIPTION
Fuse, MDL-4
Fuse, NLN-100
Fuse, OTS-60
Relay, DPST, 12V
Connector, 4 pin
Fan, axial
Transformer, aux power supply
Transformer, room I/F
HT tank assembly (complete)
PART NUMBER
6713544000
6711906500
SC3434
7213011800
5618931800
2084022900
732417-00
735496-01
See note ⇒
NOTE
2
14a
13
2
12
18
2
2
15
SUGGESTED QTY
5
5
5
2
1
1
1
1
⇐ See note
NOTE:
1a.
The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original power supply control board. The
spares board is “full featured” and will replace the original board in your generator regardless of
configuration. This is intended to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
1b.
Two versions of generator CPU boards and four versions of console CPU boards are used in Indico 100
generators. Please confirm the original part number(s) of these boards in your generator before ordering
spares. If your original generator CPU board is part number 732174-XX (where XX is a number from 00
to 08), order part number 732174-12. In this case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the
new CPU board. Please consult the factory for details.
If the original generator CPU board is part number 732174-12, it will be replaced with the same
part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required.
If your original generator CPU board is part number 734573-00, order part number 734573-02. In this
case, upgraded firmware will be required along with the new CPU board. Please consult the factory for
details.
If the original generator CPU board is part number 734573-02, it will be replaced with the same
part number. In this case, a firmware upgrade is not required.
The generator CPU board and the console CPU board must be matched per the table below:
APPLICATION
23 X 56 cm console
23 X 56 cm console
31 X 42 cm console
Rad-only console
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
If the original board is 732174XX, order part number 732174-12
for spares usage. See note 1b.
If the original board is 734573XX, order part number 734573-02
for spares usage. See note 1b.
If the original board is 734573XX, order part number 734573-02
for spares usage. See note 1b.
If the original board is 734573XX, order part number 734573-02
for spares usage. See note 1b.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-07
<MUST USE WITH>
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
732218-00
<MUST USE WITH>
733903-00
<MUST USE WITH>
735852-00
<MUST USE WITH>
736805-00
Rev. V
Page 8-3
8
Spares
CPI Canada Inc
NOTE (Cont):
1c.
Two different generator interface boards are used in Indico 100 generators. For rad and R&F
generators, use part number 732177-06, for pulsed fluoro generators use part number 732177-08.
Spares should be stocked accordingly.
2.
This part is common to all models of Indico 100 generators.
3.
Three different filament boards are used in Indico 100 generators. RAD only generators use ONE
filament board, part number 731407-00. R&F generators use TWO filament boards, part number
731407-01 (large focus) and part number 731407-02 (small focus). Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
4.
The part number shown is the suggested replacement for the original auxiliary board. The spares board
is “jumper configurable” in the field and as such will replace the original auxiliary board. This is intended
to eliminate the need to stock multiple configurations of this board.
5.
Three different inverter board part numbers are used in Indico 100 generators. For 230 VAC 1 phase
and 480 VAC 3 phase generators use part number 732813-00, for 400 VAC 3 phase 30 / 50 / 80 kW
generators use part number 732813-04, for 230 VAC 1 phase 37.5 kW and for 400 VAC 3 phase 37.5 /
65 kW generators use part number 732813-05 (see note 17 for the definition of mains input voltage). 30
and 37.5 kW generators require one inverter board, 50 and 65 kW generators require two inverter
boards, and 80 kW generators require three inverter boards. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
6.
Two part numbers of power input boards are used for spares. For 1 phase 230 VAC generators use part
number 733798-01, for 3 phase 400 or 480 VAC generators use part number 732161-01.
7.
Five different resonant boards are used in Indico 100 generators. Refer to the table below for the correct
part number for your generator.
O/P POWER (kW) & MAINS VOLTS
30 kW (230 VAC 1φ, 400 / 480 VAC 3φ)
37.5 / 40 kW (230 VAC 1φ, 400 VAC 3φ)
50 kW (400 VAC 3φ)
50 kW (480 VAC 3φ)
65 kW (400 VAC 3φ)
80 kW (400 VAC 3φ)
80 kW (400 / 480 VAC 3φ)
RESONANT BOARD
RAD POWER SUPPLIES
732808-00
732808-05
RESONANT BOARD
R&F POWER SUPPLIES
732808-01
732808-02
732808-06
732964-00
732964-02
732964-03
732964-01
732808-03
8.
The AEC board for your generator was selected to be compatible with specific AEC device(s). To
maintain full compatibility, the original part number must be ordered as a replacement. Refer to chapter
9, section 9.2.0 for the part number of the original AEC board shipped in the generator for which this
manual was prepared.
9.
THE CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD IS ONLY USED WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE. The console
display board is supplied pre-mounted to the console front panel switch assembly. Consult the factory
for the required spares part number for this assembly.
Page 8-4
Rev. V
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-07
CPI Canada Inc
Spares
8
NOTE (Cont):
10.
Remote fluoro control is an option; spares should be stocked accordingly.
11.
These items only used on generators fitted with low speed starter, spares should be stocked
accordingly. The low speed starter part number with a 33µF phase shift capacitor for standard “R” type
stators is 732752-00. The part number with a 12.5µF phase shift capacitor is 732752-01, and the part
number with a 45µF phase shift capacitor is 732752-02.
12.
These items only used on dual speed starter option, spares should be stocked accordingly. Several part
numbers of dual speed starter (which are tube stator dependent) are used in Indico 100 generators. To
determine which dual speed starter assembly is in your generator, note the DUAL SPEED STARTER
ASSY part number on a label on the dual speed starter chassis. This will be the part number that must
be ordered for spares usage. For reference, this will be part number 733317-XX or 735925-XX where
XX is a two digit number designating the exact configuration.
The dual speed starter fuses listed are used on all versions of dual speed starter.
13.
These items are used on the 400/480 VAC 3 phase power input board. Spares should be stocked
accordingly.
14a. These items are used on 1 phase 230 VAC units only (on the DC bus assembly or on the 1 phase
power input board). Spares should be stocked accordingly.
14b. This fuse used on 1 phase 230 VAC rad two tube generators, and on 1 phase 230 VAC R & F one tube
and two tube generators. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
15.
For replacement HT oil tank part numbers, consult factory.
16.
NOTE REGARDING MAINS (LINE) VOLTAGE AS DESCRIBED IN THIS SECTION: The mains
voltage referenced in this section is the mains voltage at the input to the generator (at the main fuses
on the power input board). This is not necessarily the same as the voltage at the main disconnect box in
the room, the reason being that an optional line adjusting transformer may be used with the generator
which steps the incoming line voltage to the generator up or down. To ensure that the correct part
number is selected for spares, it is suggested that the mains voltage be noted at the main input fuses
INSIDE THE GENERATOR.
17.
The digital I/O board is optional, and used on generators intended to interface with digital imaging
systems. To ensure full compatibility, please order the same part number that is in your generator(s).
18.
A cooling fan is used on R&F power supplies only. Spares should be stocked accordingly.
19.
For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use LCD display assembly part number 733396-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use LCD display assembly part number 735895-00.
20.
For 23 X 56 cm consoles, use hand switch assembly part number 733176-00. For 31 X 42 cm consoles,
use hand switch assembly part number 735203-00.
21.
Single phase generators use fuse FNM-3, three phase generators use FNQ-2. Spares should be
stocked accordingly.
22.
DAP is an option, spares should be stocked accordingly.
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-07
Rev. V
Page 8-5
8
Spares
CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 8-6
Rev. V
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-07
CPI Canada Inc
Schematics
9
CHAPTER 9
SCHEMATICS
CONTENTS:
9.1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 9-2
9.2.0 FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX.............................................................................................................. 9-2
9.3.0 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS ........................................................................................................................... 9-2
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-08
Rev. B
Page 9-1
9 Schematics
9.1.0
CPI Canada Inc
INTRODUCTION
This chapter contains the functional schematics for your X-ray generator. Each schematic represents a
major function in the Indico 100 generator; the fourteen functional schematics in this chapter represent all
of the major functional blocks in Indico 100 generators.
9.2.0
FUNCTIONAL SCHEMATIC INDEX
The functional schematic index follows this page. The part number for the AEC board originally shipped in
your generator is listed at the bottom of this form.
9.3.0
FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
The functional schematics immediately follow the functional schematic index.
Page 9-2
Rev. B
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-08
CPI Canada Inc
Functional Drawing Index
INDICO 100 FUNCTIONAL DRAWINGS
DESCRIPTION
DC Bus and Power Distribution
System ON
Room Interface
X-Ray Exposure - Rad / Fluoro
kV Control and Feedback
Filament Drive and mA Control
Low Speed Starter
Dual Speed Starter
Rad / Fluoro and Power Mode Select
Interlocks and Tube 1 / Tube 2 Tellback
Automatic Exposure Control (AEC)
Automatic Brightness Stabilization (ABS)
Remote Fluoro Control
Digital Interface
DAP (Dose Area Product)
Serial Communications
DRAWING NUMBER
MD-0788
MD-0762
MD-0763
MD-0761
MD-0759
MD-0760
MD-0764
MD-0765
MD-0786
MD-0787
MD-0757
MD-0758
MD-0766
MD-0767
MD-0828
MD-0829
INDICO 100 SCHEMATICS
DESCRIPTION
Schematic, AEC Interface Board
Schematic, AEC Board
SCHEMATIC NUMBER
728401
734628
THE PART NUMBER OF THE ORIGINAL AEC BOARD IN THE GENERATOR FOR
WHICH THIS MANUAL WAS PREPARED IS LISTED BELOW:
AEC BOARD PART NUMBER (AS ORIGINALLY SHIPPED)
N/A
MF-0718E
9 Schematics
CPI Canada Inc
(This page intentionally left blank)
Page 9-4
Rev. B
Indico 100 Series Service Manual
Ch # 740895-08
3 PHASE AC
MAINS INPUT
F5A
PHASE 3
F5C
GROUND
R11
R10
NEUTRAL
+
R20
PHASE 2
~
~
~
E23
K1
2
-
E16
D3
K1
S.S.
OK
JW2
1
1
J4-8
J4-8
5
1
U2
U1
4
+12V
2
+12VDC
OK
D2
K2
DC BUS
OK
4
5
2
1
F2
E10
F1
380/400/480 VAC
J6-1
3
D2
J6-5
D9
120 VAC
J6-6
J4-13
J4-2
J4-2
52 VAC
J2-2 P2-2
F1
K2
D8
SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
TO AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 3
R1, R2
K1
J4-1
J4-1
J4-4
J4-4
+12V
4
D5
J4-3
TP1
5
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT
COMMAND TO MD-0787
J5-3
J1-3
J5-4
J1-4
J3-3
J2-3
+12V
J4-3
F1
120 / 240 VAC
F2
J4-14
J3-4
J2-4
J4-15
J4-15
J3-2
J2-2
J4-16
J4-16
J4-18
J4-18
J3-9
J2-9
K3
TP4
TP1
REFER TO MD-0764
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD
J4-17
J10-3
K4
+12V
FLUORO FAN
TIMER / DRIVER
CIRCUIT
(U11, Q9, ETC)
D37
FLUORO
FAN ON
J4-5
D6
J5-3
J5-4
J1-6
J1-5
J1-3
K3
K4
J11-4
AUXILIARY BOARD
E21
240V
***
J8-1
F3
J7-1
J7-3
180V
T1 AND T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL AC MAINS VOLTAGE.
REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR SERVICE MANUAL.
THIS VOLTAGE IS APPROXIMATELY 560 VDC FOR 400 V GENERATORS, AND APPROXIMATELY
680 VDC FOR 480 V GENERATORS
0V
240V
200V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
OPTIONAL 400/480 VAC
*** 480 VAC GENERATORS
***
230/277 VAC
NEUTRAL
OPTIONAL
GROUND
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
3 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD
(REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR 1 PHASE POWER
INPUT BOARD)
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
0V
H.T. TANK
TUBE 1 /TUBE 2
SOLENOID
(TWO TUBE HT
TANKS ONLY)
J8-3
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
* FOR
400 VAC MAINS)
J7-5
**
J5-6
THREE FAN
UNITS ONLY
E17
200V
FROM PAGE 3
*
J5-4
F2
J11-6
R&F GENERATORS ONLY
J5-7
FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS
ONLY. DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION,
ONE, TWO, OR THREE FANS MAY BE USED
J10-1
+12V
6
J4-5
COMMON
+12V
D7
R72
52 / 73 / 94 VAC
F3
+12V
J4-14
J4-17
RETURN
J1-1
F4
K1
+12V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 3
73 VAC
K5
D4
J4-13
T1
208 VAC
N/C
J2-1 P2-1
CNCTR
CLOSED
*
94 VAC
R31
SOFT START
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
(U3B, Q6, ETC)
DUAL SPEED STARTER
IS OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED
STARTER IS STANDARD
IN INDICO 100 GENERATORS
240 VAC
J6-7
J5-6
+
-**
560 VDC
+12V
JUMPER POSITION:
1 PHASE GENERATORS 2
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS 3
JUMPER PINS 1-2
E2 -
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
+12V
J4-10
E2 -
E9
DC BUS
DISCHARGE
CIRCUIT
(Q1, D10)
F1
J4-10
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
R12
SOFT START OK
PROTECTION
CIRCUIT
(U1C, Q7, ETC)
R48
JW3
1
JUMPER POSITION:
1 PHASE GENERATORS 2
JUMPER PINS 2-3
3 PHASE GENERATORS 3
JUMPER PINS 1-2
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
E2 -
DC BUS CHARGED
SENSING
CIRCUIT
(R5-R8, D3)
F2
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
E11
E8
+12V
3 PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE
INVERTER BOARDS DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
DC BUS
OUT
R16, R17
REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
F5B
D1
R18, R19
K5
PHASE 1
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 1 OF 6
K5
1 PHASE AC
MAINS INPUT
LINE 1
F5A
LINE 2
F5B
SINGLE PHASE INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE
ONE OR TWO INVERTER MODULES DEPENDING
ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
E33
MAINS
RECTIFIER
230
VAC
E34
BUS
CAPACITORS
R11
R10
K1
P1-4
P1-1
J12-4
J12-1
NO CONNECTION
5
J6-5
2
J6-6
J4-4
J6-7
K5
J5-4
+12V
+12V
J4-4
J3-3
F4
J4-14
J4-15
J4-16
J4-16
J4-18
J4-18
J4-17
J4-17
LOW SPEED
STARTER BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 1
J3-4
D5
J3-2
R12
J4-3
J4-14
RETURN
J5-3
J4-1
J4-15
F1
J2-2 P2-2
K1
J4-3
73 VAC
52 VAC
D8
AUXILIARY BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 1
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 3
D2
K2
J4-1
120 VAC
K2
D4
J4-2
*T1
94 VAC
DC BUS
OK
J2-1 P2-1
J4-2
380/400/480 VAC TAPS
208 VAC
U1
+12V
J4-13
J6-1
1
4
J4-13
E2 -
J6-3
DC BUS CHARGED
SENSING CIRCUIT
(R6-R8, R16-R21, D3, ETC)
1
J4-8
E2 -
240 VAC
F1
J4-8
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
DC BUS ASSEMBLY
F2
J4-10
E1 +
INVERTER
BOARD
VOLTAGE DOUBLER CIRCUIT
GROUND
J4-10
650 VDC
OUT
D9
+12VDC
OK
J3-9
+12V
D7
J10-3
K3
K4
FAN(S) USED ON FLUORO GENERATORS
ONLY. DEPENDING ON THE APPLICATION,
ONE OR TWO FANS MAY BE USED
J10-1
+12V
K3
6
J4-5
J4-5
D6
J11-4
J11-6
K4
H.T. TANK
REFER TO PAGE 1
J8-3
E21
E17
J8-1
240V
*
T1 / T2 MUST BE TAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE NOMINAL
AC MAINS VOLTAGE. REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF THE GENERATOR
SERVICE MANUAL.
T2 (SHOWN TAPPED
* FOR
240 VAC MAINS)
F3
J7-1
J7-3
200V
OPTIONAL 230 VAC
J7-5
230 VAC
OPTIONAL
GROUND
180V
ROOM INTERFACE CHASSIS
0V
240V
CONTINUED ON
PAGE 4
1 PHASE POWER INPUT BOARD
DRAWN
200V
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
0V
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 2 OF 6
+35V
0V
J7-3
26 VAC
J7-6
R71
F4
C22
R65
J7-1
C21
R64
26 VAC
+12V
+12V
T1
D31
J7-4
U34
J6-5
J7-5
+5 V
REGULATOR
+/-35V
D32
+5V
J6-4
TP16
F3
FROM
PAGE 1, 2
TP5
J7-2
15 VAC
U5,U6
-35V
F1
J7-4
C24,
C25
J7-5
15 VAC
F2
TO PAGE 1
J6-1
J7-1
J6-2
J7-2
J6-3
J7-3
+12V
-12V
R70
+12 VDC
REGULATOR
0V
D29
TP1 TP15
-12V
D27
+12V
U4
D33
R68
-12 VDC
REGULATOR
D16
D30
C19
+12V
-12V
TO MD-0786
+12V
+12V
D28
-12V
J4-1
J1-1
J4-3
J1-3
J4-5
J1-5
J4-7
J1-7
U27
J4-9
J1-9
+5 V
REGULATOR
J4-11
J1-11
J4-12
J1-12
J4-13
J1-13
J4-15
J1-15
J4-17
J1-17
J4-19
J1-19
+5V
R32
+12V
D1
+12V
+/- 12V/SS FAULT
5.1V REF
J5-7
J5-6
J5-3
J5-4
J1-5
J1-6
J1-3
J6-7
J8-6
J6-4
J6-3
J8-5
J8-3
+
9
18
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
TO MD-0765
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
SIGNAL TO
MD-0765
FLUORO
RAD
+
JUMPER POSITION:
RAD GENERATORS
JUMPER "RAD"
R&F GENERATORS
JUMPER "FLUORO"
+
2
J1-4
J9-3
J1-3
J9-2
J1-2
J9-5
J1-5
J9-6
J1-6
-12V
12VDC / SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
TO MD-0764, PAGE 1
SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
FROM AUXILIARY
BOARD, PAGE 1
R227
R217
1
-35V
AUXILIARY BOARD
1
2
U41
J1-1
J1-10
J1-29
J1-18
J1-19
J2-14
J2-6
J2-15
J2-7
J1-4
J10-25
J10-6
J10-10
J10-29
J10-18
J10-19
J3-14
J3-6
J3-15
J3-7
+15V
R10
-35V
+35V
J1-6
R11
-12V
FILAMENT BOARD
J1-25
R2
+12V
F1
TP2
R225
U40
J9-4
F2
U3A
5
4
R228
1
U7
5
R226
4
RN2C
RN2D
5
J1-1
-
R21
CONTROL
BOARD
+35V
J9-1
R27, R32
RN4F
2
+12V
U3D
+12V
R223
R123
R20
4
DUAL SPEED STARTER IS
OPTIONAL. LOW SPEED
STARTER IS STANDARD IN
INDICO 100 GENERATORS
U3C
+12V
R22
+12V
Q16
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
-12V
+12V
Q1
+/- 12V/SS FAULT TO GENERATOR
READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
-
JW1
5
J6-5
+35V
8
7
J5-5
AUXILIARY BOARD
-
J6-6
D19
F2
ONE FILAMENT BOARD IS
STANDARD IN INDICO 100
GENERATORS, THE SECOND
FILAMENT BOARD IS OPTIONAL
+12V
J1-3
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
2
1
5
5
4
1
2
R33
14
12
P/S ON
-15V
DS34
DS35
GRN
RED
15
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DATA LATCH,
BUFFER, &
DRIVER
U27, U19
& U16
U17
+5V
12
11
Q4
4
+5V
11
DRIVER
DRIVER
U16
U16
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
TO MD-0787
DS22
FLUORO
16
TP2
+5V
FILAMENT BOARD
Q1
DS23
FLUORO
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS2
LOW
17
DS4
HIGH
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
U24
BUFFER
*
DATA BUS
D0..D7
BIT 0
DATA LATCH
& BUFFER
U27, U19
BIT 2
DATA
LATCH
-35V
J1-6
R9
U9
10
D1
R14
DS10
RED
-12V
J1-5
R13
DS9
GRN
F1
+5V
RN11I
CONT.
J1-2
13
RN11A
RN7F
+5V
*
THE POWER SUPPLY ON COMMAND (P/S ON) WHICH ENERGIZES
K1 / K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD IS ISSUED BY THE GENERATOR
CPU BOARD AFTER THE +5 VDC RAIL IS DETECTED BY THE CPU.
THE DC RAILS, INCLUDING THE +5 VDC RAIL, ARE ESTABLISHED
WHEN THE SYSTEM ON COMMAND IS RECEIVED. REFER TO MD-0762.
DATA
LATCH
U27
U49
BIT 7
BIT 3
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
PAGE 3
SHEET 3 OF 6
24 VDC RETURN
K3
24 VDC
F5
D3
C10
0V
+5V
J1-1
F3
18 VAC
FROM
PAGE 1, 2
K2
J1-4
D1
C16
0V
F4
J1-7
F2
J1-9
F1
J16-8
-12V
TP5
110 VAC
U40
220 VAC
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
(Q7, Q8, T1,
C57, ETC)
J10-1
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J10-4
LINE SYNC
TO MD-0767
ZERO CROSS
DETECTOR
220 VAC
220 VAC
R4
+24V
R78
TO RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 5)
CONSOLE BOARD (31 X 42 CM CONSOLE)
-15V
K1
-15V
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
TP6
110 VAC
19
TP7
-15 V
REGULATOR
-24V
TP9
J16-3
+12V
R6
U4
R5
220 VAC
+ 5 / -15VDC
POWER SUPPLY
& REGULATOR
(U28, L1, D9-D13, ETC)
F1
+12 V
REGULATOR
-12 V
REGULATOR
18 VAC
110 VAC
J5-15
CONSOLE BOARD & LCD DISPLAY
ASSEMBLY SHOWN WITHIN DASHED
LINES USED ON 31 X 42 CM CONSOLE
ONLY. REFER TO PAGE 5 FOR
23 X 56 CM CONSOLE AND FOR
RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
TP7
+5V
TP2
TP3
U3
U2
J1-5
J4-15
+5V
TP8
TP10
R3
+5 / +16VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U47, Q4, T1,
D17, D18, ETC.)
F6
J1-3
J4-13
J5-13
REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762
TP11
R1
R81
J1-2
J5-14
TP1
U5
+15 V
REGULATOR
R2
TP13
TP13
18 VAC
J5-12
J4-14
+15V
+24V
T2
J4-12
J2-1
J1-1
J2-3
J1-3
J2-6
J1-6
J2-7
J1-7
J2-8
J1-8
J2-9
J1-9
110 VAC
+24VDC
R7
DS1
D15
POWER ON
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
+12V
+12V
K1
+24V
+24V
J10-13
J10-19
K2
J10-11
REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762
REFER TO MD-0757 (AEC) FOR
PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS
ON THE AEC BOARD
J10-16
J10-17
-12V
-12V
-24V
-24V
K3
+24V
J17-3
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
J13-21
J13-23
J13-11
J13-13
J13-17
J3-6
J13-6
J3-1
J13-1
J3-8
J13-8
J3-5
J13-5
-15V
+5V
TP16
-12V
J13-4
J13-7
DS38
DS37
TP18
TP21
J3-7
J11-1
DS33
J11-5
TO REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL, PAGE 5
TP20
J13-2
J3-4
+12V
R89
-15V
J3-2
+5V
R75
R80
TP4
+24V
+12V
TP19
DS36
-15V
+15V
+15V
+12V
R85
-12V
+5V
TP17
R77
J13-15
THE DIGITAL I/O BOARD IS OPTIONAL WITH R&F
GENERATORS
REFER TO MD-0767 (DIGITAL INTERFACE) FOR
PINOUTS OF THE DC RAIL CONNECTIONS
SHOWN TO THE RIGHT OF THIS TEXT
+5V
J13-3
R76
-15V
J3-3
-15V
DS39
R90
+12V
J13-9
+15V
+15V
+24V
R86
+15V
R81
+5V
J17-4
R78
TO COIL OF POWER DISTRIBUTION
RELAY (CUSTOMER SUPPLIED)
MAXIMUM 100 MA
AEC BOARD
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 4 OF 6
+12V
+12V
+5V
U8
J11-1
P1-1
J11-5
P1-5
+5 V
REGULATOR
D4
+5V
+12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
(FROM PAGE 4)
+5V
J1-17
J2-17
J1-18
J2-18
J1-15
J2-15
J1-19
J2-19
J1-20
J2-20
+12V
REMOTE FLUORO
DISPLAY BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL OPTIONAL WITH
INDICO 100 R&F GENERATORS
J5-12
FROM GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
(PAGE 4)
+5V
+5V
REFER TO SYSTEM ON, MD-0762
J5-14
+5V
TP2
J5-13
F1
J5-15
+ 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U30, Q5, T1,
D7, D8, ETC.)
J8-1
J1-1
J8-2
J1-2
J8-23
J1-23
U31
-12 V
REGULATOR
-12V
J8-24
J1-24
J8-25
J1-25
J8-26
J1-26
CONSOLE DISPLAY BOARD
U32
THESE ITEMS ARE
USED ON THE 23 X 56
CM CONSOLE ONLY.
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
J10-1
-12V
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J10-5
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (23 x 56 CM CONSOLE)
J16-3
J8-3
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
+5V
TP3
FROM GENERATOR
INTERFACE BOARD
(PAGE 4)
TP7
TP2
J16-4
J8-8
F1
+ 5 / -20VDC
POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
(U12, L1, D2,
D3-D7, ETC.)
TP8
+5V
THESE ITEMS ARE
USED ON THE “RAD-ONLY”
CONSOLE ONLY.
TP9
-20V
19
300 VAC
BACKLIGHT
POWER SUPPLY
(Q1, Q2, T1,
C36, ETC.)
J5-1
FLUORESCENT LAMP
J5-5
DRAWN
CONSOLE BOARD (RAD-ONLY CONSOLE)
LCD DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 5 OF 6
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
THIS VOLTAGE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED. THIS WILL RISE TO APPROXIMATELY 6 VDC WHEN THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE FULLY CHARGED.
2
THE DC BUS CAPACITORS MUST CHARGE WITHIN APPROXIMATELY 0.25 SECONDS OF THE GENERATOR BEING SWITCHED ON. IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS DO NOT CHARGE NORMALLY, THE SOFT START
OK PROTECTION CIRCUIT ENERGIZES RELAY K1 (SEE # 4) AND INHIBITS OPERATION OF THE SOFT START DRIVER CIRCUIT (SEE # 3).
3
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) COMMANDS THE MAIN CONTACTOR K5 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD TO CLOSE. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = CONTACTOR OPEN. THIS OUPUT WILL NOT SWITCH
“LOW” IF THE DC BUS CAPACITORS ARE NOT CHARGED (SEE # 1 & 2).
4
K1 REMAINS DE-ENERGIZED (CONTACTS AS SHOWN) IF NO SOFT-START FAULT IS DETECTED. THEREFORE, K1 AND K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD WILL ENERGIZE WHEN THE GENERATOR IS SWITCHED
ON. A SOFT-START FAULT ENERGIZES K1 ON THE AUXILIARY BOARD, DE-ENERGIZING K1 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD. THIS WILL INHIBIT FURTHER DC BUS CHARGING.
5
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) ON, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FLUORO FAN(S) OFF. FAN(S) ARE SWITCHED ON DURING PULSED OR CONTINUOUS FLUORO OPERATION, AND
REMAIN ON FOR APPROXIMATELY 20 MINUTES AFTER SWITCHING TO RAD MODE.
“LOW” INDICATES CONTACTOR CLOSED (SEE # 3). THE CONTACTOR CLOSED SIGNAL OCCURS APPROXIMATELY 10 SECONDS AFTER INITIAL GENERATOR TURN-ON, ASSUMING NORMAL DC BUS CHARGING.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
24 VDC (APPROXIMATELY) ENERGIZES K1 AND / OR K2 ON THE POWER INPUT BOARD, INITIATING THE POWER-ON SEQUENCE. SEE # 4.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = RAD / PULSED FLUORO MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE. USED ON R&F GENERATORS ONLY.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. NOT USED ON ALL MODELS, REFER TO MD-0786 FOR DETAILS.
DS9 LIT = CONTACTOR CLOSED, DS10 LIT = CONTACTOR NOT CLOSED.
DS34 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND ISSUED (CONSOLE PASSED ALL SELF TESTS). DS35 LIT = GENERATOR ON COMMAND NOT ISSUED (DURING CONSOLE SELF TESTS, OR IF SELF TESTS FAILED).
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
DS22 LIT = FLUORO SELECTED, DS23 LIT = RAD SELECTED.
DS2 LIT = PULSED FLUORO / LOW POWER MODE. DS4 LIT = HIGH POWER RAD MODE. SEE # 13.
D1 LIT INDICATES + OR - 12 VDC FAULT, OR SOFT START FAULT.
THE VOLTAGE WAVEFORM AT THIS TEST POINT IS DEPICTED IN FIGURE 1 BELOW.
18 s
4V
FIGURE 1
-8 V
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
DC BUS & POWER
DISTRIBUTION
10 MAR 2000
MD-0788 REV J
SHEET 6 OF 6
24 VDC RETURN
T2
F5
D3
J17-2
J17-1
+ 24 VDC
*
S3
Q1
Q2
R15
24 VDC SUPPLY FOR
SYSTEM ON/OFF.
SEE MD-0788, PAGE 4
LOCKOUT
NORMAL
D4
S1
OFF
K3
D16
K2
31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE
J3-3
J5-10
J4-10
P1-2
J3-2
J5-11
J4-11
R13
Q3
P1-3
DS1
ON
S2
ON
K1
3
OFF
P1-1
J3-1
J5-12
J4-12
JW1
23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE
CONSOLE
BOARD
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
ON
P1-3
J2-3
J3-9
J6-9
J5-10
J4-10
1
P1-2
J2-2
J3-7
J6-7
J5-11
J4-11
2
P1-1
J2-1
J3-5
J6-5
J5-12
J4-12
REFER TO DC BUS &
POWER DISTRIBUTION,
MD-0788, PAGE 4
3
2
1
JUMPER POSITION:
TO ENERGIZE K1 ONLY WHEN
THE CONSOLE IS SWITCHED ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 1-2
TO ENERGIZE K1 AT ALL TIMES THAT
THE GENERATOR AC MAINS IS ON
JUMPER JW1 PINS 2-3
(K1 SWITCHES THE 110 & 220 VAC
SUPPLIES TO THE ROOM
INTERFACE BOARD)
OFF
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
DISPLAY BOARD
ON
CONSOLE CPU
BOARD
P1-16
J7-16
J8-7
J16-7
P1-15
J7-15
J8-6
J16-6
P1-17
J7-17
J8-3
J16-3
OFF
CONSOLE
BOARD
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
USE DRAWING DC BUS & POWER DISTRIBUTION, MD-0788, IN CONJUNCTION WITH THIS DOCUMENT
TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE
P1-2
J5-2
J2-10
J4-10
* TO CONNECT AN EMERGENCY-OFF SWITCH, REMOVE JUMPER FROM J17-1 TO J17-2. THEN CONNECT
THE EMERGENCY OFF SWITCH TO J17-1 AND J17-2.
ON
P1-3
J5-3
J2-11
J4-11
P1-4
J5-4
J2-12
J4-12
OFF
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
TOUCH SCREEN
INTERFACE
BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED_________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
_________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
SYSTEM ON
MD-0762 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
MOMENTARILY PRESSING ON CONNECTS THIS LINE TO “24 VDC RETURN”. THIS LATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD,
ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING). SEE NOTE ADJACENT TO JW1 ON THIS DOCUMENT.
2
MOMENTARILY PRESSING OFF CONNECTS THIS LINE TO “24 VDC RETURN”. THIS UNLATCHES RELAY DRIVERS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD,
DE-ENERGIZING K2 AND K3, AND POSSIBLY K1 (DEPENDING ON JW1 SETTING).
3
DS1 LIT INDICATES THE PRESENCE OF THE 24 VDC SUPPLY SHOWN. THIS 24 VDC SUPPLY WILL BE PRESENT IF THE GENERATOR IS CONNECTED TO A
LIVE AC MAINS SUPPLY.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED_________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
_________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
SYSTEM ON
MD-0762 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 2
+24V
NOTE *
TABLE
STEPPER
INPUT
BUCKY
CONTACTS
TB1-5
J2-15
J9-15
TB1-4
J2-16
J9-16
4
TB2-5
J2-13
J9-13
TB2-4
J2-14
J9-14
TB2-7
J2-11
J9-11
+24V
TB2-6
J2-12
3
2
J2-24
J9-24
TB3-4
J2-25
J9-25
3
1
JW10
1
5
2
4
2
JW9
1
R53
R55
R66
J9-12
TB3-5
4
NOTE *
1
5
2
4
1
JW7
1
5
U7, U12, U18,
U19, U25
U21
R54
4
2
U31
R56
+24V
U29
R67
REMOTE TOMO
SELECT
2
+24V
NOTE *
4
COLLIMATOR
INTERLOCK
3
NOTE *
4
3
2
1
JW2
SEE
MD-0761
D0
J12-1
J6-1
D1
J12-2
J6-2
D2
J12-3
J6-3
D3
J12-4
J6-4
D4
J12-5
J6-5
D5
J12-6
J6-6
D6
J12-7
J6-7
D7
J12-8
J6-8
R23
TOMO
EXPOSURE
TB3-7
J2-22
J9-22
TB3-6
J2-23
J9-23
TB4-4
J2-21
J9-21
U8
U10
R21
ROOM DOOR
INTERLOCK
+24V
U14
TB4-5
R29
J2-20
R38
4
2
1
5
2
4
J9-20
R34
R36
TB4-7
4
U13
3
J2-19
T2 FROM MD-0787
J9-19
R33
2
+24V
R32
TB4-8
THERMAL
SWITCH 1
+24V
NOTE *
+24V
TB4-6
THERMAL
SWITCH 2
5
1
JW3
1
5
BUFFER, DRIVER
AND ADDRESS
DECODER CIRCUITS
U9
R22
U16
1
4
2
R37
TB4-9
T1 FROM MD-0787
MULTIPLE SPOT
EXPOSURE
I.I.
SAFETY
TB5-12
J2-17
J9-17
TB5-11
J2-18
J9-18
TB6-4
J2-9
J9-9
TB6-3
J2-10
J9-10
+24V
NOTE *
+24V
4
NOTE *
3
2
R35
4
3
2
JW8
1
1
JW6
1
5
2
4
U20
J2-8
TB6-5
REMOTE FLUORO
EXPOSURE
REMOTE
PREP
+24V
J9-8
TB6-6
J2-7
J9-7
TB6-8
J2-5
J9-5
TB6-7
J2-6
J9-6
R68
**
U30, U42,
U44
R70
R71
1
5
2
4
R52
U27
R69
DATA BUS
DO..D7
+24V
NOTE *
REMOTE
EXPOSURE
TB6-10
J2-3
J9-3
TB6-9
J2-4
J9-4
4
TP14
J2-1
J2-2
+24V
NOTE *
4
J9-1
J9-2
3
2
R77
R76
JW15
1
3
1
JW14
1
5
2
4
2
R75
U28
R74
**
U41,
U43
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE OUTPUTS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 2
** ADDITIONAL CIRCUITS ARE USED IN THE AREAS INDICATED **. THESE CIRCUITS ARE NOT
RELEVANT TO THIS ROOM INTERFACE DIAGRAM, HOWEVER, THEY ARE PART OF THE X-RAY
EXPOSURE FUNCTION AND ARE SHOWN ON MD-0761
*
24 VDC EXTERNAL INPUT POSITION
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9,
JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 2-3; 24 VDC
APPLIED EXTERNALLY ACTIVATES
THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING THE
APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
*
DRY CONTACT INPUT POSITION
FOR JW2, JW3, JW6, JW7, JW8, JW9,
JW10, JW14, JW15 SHOWN. JUMPER
CONNECTS PINS 1-2 AND 3-4; AN
EXTERNAL DRY CONTACT CLOSURE
ACTIVATES THE INPUT(S) BY ENERGIZING
THE APPROPRIATE OPTO-COUPLER.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 APR 2000
14 APR 2000
ROOM
INTERFACE
13 APR 2000
MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
FOR +24 VDC SOURCE, REFER TO
MD-0788, PAGE 4, ON
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
+24V
+24V
C2
U6, U7, U11, U12
U24, U25, U34
DRIVE 1
J9-40
J2-40
J9-39
J2-39
J9-30
J2-30
TB1-2
JW12
R2
K1
TB1-1
C1
K1
JW1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DRIVE 2
TB1-11
JW9
R1
K2
DRY * LIVE *
J9-29
TOMO / BUCKY 4
SELECT
TB1-12
J2-29
BUCKY 3
SELECT
K2
TB11
J9-28
DRIVE 3
J6-1
J12-1
J2-28
K6
K3
D0
K3
K4
J9-27
DRIVE 4
J6-2
J12-2
J12-3
K1
K4
D1
J9-34
DRIVE 5
J6-3
J2-27
K2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
DRY * LIVE *
2
3
C3
4
TB2-2
JW11
R3
K3
5
TB2-1
BUCKY 2
SELECT
C4
J2-34
220 VAC
K5
D2
JW2
1
JW3
1
2
3
4
TB10
5
6
7
8
TB2-11
JW10
R4
K4
DRY * LIVE *
TB2-12
BUCKY 1
SELECT
1
J9-32
DRIVE 6
J6-4
J6-5
J12-4
J12-5
J2-32
D3
D4
ADDRESS DECODERS,
BUFFER, REGISTER,
AND DRIVER
CIRCUITS
TB3-1
2
K6
3
JW4
J2-31
3
4
5
6
7
K5
8
TB3-12
JW14
C6
J2-35
1
J6-7
J12-7
J2-36
3
K9
D6
JW5
1
2
3
4
J9-37
J6-8
J12-8
5
6
7
8
TB4-1
K10
24 VDC
TB8
J9-38
DRIVE 11
J2-38
DATA BUS
DO..D7
2
3
J9-33
J2-33
J9-26
NOTE THE FOLLOWING IF USING JW1, JW2,
JW3, JW4, OR JW5 IN THE LIVE CONTACT
POSITION:
+24V
JW6
1
2
3
K9
4
K13
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
INDICATOR (COMM)
TUBE 1 INDICATOR
TUBE 2 INDICATOR
TB5-4
MAG 3
TB5-3
DRY **
K10
LIVE 24 VDC **
TB5-7
TB5-6
5
MAG 2
TB5-5
J2-26
DRIVE 1 TO
DRIVE 13 = “LOW”
ENERGIZES
THE RELAYS
ROOM
LIGHT
TB5-2
4
K12
DRIVE 13
TB4-2
A JUMPER WIRE MUST BE CONNECTED TO
TB11 PIN 1, 2, 3, 4 OR 5 AS APPROPRIATE
FROM TB8, TB9, OR TB10 IN ORDER TO
SUPPLY 24 VDC, 110 VAC, OR 220 VAC
FROM THE SELECTED OUTPUT
1
K11
DRIVE 12
TB4-3
K7
J2-37
D7
TB4-12
DRY * LIVE *
4
5
DRIVE 10
K8
JW13
2
J9-36
DRIVE 9
TOMO / BUCKY
START
TB4-11
C5
K6
R5
D5
R6
TB9
K8
COLLIMATOR
BYPASS
TB3-11
K7
J9-35
TB3-2
DRY * LIVE *
5
110 VAC
J12-6
2
4
J9-31
DRIVE 7
DRIVE 8
J6-6
1
TB5-8
K12
TB7
1
K11
+24V
2
TB5-10
MAG 1
TB5-9
3
JW7
4
K13
1
2
3
+24V
DRY **
5
TB5-1
4
TB6-1
LIVE 24 VDC **
JW8
1
2
3
TB6-2
4
ALE
OUTPUT
TB6-11
DRY **
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
THIS PAGE SHOWS THE ROOM INTERFACE
OUTPUTS. ROOM INTERFACE INPUTS ARE
SHOWN ON PAGE 1
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
*
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT POSITION
FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 4-6
LIVE CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
LIVE CONTACT POSITION
FOR JW1 TO JW5 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS PINS 6-8
TB6-12
LIVE 24 VDC **
**
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
SPARE
OUTPUT
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC
DRAWN
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT
DRY CONTACT POSITION FOR
JW6 TO JW8 SHOWN.
JUMPER CONNECTS
PINS 2-3
LIVE CONTACT 24VDC POSITION
FOR JW6 TO JW8 SHOWN.
JUMPERS CONNECT
PINS 1-2 AND 3-4
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 APR 2000
14 APR 2000
ROOM
INTERFACE
13 APR 2000
MD-0763 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
+24V
+24V
2
4
1
5
U22
5
2
4
2
4
LAST IMAGE
HOLD CIRCUIT
(U39, C30, ETC.)
REMOTE FLUORO
EXPOSURE INPUT
TP5
TP6
+5V
+5V
J5-6
J4-6
J5-7
J4-7
J5-8
J4-8
R19
1
FROM
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 3)
U15
R25
2
4
1
5
2
4
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
1
5
U18, U25
2
4
U37
R18
2
J13-7
R72
COM
CPU
1
5
2
4
U46
RN14C
J12-5
J6-5
RN14D
5
U25, U12, U7
BUFFER AND
ADDRESS
DECODER
J12-7
J6-7
RN14B
J6-4
RN14E
4
J12-4
5
KV CONTROL
REFER TO MD-0759
5
1
4
2
4
5
3
2
JW15
1
SEE NOTE 1
1
J9-3
U26
4
MA CONTROL
REFER TO MD-0760
R77
2
J9-4
J13-9
1
5
2
4
1
5
2
4
U25, U12, U7
U43
X-RAY
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
+24V
U25
HAND
SWITCH
DS41
U28
1
U24
4
PREP
DS42
4
+24V
J16-4
J16-5
FOOT
SWITCH
5
R102
R121
J4-9
BUFFER AND
ADDRESS
DECODER
J16-3
5
J6-6
U18, U25
+24V
U38
U18
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J12-6
2
R20
+5V
CPU
EXP
SWT
4
2
R70
+5V
+12V
SEE NOTE 1
J5-9
R120
J9-8
U30
R119
R118
R113
1
EXPOSURE ENABLE
COMMAND FROM
MD-0767, PAGE 1
BUFFER AND ADDRESS
DECODER (U18, U25)
5
R24
TP4
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
TO J10-35 (PAGE 2)
3
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
4
1
J6-17
U25, U12, U7
U42
2
J12-17
U32
U44
REFER TO PAGE 4 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
1
R92
5
5
R82
1
1
RN19B
NOTE: THE PORTION OF THE REMOTE FLUORO EXPOSURE,
REMOTE EXPOSURE, AND REMOTE TOMO SELECT INPUTS
SHOWN WITHIN THE DASHED OUTLINES IS DETAILED ON
MD-0763, PAGE 1
R39, R57
1.
J13-3
REMOTE
EXPOSURE
INPUT
J13-1
R76
J13-5
J3-18
CONSOLE BOARD
J3-19
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
J12-5
RN14D
J6-5
4
BUFFER AND ADDRESS
DECODER (U18, U25)
U41
J3-20
+24V
4
P1-18
3
2
JW2
1
SEE NOTE 1
RN14A
J9-24
P1-19
PREP
THE CONSOLE BOARD &
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
SHOWN ON THIS PAGE IS
USED ON THE 31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE ONLY. REFER TO PAGE
3 FOR THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE,
AND PAGE 4 FOR THE
TOUCH SCREEN CONSOLE.
R23
J9-25
1
5
X-RAY
P1-20
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
2
4
REMOTE
TOMO
SELECT
INPUT
1
5
R21
2
J6-8
U25, U12, U7
U8
ADDRESS DECODER,
DATA LATCH, AND
DRIVER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
J12-8
BUFFER AND ADDRESS
DECODER (U18, U25)
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
4
DRAWN
U10
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
4
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 1 OF 4
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH &
THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL
FROM MD-0787
13
J1-4
GRN
6
R174
RN11D
DS31
RED
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DS27
GRN
7
U27
D19
+5V
14
DS26 X-RAY
DS28
9
5
2
4
RN5E
J1-33
RN2A
J3-9
J9-7
J3-7
H.T. TANK
+12V
U19, U16
D21
TP18
J10-15
J1-15
“PREP ENABLED”
DETECTOR CKT
(U11B, U10C, ETC)
RN1C
5
1
11
12
J1-34
RN4B
“GENERATOR READY”
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
(U10A, Q6, D37, ETC)
J10-16
J1-3
D25
4
2
RN1D
PREP COMMAND TO MD-0764 & MD-0765
D24
U2
18
J1-22
CONTINUED
ON PAGE 3
R133
Q12
J10-35
+/- 12V/SS FAULT FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3 (CONTROL BOARD)
J1-16
RN1H
1
5
“X-RAY REQUEST”
DETECTOR CKT
(U11D, RN7, ETC)
FILAMENT FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 1
STATOR FAULT FROM MD-0764 & MD-0765
U5
J1-35
RN1F
2
4
HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT FROM MD-0759, PAGE 1
& HIGH MA FAULT FROM MD-0760, PAGE 2
16
HV / MA FAULT TO MD-0760, PAGE 1
TP12
RN1G
1
5
2
4
U3
RN1E
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J9-9
ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0764
15
J10-33
J10-34
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
FROM PAGE 1
RESET COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1 &
MD-0760, PAGE 2
10
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
12
U4
J10-14
RED
DATA
LATCH
1
“KV ENABLED”
DETECTOR CKT
(U11A, RN8, ETC)
RN2B
8
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
U33F
13
TP10
J1-14
YEL
PREP
R173
RN2F
DS30
KV
EN
+12V
J8-4
+5V
RN11C
RN11B
+5V
AUXILIARY BOARD
“X-RAY REQUEST”
DETECTOR CKT
(U10D, RN7, ETC)
TP14
LOGIC “OR / NOR”
CIRCUITS (U10B, U14,
Q4, Q13, D91, ETC)
17
DRIVE ENABLE COMMAND TO MD-0759, PAGE 1
CONTROL BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 2 OF 4
+5V
P/S
READY
DS17
OPTO-COUPLER “ON”
= GENERATOR READY
J1-3
FROM
PAGE 2
J1-22
J5-6
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
J5-7
U24
J5-8
1
5
2
4
5
1
U14
U6
J10-22
5
1
BUFFER
J10-3
R9
RED
R8
GRN
19
1
DS18
R10
RN7D
+5V
4
5
2
4
J4-7
J4-8
U10
U12
2
1
J4-6
4
2
J5-9
U3
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
J4-9
BUFFER
DATA BUS
D0..D7
CONTROL BOARD
5
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
5
1
U21
1
4
4
2
5
1
4
2
U11
U13
2
DATA BUS
D0..D7
1
TP12
+5V
TB1-1
TP13
J8-4
+5V
J8-5
R66
R67
J8-3
J16-4
J16-5
J16-3
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
FOOT
SWITCH
PREP
U17
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
CPU
COM
5
DATA BUS
D0..D7
PREP
HAND
SWITCH
X-RAY
1
U9
5
1
4
2
TB1-5
J6-6
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
J6-8
J6-10
U10
4
2
P1-18
J2-18
J3-6
P1-19
J2-19
J3-8
P1-20
J2-20
J3-10
J3-3
PREP
J3-1
X-RAY
COM
J3-5
J7-3
CONSOLE CPU BOARD
J7-2
J7-1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN
DASHED LINES ARE USED
ON THE 23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE ONLY.
DISPLAY BOARD
P1-3
P1-2
PREP
X-RAY
DRAWN
P1-1
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN
DASHED LINES ARE USED
ON RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 3 OF 4
PREP
P1-6
J5-6
J3-7
P1-7
J5-7
J2-8
P1-5
J5-5
J2-9
J4-7
J4-8
X-RAY
TO
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
(PG 1)
J4-9
KEYPAD ASSEMBLY
PREP
HAND
SWITCH
CIRCUITS SHOWN WITHIN
DASHED LINES ARE USED
ON THE TOUCH SCREEN
CONSOLE ONLY.
NOTE
REFERENCE
X-RAY
COM
J3-3
J3-1
J3-5
TOUCH SCREEN INTERFACE BOARD
REMARKS
1
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) AT THESE POINTS INDICATES FOOT SWITCH INPUT CLOSED, PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED RESPECTIVELY. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) =
OPEN CIRCUIT (I.E. NOT PRESSED) FOOT SWITCH, OR PREP SWITCH, OR X-RAY SWITCH. FOR RAD-ONLY CONSOLE, “LOW” INDICATES PREP SWITCH PRESSED, OR X-RAY SWITCH PRESSED, RESPECTIVELY.
2
3
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = AN X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED VIA ONE OF SEVERAL EXPOSURE INPUTS. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 24 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
EXPOSURE ENABLE LINE. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) INDICATES AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO X-RAY EXPOSURE HAS BEEN REQUESTED.
4
THE CATHODE OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS HELD “LOW” UNDER CPU CONTROL DURING AN X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUEST ONLY. NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE MADE ON THIS LINE AS THIS IS A
DATA LINE. THE REQUIRED DATA IS LATCHED BY THE REGISTER CIRCUIT(S) AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME.
5
THE OUTPUT OF THE ASSOCIATED LED IS LATCHED BY A REGISTER. THIS IS THEN READ BY THE DATA BUS AT THE APPROPRIATE TIME. AS THIS IS A DATA LINE, NO MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS CAN BE
MADE AT THIS CONNECTION.
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
DS30 LIT = KV ENABLE REQUEST SENT. THIS IS NECESSARY TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. DS31 LIT = KV ENABLE NOT REQUESTED.
DS27 LIT = PREP REQUEST SENT. DS28 LIT = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
DS26 LIT = X-RAY EXPOSURE IN PROCESS.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = KV ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED. “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
“LOW” = X-RAY EXPOSURE REQUESTED AS PER # 3. THIS LINE MUST BE “LOW” IN ORDER FOR THE X-RAY EXPOSURE LED’S ON THE CONTROL BOARD TO BE ENERGIZED (SEE # 16).
“LOW” = (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH OR THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = NO FAULT.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = KV ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = KV NOT ENABLED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = X-RAY REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = X-RAY NOT REQUESTED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = OUTPUT DRIVE DISABLED.
18
ALL INPUTS TO THE “GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT” MUST BE AT THE CORRECT LOGIC LEVEL IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO MAKE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE. THIS MEANS ALL FOUR FAULT INPUTS SHOWN
MUST BE CLEARED, AND THE KV ENABLE AND PREP COMMANDS MUST BE PRESENT.
19
DS17 LIT INDICATES GENERATOR READY TO MAKE AN EXPOSURE. THIS REQUIRES THAT ALL CONDITIONS PER # 18 BE SATISFIED. DS18 LIT INDICATES A “GENERATOR READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT” INPUT IS
NOT SATISFIED TO ENABLE AN X-RAY EXPOSURE.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
26 APR 2000
26 APR 00
26 APR 2000
X-RAY EXPOSURE
RAD/FLUORO
MD-0761 REV G
SHEET 4 OF 4
TP9 TP8
J1-31
R89
7
+
U16A
+12V
D80
R208
HIGH KV
DETECTOR
AND LATCH
(U31, U32A, U33A)
HV ON DETECTOR
CIRCUIT (U30C
U30D, Q6, ETC)
JW3
125kV 150kV
“OR”
LOGIC
JUMPER POSITION:
125kV GENERATORS
JUMPER “125kV”
150 kV GENERATORS
JUMPER “150kV”
R25
1
-
1
J10-7
J1-7
3+
J1-26 R25, R44
D93
CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
R220
INVERTER 1
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39B, U35F)
INVERTER 1
FAULT DETECTOR
(T3, U36, D83, ETC)
INVERTER 2
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39C, U35E)
INVERTER 2
FAULT DETECTOR
(T4, U37, D84, ETC)
INVERTER 3
FAULT LATCH &
LOGIC INVERTER
(U39D, U35D)
INVERTER 3
FAULT DETECTOR
(T5, U38, D85, ETC)
J14-1
J14-3
J15-1
INVERTER FAULT SIGNALS
FROM PAGE 2
J15-3
J16-1
J16-3
4
1
R71
ERROR AMPLIFIERS
INCLUDES U13B, U21A
R70
U13A
-
R106
D49
-
D35
R107
65+
+
+
U13B
R43
U21A
R175
7
VCO
INCLUDES U19, U20,
U23, U25, U27, Q10
U21B
R108
+12V
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL TO MD-0760, PG 2
TP17 TP19
D48
2-
J10-26
D92
+5V
R26, R45
U14A
J9-8
R50
U12B
R132
2
3+
6
5
INV 1
R46
U24A
2
1
U26A
3
2
DRIVE PULSES
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
U26B
U24B
5
4
7
6
4
5
D66
D70
DATA BUS
D0..D7
Ir
R62
3
2
+
-
D27-D30
R66
U15
R64
7
R63
HIGH RESONANT
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32D, U33D)
CURRENT SENSE
R65
D/A
CONVERTER
KV FEEDBACK SIGNAL
FROM PAGE 3
D87-D89, U35C
D86
U22
+
D82
INV 2
11
kV
D63
TP2
7
+12V
D81
INV 3
D69
U33E
TP26
+12V
R172
10
3
R69
R221
RESET COMMAND
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
J9-5
J9-7
R54
R23
HV ON SIGNAL
TO MD-0767, PG 1
A/D
CONVERTER
5
U16B
HIGH KV / INVERTER FAULT
TO GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761, PG 2
+12V
U37
6
R171
RN2B
-
R48
2
3
R180
J10-12
J9-6
R49
U12A
R37
-
1
2
3
R52
R24
J1-12
+
3
U15A
RN4B
J10-31
R67
R72
RN2A
R91
R210
+
2
+
R209
R31
-
1
-
1
R215
RN4A
R68
R42
R26
5
U15B
R35
+
6
R36
-
R41
TP6 TP8
7
R53
2
2
T1
T2
DRIVE ENABLE
COMMAND FROM
MD-0761, PAGE 2
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
J13-4
J13-1
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT SENSE
FROM PAGE 2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 4
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1
J2-3
J10-1
J1-1
J10-2
J1-2
J10-3
J1-3
J10-4
J1-4
* USED ON R&F
GENERATORS ONLY
TO J14-1
TO J14-3
K1 *
REFER TO MD-0786 FOR
K1 DRIVE CIRCUITS
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E3
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
*
E4
INVERTER BOARD #1
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1
J2-3
GATE DRIVE CIRCUIT
FOR MOSFET INVERTER
(INCLUDES Q19 TO Q26)
J11-1
J1-1
J11-2
J1-2
TO J15-1
TO J15-3
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
E3
J11-3
J1-3
J11-4
J1-4
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E4
INVERTER BOARD #2
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
E1: 560 / 650 VDC (+)
J2-1
J2-3
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
DRIVE PULSES
FROM PAGE 2
J1-1
POWER MODE
SELECT
BOARD
(REFER TO
MD-0786)
J1-2
TO J16-1
TO J16-3
INVERTER FAULT
SIGNAL, TO PAGE 1
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E3
J1-3
J1-4
MOSFET
SWITCHES
MOSFET
SWITCHES
E4
CONTROL BOARD
INVERTER BOARD #3
E2: 560 / 650 VDC (-)
INDICO 100 GENERATORS USE ONE, TWO, OR THREE INVERTER
MODULES DEPENDING ON GENERATOR OUTPUT POWER
RESONANT BOARD
H.T. PRIMARY CURRENT
SENSE, TO PAGE 1
J1-1
J1-4
TO J13-1
TO J13-4
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 4
HV ANODE
BOARD
J1
ANODE
S
C
L
TO J9-8
KV FEEDBACK
SIGNAL
TO PAGE 1
TO J9-7
TO J9-5
TO J9-6
J3-8
HV MULT
ASSY +
(ANODE)
J3-7
J3-5
J3-6
E9
HV MULT
ASSY(CATHODE)
E10
FROM
PAGE 2
C
L
S
TANK LID
BOARD
RESONANT BOARD
HV CATHODE
BOARD
J2
CATHODE
PART OF H.V. OIL TANK
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE
TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 4
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
kV REFERENCE OUTPUT, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 15 kV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
kV FEEDBACK TO THE CPU. SCALING IS 1V = 20 KV OF GENERATOR OUTPUT.
HV ON SIGNAL. THIS IS “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS ON, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) WHEN HIGH VOLTAGE IS OFF.
4
THE VOLTAGE AT TP17 AND TP19 SHOULD BE A 50% DUTY CYCLE SQUARE WAVE, RANGING IN FREQUENCY FROM APPROXIMATELY 80 kHz TO APPROXIMATELY 250 kHz, DEPENDING ON GENERATOR
OUTPUT POWER. SEE FIGURE 1.
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
KV CONTROL &
FEEDBACK
MD-0759 REV C
SHEET 4 OF 4
+5V
J2-8
RN7C
JW1
5.5 A 6.5 A
1
3
2
J2-7
FIL
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
J2-9
DS14
DS13
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
+12V
RED
TP2
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
U24
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = NO FILAMENT
FAULT
BUFFER
5
RN7E
+5V
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(SM) TO PAGE 2
2
J10-23
J1-23
RN4D
R137
5
1
4
2
J10-5
J1-5
J10-24
J1-24
3
RN2G
R136
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = NO HV / MA
FAULT
1
TP3
HV / MA FAULT
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
J2-6
JW1
J2-2
J3-8
J3-10
J2-10
J3-7
TP2
5
-
7
R24
J10-9
J1-9
J3-6
J10-28
J1-28
J3-5
RN11E
LARGE
U27
JW5 JUMPER POSITION:
INDICO GENERATORS
JUMPER PINS 1-2
DO NOT USE JUMPER
POSITION 2-3
SMALL
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
2
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
DATA
LATCH
3
RN6E
+5V
U24
J2-6
U19, U16
2
J10-17
J1-17
J10-36
J1-36
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = LARGE FOCUS
SELECTED
“LG/SM REQUEST”
DETECTOR CKT
RN1A
(U11C, Q2, ETC)
5
1
JW1
J3-11
TO J3-6, J3-5, J3-9, J3-10
ON CONTROL BOARD
BUFFER
5
FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK
SIGNAL (SM) TO PAGE 2
RN2E
J1-8
1
2
J2-4
J2-3
J2-2
FIL CURRENT FEEDBACK
SIGNAL (LG) TO PAGE 2
4
J10-27
J1-27
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
J2-9
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
TP1
U10
DATA BUS
D0..D7
LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
J2-10
+12V
J10-8
J5-1
3
4
2
RN1B
5.5 A 6.5 A
1
3
2
J2-5
4
U1
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = SMALL FOCUS
SELECTED
J8
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH STANDARD SINGLE FILAMENT BOARD (TYPICALLY USED IN RAD
ONLY GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN BELOW
JW5
1
J5-2
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH OPTIONAL TWO FILAMENT BOARDS (TYPICALLY USED IN R&F
GENERATORS) USE THE FILAMENT BOARD CONFIGURATION SHOWN ABOVE
+5V
DS25
J2-1
T1
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (LARGE)
+
U14B
DS24
C22
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
J2-2
R11
6
D/A
CONVERTER
TP1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(LG) TO PAGE 2
R17
U22
SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
ERROR
AMPLIFIER &
DRIVER CIRCUIT
J2-10
TP1
1
J5-3
3
J3-9
TP21
U14D
J4
JW1 SELECTS MAXIMUM
FILAMENT CURRENT
5.5 OR 6.5 AMPS
BUFFER &
CURRENT LIMIT
CIRCUIT
J2-9
R7
14
5.5 A 6.5 A
1
3
2
J2-5
J3-2
R5
R10
Q14
J5-4
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (SMALL)
RN4C
U8
BUFFER
J2-3
T1
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
J3-10
Q15
+12V
RED
C22
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
J2-4
DS12
U24
12 +
J1-4
HV
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
D/A
CONVERTER
TP1
1
4
GRN
13 -
J10-4
3
J2-10
FILAMENT FAULT
TO MD-0761, PAGE 2
U7
DS11
U18
RN2H
GRN
RN4A
R75
J2-1
C22
T1
BUFFER /
AMPLIFIER &
FILAMENT
CURRENT
COMPARATOR
RMS
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
TP2
J2-11
Q3
J5-3
J5-4
+12V
K1
K1
SMALL FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
J5-1
J5-2
LARGE FILAMENT DRIVE
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD (UNIVERSAL)
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
REFER TO PAGE 4 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
CONTROL BOARD
DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, THIS PAGE SHOWS
ONLY THE MAJOR FILAMENT BLOCKS. REFER TO
PAGE 3 FOR A MORE DETAILED FUNCTIONAL
DIAGRAM OF THE FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 4
LARGE
J5-1
J4-1
J5-2
J4-2
FROM J2-4
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(LG) FROM PAGE 1
FROM J2-2
FROM J2-3
J3-4
J2-3
J3-3
J2-11
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
J2 **
CATHODE
C
S
L
5
FROM PAGE 1
FILAMENT CURRENT
FEEDBACK SIGNAL
(SM) FROM PAGE 1
FROM J2-1
J3-2
J1-13
J3-1
J1-32
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
8
J4-4
6-
7
R4
J1-11
U30B
R3
J1-30
R15
J2-1
R14
J2-9
5+
-
9
6
TP6 TP7
+
U9
7
C
L
HIGH MA FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
ON CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761, PAGE 2
+12V
TP2 TP3
J3-1
RN6C, RN6D
J3-2
6-
E18
10
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
U33E
ANODE I
D65
D95
R38
U6B
D72
HIGH ANODE
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32C, U33C)
ANODE OVERCURRENT DETECTOR
(U18, RN9E-H, ETC.)
7
5+
RN6A, RN6B
J9-2
ANODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
R19
R8
J9-1
R212
R179
R9
R7
R34
RAD MA FEEDBACK
CONTINUED ON PAGE 3
11
S
HV ANODE
BOARD
3
R36
R33, R32
R164
R213
H.T.TANK
2
J1
ANODE
R165
R216
FILAMENT SUPPLY
BOARD
R5
R163
CATHODE
H.T. BOARD
R6
J5-4
TP4 TP5
R16
J4-3
R17
SMALL
J5-3
mA
TEST
JACK
RESET COMMAND
FROM MD-0761, PG 2
+
E17
R177
+12V
CATHODE OVERVOLTAGE
SIGNAL FROM MD-0759, PG 1
R39
RN6G, RN6H
J9-4
2-
R18
J3-4
J3-3
RN6F, RN6E
1
U6A
D96
HIGH CATHODE
CURRENT LATCH
& LOGIC INVERTER
(U32B, U33B)
CATHODE
D64
C
S
J2
CATHODE
R40
L
J9-3
3+
CATHODE OVERCURRENT DETECTOR
(U17, RN9A-D, ETC.)
D71
H.T.TANK
HV CATHODE
BOARD
TANK LID
BOARD
PART OF HV OIL TANK
** ONE TUBE H.T. OUTPUTS ARE SHOWN. TWO TUBE
TANKS WILL HAVE A SECOND PAIR OF H.T. OUTPUTS
DRAWN
CONTROL BOARD
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 4
MAXIMUM FILAMENT CURRENT
LIMIT CIRCUIT
6
JW1
TP25 TP24
R57
+
-
U1A
RN8D
2
6.5 A
1
5.5 A
+35V
-12V
RN9D
65
J3-3
R63
7
+
U30B
RN8C
RN9C
D6
R62
J3-11
ERROR AMPLIFIER, PWM REGULATOR,
AND FILAMENT CURRENT DRIVERS
3
R61
SM FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
SET MAX
CURRENT
11
RN3G
J2-8
RN2A
J2-7
RN2B
6-
7
5+
6
R64
RN1A
J2-5
RN1B
Q12
+
U4B
RN3F
J2-6
Q6
TP3
U3
RN4H
U1B
TP23 TP22
R67
RN5G
PWM
REGULATOR
RN8B
J10-13
R59
1
+
U30A
RN8A
RN9A
RN3H
23
Q13
Q7
R60
J10-32
LG FILAMENT FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
RN9B
J2-9
3
U37
11
+12V
RN5D
A/D
CONVERTER
R38
R39
RN2D
910 +
K1 IS FITTED ON “UNIVERSAL” (LARGE/SMALL)
FILAMENT BOARDS. J8 IS FITTED ON LARGE
FILAMENT BOARDS, AND J4 IS FITTED ON
SMALL FILAMENT BOARDS.
J10-11
-
12 +
R34
J5-3
J8
14
U15D
R23
RN1C
J5-4
J4
13
U15C
RN2C
K1
J2-11
R29
8
J5-1
K1
RN1D
J10-30
J5-2
TP4
TP2
TP10
TP7
RAD MA FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
-35V
10
TP1
J2-10
C22
12
J2-4
RN2C
J2-3
RN2D
U4A
1.7 V
Ref
U2A
-
TP11 TP14
R45
R50
J2-2
RN1C
J2-1
RN1D
D12, 13
D27, 28
U7
Q1
+
T1
RMS
CONVERTER
-
+
RN4C
-
3+
J3-1
1
+
U2B
U23A
RN5D
R79
R21
FILAMENT CURRENT SENSE, RMS
CONVERTER, AND FILAMENT FEEDBACK
R87
2-
R88
FLUORO MA FEEDBACK
FROM ON PAGE 2
RN5C
RN4D
J3-9
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
DATA BUS
D0..D7
FILAMENT SUPPLY BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 3 OF 4
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
FILAMENT REFERENCE OUTPUTS, GENERATED BY THE CPU. SCALING IS 1 VOLT OUT = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = SMALL FOCUS SELECTED. THIS SIGNAL IS USED IN SINGLE FILAMENT SUPPLY GENERATORS ONLY.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = FILAMENT FAULT (FILAMENT CURRENT < 2 A). “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO FILAMENT FAULT.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LARGE FOCUS SELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) SMALL FOCUS SELECTED.
7
THESE TEST POINTS ALLOW MEASUREMENT OF A VOLTAGE PROPORTIONAL TO ANODE CURRENT. THE SCALING IS 0.4 VDC = 100 mA. SHORT EXPOSURE TIMES MUST BE CONSIDERED AND APPROPRIATE
MEASUREMENT TECHNIQUES MUST BE USED.
8
9
10
11
THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 100 mA OF X-RAY CURRENT.
THESE TEST POINTS ARE SCALED 1 VDC = 2.5 mA OF X-RAY CURRENT (R&F GENERATORS ONLY).
FILAMENT FEEDBACK CURRENT TEST POINT. THIS IS SCALED 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
PWM OUTPUT. THE WAVEFORM WILL BE AS PER FIGURE 1 FOR LOW AND HIGH FILAMENT CURRENT DEMAND.
PRIMARY FILAMENT CURRENT AT THESE POINTS MAY BE CONFIRMED USING A CURRENT PROBE ON ONE OF THE OUTPUT LEADS ON THE SMALL OR LARGE PAIR OF OUTPUTS.
THE VOLTAGE AT THESE TEST POINTS WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC = 1 AMP OF FILAMENT CURRENT.
Approx 25 usec (40 kHz)
+12 V
LOW FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V
FIGURE 1
+12 V
HIGH FILAMENT
DEMAND
0V
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
12 MAY 2000
12 MAY 2000
FILAMENT DRIVE
& MA CONTROL
15 MAY 2000
MD-0760 REV E
SHEET 4 OF 4
REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
+12V
TUBE 1
SHIFT
J3-3
MAIN
R1
J3-9
J1-1
K2
+12V
J1-20
C3
R121
CONTINUED
ON PAGE 2
RN4E
R138
J6-10
Q18
J5-10
2
D7
R29
J4-9
J4-9
J3-8
J2-8
1
R30
Q3
COMM
K4
+12V
TUBE 2
K1
STATOR FAULT TO GENERATOR
READY DETECTOR CIRCUIT ON
CONTROL BOARD, SEE MD-0761
J3-7
SHIFT
J3-5
MAIN
J3-1
COMM
K3
TP1
3
J5-8
COMMON FROM J1-4. REFER
TO LOW SPEED STARTER
BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
JUMPER POSITION:
INDICO 100 GENERATORS
JUMPER “1.5S” FOR 1.5 SEC
BOOST, NO JUMPERS FOR
2.5 SEC BOOST. REFER TO
CH. 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL.
DO NOT USE JUMPER
POSITION “.15S”
JW1
TP3
R36
4
BOOST AND
RUN LOGIC
CIRCUIT
(U1, U10, U18
Q2, Q12, ETC.)
.15S
1.5S
120 / 240 VAC FROM J1-1. REFER
TO LOW SPEED STARTER
BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
J4-11
J3-7
52 / 73 / 94 VAC FROM J1-3.
REFER TO LOW SPEED STARTER
BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
TP4
6
J8-4
J1-4
R35
J4-12
J3-6
F2
Q1
U1
ZERO
CROSS
CIRCUIT
J2-6
+12V
D1
8
K1
J4-6
J4-6
J3-10
+12V
J2-10
D15
D2
J2-9
POWER INPUT BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
U2
TP2
J4-12
Q15
D17
+12V
ZERO
CROSS
CIRCUIT
+12V
R46
ENABLE COMMAND
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
D18
R45
7
Q2
J2-7
5
12 VDC / SOFT START
FAULT SIGNAL
FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
+12V
F1
TP3
J4-11
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH &
THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL
FROM MD-0787
F3
R5
J6-8
R1
PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761,
PAGE 2
TUBE SELECT SIGNAL FROM J2-9. REFER TO LOW
SPEED STARTER BOARD ON MD-0788, PAGE 1
K4
LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD
AUXILIARY BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
LOW SPEED
STARTER
10 MAR 2000
MD-0764 REV E
SHEET 1 OF 2
RN7A
+5V
DS20
GRN
U24
9
ROTOR
DS21
RED
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = NO FAULT
J10-1
BUFFER
5
J1-1
1
FROM
PAGE 1
U5
4
2
J10-20
J1-20
DATA BUS
D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
NOTE
REFERENCE
CONTROL BOARD
REMARKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 6-11 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, “LOW” (<APPROXIMATELY 2 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = PREP REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 1 VDC) = PREP NOT REQUESTED.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = BOOST REQUESTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (BOOST REQUESTED FOR APPROXIMATELY 1.5 SEC AFTER PREP INITIATED).
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = RUN REQUESTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = RUN NOT REQUESTED (RUN REQUESTED AFTER BOOST COMPLETE, AND FOR DURATION THAT PREP IS PRESSED).
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = LOW SPEED STARTER ENABLED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = STARTER DISABLED (SEE # 7).
7
THIS POINT MUST BE “HIGH” (AS PER # 6) TO ENABLE THE LOW SPEED STARTER. THIS REQUIRES THE ENABLE COMMAND TO BE PRESENT (”HIGH”), AND THE TUBE 1 /TUBE 2 MISMATCH &THERMOSTAT
OPEN SIGNAL TO BE “HIGH”. IF THE 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT SIGNAL IS LOW (INDICATING A FAULT), J1-4 WILL NOT BE PULLED LOW DUE TO THE DIODE SHOWN CONNECTED TO THIS PIN ON PAGE 1.
8
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD, ENABLING THE STARTER. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) DE-ENERGIZES K1 ON THE LOW SPEED STARTER BOARD.
AS PER # 6 AND 7, NO ENABLE COMMAND, OR PRESENCE OF A TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH & THERMOSTAT OPEN FAULT, OR A 12 VDC / SOFT START FAULT WILL INHIBIT LOW SPEED STARTER OPERATION.
9
DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS 21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR LOW SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
10 MAR 2000
________
LOW SPEED
STARTER
10 MAR 2000
MD-0764 REV E
SHEET 2 OF 2
CS1, U10, U11
+5V
SW2 *
LS
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
DATA
LATCH
R40
BUFFER AND
DRIVER
J10-2
J1-2
J10-21
J1-21
2
J4-6
J1-6
J4-8
J1-8
PREP COMMAND
FROM MD-0761
R96
CONTACTOR
CLOSED
SIGNAL FROM
MD-0788, PAGE 3
J1-2
J4-4
J1-4
RN7A
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q3)
6
1
5
2
4
560 / 650 VDC (-)
+12V
TUBE 1
DUAL SPEED
STARTER CPU,
BUFFERS,
DRIVERS
PREP
INITIATED
K1-A
K5
R42
J4-14
J1-14
J4-16
J1-16
1
2
4
K6
R32
K3
HIGH SPEED
PHASE SHIFT
CAPACITOR
J10-1
1
4
2
COMM
TUBE 2
K4
SHIFT
TB3-2
MAIN
TB3-1
COMM
R1
TB3-3
J1-1
+12V
J1-20
R121
U5
J10-20
TB2-1
K1-B
K2-B
5
MAIN
+12V
K5
C22
TUBE 2
SELECT
+12V
BUFFER
TB2-2
D47
K6
OPTO-COUPLER
“ON” = NO FAULT
SHIFT
Q5
K2
TUBE 1/TUBE 2
SELECT SIGNAL
FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
TB2-3
K2-A
K1
5
U14
+5V
8
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q1)
U13
4
U24
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q4)
R41
J4-2
3
TO 2.1 V
CURRENT
SINK
4
IGBT
SWITCH
(Q2)
+12V
R94
RED
2
DRIVER
CIRCUIT AND
FAULT
CURRENT
LATCH
(U1-U10,
T1-T4, ETC).
HIGH SPEED
SELECT
Q7
GRN
5
K4
D47
ROTOR
1
U12
+12V
DS21
5
U17, U18
U19, U22, U24
U19, U16
DS20
560 / 650 VDC (+)
R31
U27
R24
HS
1
DS1
INVERTER
FAULT
DS7
DS8
INVERTER
FAULT
DETECTOR
+5V
RN7G
SW1 *
RN4E
K3
J4-10
J1-10
7
LOW SPEED
PHASE SHIFT
CAPACITOR
R138
Q18
STATOR FAULT TO
GENERATOR READY
DETECTOR CIRCUIT
ON CONTROL BOARD,
SEE MD-0761
DATA BUS
D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
DUAL SPEED STARTER BOARD
* REFER TO CHAPTER 2 OF SERVICE MANUAL FOR THE
PROCEDURE TO SET DIP SWITCHES SW1 AND SW2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
STEVE BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
DUAL SPEED
STARTER
MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 2
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
3
DS8 LIT INDICATES HIGH SPEED SELECTED, DS7 LIT INDICATES LOW SPEED SELECTED.
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = HIGH SPEED SELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = LOW SPEED SELECTED.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 7 VDC) = CONTACTOR CLOSED AND PREP REQUESTED. THIS INITIATES THE BOOST CYCLE. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = BOOST NOT REQUESTED (PREP COMMAND NOT
RECEIVED, OR CONTACTOR IS NOT CLOSED).
4
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 2 DESELECTED. THIS CONDITION DEFAULTS TO TUBE 1.
5
DS1 LIT INDICATES AN INVERTER CURRENT FAULT. POSSIBLE CAUSES INCLUDE INCORRECT DIP SWITCH SETTINGS FOR THE TUBE IN USE (SEE ** ON PAGE 1), INCORRECT STATOR IMPEDANCE, OR
DEFECTIVE STATOR CABLE.
6
7
8
K4 OPEN CIRCUITS THE STATOR COMMON LEAD AT ALL TIMES THAT THE DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = NO STATOR FAULT, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = STATOR FAULT (LOW OR NO STATOR CURRENT).
DS20 LIT INDICATES NORMAL STATOR CURRENTS. DS21 LIT INDICATES STATOR FAULT, OR DUAL SPEED STARTER IS IN STANDBY MODE.
1
2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
STEVE BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L.FOSKIN
DATE
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
30 MAR 2000
DUAL SPEED
STARTER
MD-0765 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 2
NOTE
REFERENCE
K1
REFER TO MD-0759
PAGE 2
REMARKS
1
D36 LIT INDICATES RAD OR PULSED FLUORO
MODE. D36 NOT LIT INDICATES CONTINUOUS
FLUORO MODE.
2
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON
RESONANT BOARD ENERGIZED IN RAD / PULSED
FLUORO MODE. “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC)
= K1 ON RESONANT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN
CONTINUOUS FLUORO MODE.
3
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = K1 ON POWER
MODE SELECT BOARD ENERGIZED IN FLUORO OR
LOW POWER RAD MODE (< 20 kW APPROX). “HIGH”
(APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = K1 ON POWER MODE
SELECT BOARD DE-ENERGIZED IN HIGH POWER
RAD MODE (> 20kW APPROX).
R44
+12V
+12V
D36
J2-1
1
FROM J1-5 (AUXILIARY
BOARD), SEE MD-0788,
PAGE 3
RAD
MODE
J2-2
R79
THESE CIRCUITS USED
ON R&F GENERATORS
ONLY
J2-1
K1
J2-2
Q5
R47
2
RESONANT BOARD
+12V
D38
J10-1
D44
J10-2
K1
J3-2
THE POWER MODE SELECT
BOARD IS USED ON 65 / 80 kW
GENERATORS WITH THREE
INVERTER BOARDS ONLY
D1
R69
Q4
3
R66
FROM J1-3 (AUXILIARY
BOARD) SEE MD-0788,
PAGE 3
J3-1
AUXILIARY BOARD
ENERGIZING K1
DISABLES DRIVE
TO INVERTER
BOARD No. 3
J12-1
J1-1
J12-2
J1-2
J12-3
J1-3
K1
J4-1
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL
FROM MD-0759
J12-4
CONTROL BOARD
J1-1
J4-2
J1-2
J4-3
J1-3
J4-4
J1-4
J1-4
POWER MODE SELECT BOARD
INVERTER DRIVE SIGNAL
TO MD-0759
INVERTER BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
HTW
DATE
21 MAR 2000
________
RAD / FLUORO AND
POWER MODE SELECT
21 MAR 2000
MD-0786 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
4
+12V
D42
R41
JW4
JUMPER POSITION:
R&F GENERATORS (WITH THERMAL SWITCH)
JUMPER JW4 PINS 1-2 (ON)
RAD GENERATORS (NO THERMAL SWITCH)
JUMPER JW4 PINS 2-3 (OFF)
ON OFF
3
1
2
R39
+12V
THERMAL
CUTOFF
OPEN
R40
J2-4
R43
Q10
J2-3
+12V
D26
1
5
FOR TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
SOLENOID DRIVE
CIRCUITS SEE
MD-0788, PAGE 1
2
4
1
5
2
4
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK LOGIC
CIRCUIT
(U9, U10, R84)
R7
Q8
+5V
INVERTER BOARD
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT
SIGNAL FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 3
U8
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
RELAY CONTACTS
(SHOWN IN TUBE
1 POSITION)
J5-1
J11-1
J4-20
J4-20
J5-2
J11-2
J4-19
J4-19
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 SELECT
COMMAND FROM MD-0788,
PAGE 1
R28
TUBE 2
SELECTED
1
DS5
DS6
TUBE
2
TUBE
1
U35
+12V
D39
R38
+5V
RN7H
U7
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 MISMATCH &
THERMOSTAT OPEN SIGNAL TO
MD-0764 AND MD-0761, PAGE 2
5
R8
+12V
RN11H
R6
THERMAL SWITCH ON
INVERTER HEATSINK
(R&F UNITS ONLY)
3
DECODER/
DEMULTIPLEXER
J1-2
J8-2
J2-5
J3-5
J1-1
J8-1
J2-13
J3-13
2
1
5
2
4
U3
OPTO COUPLER
“ON” = TUBE 2 SELECTED
H.T. TANK
POWER INPUT
BOARD
AUXILIARY BOARD
CONTROL BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
REFER TO MD-0763 (ROOM INTERFACE) FOR INTERLOCKS ACCESSED VIA THE ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
TUBE 1
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
J5-1
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
2
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 10 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = TUBE 2 SELECTED, “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) = TUBE 1 SELECTED.
3
DS6 LIT INDICATES TUBE 1 SELECTED. DS5 LIT INDICATES TUBE 2 SELECTED. NEITHER LED LIT INDICATES A MISMATCH BETWEEN THE
TUBE THAT HAS BEEN REQUESTED, AND THE TUBE THAT HAS ACTUALLY BEEN SELECTED (SEE # 5).
4
5
“LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH CLOSED (OR JUMPERED VIA JW4), “HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 12 VDC) =
INVERTER THERMAL SWITCH OPEN, OR JW4 JUMPER OMITTED ON RAD GENERATORS.
THERMAL
SWITCH
TUBE 1 THERMOSTAT TO T1
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
J5-2
TUBE 2
STATOR
TERMINAL
BLOCK
J5-3
TUBE 2 THERMOSTAT TO T2
ON MD-0763, PAGE 1
THERMAL
SWITCH
J5-4
THE TUBE 1 / TUBE 2 TELLBACK LOGIC CIRCUIT ENSURES THAT THE TUBE ACTUALLY SELECTED MATCHES THE TUBE THAT WAS
REQUESTED. FOR EXAMPLE, IF TUBE 2 WAS REQUESTED BY THE CONSOLE BUT TUBE 1 WAS ACTUALLY SELECTED BY THE H.T. TANK,
THE LOGIC CIRCUIT WILL INDICATE A FAULT CONDITION.
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
S. BLAKE
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
18 MAY 2000
18 MAY 2000
INTERLOCKS &
TUBE 1 / TUBE 2
TELLBACK
18 MAY 2000
MD-0787 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR LOGIC LEVELS,
NOTES, ETC, REFERENCED BY
HEXAGONAL SYMBOL:
+24V
+12V
J10-13
GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL
FROM MD-0758
(NOT USED AT THIS TIME)
J10-19
J10-16
J10-11
-24V
U25, U23
RN14H
D0
RN14G
D1
RN14F
D2
RN14E
D3
RN14D
D4
RN14C
D5
RN14B
D6
RN14A
D7
-12V
U33
J6-1
J12-1
8
11
4
CH 4 SELECT
J10-2
J6-2
J12-2
7
12
4
CH 3 SELECT
J10-3
J6-3
J12-3
6
13
4
CH 2 SELECT
J10-4
J6-4
J12-4
5
14
4
CH 1 SELECT
J10-5
15
5
“L” FIELD SELECT
J10-7
BUFFER &
DATA LATCH
DRIVER
J6-5
J12-5
J6-6
J12-6
3
16
5
“M” FIELD SELECT
J10-8
J6-7
J12-7
2
17
5
“R” FIELD SELECT
J10-9
J6-8
J12-8
1
18
7
START
J10-6
4
CONTINUED
ON PAGES
3 TO 5
R88
+5V
R87
+5V
TP10
9
10
8
CPU
R99
1
U28
R100
J7-19
J11-19
Q6
U45C
PTSTOP
J10-1
PTRAMP
J10-15
PTREF
J10-10
R85
TP12
R42
R44
TP9
6
R86
Q5
2
TP11
J11-4
2
U37
9
J7-4
10
J11-1
3
TP12
RN5B
U23C
+12V
TP4
U18
9
D/A
CONVERTER
-
10 +
8
4
5
2
1
J10-17
R89
U46
R30
3
R117
+
Q7
+12V
R116
8
A/D
CONVERTER
J7-1
-12V
U14C
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
J14-6
J14-7
J14-14
J14-3
J14-1
J14-2
J14-4
J14-12
J14-13
J14-15
J14-8
J14-9
J14-10
J14-11
DATA BUS
DO..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
2
2
TO A EC DETECTOR CIRCUIT
CONTINUED ON PAGE 2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 5
FROM GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD, PAGE 1
J2-3
J2-4
J2-1
J2-6
J2-7
J2-14
J2-2
J2-12
J2-13
J2-15
J2-8
J2-9
J2-10
J2-11
OPTO-COUPLER
"ON" = AEC START
S1
+8V
+8 VDC
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
ANALOG
SWITCH
J1-1
-8V
J1-2
PHOTO DIODE
DETECTORS
J1-3
-8 VDC
REGULATOR
CIRCUIT
INTEGRATOR
CIRCUIT
AMPLIFIER
CIRCUIT
COMPARATOR
& DRIVER
CIRCUIT
J1-4
PHOTO DIODE DETECTOR UNIT
A2EC2 DETECTOR CIRCUIT
2
OPTIONAL A EC
2
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 2 OF 5
J5-4
J7-5
“R” SELECT
U2D
R30
D10
U2B
R29
D11
D14
R41
R28
D15
“L” SELECT
J7-7
J5-7
J7-8
J5-8
J7-9
J5-9
+12V
+12V
Q1
R45
D19
R22
D18
DS5
R82
+12V
R57
J12-1
U11B
“L” SELECT
R11
J3-4
R20
J7-12
J5-12
-12V
2 TP3
J5-10
J7-1
J5-1
J13-1
R19
SAMPLE
& HOLD
U12
1
-
U10A
R23
2
R60
-
“L” SELECT
-
U10B
+
U9B
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
AEC CH 4
J4-2
“R” SELECT
ANODE
J4-3
J4-4
“M” SELECT
CATH (L)
J4-5
R6
R5
-
7
R84
+
+
U13
3
U1B
R85
2
J4-6
R56
5
R70
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J14-4
J14-5
AEC BOARD
DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES”
THAT ARE SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE
LOGIC LEVEL (0V = OFF, 12V = ON).
CATH (R)
J4 (shell)
6
R4
-
R50
7
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
CATH (L)
J4-1
+
3
TP5
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 733347
ANODE
J13-3
J13-4
6
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
GROUND
J13-2
J13-5
+
D31
CATH (M)
GROUND
U6C
R88
D33
R17
C37
R14
J5-15
3
U1A
R51
TP1 3
J7-10
+
TP4
R18
JW3
J5-11
J7-15
J3-6
JW4
J7-11
1
R33
J5-18
TP2
CATH (L)
CATH (R)
J3 (shell)
2
R3
J7-18
+12V
-
R81
J5-17
D20
R80
J7-17
ANODE
J3-3
J3-5
R21
J5-14
AEC CH 3
J3-1
J3-2
J5-13
J7-14
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
U6B
“M” SELECT
U2E
CATH (L)
J12-4
“R” SELECT
U2F
ANODE
J12-3
R26
J7-13
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
J12-2
J12-5
D30
D24
R58
5
+
“L” SELECT
J2-6
R2
R62
R64
FROM
PAGE 1
“M” SELECT
CATH (L)
CATH (R)
J2 (shell)
6
-
7
Q2
“R” SELECT
J2-4
J2-5
R61
R54
ANODE
J2-3
R77
R76
R69
R87
AEC CH 2
J2-1
“M” SELECT
+12V
Q3
PT STOP
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
J2-2
“R” SELECT
R55
PT REF
CATH (L)
U6A
J5-6
R63
PT RAMP
ANODE
J11-3
JW2
J7-6
D16
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
J11-2
J11-4
R59
RIGHT FIELD SELECT
R71
J11-5
R86
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT
J1-6
J11-1
U11A
U2C
R72
3
+
CATH (R)
J1 (shell)
2
-
1
R31
D12
R74
R75
R43
D13
LEFT FIELD SELECT
CATH (L)
J1-5
U2A
START
J1-4
“M” SELECT
D6
J5-5
ANODE
J1-3
JW1
J7-4
AEC CH 1
J1-1
J1-2
R1
J5-3
DS4
R42
CHAMBER 1 SELECT
J7-3
“L” SELECT
R32
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
J5-2
DS3
R38
R37
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
J7-2
+12V
R40
DS2
DS1
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
+12V
R73
+12V
R39
+12V
CATH (M)
GROUND
GROUND
ANODE
CATH (L)
CATH (M)
CATH (R)
U6D
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 3 OF 5
+500V
DS5
CHAMBER 2 SELECT
CHAMBER 1 SELECT
START
J10-3
J10-4
J10-5
J10-6
J5-2
DS3
CH 4
D5
U3B
U3F
CONVERTER
CIRCUIT
12 VDC TO 45 VDC
AND 300 / 500 VDC
+12V +24V
RN3C
*
RN3A
CH 1
U3D
J5-6
RN3D
CH 2
D4
D11
Q1
SET
VALUE
*
U3A
+12V +24V
11
LEFT FIELD SELECT
MIDDLE FIELD SELECT
RIGHT FIELD SELECT
J5-7
J10-8
J5-8
J10-9
J5-9
D30
D65
Q2
Q3
J12-4
START
J12-3
MIDDLE
J12-2
J12-6
Q4
*
LEFT
*
MIDDLE
R67
S1C
J10-19
TP17
J5-19
TP20
2
TP23
J10-13
J10-17
TP5
+12V
TP6
TP7
+
CH 2
S4
J5-17
U4A
U4B
TP4
J10-16
S2A
R1
STRT
+
J2-11
J12-9
R2
R32
C4
J5-11
-12V
CH 1
TP21
J5-16
S3A
-24V
S2C
R3
CH 4
R53
TP3 3
CH 2
TP19
S1B
9
PT REF
PT STOP
J10-15
J10-10
J10-1
J5-15
R54
J13-6
RN4C
J5-10
CH 3
R13
-
CH 4
+
S3D
U2A
R56
+
D22
3
STRT
2
SAMPLE
& HOLD
U6
J3-12
J3-7
J4-2
J14-4
START
J14-3
MIDDLE
J14-2
J14-6
13
J4-1
J4-3
+45V
TP14
R35
J4-8
J4-10
L/R
J4-9
R/L
J4-11
J14-5
J14-9
CH 4
S1A
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
AEC CH 2
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
AEC CH 3
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
J4-12
J4-7
AEC CH 4
+/-300 V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
START
M FIELD SEL
L FIELD SEL
R FIELD SEL
SIGNAL
GROUND
R36
AEC BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO AEC BOARD ASSEMBLY 734614
DESIGNATES AN ANALOG SWITCH. THESE ARE I.C. “SWITCHES” THAT ARE
SWITCHED ON / OFF BY APPLYING THE APPROPRIATE LOGIC LEVEL.
REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR INSTALLATION AND CALIBRATION DETAILS.
THE -24V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4 AND THE +/- 12V OUTPUTS ON J1 TO J4
AND J11 TO J14 ARE NOT SHOWN ON THIS DIAGRAM. THESE ARE
DETAILED ON THE CONNECTOR PIN OUT TABLES IN CHAPTER 3D.
J3-11
J14-1
RN4B
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
J3-9
J13-9
H.V.
JW1
1
2
3
U1A
R14
7
J3-8
J3-10
R/L
J13-5
R57
LEFT
+
D27
J3-1
L/R
+/-300V
JW2
1
2
3
S3C
J5-1
L FIELD SEL
R58
RIGHT
R12
START
M FIELD SEL
TP2 10
S3B
PT RAMP
J13-2
CH 3
U2B
R11
J13-3
MIDDLE
13
S2D
R4
+
J13-4
START
TP13
-
J2-7
J3-3
+45V
JW3
1
2
3
CH 3
*
J2-12
J3-2
J13-1
H.V.
LEFT
S2B
J2-10
R/L
+/-300V
JW4
1
2
3
CH 1
-
J5-13
C11
J10-11
8
+24V
+/-300/+500 V
+45 V
R68
RIGHT
TP18
J2-8
J2-9
CH 2
FROM
PAGE 1
J2-1
L/R
J12-5
13
RIGHT
J1-7
J2-3
+45V
TP12
*
J1-12
J2-2
J12-1
H.V.
JW5
1
2
3
*
D40
J1-11
+/-300V
JW6
1
2
3
+12V +24V
*
*
J1-9
R/L
J11-9
LEFT
J10-7
L/R
J11-5
R89
J1-8
J1-10
AEC CH 1
+/-300 V
R90
RIGHT
START
+12V +24V
J11-6
CH 1
S1D
STRT
J11-2
13
+45V
INCLUDES U7 AND T1
J11-3
MIDDLE
TP11
D16
RN3B
U3E
J11-4
START
JW7
1
2
3
TP9
CH 3
D12
J5-5
H.V.
RN4A
U3C
J5-4
*
J1-1
J1-3
+45V
LEFT
D6
J5-3
+/-300V
TP24
DS4
J11-1
H.V.
JW8
1
2
3
+12V
TP22
J1-2
+/-300V
RIGHT
TP10
12
RN6E
RN6D
RN6A
DS2
+12V
R66
CHAMBER 3 SELECT
J10-2
DS1
+12V
R79
CHAMBER 4 SELECT
+12V
RN6C
+12V
RN6B
+12V
*
DESIGNATES A FACTORY CONFIGURED LOGIC OR SIGNAL LEVEL. AEC
BOARDS ARE CONFIGURED AT THE TIME OF ORDER TO BE COMPATIBLE
WITH THE SPECIFIED AEC CHAMBER(S). FOR EXAMPLE, THE START
SIGNAL TO THE CHAMBER MAY BE FACTORY CONFIGURED TO BE ACTIVE
LOW (0 V), ACTIVE HIGH +12 V, OR ACTIVE HIGH +24 V.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 4 OF 5
FOR “UNIVERSAL” AEC ASSEMBLY 734630, REFER TO SCHEMATICS 734628, 728401
NOTE
REFERENCE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
REMARKS
“HIGH” (APPROXIMATELY 5 VDC) = NO PTSTOP (PHOTOTIMER STOP) SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD. “LOW” (APPOXIMATELY 0 VDC) = PTSTOP SIGNAL RECEIVED FROM AEC BOARD.
“PTRAMP” IS THE AEC RAMP FROM THE AEC BOARD. THE RAMP SLOPE AND MAGNITUDE WILL DEPEND ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE. THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE RAMP MAGNITUDE IS 5 TO 10 VDC,
DEPENDING ON MODEL.
“PTREF” (THE AEC REFERENCE VOLTAGE FROM THE CONSOLE) WILL VARY FROM 0 TO 10 VDC, DEPENDING ON TECHNIQUE.
“HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL DESELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC CHANNEL SELECTED.
“HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD DESELECTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = L, M, R, FIELD SELECTED.
“HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = NO AEC STOP REQUEST (INSUFFICIENT RAMP TO TERMINATE AEC EXPOSURE), “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC STOP REQUESTED (AEC EXPOSURE TERMINATED).
“HIGH” (> 10 VDC) = AEC START NOT REQUESTED, “LOW” (APPROXIMATELY 0 VDC) = AEC START REQUESTED.
THE VOLTAGE AND MAGNITUDE OF THE RAMP AT THIS POINT SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY THE SAME AS AT TP17 ON THIS BOARD (NOTE REFERENCE 2) .
THIS WILL BE A NEGATIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
THIS WILL BE A POSITIVE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP, DEPENDING ON AEC CHAMBER OUTPUT. THE MAGNITUDE OF THE DC VOLTAGE OR RAMP IS DEPENDENT ON THE AEC TECHNIQUE IN USE.
R79 ADJUSTS THE +45V, +300V, AND +500V OUTPUTS FROM THE DC TO DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT. REFER TO CHAPTER 3D FOR DETAILS.
THE VOLTAGE AT TP22 SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 1 (BELOW). THE MAXIMUM DUTY CYCLE WILL BE APPROXIMATELY 45%, DEPENDING ON THE LOAD ON THE HV SUPPLIES.
THE VOLTAGE AT THIS TEST POINT IS THE OUTPUT OF THE AEC CHAMBER. REFER TO THE AEC CHAMBER MANUFACTURERS DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
200 kHz
12 VDC
0 VDC
FIGURE 1
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
__________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
__________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
AEC
MD-0757 REV C
SHEET 5 OF 5
“DIGITAL IMAGING” ABS
FROM MD-0767, PAGE 1
2
3
R64
3
J7-10
6
5
-
7
R48
R41
9
+
Set
ABS gain
U17B
**
JW24
(IN)
R118
-
J11-3
8
13 -
J7-3
12 +
+
U17C
JW25
(OUT)
14
R56
SAMPLE AND HOLD
CIRCUIT (U47,
R95, C102, ETC.)
A/D
CONVERTER
U23D
TP8
C22
1
J7-5
TP9
J7-7
CONTROL SIGNALS
FROM DATA BUS
ADDRESS REGISTERS
(U24, U25)
-12V
J7-12
DIGITAL
POTENTIOMETER
U49
2
COMPOSITE VIDEO
INPUT
JW19 *
DATA BUS
D0..D7
R49
3
R47
U34
13 -
R28
C21
JW5 *
12 +
R26
D11
14
GAIN CONTROL SIGNAL
TO MD-0757
DRIVER
U17D
R46
R30
C20
JW20 *
TP14
**
1
J8
REFER TO CHAPTER
3E OF SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS ON
ABS INPUT CONNECTIONS
10
R50
PMT / PHOTO DIODE /
PROPORTIONAL DC
VIDEO INPUT &
AEC OUTPUT
U17A
R61
+12V
J7-4
U37
R52
D13
R45
+
C19
R42
3
1
R44
4
-
R51
R63
2
JW11 *
JW4 *
2
R54
1
JW23
R27
JW21 *
1
R65
R58
R62
TP13 TP15
RN5A
JW12 *
1
R43
R31
JW13 *
JW23 INSTALLED FOR UNITS FITTED
WITH ANALOG POTENTIOMETER, OMITTED
FOR UNITS WITH DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
* REFER TO CHAPTER 3E OF SERVICE MANUAL TO DETERMINE REQUIRED JUMPER
POSITIONS FOR THESE CONNECTORS.
** ANALOG POTENTIOMETER R48 IS USED ON GENERATORS WITH THE CONVENTIONAL
(CONTINUOUS) FLUOROSCOPY OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER IS FITTED
ON GENERATORS WITH THE PULSED FLUORO OPTION. THE DIGITAL POTENTIOMETER
IS ADJUSTED VIA THE ABS SETUP MENU ON THE CONTROL CONSOLE.
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
NOTE
REFERENCE
REMARKS
1
A DC VOLTAGE WILL BE PRESENT FROM TP8 (TO TP9 OR GROUND),
AND FROM TP13 TO TP15 WHEN OPERATING WITH ABS ON. THIS
VOLTAGE WILL TYPICALLY RANGE FROM 0.5 TO 5 VDC, AND WILL
VARY DEPENDING ON THE NOMINAL DOSE VALUE IN THE
ABS SETUP MENU.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
ABS
(AUTOMATIC BRIGHTNESS
STABILIZATION)
16 MAY 2000
16 MAY 2000
MD-0758 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
DS15
DS19
TXD
RXD
R43
U20
UART
+5V
LS1
R46
+5V
U11
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
U7
RN3E
RN3F
RN3G
RN3H
J11-3
P1-3
J11-7
P1-7
J11-2
P1-2
J11-8
P1-8
RS-232
RECEIVER /
DRIVER
MICROCONTROLLER
(CPU, EPROM **,
J1-1
J2-1
J1-2
J2-2
J1-3
J2-3
J1-4
J2-4
J1-5
J2-5
J1-6
J2-6
J1-7
J2-7
J1-8
J2-8
J1-9
J2-9
J1-10
J2-10
J1-11
J2-11
J1-12
J2-12
J1-13
J2-13
J1-14
J2-14
ADDRESS DECODERS
& LOGIC CIRCUITS)
U1, U2, U3, U4
LED
DISPLAYS
DATA LATCHES
(U6-U9)
(7 SEGMENT
DISPLAYS &
STATUS LEDs)
DS1-DS23
DRIVERS
(U1-U4, U10)
U5
** U3 IS THE EPROM.
BUFFER
DATA & ADDRESS
BUS
DATA BUS
D0..D7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J1-1
P1-1
J1-2
P1-2
J1-3
P1-3
J1-4
P1-4
J1-5
P1-5
J1-6
P1-6
J1-7
P1-7
J1-8
P1-8
J1-9
P1-9
J1-10
P1-10
REMOTE FLUORO DISPLAY BOARD
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL BOARD
FRONT PANEL
KEYBOARD
SWITCHES
KEYBOARD ASSEMBLY
REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL UNIT
LIMITED TROUBLESHOOTING CAN BE PERFORMED ON THE REMOTE FLUORO CONTROL ASSEMBLY IN THE FIELD. THE DC RAILS CAN BE CHECKED (REFER TO MD-0788),
AND THE TXD AND RXD LEDs ON THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD MAY BE OBSERVED (THESE WILL FLASH ON AND OFF TO INDICATE DATA FLOW). MEANINGFUL MEASUREMENTS
CANNOT BE MADE ON COMMUNICATIONS, DATA, AND CONTROL LINES.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED _________
DATE
02 JUN 2000
_________
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
02 JUN 2000
REMOTE FLUORO
CONTROL
MD-0766 REV C
SHEET 1 OF 1
+24V
+15V
+5V
J13-11
J13-13
J13-17
J13-15
-15V
RN14H
D0
RN14G
D1
RN14F
D2
RN14E
D3
RN14D
D4
RN14C
D5
RN14B
D6
RN14A
D7
J6-1
J12-1
J6-2
J12-2
J6-3
J12-3
J6-4
J12-4
J6-5
J12-5
J6-6
J12-6
J6-7
J12-7
J6-8
J12-8
J6-9
J12-9
RN4A
RN4C
RN4E
RN4G
RN3A
J13-1
RN4B
RN3B
RN4D
RN3D
RN4F
RN3F
RN4H
RN3H
RN3C
J13-2
J13-3
RN3E
J13-4
J13-5
RN3G
J13-6
J13-7
J13-8
J13-10
WRITE ENABLE
J6-11
J12-11
READ ENABLE
J6-13
J12-13
J13-12
RESET
J6-20
J12-20
J13-16
J6-15
J12-15
J7-20
J11-20
R91
ADDRESS LATCH ENABLE
HV ON SIGNAL FROM
MD-0759, PAGE 1
4
5
6
DS40
U45B
1
2
3
U28
CPU
U45A
3
2
JW3
1
DATA, ADDRESS,
AND CONTROL BUS
JUMPER POSITION:
INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 1-2
NON-INVERTED SYNC
JUMPER PINS 2-3
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
R84
J13-18
J13-19
EXPOSURE ENABLE COMMAND
TO MD-0761, PAGE 1
J13-14
“DIGITAL IMAGING” ABS
TO MD-0758
J13-20
RN19D
+5V
R115
EXTERNAL SYNC
SYNC
1
4
2
J13-22
3
R97
5
CONTINUED
ON PAGES
2 TO 6
J7-15
2
J11-15
JW22
1
U51
LINE SYNC FROM
MD-0788, PAGE 4
JUMPER POSITION:
INTERNAL (LINE SYNC)
JUMPER PINS 1-2
EXTERNAL (DIGITAL IMAGING SYNC)
JUMPER PINS 2-3
J13-9
J13-21
J13-23
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 9
+5V
+15V
+24V
J1-11
J1-13
J3-7
J1-17
J3-1
J1-15
J3-3
TP1
U7
J1-20
TP2
R2
+24V
J2-20
MUX
R3
J2-21
R11
-15V
+24V
J3-9
1
5
2
4
R1
J1-14
DS4
J1-1
U4
J1-2
EXON
U6
PFL
DS7
DS8
HCF
PREP
DS10
GEN
READY
TOMO
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J2-1
J2-7
J3-5
1
5
2
4
U14
J2-3
J1-4
J1-5
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U6A)
DATA
LATCH
J2-4
DRIVER
J2-5
J3-6
J2-6
J2-22
J1-10
J3-2
+24V
U8
BUFFER
5
1
4
2
J1-9
R7
J3-8
J2-9
DS1
U13
J1-21
J3-4
+24V
OFL
+24V
+24V
U9
R5
J1-23
SW1
5
1
BUFFER
U12
2
STOP
EXP.
J2-2
+24V
+24V
R4
4
J2-23
DS2
5
1
DS3
U11
4
2
J2-10
J2-12
R9
J1-16
R8
J1-12
J1-18
J3-10
+24V
DS9
J1-3
R6
FROM
PAGE 1
DS6
F1
R17
2
U16
+24V
+24V
R16
4
U10
1
+24V
R15
1
+24V
R14
6
5
JW1
+24V
R12
4
5
2
+24V
R10
J1-19
U3B
+24V
R13
3
O.EXP
J2-11
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733752.
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 9
+24VR
+5V
+15V
+24VR
+24V
J1-11
J1-13
J1-17
D6
F1
J1-15
D5
R10
12 U10D 11
13
J1-19
D3
U17
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
J3-25
J2-1
J3-27
J2-3
J3-29
J2-5
J3-31
J2-7
J3-33
J2-9
J3-35
J2-11
Q1
J2-13
J2-17
R9
-15V
+24VR
J2-19
J2-18
D4
U14
J2-20
U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3
J1-4
DATA
LATCH
J1-5
J1-6
J2-8
DRIVER
J2-6
+24V
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
U13
J1-12
J2-4
+24VR
J2-2
R15
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
R13
U15
J3-34
Q2
J1-16
J1-18
J3-30
D1
DATA
LATCH
J2-23
J3-32
J3-28
DRIVER
J3-26
J3-36
FROM
PAGE 1
+24VR
+24VR
+24V
+24VR
+24VR
R14
U12
R12
J1-9
BUFFER
5
J1-21
1
R1
U3
J1-23
1
R2
U4
4
U11
5
1
R3
U5
4
2
5
4
2
Q3
J2-16
J3-47
J2-22
D2
2
J3-41
J3-39
SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER
J3-40
J3-42
5
1
U6
R4
5
1
U7
4
2
R5
5
1
4
2
R6
J3-44
J3-46
U8
4
+24VR
2
J2-15
J3-45
R16
J3-43
J2-24
J3-48
J1-22
J2-21
J1-20
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 733947.
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 3 OF 9
+24VR
+5V
+15V
+24VR
+24V
+24VR
J3-25
J2-1
J1-11
J3-27
J2-3
J1-13
J3-29
J2-5
J3-31
J2-7
J1-17
D6
F1
J1-15
D5
R10
12 U10D 11
13
J1-19
D3
U17
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
J2-9
J3-35
J2-11
J2-13
J2-17
R9
-15V
J3-33
Q1
J2-19
J2-18
D4
U14
* THESE ARE SERIAL COMMUNICATION LINES. REFER TO MD-0829, SHEET 1, FOR
THE CORRESPONDING CONNECTIONS ON THE GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD.
** REFER TO MD-0761, SHEET 1, FOR THE PREP AND X-RAY INPUTS ON THE
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD.
*** REFER TO MD-0762, SHEET 1, FOR THE POWER ON & OFF INPUTS ON THE
GENERATOR INTERFACE BOARD.
J2-20
U16
J2-14
J1-1
J2-12
J1-2
J2-10
J1-3
J1-4
DATA
LATCH
J1-5
J1-6
DRIVER
+24V
J1-7
J1-8
J1-10
U13
J1-12
J4-1
J2-6
J4-2
J2-4
+24VR
J4-5
R13
U15
J3-34
Q2
J1-16
J1-18
J3-32
J3-30
D1
DATA
LATCH
J2-23
J3-28
DRIVER
J3-26
+24VR
+24VR
+24V
J5-8
J4-7
PREP SW **
J4-8
X-RAY SW **
J5-5
J4-10 “ON” SW ***
J4-11 “OFF” SW ***
J4-9
+24VR
**
R14
+24VR
J5-7
J5-2
J4-12 COMMON***
J4-3
J3-36
U12
FROM J4
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD
J5-3
*
*
*
*
J4-4
J2-2
R15
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U9, U10C)
J2-8
R12
J1-9
BUFFER
5
J1-21
1
R1
U3
J1-23
U11
1
R2
U4
4
FROM
PAGE 1
5
1
4
2
R3
2
Q3
J3-47
U5
4
2
5
J2-16
J2-22
D2
J3-41
J3-39
SW1
J3-37
J3-38
BUFFER
J3-40
J3-42
5
1
R4
U6
5
1
U7
4
2
R5
5
1
4
2
J3-44
R6
+15V
J3-46
U8
4
2
J6-1
J2-15
+24VR
J6-2
J3-45
R16
J3-43
J6-3
J2-24
J6-4
J3-48
J1-22
J6-6
J2-21
J1-20
J6-7
THE CIRCUITS WITHIN THE DASHED LINES ARE IDENTICAL TO THOSE
ON PAGE 3. REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR THE FULL SIZED DIAGRAM
J6-8
J6-11
+15V
J6-12
J6-9
J7-2
J6-10
J7-3
J7-1
J7-4
U18
U19
DATA
LATCH
DRIVER
TO X-RAY
MINI-CONSOLE.
(SHEET 5)
J7-5
J6-13
TO MINI-CONSOLE X-RAY
EXPOSURE INDICATOR.
(SHEET 5)
J6-5
J6-14
J7-7
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 735921.
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3, J5.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 4 OF 9
P1-1
P1-2
DS1
DS2
RAD
EXP
FLUORO
EXP
DS3
PREP
DS4
PWR
ON
LS1
LS2
P1-4
P1-6
P1-3
P1-5
P1-7
FROM J6
(SHEET 4)
P1-8
P1-9
P1-10
ON
OFF
P1-13
P1-11
E1
E2
P1-12
HAND
SWITCH
PREP
X-RAY
E3
P1-14
X-RAY MINI CONSOLE
J3-2
J3-3
DS1
RAD
EXP
DS2
FLUORO
EXP
LS1
FROM J7
(SHEET 4)
LS2
J3-1
J3-5
J3-7
J3-4
MINI CONSOLE X-RAY EXPOSURE INDICATOR
DRAWN
THE OPTIONAL “X-RAY MINI CONSOLE” AND OPTIONAL “MINI CONSOLE X-RAY EXPOSURE INDICATOR”
ARE TYPICALLY USED WITH DIGITAL IMAGING SYSTEMS THAT HAVE INTEGRATED GENERATOR
CONSOLE CONTROL FUNCTIONS.
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 5 OF 9
+24V
+15V
J1-11
U12
J1-13
+5 V
REGULATOR
J1-17
F1
+5V(A)
+24V
+15V
J1-1
GENERATOR
READY
J1-3
U4
U6
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
4
2
EXPOSURE IN
PROCESS (EIP)
R2
DATA
LATCH
DS3
DRIVER
R1
J1-10
J1-12
J1-18
DS2
5
1
4
U10
J2-11
4
2
R7
5
1
U8
4
2
5
1
J2-15
J2-4
J3-1
U16
J2-5
J3-4
J2-6
J3-3
U14
J1-9
J1-23
2
X-RAY
J1-14
J1-21
5
R9
J1-16
J2-22
1
J2-13
+24V
R8
FROM
PAGE 1
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5A)
+15V
U7
DS4
J1-5
J2-8
5
1
J1-2
J1-4
J2-14
J2-21
R6
+5V
J2-16
J3-10
BUFFER
J2-18
J3-11
U15
+5V(A)
U9
SW1
5
5
EXPOSE
RDY
U11
+24V
BUFFER
4
1
4
2
1
R3
2
DS1
R4
R5
J2-17
J2-19
J3-12
DS5
U13
4
2
J2-9
J2-12
PREP
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 735406.
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 6 OF 9
+24V
F1
+5V
+15V
+24V
J2-13
J2-7
J2-8
J1-11
J2-9
J1-13
J2-12
J1-17
J2-5
J4-3
J2-6
J4-2
J2-20
+15V
1
5
2
4
U10
J1-1
U6
J1-2
DS3
U4
J1-3
R1
J1-4
J1-5
J1-6
FROM
PAGE 1
J1-7
J1-8
J4-5
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5A)
5
1
4
2
DS4
5
1
4
2
R7
2
R8
J1-12
1
5
J2-23
+15V
U14
DS8
J1-10
J2-21
+15V
U13
DS7
DRIVER
J2-22
+15V
U7
R2
DATA
LATCH
J2-24
+15V
4
1
5
2
4
U15
DS9
J2-1
J3-2
R9
J1-16
J1-18
9
10
8
12
13
DS3 EXPOSURE IN PROCESS (EIP)
11
DS4 GENERATOR PREPPED
U3D
U3C
J2-2
J3-1
J2-3
DS7 RAD HANGMODE
J1-19
DS8 BUCKY START
J3-4
J2-4
J3-5
DS9 X-RAY ON
J2-11
J3-6
U8
J2-15
J3-8
J1-9
J1-21
J1-23
J2-16
BUFFER
J3-7
J2-17
J3-12
U9
J2-18
SW1
J3-11
+24V
5
BUFFER
1
4
2
1
J3-10
U11
+24V
5
J2-19
4
2
DS5
R3
R4
U12
DS6
R5
R6
J2-10
BUCKY IN MOTION
J2-25
SPARE INPUT
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736153
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3, J4.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 7 OF 9
+5V +15V +24V
U1
+24V
U12
RATE 0
J1-11
*
DS38
J1-13
*
DRIVER
J1-17
J2-8
RATE 1
DS40
RATE 2
*
DS41
DS43
*
U11
-15V
J1-1
SPARE I/P
J1-2
J1-3
J3-1
+24V
J2-22
J2-13
J3-2
J2-23
J2-1
J3-3
J3-8
J2-2
J3-4
J3-27
J2-3
J3-5
J3-9
J2-4
J3-6
J3-28
J2-5
J3-7
J3-10
J2-6
J3-8
J3-29
J2-7
J3-9
J3-31
J2-8
J3-10
J2-9
J3-20
U9
DS45
SELECT DIGITAL RADIOGRAPHY
*
TABLE STEP SELECT
EXPOSURE ON
GENERATOR RDY
TOMO SELECT
EXP SAFETY ITLK
EXPOSURE REQ
PREP REQ
DRIVER
J3-17
J2-9
RATE 3
*
J1-15
DS16
J2-17
*
SELECT TOMO
DS18
J2-4
*
DRIVER
J2-16
SPARE INPUT 1
DS20
*
J2-3
SPARE INPUT 2
DS21
MAG MODE 0
MAG MODE 1 *
J2-15
DS22
MAG MODE 2 *
J2-2
DS23
*
J2-14
DS24
J2-1
J1-4
J1-5
FLUORO
REQUEST
J1-6
J1-7
CPLD
J1-8
DS29
DS27
*
*
U10
*
*
J1-12
DS25
*
J1-18
*
*
DS37
DS36
*
*
*
J2-5
DS26
DS28
DS30
SELECT CINE *
FROM
PAGE 1
J2-6
CINE TIME SEL 2
*
SELECT HCF
J2-7
TABLE STEP
REQUEST
DS34
DS6
DS4
*
R77
*
*
DRIVER
DS46
J3-21
J3-23
J2-11
J3-22
J3-4
J2-12
J3-23
J2-14
J3-24
J2-15
J3-25
J3-22
J3-3
J3-21
J3-2
J3-20
*
DS3
*
*
*
DS19
*
J3-5
J3-24
SELECT STEP DIRECTION
DS5
TOMO TIME SELECT 1 *
J3-26
J2-17
J3-27
J2-18
J3-28
J2-19
J3-29
J2-20
J3-30
J2-21
J3-31
J2-22
J3-32
J2-23
J3-33
J2-25
J3-25
DS7
J2-16
J2-24
J3-6
TOMO TIME SELECT 0
J3-7
TOMO TIME SELECT 2 *
D3
DS17
DS14
SELECT TABLE STEPPING
DRIVER
R72
*
DS13
AEC CENTER FIELD SELECT
DS1
*
Q1
DS11
DS8
*
U2
U17
R78
J2-10
J3-1
J2-20
*
SPARE O/P 4
SPARE O/P 3
SPARE O/P 2
SPARE O/P 1
TABLE TUBE SELECT
GENERATOR READY
X-RAY ON
J2-19
DS32
+24V
+24V
DRIVER
J2-18
CINE TIME SEL 1
*
U3
DS39
CINE TIME SEL 0
DRIVER
J1-22
DS35
STEP TABLE
J1-10
J1-19
DS33
DS31
J3-16
F1
J2-21
DS10
*
J3-26
DS12
J3-34
J3-35
J3-36
J2
J3-37
1
2
5
1
TABLE FLUORO
REQUEST
4
2
5
1
U15
READY ACQUIRE
FLUORO
-3
J3
J2
3
2
-1
4
-2
0
J2
-3
-3
J3
J2
J3
5
4
U6
1
1
-15V
TABLE X-RAY
REQUEST
DS44
5
U
2
1
1
4
U4
DS9
5
U
1
1
5
U
D2
1
DS2
R63
J1-20
U
1
D1
U
-1
0
2
1
-1
+15V
DS42
5
1
4
2
5
1
U13
READY ACQUIRE
RAD/CINE/HCF
DS15
5
1
4
2
U8
TABLE PREP
REQUEST
R30
+24V
K1
J1-14
J1-9
U5
J1-21
U7
4
J1-23
2
R17
U16
4
2
R25
U14
4
2
R69
4
2
R68
24V FROM
ROOM INTERFACE
J5-1
J5-3
J3-18
J3-19
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 736894
* DUE TO SPACE RESTRICTIONS, SERIES RESISTORS ARE NOT SHOWN FOR THE INDICATED LED’S
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J3.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 8 OF 9
+5V
+15V
+24V
J1-11
+5V
J1-13
+15V
DS1
J1-17
R10
J1-19
J7-2
XRAY ON
12 U3D 11
13
U7
MONOSTABLE
TIMER
4
5
U3B
9
10
6
U3C
J7-3
U10
4
8
6
J2-20 (-)
7
J2-19 (+)
DRIVER
+15V
J6-1
J7-1
J6-2
J7-4
J6-5
J7-5
J6-14
J7-7
U17
U18
J6-3
J1-1
J6-4
J1-2
J6-6
J1-3
J1-4
DATA
LATCH
J1-5
J1-6
J1-7
J1-8
J6-7
DRIVER
J6-8
ADDRESS DECODER
CIRCUITS
(U1, U2, U3A, U5)
J4-10
J6-9
J1-10
J1-16
4
J1-18
DATA
LATCH
U11
R8
XRAY
DS4
DRIVER
DRIVER
7
J2-14 (-)
DS2 PREP
4
U14
GENRDY
R9
U8
R7
J1-21
DS3
DS5 *
DRIVER
1
DRIVER
6
J2-15 (+)
7
J2-16 (-)
6
J2-21 (+)
7
J2-22 (-)
J2-1 (+)
U15
BUFFER
6
DRIVER
7
SW1
J4-1
J4-2
J5-7
J4-5
J5-8
+5V
R11
R12
XRAYEN
Q1
* THE INPUTS / OUTPUTS MARKED “*” ARE SPARE, AND HAVE NOT BEEN ASSIGNED
J4-9
J5-2
DS7
DS6 *
J6-13
J4-3
J4-4
+5V
R5
BUFFER
J6-12
J5-3
J2-2 (-)
U9
J4-8
J4-12
U12
4
J4-7
J6-11
J2-13 (+)
J1-9
J1-23
J2-18 (-)
7
6
DATA
LATCH
J6-10
J2-17 (+)
6
R6
4
FROM
PAGE 1
U6
J4-11
U13
U4
R4
J1-12
J2-25 (+)
5
1
4
2
J5-5
U16
J2-26 (-)
DIGITAL I/O BOARD
THIS SHEET APPLIES TO DIGITAL I/O BOARD ASSEMBLY 737950.
REFER TO THE DIGITAL IMAGING SUPPLEMENT IN THE SERVICE MANUAL
FOR DETAILS REGARDING THE CONNECTIONS TO J2, J4, J5, J6, AND J7.
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
KVR
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
17 MAY 2000
DIGITAL
INTERFACE
MD-0767 REV D
SHEET 9 OF 9
+15V
Q6
+15V
Q5
+5V
J2-1
R2
Q4
+5V
R31
Q3
DS1
J2-2
+5V
U1
U2
RN12C
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
UART
RN12A
RN12B
J2-2
J1-2
J2-3
J1-3
J2-7
J1-7
J2-5
J1-5
R7
U5
J2-5
J2-8
J2-9
RS-422
DRIVER
RS-232
TRANSMITTER /
RECEIVER
MICROCONTROLLER
+5V
SWITCHED +15V
TEST +15V
TEST +15V
+ DOSE
DAP
CHAMBER
#1
- DOSE
OPTO
RELAY
GROUND
GROUND
R9
U38
J2-4
DAP
CHANNEL 1
DS3
R69
R71
DS29
U31
J2-3
+5V
R5
+5V
DS32
J2-7
R8
+5V
J2-6
R10
Q1
R11
DATA BUS
D0..D7
D2
+15V
Q8
+15V
Q7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
J3-1
Q10
J3-6
R44
Q9
TP2
+5V
TP3
TB8
3
4
5
J4-1
J3-8
J3-9
RS-422
DRIVER
+5 AND +15 VOLT
REGULATORS
(U7, U4, L1, D4
D5, ETC)
+5V
1
2
U6
J3-5
TEST +15V
TEST +15V
+ DOSE
- DOSE
OPTO
DAP
CHAMBER
#2
RELAY
GROUND
GROUND
R15
TB7
R45
+5V
J3-4
DAP
CHANNEL 2
DS2
J4-2
J3-3
R5
2
+5V
R26
R25
1
J3-2
+5V
R14
+15V
R13
24 VDC
J3-7
SWITCHED +15V
R16
TP1
Q2
R17
3
4
5
D3
ROOM INTERFACE BOARD
DAP INTERCONNECT BOARD
DRAWN
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
M. LODER
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
16 JULY 2001
DAP
21 AUG 2001
28 AUG 2001
MD-0828 REV B
SHEET 1 OF 1
+5V
*
FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R16 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U12, RN3C, RN3D, RN3A, AND RN3B
ARE NOT FITTED.
+5V
DS3
DS1
TXD
J5-1
J7-7
RXD (RS-232)
*
14 RN3C 3
2
15
J4-2
J11-18
J7-18
CTS (RS-232)
*
13 RN3D 4
4
13
* RN3A
1
3
14
* RN3B
2
5
12
J5-4
J4-4
J11-6
J7-6
TXD (RS-232)
J5-5
J4-5
J11-17
J7-17
RTS (RS-232)
J5-3
+5V
TP3
TXD- (RS-422)
7
J11-10
J7-10
TXD+ (RS-422)
6
C40
Y2
RXD
U23
J11-13
J7-13
RXD- (RS-422)
7
J11-12
J7-12
RXD+ (RS-422)
6
J11-9
J7-9
R122
14
J16-1
CPU
C35
* U1
11
12
13
R123
9
8
R124
FROM
RAD-ONLY
CONSOLE
(PAGE 2)
RS-422
I/P
1
* R16
+5V
J16-2
J16-3
J1
RS-232
3
7
J6-1
2
J6-2
8
+5V
RS-422 4
O/P
ALTERNATE
CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS
+5V
3
14
6 RN12F 11
5
12
7 RN12G 10
2
15
8 RN12H 9
4
13
DS43
J2
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
R116
R117
RXD
U27
14
R126
10
7
R127
12
13
R128
8
R129
11
DATA BUS
D0..D7
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE CONSOLE BOARD FOR
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 31 X 42 CM
CONSOLE. REFER TO PAGE 2 FOR INDICO 100
GENERATORS WITH THE 23 X 56 CM CONSOLE
AND THE RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
9
3
J2
RS-232
7
3
TXD
2
7
RTS
8
2
RXD
8
CTS
5
RXD
TXD
U38
1 RN12A 16
3
14
2 RN12B 15
5
12
3 RN12C 14
2
15
4 RN12D 13
4
13
U31
+5V
DS32
DS29
RXD
TXD
R71
-12V
J6-4
TXD
DS43
+5V
RS-232
J6-3
DS44
DS44
U42
5 RN12E 12
5
+5V
R98
TXD
R115
U18
J7-11
DS42
R114
R101
DS41
J11-11
DUART
DUART
R69
1 Hz
* U2
R93
+5V
J4-3
SERIAL PORT FOR REMOTE
FLUORO CONTROL. REFER
TO MD-0766 FOR INDICO 100,
OR SCHEMATIC 734571 FOR
MILLENIA GENERATORS.
RS-232
R72
DS40
U20
J11-7
15
+5V
U12
J4-1
16
R15
RXD
R18
CONSOLE
CABLE
RS-232
5
DATA BUS
D0..D7
OPTIONAL COMMUNICATIONS PORTS ARE SHOWN ON PAGE 2
GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100)
DRAWN
REFER TO PAGE 3 FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS.
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
J. BARNES
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 DEC 2001
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 1 OF 3
COMMUNICATIONS PORTS SHOWN BELOW ARE OPTIONAL
+5V
*
FOR RS-232: U5, U9, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4C, RN4D AND R7 ARE
NOT FITTED.
DS16
+5V
TXD
6
J5-4
1 RS-422
I/P
7
J5-5
D3
2
8
J5-3
5
2
RN2B
R5
7
1
Q3
3
* U6
7
14
2
*RN4A
3 RN18B 4
3
14
5 RN18C 6
5
12
7 RN18D 8
2
15
1 RN18A 2
4
13
8 RN17D 7
7
10
5 RN17C 6
6
11
J15
JP2 CLOSED FOR RS-422,
OPEN CIRCUIT FOR RS-232
11
TP5
RXD
TXD
1
R65
TXD
RN16B
RXD
RN16A
DS48
U50
3
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD (PG 1)
3
*
RXD
1 Hz
U23
*JP2
R6
RN2A
+5V
Q4
DS46
RN16D
J16
R94
D4
DS45
J5-2
* U5
+5V
TP1
+5V
DS47
RN16C
J5-1
6
4 RS-422
O/P
7
D6
+5V
1 Hz
* U9
+5V
+5V
U28
CPU
RS-232
-12V
2
DATA BUS
D0..D7
8
*
6 RN4C 5
8
*RN4D
8
7
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
R7
RS-232
5
*
+5V
-12V
+5V
DS1
U17
DS2
DS3
TXD
RXD
R10
+5V
TP1
1 Hz
+5V
R20
9
CPU
13
R19
12
D2
TXD
Q1
Q2
U20
11
14
6 RN1C 5
10
7
4 RN1B 3
12
13
2 RN1A 1
9
8
8 RN1D 7
DATA BUS
D0..D7
RS-232
TP10
J8-1
J16-1
R24
J8-2
J16-2
3
TXD
7
RTS
2
RXD
8
CTS
+5V
+5V
J8-3
J16-3
DS5
DS4
TXD
RXD
RS-232
J4
U11
5
R25
R26
R27
R28
DATA BUS
D0..D7
TO GENERATOR
INTERFACE
BOARD (PG 1)
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
THIS AREA SHOWS THE CONSOLE CPU BOARD
FOR INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH THE 23 X 56 CM
CONSOLE.
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100)
TP11
R23
CPU
R21
RN2C
RXD
J2
R22
D1
U8
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
RN2D
+5V
RS-232
3
TXD
7
RTS
2
RXD
8
CTS
5
DRAWN
THIS AREA SHOWS THE CONSOLE CPU BOARD FOR
INDICO 100 GENERATORS WITH RAD-ONLY CONSOLE.
CONSOLE BOARD (INDICO 100)
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
J. BARNES
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 DEC 2001
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 2 OF 3
+5V
*
FOR RS-232: U1, U2, AND R8 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U12, RN4C, RN4D, RN4A, AND RN4B
ARE NOT FITTED.
DS2
J4-1
J11-7
J7-7
RXD (RS-232)
*
14 RN4C 3
13
12
4 RS-422
O/P
7
J5-2
J4-2
J11-18
J7-18
CTS (RS-232)
*
13 RN4D 4
8
9
* RN4A
1
14
11
* RN4B
2
7
10
+5V
D4
15
6
J5-4
J4-4
J11-6
J7-6
TXD (RS-232)
1 RS-422
I/P
7
J5-5
J4-5
J11-17
J7-17
RTS (RS-232)
* U2
RXD
*JP2
*
3
J5-3
J4-3
2
RN2B
Q4
R6
+5V
D3
J11-11
J7-11
TXD- (RS-422)
7
J11-10
J7-10
TXD+ (RS-422)
6
2
* RN4B
J7-13
RXD- (RS-422)
7
J11-12
J7-12
RXD+ (RS-422)
6
J11-9
J7-9
1
10
7
4
12
13
*
6 RN4C 5
9
8
*
8 RN4D 7
R7
3
7
J6-1
2
J6-2
8
C35
ALTERNATE
CONSOLE
CONNECTIONS
11
6 RN13F 11
7
10
7 RN13G 10
13
12
8 RN13H 9
8
9
9
RS-232
14
6 RN1C 5
7
4 RN1B 3
13
2 RN1A 1
8
8 RN1D 7
Q12
R1
U29
+5V
+5V
DS31 TXD
DS35 RXD
DUART
3
3
TXD
7
7
RTS
2
2
RXD
8
8
CTS
5
Q9
U39
1 RN13A 16
14
11
2 RN13B 15
7
10
3 RN13C 14
13
12
4 RN13D 13
8
9
R65
RN2D
Q2
J2
J2
U20
12
DATA BUS
D0..D7
RS-232
Q8
RS-232
(LAPTOP)
10
DS48 RXD
-12V
J6-4
TXD
RN2C
14
J6-3
D2
Q1
DS47 TXD
U43
5 RN13E 12
5
+5V
11
+5V
Q11
-12V
Y2
+5V
3
*
DUART
1
R8
J1
RS-232
D1
RS-422
I/P
R64
14
J11-13
R48
* RN4A
C30
R63
11
RXD
C39
* U1
R66
U25
DUART
Y1
JP2 CLOSED FOR RS-422,
OPEN CIRCUIT FOR RS-232
* U6
+5V
RS-422 4
O/P
1
Q3
C41
SERIAL PORT FOR REMOTE
FLUORO CONTROL. REFER
TO MD-0766 FOR INDICO 100,
OR SCHEMATIC 734571 FOR
MILLENIA GENERATORS.
RS-232
R47
RN2A
TXD
U24
J5-1
16
TXD
Q2
U12
6
* U5
DS1
RXD
Q1
* U9
+5V
R15
CONSOLE
CABLE
*
FOR RS-232: U9, U5, JP2, AND R6 ARE NOT FITTED.
FOR RS-422: U6, RN4A, RN4B, RN4C, RN4D, AND R7
ARE NOT FITTED.
RS-232
5
GENERATOR INTERFACE
BOARD
DATA BUS
D0..D7
-12V
GENERATOR CPU BOARD
CONSOLE CPU BOARD (MILLENIA)
DRAWN
THIS SHEET SHOWS THE SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS
CIRCUITS FOR MILLENIA GENERATORS
G. SANWALD
CHECKED
J. BARNES
DES.\MFG.\AUTH.
L. FOSKIN
DATE
13 DEC 2001
9 JAN 2002
9 JAN 2002
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
MD-0829 REV D
SHEET 3 OF 3
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
REVISIONS
NOTES:
ZONE
LTR
1. ALL RESISTOR VALUES ARE IN OHMS 1/4W 5%
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
2. ALL CAPACITOR VALUES ARE IN MICROFARADS
UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
DESCRIPTION
DWN
CHKD
APPROVED
DATE
2
INC PER ENG. J.C.
Emir
S.C
3
INC PER ECO No. 14083
Emir
Emir
G.SANWALD
27SEP94
A
INC PER ECO No. 14084
Emir
Emir
G.SANWALD
27SEP94
B
INC PER ECO No. 14133
Emir
Emir
G.SANWALD
20OCT94
C
INC PER ECO No. 15473
Emir
Emir
M.PHILLIPS
10DEC96
D
INC PER ECO No. 16111
Emir
Emir
E
INC PER ECO No. 16121
Emir
Emir
F
INC PER ECO No.18348
Emir
Emir
J.C.
01SEP94
3. TAB "-01" INSTALL ONLY J1-J6, TP5.
J7
D
1
2
3
4
R7
R8
R9
R17
R18
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
S.CARTWRIGHT
D.YAKE
S.CARTWRIGHT
20JUN97
26JUN97
28FEB00
D
-1000V
R48
100K
TP4
J1
R49
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
100K
+12V
-12V
-24V
D11
C4
T1
C9
R1
1K
C8
5
1N3070
TP5
C15
.01
E2
START (1)
L (1)
N (1)
R (1)
SIG (1)
D6
.01
600V
L1
D5
D4
.01
600V
D3
D2
.01
600V
D1
2
23 uH
6
C3
C2
C1
.01
600V
.01
600V
.01
600V
C18
C20
C22
+300V
4
C24
C25
+500V
C5
E3
1
.01
200V
D12
1 uF
D13
D14
.01
200V
D15
D16
.01
200V
D17
D18
.01
200V
D19
.01
200V
D20
C14
C17
C19
C21
C23
.01
200V
.01
200V
.01
200V
.01
200V
.01
200V
D21
3
+50V
R44
100K
R45
J2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
C
100K
C
START (2)
L (2)
N (2)
R (2)
SIG (2)
J6
1 1 1 1 1 9 7 5 3 1
9 7 5 3 1
2 1 1 1 1 1
0 8 6 4 2 0 8 6 4 2
+12V
TP1
C16
R39
100K
R47
R46
R43
R42
R41
R36
R35
R34
R26
R22
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
1M
C7
10
6.8nF
R23
C6
1
R30
R11
J3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
100K
R40
R27
90.9K
100K
R13
10K
C12
.01
-12V
R33
10K
220
220
D7
D9
Q3
Q1
TP2
6
5
7
U1B
LF353N
START (3)
L (3)
N (3)
R (3)
SIG (3)
+12V
C27
0.1
U3
2
1
3
C10
.01
R28
49K9
8
R21
1K
+12V
+V
-V
SYNC
CT
RT
DISC
CSS
COMP
SD
VREF
R20
1K
C26
10
B
OSC
OUTA
OUTB
R31
R32
475K
5
6
7
9
10
16
R29
R25
E2
E3
2.74K
22
Q2
C13
2.2nF
Q4
R14
R12
4
11
14
220
220
D8
D10
B
SG3525
121K
U2A
14016
2
TP3
R10
20K
R19
20K
R24
20K
1
SPARE
R16
1K
1
3
U2D
14016
R37
9
R15
10K
8
C11
.01
R6
10
100K
J4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
R4
10
R3
10
R5
10
8
-24V
100K
-12V
+12V
U2C
14016
J5
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
START (4)
L (4)
N (4)
R (4)
SIG (4)
3
2
6
U2B
14016
LF353N
3
R38
U1A
4
1
11
10
4
+12V
1
3
5
7
9
11
13
15
17
19
1
2
5
A
A
DRAWN
HIGHEST REFERENCE
DESIGNATIONS
Emir
07SEP94
Emir
27SEP94
Communications & Power Industries
Canada Inc.
CHECKED
C27, D21, J7, Q4, R49
APPROVAL
DATE
TP4, T1, U3
SCHEMATIC
ENGINEER
J.CUNNINGHAM
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM
27SEP94
DES/MFG AUTH.
S.CARTWRIGHT
REFERENCE DESIGNATIONS
NOT USED
NEXT ASSY
COMPUTER GENERATED
6
5
SIZE
CONTRACT No.
728399
7
MANUALS
D
3
CAGE CODE
DWG NO
02845
REV
728401
F
USED ON
February 28, 2000
4
INTERFACE
-----------------------
R2
8
AUTOMATIC EXPOSURE CONTROL
27SEP94
SCALE
2
NTS
SHEET
LEVEL 3
1
1 OF 1